Serv Man 1

New South Wales
VIDEO
GAMING MACHINE
SERVICE MANUAL
AM-1911042-04
ARISTOCRAT TECHNOLOGIES AUSTRALIA PTY LTD (ACN 001 660 715)

71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove N.S.W. 2066, Australia Telephone: (612) 9413 6300
PO. Box 808, NSW 2066, Australia. Fax: (612) 9420 1329
© 2000 Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd
The gaming machine described in this document may be covered by patents and registered designs. This
document is protected by copyright. No part of it may be reproduced or copied without the written
permission of Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd. This document is not for use in
countries where gaming machines are prohibited by law.
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd reserves the right to change, without notice, the design or
specification of the gaming machine covered by this document. Additional information is available from
time to time in the form of technical bulletins. New editions of this document may change its contents.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be
required to take adequate action.
CAUTION
All functions of the machine are controlled by
complex electronics. Unqualified personnel
must not interfere with any mechanisms or
controls as this may permanently damage the
machine and lead to expensive repairs or
component replacement, and will render the
warranty void.
Important Safety Information

This document contains important information about the use of the equipment and hazards involved in
owning and operating the equipment to which it relates. The equipment can be very hazardous if used other
than in accordance with this document.
Inform Yourself and Your Staff

You must read this document before using the equipment or opening any part of the equipment. Ensure your staff do too.
The equipment itself is marked with important warning labels detailing dangers.
♦ Check for warning labels whenever opening any part of the equipment.
♦ Read and comply with all warning labels you see when operating or opening the equipment.
♦ Under no circumstances remove or alter any warning label.
Be Careful
If you don’t follow the directions in this manual and on warning labels you increase the risk of the following
things occurring:
♦ serious personal injury, including electrocution and amputation. Unless you are a trained
technician, tampering with the machine can kill you.
♦ serious damage to the equipment;
♦ serious damage to other equipment;
♦ serious damage to the premises housing the equipment;
♦ rendering the warranty void.
MVP Video Service Manual Record of Amendments
Record of Amendments
Amendment Amendment Items and Functions Writer

Number Date
Initials
No. 02 February Update for Bilocks RP

1999
No. 02 February Update for Electronic Hard Meters RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for BIPs RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Touch Screen RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Ticket Printer and Himec Hopper RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Video Monitor Degaussing RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Note Acceptor Display of RP
1999 Denominations at right-hand side of device.
No. 02 February Update for Operator Menus and Help Screens RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Aristocrat company locations and RP
1999 contact numbers
No. 02 February Update for Coin Comparator and Coin Validator RP
1999
No. 02 February Update for Wiring Diagrams and Circuit Diagrams RP
1999
No. 03 June 1999 Update for Wiring Diagrams RP
No. 03 June 1999 Update to Installation Chapter for Plug and Play RP
requirements
No. 03 June 1999 Update for Video Monitor Degaussing RP
No. 03 June 1999 Chapter reorganisation RP
No. 03 June 1999 Update to Main Board chapter for battery RP

replacement
No. 03 June 1999 Update for power ratings RP
No. 04 Nov 1999 Appendix B added IW
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 iii

Record of Amendments MVP Video Service Manual
Amendment Amendment Items and Functions Writer

Number Date
Initials
No. 04 Nov 1999 New Installation chapter IW
No. 04 Nov 1999 Update to Wiring Diagrams IW
No. 04 Nov 1999 New Cautions added to reverse of Flyleafs. IW
iv NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

MVP Video Service Manual
Aristocrat MVP Manuals
Operator Manual
Primarily intended for operators of Aristocrat

MVP Video Gaming Machines. The Operator
Manual:
• gives a general overview of the hardware and
software
• provides procedures for daily operations and
simple maintenance.
Cover4.eps
Service Manual
Primarily intended for service technicians. The

Service Manual:
• gives a general overview of the hardware and
software
• provides instructions for installation and fault
finding
• describes in detail each of the major
components of the machine.
Parts Catalogue
Primarily intended for operators and service

technicians. It enables operators and service
technicians to order machine parts. The Parts
Catalogue:
• shows an illustration of each of the
components of the machine
• links each illustration with a part number.
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 v

This page intentionally left blank
vi NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

MVP Video Service Manual Foreword
Foreword
How To Use This Manual
Purpose of the Manual
This manual provides procedures for the servicing and maintenance of the
Aristocrat MVP Video Gaming Machine. It covers areas of machine operation
that must be carried out by licensed technicians.
User of the Manual

The manual is aimed at technicians who need to understand detailed and
technically complex aspects of the machine to service and maintain it.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
WARNING
A warning immediately precedes an
operating procedure or maintenance practice
which, if not correctly followed, could result
in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
A caution immediately precedes an
operating procedure or maintenance practice
which, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to or destruction of the equipment,
or corruption of the data.
Note
A note immediately precedes or follows an
operating procedure, maintenance practice
or condition which requires highlighting.
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 vii

Foreword MVP Video Service Manual
Brief History of Aristocrat Technologies Australia

Aristocrat Technologies Australia (ALI), established in 1953, is one of the oldest and most successful gaming machine
manufacturers. ALI has supplied machines to every country and region in the world where gaming machines are legal,
including Austria, France, Germany, Holland, Malaysia, China, the Philippines, Africa, Singapore, Russia, South
America, and the USA. Aristocrat Technologies Australia employs over 1,400 people and has the largest gaming
research and development facility in the Southern Hemisphere.
Offices
Spare Parts Department
PO Box 155, Rosebery, NSW 2018, Australia
Outside Australia Tel: 612 9697 4000 Fax: 612 9693 1340
Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4000 Fax: 02 9693 1340
Head Office International Offices

New South Wales
New Zealand
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715), Auckland Office
71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove N.S.W. 2066, Australia Aristocrat Technologies Australia (NZ) Ltd,
Outside Australia Tel: 612 9413 6300 Fax: 612 9420 1329 22 Vestey Drive, Mt Wellington, Auckland, New Zealand.
Within Australia Tel: 02 9413 6300 Fax: 612 9420 1329 Tel: 0011 64 9 270 1600 Fax: 0015 64 9 270 1601
Christchurch Office
Manufacturing / Operations Aristocrat Technologies Australia (NZ) Ltd,
New South Wales Unit D 5 Tenahaun Place, Sockburn,
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715), Christchurch, New Zealand.
Tel: 0011 64 3 338 7430 Fax: 0015 64 3 338 6492
85-113 Dunning Avenue, Rosebery NSW 2018, Australia.
Outside Australia Tel: 612 9697 4000 Fax: 612 9693 1340 Russia
Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4000 Fax: 02 9693 1340 Aristocrat (Russia),
GPO Box 134, 122108 Moscow, Russia.
National Offices Tel / Fax: 0011 7 095 146 1326
South Australia
UK
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty. Ltd.
Aristocrat Europe
75 Henley Beach Road, Mile End, SA 5031, Australia.
Falcon Unit 1, Stonfield Way, South Ruislip,
Outside Australia Tel: 6108 8443 3664 Fax 618 8443 3606
Middlesex HA4 OJS, England.
Within Australia Tel: 08 8443 3664 Fax 08 8443 3606
Tel: 0011 44 181 426 5822 Fax: 0015 44 181 426 5762
Victoria
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Ltd. USA
Nevada
672 Lorimer Street, Port Melbourne, Vic. 3207, Australia
Aristocrat Incorporated,
Outside Australia Tel: 613 9644 1000 Fax: 613 9644 1032
9895 Double R Blvd, Suite 200,
Within Australia Tel: 03 9644 1000 Fax: 03 9644 1032
Reno, Nevada 89511, USA.
Queensland Tel: 0011 1 702 850 7767 Fax: 0011 1 702 860 5646
Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty. Ltd. California
60-62 Commercial Drive, Shailer Park. Qld. 4128, Australia Aristocrat Incorporated
Outside Australia Tel: 617 3801 4444 Fax: 617 3801 4403 10960 W.River Street. #101E Truckee, CA 96161, USA.
Within Australia Tel: 07 3801 4444 Fax: 07 3801 4403 Tel: 0011 1 916 582 9570 Fax: 0015 1 916 582 1305
Western Australia Latin America

Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty. Ltd. 1500 NW 79th Avenue, Miami Florida, 33126 USA
Unit 8 18 Milford St, East Victoria Park, W.A. 6101, Australia Tel: 0011 1 305 594 2881 Fax: 0015 1 305 594 9022
Outside Australia Tel: 618 9355 1212 Fax: 618 9355 1213 South Africa
Within Australia Tel: 08 9355 1212 Fax:
ALI Gaming Solutions (PTY.) Ltd.,
Po Box 2570, Bramley 2018, South Africa
Tel: 0011 27 11 448 2320/1 Fax: 0015 27 11 448 2322
viii NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

MVP Video Service Manual Table of Contents
Table of Contents
General Description 1-1

1.1 Physical Description ........................................................... 1-3
1.2 Basic Operation................................................................. 1-11

1.2.1 Play Mode ................................................................................ 1-12
1.2.2 Operator Mode......................................................................... 1-13
1.3 Functional Description ..................................................... 1-15
1.3.1 Currency Handling ................................................................... 1-15
1.3.2 Machine Conditions ................................................................. 1-16
1.4 Specifications.................................................................... 1-18
Installation 2-1
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ........................................... 2-3
2.2 Inspection on Delivery ........................................................ 2-7
2.3 Installation Procedure ........................................................ 2-7

2.3.1 Mounting .................................................................................... 2-7
2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up .......................... 2-7
2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine.................................................... 2-10
NSW Clubs & Hotels Machine Modes 3-1

3.1 Modes of Operation ............................................................ 3-3
3.2 Play Mode ............................................................................ 3-4

3.2.1 Player Operation ........................................................................ 3-5
3.2.2 Video Display ............................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes..................................................................... 3-7
3.2.4 Pushbuttons ............................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring ............................................................ 3-8
3.2.6 Light Tower .............................................................................. 3-11
3.2.7 Electro-mechanical Meters (Hard Meters) ............................... 3-12
3.2.8 Electronic Hard Meters ............................................................ 3-13
3.2.9 Electronic Meters (Soft Meters) ............................................... 3-14
3.2.10 Bar Interface Poker System - BIPS Plus.................................. 3-15
3.3 Operator Mode .................................................................. 3-17
3.3.1 Machine Identification .............................................................. 3-19
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 VII

Table of Contents MVP Video Service Manual
3.3.2 Accounting Information ............................................................3-19

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu ...................................................3-25
3.3.4 Self Test Mode .........................................................................3-29
3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ...........................................3-37
3.3.6 Power Save Mode ....................................................................3-40
3.3.7 Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu Items ...............................3-41
Cabinet, Door and Top Box 4-1

4.1 General Description ............................................................ 4-3
4.2 Technical Description ......................................................... 4-6

4.2.1 Cabinet and Door .......................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Top Box ....................................................................................4-20
4.3 General Maintenance ........................................................ 4-25
Power Supply Assembly 5-1

5.1 Physical Description ........................................................... 5-3
5.2 Basic Operation................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Functional Specification..................................................... 5-6

5.3.1 Input Requirements....................................................................5-6
5.3.2 Output Requirements .................................................................5-7
5.3.3 Control Signals ...........................................................................5-9
5.3.4 Physical Connections .................................................................5-9
5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures .......................... 5-11
Coin Handling Assembly 6-1

6.1 Overview .............................................................................. 6-3
6.2 CC-62 Coin Comparator...................................................... 6-4

6.2.1 Basic Operation..........................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Functional Description................................................................6-5
6.2.3 Replacing the Sample Coin........................................................6-8
6.2.4 Adjustment Procedures..............................................................6-9
6.2.5 Removal and Replacement......................................................6-11
6.2.6 CC-62 Comparator Connector Pinouts ....................................6-12
6.2.7 Fault Finding.............................................................................6-13
6.3 Condor Coin Validator ...................................................... 6-14
6.3.1 Basic Operation........................................................................6-14
6.3.2 Removal and Replacement......................................................6-16
6.3.3 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts..............................6-17
VIII NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

6.3.4 Fault Finding ............................................................................ 6-17

6.4 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor ..................... 6-18
6.4.1 Physical Description................................................................. 6-18
6.4.2 Basic Operation ....................................................................... 6-18
ADH Hoppers 7-1

7.1 Overview .............................................................................. 7-3
7.2 Aristocrat Disc Hopper ....................................................... 7-3

7.2.1 Basic Operation ......................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Functional Description ............................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Fault Finding .............................................................................. 7-8
7.2.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures .................................... 7-9
7.2.5 Disassembly and Assembly Procedures.................................. 7-10
7.2.6 Test Procedure ........................................................................ 7-11
7.2.7 General Maintenance............................................................... 7-11
Video Monitors and Touch Screen 8-1

8.1 Overview ............................................................................. 8-3
8.2 General Description ........................................................... 8-3
8.3 Tatung Monitor ................................................................... 8-4

8.3.1 Physical Description................................................................... 8-4
8.3.2 Technical Description................................................................. 8-6
8.3.3 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................. 8-8
8.4 Ceronix or Kristel ............................................................. 8-11
8.4.1 Technical Description............................................................... 8-11
8.4.2 Adjustment Procedures ........................................................... 8-13
8.5 Removal and Replacement Procedures ......................... 8-13
8.6 General Maintenance ....................................................... 8-14
8.7 Touchscreen Option ........................................................ 8-15

8.7.1 Touchscreen Operation ........................................................... 8-15
8.7.2 Performance ............................................................................ 8-16
8.7.3 Machine Interface .................................................................... 8-16
8.7.4 Touchscreen Specifications ..................................................... 8-17
8.7.5 Notes on Handling ................................................................... 8-18
8.8 Degaussing........................................................................ 8-19
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 IX

Serial Ticket Printer 9-1

9.1 Technical Description ......................................................... 9-3
9.1.1 Physical Description ...................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Functional Description................................................................9-6
9.2.1 Paper Roll Replacement ..........................................................9-10
9.2.2 Ribbon Cassette Replacement ................................................9-12
Bank Note Acceptor 10-1

10.1 Technical Description ....................................................... 10-3
10.1.1 Overview ..................................................................................10-3
10.1.2 Physical Description .................................................................10-3
10.1.3 GL5 Non-isolated Serial Interface ..........................................10-11
10.2 Installation and Machine Conditions ............................. 10-14
10.2.1 Configuration Setup................................................................10-14
10.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators .................................................10-14
10.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ........................ 10-15
10.3.1 Clearance of Embedded Bank Note Acceptor Stacker ..........10-15
10.3.2 Removing Bank Note Acceptor Stacker.................................10-15
10.3.3 Bank Note Acceptor Jams .....................................................10-15
10.4 Care and Maintenance .................................................... 10-17
10.4.1 Troubleshooting .....................................................................10-17
10.4.2 Periodic Maintenance.............................................................10-17
10.4.3 Video Level Calibration ..........................................................10-18
Main Board Part Nos 410388 or 410389 11-1

11.1 Introduction ....................................................................... 11-3
11.2 Physical Description ......................................................... 11-3

11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations.......................................11-4

11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor..........................................................11-9
11.4.2 Video ......................................................................................11-10
11.4.3 Sound .....................................................................................11-11
11.4.4 Keyboard Port ........................................................................11-11
11.4.5 Reset ......................................................................................11-12
11.4.6 Internal I/O..............................................................................11-12
11.4.7 External I/O Expansion ..........................................................11-13
X NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

11.4.8 Memory .................................................................................. 11-13

11.4.9 Battery Backup Circuit ........................................................... 11-15
11.4.10 Real Time Clock .................................................................... 11-15
11.4.11 Temperature Measurement ................................................... 11-16
11.4.12 Security .................................................................................. 11-16
11.4.13 Machine Peripherals .............................................................. 11-17
11.4.14 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry................................ 11-19
11.4.15 DES Encryption Device.......................................................... 11-19
11.4.16 Serial Channels...................................................................... 11-19
11.4.17 Communication Configuration Board..................................... 11-20
11.4.18 Interface with the Power Control System ............................... 11-20
11.4.19 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface......................................... 11-21
11.4.20 Debugging.............................................................................. 11-21
11.4.21 Mechanical Switches ............................................................. 11-22
11.4.22 Interface Board ...................................................................... 11-22
11.6 Description of Connectors ............................................. 11-24

11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board ................................... 11-24
11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20......................................... 11-26
11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 ............................................. 11-28
11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ........................ 11-30
Interface Board Part No. 410315 Issue B 12-1

12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ........................................ 12-3
12.2.1 Keying ...................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Description of Connectors ............................................... 12-7
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3................................ 12-7
12.3.2 Driver Board, P4 .................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Optional I/O Expansion Card / LAB Comms, P5 ................... 12-15
12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6 .......................................................... 12-17
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24................................................... 12-17
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11 ................................... 12-19
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12 ................................................................ 12-20
12.3.8 Bank Note Acceptor LEDs, Backlight and Security, P13 ....... 12-21
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18. ........................... 12-21
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21 ................................................................ 12-23
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16 ........................................................................... 12-23
12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19................................................................ 12-24
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20 ................................................................ 12-24
12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23 ................................................. 12-25
12.3.15 Hopper, P25........................................................................... 12-25
12.3.16 Video, P26.............................................................................. 12-25
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XI

12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27 ....................................................12-26

12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28........................12-26
12.3.19 Power Supply, P29 .................................................................12-27
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30....................................................12-27
I/O Driver Board 410311 or 410415 13-1

13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations ...........................13-3
13.2.1 Power Supply ...........................................................................13-6
13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps ..........................................................13-6
13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface............................................................13-7
13.2.4 Security Switches .....................................................................13-9
13.4 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................ 13-11
Communications Configuration Boards - Part Nos. 410165,

410217, 410314 14-1
14.4 Connector Pin Assignments............................................. 14-8
Hard Meters EMM Part No. 410366, 250 EHM Part No. 410337,
385, 345 15-1
15.1 Electromechanical Meters ................................................ 15-3
15.1.1 General Description .................................................................15-3
15.1.2 Operational Description............................................................15-3
15.1.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................15-9
15.1.4 Connector Pin Assignment.......................................................15-9
15.1.5 General Maintenance .............................................................15-11
15.2 Electronic Hard Meters ................................................... 15-12
15.2.1 General Description ...............................................................15-12
15.2.2 Operational Description..........................................................15-13
15.2.3 Displaying Meter Values.........................................................15-13
15.2.4 EEPROM Bit Error Procedure................................................15-14
XII NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

15.2.5 Warning Messages ................................................................ 15-14

15.2.6 Block Diagram........................................................................ 15-15
15.2.7 Electronic Hard Meter SPI Board (ESB) ................................ 15-16
15.2.8 Data Storage Board (DSB) .................................................... 15-16
15.2.9 Input/Output Connectors........................................................ 15-18
15.2.10 DSB Connectors .................................................................... 15-21
15.2.11 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................ 15-23
15.2.12 General Maintenance............................................................. 15-23
Progressive Jackpot Systems 16-1

16.1 Overview ............................................................................ 16-3
16.2 SPI (410254) plus SEI (410227)......................................... 16-4

16.2.1 Progressive SPI Display Controller Board (410254) ................ 16-5
16.2.2 SPI Display Boards .................................................................. 16-7
16.2.3 DC - DC Converter Board ........................................................ 16-8
16.2.4 Progressive SEI Board (410227) ............................................. 16-8
16.3 SEI (410252)..................................................................... 16-14
16.3.1 Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board (410252).............. 16-14
LAB Communications Board - Part No. 410174 17-1

17.1.2 Basic Operation ....................................................................... 17-5
17.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description ................................................. 17-7
17.4 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................ 17-10
ANET - DACOM Communications Interface 18-1

18.1 General Description .......................................................... 18-3
18.1.1 Typical Hardware Devices ....................................................... 18-3
18.2 Basic Operation................................................................. 18-6

18.3.2 Functional Description ............................................................. 18-9
18.3.3 Serial Equipment Interface (Assembly SEI 564144).............. 18-16
18.4.1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface:......................... 18-17
18.4.2 Communications Filter: .......................................................... 18-17
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XIII

18.4.3 Mains Filter Box:.....................................................................18-18

18.5 Pin Connector Assignment ............................................ 18-20
18.6 Installation and General Maintenance ........................... 18-24
Player Communication Module 19-1

19.1 General Description .......................................................... 19-3
19.2 Technical Description (PCM)............................................ 19-4

19.2.1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader...................................................19-4
19.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display...............................................................19-4
19.2.3 Service Buttons ........................................................................19-5
19.4 Machine Communications Setup ..................................... 19-6
Communications Systems 20-1

20.1 Overview ............................................................................ 20-3
20.2 VLC Communication PCB................................................. 20-3
20.3 TCP/IP Communications................................................... 20-8

20.3.1 TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board .................................20-8
20.3.2 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board......................................................20-15
20.4 Machine Communications Interface (MCI) .................... 20-19
20.5 IGT Interface .................................................................... 20-21
20.6 ActivData II+..................................................................... 20-23
20.7 Olympic Head Unit .......................................................... 20-24
Machine Fault Finding 21-1
A.1 Games A-1

MVP Games .................................................................................A- 3
Spinning Reel games ............................................................................ A- 3
Card Games.......................................................................................... A- 6
Keno/Bingo Games ................................................................................ A-6
B.1 Hyperlink Systems B- 1

B. 1 Overview .............................................................................B- 4
XIV NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

B.1.1 LPJS Concepts .........................................................................B- 4

B.1.2 General Principles.....................................................................B- 4
B.1.3 Regulatory Requirements .........................................................B- 8
B.1.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface .................................................B-8
B.2 Technical Description .........................................................B-9
B.2.1 Physical Description...................................................................B-9
B.3 Hyperlink Jackpot Controller ...........................................B-13
B.3.1 Front Panel ..............................................................................B-13
B.3.2 Back Panel...............................................................................B-16
B.3.3 Internal Components................................................................B-17
B.3.4 Functional Description .............................................................B-20
B.3.5 Configuration EPROM Layout..................................................B-22
B.3.6 Replacing a Faulty Controller Board ........................................B-24
B.3.7 Replacing the Firmware ...........................................................B-25
B.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface.......................................B-26
B.5 Graphic Displays...............................................................B-30

B.5.1 In Machine Displays .................................................................B-30
B.6 Link Configuration ............................................................B-35
B.6.1 Link Configuration Data Sheet .................................................B-35
B.7 Installation and Pre-start Checks.....................................B-36
B.8 Jackpot Controller Modes ................................................B-37

B.8.1 Initial Power Up ........................................................................B-37
B.8.2 Power Up .................................................................................B-37
B.8.3 Normal Mode ...........................................................................B-38
B.8.4 Jackpot Hit ...............................................................................B-38
B.8.5 Power Save..............................................................................B-39
B.8.6 Audit Mode ...............................................................................B-39
B.8.7 Test Mode ................................................................................B-44
B.8.8 Reset........................................................................................B-45
B.9 Error Conditions................................................................B-46
B.9.1 Memory Error ...........................................................................B-46
B.9.2 Communication Failure ............................................................B-47
B.9.3 Security Cage Open.................................................................B-47
B.9.4 Meter Disconnect .....................................................................B-47
B.9.5 Link Controller Power Save .....................................................B-47
B.9.6 Power Good Signal Fail ...........................................................B-48
B.9.7 Configuration Change ..............................................................B-48
B.9.8 Manufacturer Specific Errors ...................................................B-48
B.10 Hyperlink Statistics...........................................................B-49
B.11 Hyperlink Reels Test .........................................................B-49
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XV

B.12 Adding / Removing EGMs.................................................B-50
B.13 Hyperlink Games ...............................................................B-51

B.13.1 Hyperlink Jackpot Feature Game............................................ B-51
B.14 Fault Finding......................................................................B-53
B.15 PalLinks .............................................................................B-55

B.15.1 Overview ................................................................................. B-55
B.15.2 EPROM Production Checklist ................................................. B-55
B.15.3 Sites ........................................................................................ B-55
B.15.4 Links ........................................................................................ B-57
B.15.5 Slot Machines.......................................................................... B-60
B.15.6 Generating an EPROM Configuration File .............................. B-64
B.15.7 Link Configuration Report ....................................................... B-64
Glossary G-1
Index Index-1
Volume 2 - Diagrams and References: Volume II
XVI NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical MVP Video Gaming Machine with Note Acceptor
- external view ........................................................................... 1-6
Figure 1-2 MVP Gaming Machine with Highboy Top Box and Note
Acceptor - Internal View ........................................................... 1-7
Figure 1-3 MVP Gaming Machine with Ticket Printer, No Hopper,
and Note Acceptor - Internal View............................................ 1-8
Figure 1-4 MVP Gaming Machine with Aristocrat Player
Communications Module........................................................... 1-9
Figure 1-5 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core
Features .................................................................................. 1-11
Figure 1-6 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ...................................... 1-14
Figure 1-7 Typical Video Machine Functional Diagram ............................ 1-17
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions ................................................................. 2-4
Figure 2-2 Machine Dimensions - Low Boy with Hard Meters .................... 2-5
Figure 2-3 Machine Footprint and Clearances............................................ 2-6
Figure 2-4 Coin Comparator (CC-62 shown) .............................................. 2-9
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display ........................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations.................................. 3-7
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout ........................................................ 3-8
Figure 3-4 Electro-mechanical Meters ...................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-5 Electronic Hard Meters -Location ............................................ 3-14
Figure 3-6 BIPS Plus - Hotel gaming management system ..................... 3-16
Figure 3-7 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure .............................. 3-18
Acceptor - External View .......................................................... 4-4
Acceptor - Internal View ........................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-3 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment................................................. 4-8
Figure 4-4 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement................................ 4-9
Figure 4-5 Bilock Key and Quick Change Core ........................................ 4-10
Figure 4-6 Bilock Camlock ........................................................................ 4-10
Figure 4-7 Bilock Switchlock ..................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-8 Cash Box Chute: Removal and Replacement......................... 4-11
Figure 4-9 Logic Cage .............................................................................. 4-12
Figure 4-10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting System and Artwork....... 4-15
Figure 4-11 Warning Label ....................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-12 Playbutton: Exploded View .................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-13 Coin Tray ............................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-14 Top Box ................................................................................. 4-21
Figure 4-15 Two-tier Light Tower - exploded view.................................... 4-24
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location ............................................. 5-3
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly ............................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram .................................. 5-5
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution................................................. 5-6
Figure 6-1 CC-62 Coin Chute Assembly - Location.................................... 6-5
Figure 6-2 CC-62 Coin Comparator - Exploded View................................. 6-6
Figure 6-3 CC-62 Sensor Coil Arrangement............................................... 6-7
Figure 6-4 CC-62 Sensor Assembly ........................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-5 CC-62 Comparator - accept/reject adjustment.......................... 6-9
Figure 6-6 CC-62 Null Field Adjustment ................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-7 Condor Coin Handling Assembly............................................. 6-14
Figure 6-8 Condor Coin Validator ............................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-9 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor.............................. 6-18
Figure 7-1 ADH Hopper Location................................................................ 7-3
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XVII

Figure 7-2 ADH Hopper- rear view..............................................................7-4

Figure 7-3 ADH Hopper - Exploded View....................................................7-5
Figure 8-1 Tatung Video Monitor Assembly................................................8-5
Figure 8-2 Monitor Assembly – Kristel and Ceronix ..................................8-12
Figure 8-3 Video Monitor Assembly ..........................................................8-14
Figure 8-4 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor ....................................................8-15
Figure 8-5 Capacitive Sensing – operation ...............................................8-16
Figure 8-6 Touchscreen Connection.........................................................8-17
Figure 9-1 Location of Printer......................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 Printer - Physical Description.....................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Printed Ticket Examples - 1.......................................................9-8
Figure 9-4 Printed Ticket Examples - 2.......................................................9-9
Figure 9-5 Replacing the Paper Roll .........................................................9-11
Figure 9-6 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette ...............................................9-12
Figure 10-1 Bank Note Acceptor Location ................................................10-4
Figure 10-2 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide .........................10-5
Figure 10-3 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly ............................10-6
Figure 10-4 Input/Output Connector .........................................................10-7
Figure 10-5 Interconnection Diagram........................................................10-8
Figure 10-6 Stacker...................................................................................10-9
Figure 10-7 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays ..........................10-10
Figure 10-8 GL5 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages .....................10-11
Figure 10-9 GL5 Protocol - Request for Re-transmission Message .......10-12
Figure 10-10 GL5 Protocol - Hex Code Messages .................................10-13
Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board..........................................................11-4
Figure 11-2 System Architecture...............................................................11-5
Figure 11-3 Main Board Block Diagram ....................................................11-7
Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board Layout ....................................................11-8
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ....................................12-4
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location ....................................................13-3
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram ..........................................13-4
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout ......................13-5
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals ............................................13-7
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals................................13-8
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ..................14-3
Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ........14-5
Figure 15-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location............................15-4
Figure 15-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block
Diagram ...................................................................................15-4
Figure 15-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component
and Solder Sides .....................................................................15-6
Figure 15-4 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Block
Diagram ...................................................................................15-7
Figure 15-5 Electormechanical Meter Board - 410250 Detailed Block
Diagram ...................................................................................15-7
Figure 15-6 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Component
and Solder Sides .....................................................................15-8
Figure 15-7 Electronic Hard Meters - location.........................................15-13
Figure 15-8 Electronic Hard Meter Board - block diagram......................15-16
Figure 15-9 Data Storage Board - block diagram ...................................15-18
Figure 16-1 SPI Standalone and SEI Link Progressive Jackpot
System - block diagram ...........................................................16-4
Figure 16-2 SEI Board - data flows .........................................................16-11
Figure 16-3 Cashcade - data flows .........................................................16-12
Figure 16-4 Mikohn Comms Inlet Board - block diagram .......................16-15
Figure 16-5 Progressive Interface Board Connections ...........................16-17
XVIII NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

Figure 17-1 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout................ 17-5

Figure 17-2 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ...................... 17-6
Figure 17-3 LAB PSU Chassis.................................................................. 17-7
Figure 17-4 LAB PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring .......... 17-8
Figure 18-1 Typical DACOM Installation................................................... 18-5
Figure 18-2 FEP Connection to Gaming Machines .................................. 18-6
Figure 18-3 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface -
Component Locations ............................................................. 18-7
Figure 18-4 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Functional
Diagram ................................................................................... 18-9
Figure 18-5 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Assembly....... 18-10
Figure 18-6 Serial Equipment Interface .................................................. 18-16
Figure 18-7 Data Cable Filter Box .......................................................... 18-18
Figure 18-8 Mains Filter Box................................................................... 18-19
Figure 19-1 Player Communication Module.............................................. 19-3
Figure 19-2 Variation to Face of PCM (Initial Display Message) .............. 19-6
Figure 20-1 VLC Comms Inlet PCB Block Diagram ................................. 20-4
Figure 20-2 VLC Communication Inlet PCB - Component Layout............ 20-5
Figure 20-3 TCP/IP Communications Board - Block Diagram................ 20-10
Figure 20-4 TCP/IP Communications Board - Component Location....... 20-11
Figure 20-5 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Block Diagram ...................... 20-15
Figure 20-6 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Component Location ............ 20-16
Figure 20-7 MCI - Typical Connections .................................................. 20-19
Figure 20-8 Olympic Head Unit - Connections ....................................... 20-24
Figure A-1 MVP Video Game Screen Example...........................................A-4
Figure A-2 MVP Pay Table Example ..........................................................A-5
Figure B.1 Hyperlink - block diagram..........................................................B-7
Figure B.2 Hyperlink – Machine Wiring.....................................................B-10
Figure B.3 Link Layout ..............................................................................B-11
Figure B.4 Last Machine in Bank – Option 1 ............................................B-12
Figure B.5 Last Machine in Bank – Option 2 ............................................B-12
Figure B.6 Jackpot Controller ...................................................................B-13
Figure B.7 Jackpot Controller – Front Panel.............................................B-14
Figure B.8 JPC Door – Top Cover security...............................................B-15
Figure B.9 Jackpot Controller – Back Panel .............................................B-16
Figure B.10 JPC – Top Cover removed....................................................B-18
Figure B.11 Jackpot Controller Board - layout ..........................................B-19
Figure B.12 Hyperlink SEI Board – component layout..............................B-27
Figure B.13 Graphic Display – wiring diagram..........................................B-31
Figure B.14 Hyperlink Display...................................................................B-32
Figure B.15 Hyperlink Graphic Display Assembly......................................B-33
Figure B.16 Power Supply Unit .................................................................B-34
Figure B.17 Link Configuration Report......................................................B-35
Figure B.18 Site Information .....................................................................B-55
Figure B.19 Link Configuration Information ..............................................B-57
Figure B.20 Slot Machines Information.....................................................B-60
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XIX

List of Tables
Table 1-1 Video Gaming Machine Modules ................................................1-4
Table 1-2 MVP Video Machine Key Types................................................1-10
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics ............................................................1-18
Table 1-4 Power Requirements ................................................................1-18
Table 1-5 Environment..............................................................................1-18
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu................................................................3-17
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display...................................................3-19
Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu ...................................................3-20
Table 3-4 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1................................................3-20
Table 3-5 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2................................................3-21
Table 3-6 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 1...........................................3-21
Table 3-7 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 2...........................................3-22
Table 3-8 Reset Periodic Meters...............................................................3-22
Table 3-9 Game Replay Display ...............................................................3-22
Table 3-10 Previous Game Jurisdictional Meters Display.........................3-23
Table 3-11 Game Statistics Display ..........................................................3-23
Table 3-12 Gamble Statistics Display - Screen 1......................................3-24
Table 3-13 Collect Statistics Display.........................................................3-24
Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information Menu ..................................................3-25
Table 3-15 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 1.....................................3-25
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 2.....................................3-26
Table 3-17 Error Log Display ....................................................................3-26
Table 3-18 Panic Log Display ...................................................................3-27
Table 3-19 Note Acceptor Information Display .........................................3-27
Table 3-20 Ticket Printer Log Display .......................................................3-28
Table 3-21 Typical Cash Out Ticket..........................................................3-29
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode Menu..............................................................3-30
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode Requirements ................................................3-30
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test Display.......................................3-31
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Button Test ..................................................3-31
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test Display ...............................3-32
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test Display....................................3-32
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu ............................3-33
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions .................3-33
Table 3-30 Self Test Mode - Sound System Test Display ........................3-34
Table 3-31 Self Test Mode - Factory Test Display....................................3-34
Table 3-32 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test Display............................3-35
Table 3-33 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result Display ................3-35
Table 3-34 Self Test Mode.- Combination Quick Test Display .................3-36
Table 3-35 Self Test Mode - Printer Test Display .....................................3-36
Table 3-36 Operator Setup / Selections Menu..........................................3-37
Table 3-37 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options Display ..................3-38
Table 3-38 Operator Setup / Selections - Real Time Clock
Setup Display...........................................................................3-39
Table 3-39 Operator Setup / Selections - Sound System
Setup Display...........................................................................3-39
Table 3-40 Operator Setup / Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup ............3-40
Table 3-41 Operator Setup / Selections - Layout Setup Display...............3-40
Table 3-42 Power Save Mode Display ......................................................3-40
Table 3-43 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu .............................3-41
Table 3-44 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Displays ................3-42
Table 5-1 Mains Connector to Power Supply Assemblyr ............................5-9
XX NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

Table 5-2 - Connector for Secondary Output 24 V .................................... 5-10

Table 5-3 - Connector for Secondary Output 12 V .................................... 5-10
Table 5-4 - Connector for Fluorescent Lamp Outputs ............................... 5-10
Table 6-1 J1 - Connects to the Interface Board........................................ 6-12
Table 6-2 J2 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Emitters ............................... 6-12
Table 6-3 J3 - Connects to the Accept Solenoid Coil ............................... 6-12
Table 6-4 J4 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Detectors ............................. 6-12
Table 6-5 J5 - Connects to the Sensor Coils ............................................ 6-12
Table 6-6 Fault Finding ............................................................................. 6-13
Table 6-7 Condor Validator Interface Signals ........................................... 6-17
Table 6-8 Fault Finding ............................................................................. 6-17
Table 7-1 Fault Finding ............................................................................... 7-8
Table 8-1 Adjustments and Functions - Picture Control PCB..................... 8-8
Table 8-2 Adjustment and Functions - CRT PCB ....................................... 8-9
Table 8-3 Adjustment and Functions - Main Monitor PCB.......................... 8-9
Table 8-4 Touchscreen Control Signals ................................................... 8-17
Table 9-1 Printer Specifications .................................................................. 9-5
Table 9-2 Print Formats .............................................................................. 9-5
Table 10-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding ........................................ 10-17
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics ......................................... 11-14
Table 11-2 Optical Security - Typical Assignment .................................. 11-16
Table 11-3 Mechanical Security - Typical Assignment ........................... 11-17
Table 11-4 Hopper Control Signals......................................................... 11-18
Table 11-5 Coin Handling Signals .......................................................... 11-18
Table 11-6 SPI Channel Signals ............................................................. 11-19
Table 11-7 SPI Channel Allocations ....................................................... 11-19
Table 11-8 Power Control System Signal Lines ..................................... 11-20
Table 11-9 Communications Configuration Board Connector - P23....... 11-24
Table 11-10 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ..................................... 11-26
Table 11-11 Miscellaneous Connector - P22.......................................... 11-28
Table 11-12 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ..................... 11-30
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections .................................................. 12-6
Table 12-2 Keying of Connections ............................................................ 12-6
Table 12-3 Main Board Connector P1 ...................................................... 12-7
Table 12-4 Main Board Connector P2 ...................................................... 12-9
Table 12-5 Main Board Connector P3 .................................................... 12-11
Table 12-6 Driver Board Connector P4................................................... 12-13
Table 12-7 Optional I/O Expansion Card Connector P5 ......................... 12-15
Table 12-8 Mechanical Meters Connector P6......................................... 12-17
Table 12-9 Security Connectors P8, P22, P24 ....................................... 12-17
Table 12-10 Logic Door Security Connector P8 ..................................... 12-18
Table 12-11 Security No.3 to No.5 Connector P22................................. 12-18
Table 12-12 Security 6 & 7 Connector P24 ............................................ 12-19
Table 12-13 Pushbuttons and Lamps 1 Connector P10......................... 12-19
Table 12-14 Pushbuttons and Lamps 2 Connector P11......................... 12-20
Table 12-15 Coin Handling Connector P12 ............................................ 12-20
Table 12-16 Bank Note Acceptor Connector P13................................... 12-21
Table 12-17 Serial Channel 0 Connector P14 ........................................ 12-21
Table 12-18 Serial Channel 2 Connector P15 ........................................ 12-22
Table 12-19 Generic Serial Channel 3 Connector P17........................... 12-22
Table 12-20 Generic Serial Channel 1 Connector P18........................... 12-23
Table 12-21 DACOM 5000 Connector P21 ............................................ 12-23
Table 12-22 Mikohn Connector P16 ....................................................... 12-23
Table 12-23 SPI Channel 1 Connector P19............................................ 12-24
Table 12-24 DACOM 3000 Connector P20 ............................................ 12-24
Table 12-25 Spare Voltage 24 V DC Connector P23 ............................. 12-25
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XXI

Table 12-26 Hopper Connector P25 .......................................................12-25

Table 12-27 Video Connector P26..........................................................12-25
Table 12-28 Mechanical Switches Connector P27 .................................12-26
Table 12-29 Audit, Jackpot Switch & Door Security Connector P28.......12-26
Table 12-30 Power Supply Connector P29 .............................................12-27
Table 12-31 Optional Fan DC 12 V Connector P30................................12-27
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation.......................................13-8
Table 13-2 LED Functions ........................................................................13-9
Table 13-2 Security Switch Functions .......................................................13-9
Table 13-4 Connector Pin Assignments..................................................13-11
Table 14-1 CCB PCBA Part Numbers ......................................................14-4
Table 14-2 Channels and Port Numbers...................................................14-4
Table 14-3 RS485 Interface Signal Lines .................................................14-6
Table 14-4 CCB 72-pin connector to Main Board .....................................14-8
Table 15-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ..................................15-9
Table 15-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface..........................................15-10
Table 15-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface ............................................15-10
Table 15-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface .....................................................15-10
Table 15-5 S1 - Security Interface ..........................................................15-10
Table 15-6 Optional Interface to Gamble Feature J3 (410250) ..............15-11
Table 15-7 Connections for EHM SPI .....................................................15-19
Table 15-8 Connections for Pulse Interface – ESB Output.....................15-20
Table 15-9 Connections for Tower Lamps..............................................15-20
Table 15-10 Connections for Pulse Interface – DSB Input .....................15-21
Table 15-11 Connections for EHM Switch Input .....................................15-22
Table 15-12 Connections for LCD Display..............................................15-22
Table 16-1 SPI Display Controller - connection to P19 on Interface
Board .......................................................................................16-6
Table 16-2 SPI Display Controller - connector J2 pinout ..........................16-6
Table 16-3 SPI Display Controller - connector J3 pinout ..........................16-7
Table 16-4 SPI Display Board -connector J1 pinout .................................16-7
Table 16-5 SPI Display Board -connector J2 pinout .................................16-8
Table 16-6 SEI Board Configurations .......................................................16-9
Table 16-7 DIP Switch Settings...............................................................16-10
Table 16-8 Mikohn Interface ...................................................................16-13
Table 16-9 Machine Interface .................................................................16-13
Table 16-10 CDS Display Interface.........................................................16-13
Table 16-11 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface ...................................16-14
Table 16-12 Connector J5 Pinout ...........................................................16-17
Table 16-15 RS422 Communications with Mikohn Controller (J7) .........16-19
Table 16-16 Drop Loom Connectors J1, J2, J3, J4 ................................16-19
Table 16-17 Cashbox Security J9 ...........................................................16-19
Table 17-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout....................................................................17-3
Table 17-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout ..............................................................17-4
Table 17-3 Interface Board Bus Connector to LAB Communications
Board .....................................................................................17-10
Table 18-1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Physical
Description...............................................................................18-8
Table 18-2 Status Indicator Function ......................................................18-14
Table 18-3 Typical Memory Configuration ..............................................18-15
Table 18-4 J1 - RS232 Interface .............................................................18-20
Table 18-5 J2 - LCD Display ...................................................................18-20
Table 18-6 J3 - ANET Connection to Interface Board ............................18-20
Table 18-7 J4 - LCD Back Light Power...................................................18-21
XXII NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

Table 18-8 J5 - Quad Input ..................................................................... 18-21

Table 18-9 J6 - RS485 Serial Cable Connection .................................... 18-21
Table 18-10 J7 - Octal Input ................................................................... 18-21
Table 18-11 J8 - SPI Interface ................................................................ 18-22
Table 18-12 J9 - Door Inputs .................................................................. 18-22
Table 18-13 J10 - Relays ........................................................................ 18-22
Table 18-14 J11 - Service Buttons and Keypad Input ............................ 18-22
Table 18-15 J12 - Power Input................................................................ 18-23
Table 18-16 J13 - Mains Power Sense................................................... 18-23
Table 18-17 J14 - Locking Card Reader................................................. 18-23
Table 18-18 J15 - Non-locking Card Reader .......................................... 18-23
Table 20-1 Connector P0.......................................................................... 20-6
Table 20-2 Connector P1.......................................................................... 20-6
Table 20-3 Connectors P2 and P3............................................................ 20-7
Table 20-4 Connector J1 .......................................................................... 20-7
Table 20-5 Interface Connector - P7 ...................................................... 20-12
Table 20-6 AUI and Cash Box Connector P2 ......................................... 20-14
Table 20-7 Logic Seal Interface .............................................................. 20-14
Table 20-8 Comms Board Connector J3 ................................................ 20-17
Table 20-9 Isolated Power Input Connector J4....................................... 20-17
Table 20-10 AUI / Network Interface Connector J2 ................................ 20-18
Table 20-11 Cash Box Connector J1...................................................... 20-18
Table 20-12 MCI Harnesses and Functions ........................................... 20-20
Table 20-13 P15 - RS232 Port to IGT Interface Board........................... 20-21
Table 20-14 Gaming Machine to ORION Unit Communications ............ 20-23
Table 20-15 ORION Unit to ActivData II+ communications cable .......... 20-23
Table 20-1 Fault Finding ........................................................................... 21-1
Table B.1 Status LEDs on SEI..................................................................B-27
Table B.2 P1 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422 .................................B-28
Table B.3 P5 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422 .................................B-28
Table B.4 P1SIM - from SEI......................................................................B-28
Table B.5 JPCIN on SEI – RS485 ............................................................B-29
Table B.6 JPCOUT on SEI – RS485 ........................................................B-29
Table B.7 Display on SEI – RS485 ...........................................................B-29
Table B.8 Power to ACDC on SEI ............................................................B-29
Table B.9 Graphic Display Power Supply Specification............................B-34
Table B.10 Hyperlink Statistics .................................................................B-49
Table B.11 Fault Finding...........................................................................B-53
Table B.12 Site Function Details...............................................................B-56
Table B.13 Basic Details Tab Screen .......................................................B-57
Table B.14 Percentages Tab Screen........................................................B-58
Table B.15 Cashless Details Tab Screen .................................................B-58
Table B.16 Slot Machines Function ..........................................................B-61
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 XXIII

Notes
XXIV NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

MVP Video Service Manual General Description
_____Chapter 1_____
General Description
1.1 Physical Description .............................................................. 1-3
1.2 Basic Operation.................................................................... 1-11
1.2.1 Play Mode .............................................................................. 1-12

1.2.2 Operator Mode ....................................................................... 1-13
1.3 Functional Description ........................................................ 1-15
1.3.1 Currency Handling.................................................................. 1-15

1.3.2 Machine Conditions................................................................ 1-16
1.4 Specifications ....................................................................... 1-18
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 1-1

General Description MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical MVP Video Gaming Machine with Note Acceptor - external
view ...................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-2 MVP Gaming Machine with Highboy Top Box and Note Acceptor -
Internal View......................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-3 MVP Gaming Machine with Ticket Printer, Himec Hopper, and Note
Acceptor - Internal View ...................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-4 MVP Gaming Machine with Aristocrat Player Communications Module........1-9
Figure 1-5 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features....................1-11
Figure 1-6 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ...........................................................1-14
Figure 1-7 Typical Video Machine Functional Diagram .................................................1-17
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Video Gaming Machine Modules .......................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-2 MVP Video Machine Key Types .......................................................................... 1-10
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics ...................................................................................... 1-18
Table 1-4 Power Requirements........................................................................................... 1-18
Table 1-5 Environment ........................................................................................................ 1-18
1-2 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

1.1 Physical Description

The Aristocrat MVP Video Gaming Machine is the latest model of a range of
advanced gaming machines that incorporates the following features:
• Advanced, high-performance electronics based on ARM RISC technology,
• Advanced software enabling a wider variety of games and simpler machine
operations,
• Complete range of machine attachments enabling note and coin currency,
communication links, progressive systems, and custom options,
• Comprehensive security options,
• Modular design and construction,
• A multi-voltage power supply assembly,
• Easier servicing and maintenance,
• High resolution video displays, advanced animation and graphics, and
improved sounds and tunes,
• Variety of aesthetic cabinet types, colours, and game and score displays.
The machine is assembled from various sub-assemblies and major components

(modules) which are described in detail in other chapters of this manual.
Figures 1-1 through 1-4 show a range of machine models and component
configurations.

The following table briefly identifies the various modules of the gaming machine.
Table 1-1 Video Gaming Machine Modules

Machine Module Description
Cabinet, Door and Top The physical outer enclosure which provides for the location and mounting
Box. of other modules.
Video Monitor High resolution 640 x 400 pixels for improved-quality graphics. The monitor
is the main medium for displaying game operation and status to the player.
Main Board The Main printed circuit board (PCB) provides primary control of the gaming
machine. The Main Board is interfaced (via the Interface Board) to all the
major components of the machine. The board receives signals from, and
sends control signals to machine components. The Main Board houses the
central processor and other logic components for game generation, video
and stepper drivers, security items, power control, memory storage, and
communications.
Interface Board The Interface Board houses an array of connectors which are used to
(may also be called the electrically connect (via direct mechanical coupling or through looms and
Backplane). ribbon cables) the various electrical components of the machine to the Main
Board.
I/O Driver Board The I/O Driver Board drives the lamps, receives inputs from the
pushbuttons, interfaces with the coin handling system, and provides a
battery-backed circuit for security monitoring.
Communication The Communication Configuration Board (CCB) 'piggy-backs' to the Main
Configuration Board Board. The board is used to set up the communications channels of the
Main Board (up to three) for external networks, note acceptor, printer, and
touchscreen.
Logic Cage The logic cage consists of a secure, steel cabinet that houses the Main,
Communications Configuration, and I\O Driver PCBAs. The section of the
Interface Board that interfaces with the Main Board and the I/O Driver Board
is also located within the logic cage.
Power Supply Assembly The power supply assembly converts the AC mains input voltage into low
voltage DC power for the various machine modules and circuits. Power is
directed via the Interface Board to the machine components. The video
monitor and the fluorescent lighting system receive AC power directly from
the power supply assembly.
Coin Handling System The function of the coin handling system is to check the validity of coins
inserted, establish a count and pass signals to the Main Board. The coin
handling system directs coins to the hopper, cash box, or coin tray. The
MVP Gaming Machine is compatible with several different coin-handling
systems.
Hopper (if used) The hopper acts as a holding unit for coins. When instructed by the main
board, the hopper returns coins to the player. For each coin ejected, the
hopper sends a signal to the Main Board. When the required number of
coins have been dispensed, the Main Board signals the hopper motor to
stop.
Note Acceptor and Soft The function of the note acceptor is to accept valid note currency and
Drop Analyser (if used) register the appropriate number of credits for gameplay. A note stacker is
used to store the notes and to record monetary and statistical information.
Player Communication The function of player communication is to allow a player, using an
(if used) identification card, to 'log on' to a network system when playing a machine.

The network system maintains a record of player transactions, and allows

messages to be sent to individual players. The player communication
module can be attached to the side of the gaming machine or fitted in the
top box.
LAB Communications The LAB communications interface board mounts directly to the interface
Board board. The board provides up to six extra ports for communications to
various subsidiary equipment as required by the New South Wales Liquor
Administration Board.
The LAB PSU Chassis that provides power connections to the six interfaces
is located behind the video monitor.
Mechanical Meter Board Electromechanical meters are used to record accounting data in a physical
(if used) format. The signals for the meters are received from the Main Board, via
the Interface Board.
Ticket Printer (if used) A ticket printer can provide players with a ticket for redeemable credits. The
printer may also keep a second copy of all tickets printed for additional audit
information.
Communications The function of the communications interface is to enable the machine to be
Interface (if used) linked to a network and/or subsidiary equipment. The communications
interface may be linked to various machine modules for transmission of
changes in device status.
Light Tower (if used) Multi-level light towers may be used to provide an additional level of
customer service and security.
Touchscreen (if fitted) A touchscreen enables games to be played by touching designated areas of
the screen.

Light Tower
Top Box
Jackpot Key
Switch
Top Trim
Audit Key
Switch
Monitor
Main Door
Lock
Mid Trim
Main Door
Latch Access
Speakers x 2
Coin Tray
Figure 1-1 Typical MVP Video Gaming Machine with Note Acceptor
- external view

Light Tower
Highboy
Top Box
Top Trim
Logic cage
Mid Trim
Coin
Comparator
Bill acceptor
Power Supply
Assembly
Coin Chuting DANGER
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
CHANGING TUBE . FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CA USE S ERIOUS
DAMAGE OR INJURY
WARNING
TUB E SOCKETS A RE VERY HOT
Illuminator
Panel
DR
PP.C
HO
Fluoro
Ballast
Coin Tray
Hopper
Side-Lighting
MVPcab
Fluorescent Tube Cash Box
and Reflector Chute
Mechanical Door
Mains Switch Switch
Figure 1-2 MVP Gaming Machine with Highboy Top Box and Note Acceptor
- Internal View

Light Tower
Highboy
Top Box
Sandwich Box
Top Trim
Logic cage
Mid Trim
Coin
Comparator
Bill acceptor
Power Supply
Assembly
Coin Chuting DANGER
TU R N O F F PO W E R B EF OR E
C H AN G IN G T UB E . FA IL U R E TO
C OM PL Y MAY C A U SE S ER IO U S
D AM AG E OR I N JU R Y
WARNING
TU B E SO CK E T S AR E V ER Y H O T
Perspex Illuminator
Panel and
Matt Illuminator
Panel
Side-Lighting Fluorescent
CoinTray Ballast Printer
Tube and Reflector
MK5V188A
Mechanical Door
Mains Switch Switch
Figure 1-3 MVP Gaming Machine with Ticket Printer, No Hopper, and Note Acceptor
- Internal View

Light Tower
Player
Communication
Top Box
Module
Service Card Reader
VFD Display
Pushbuttons
Jackpot Key
Switch
Top Trim
Audit Key
Switch
Monitor
Main Door
Lock
Mid Trim
Main Door
Latch Access
Belly Panel
Speakers x 2
Coin Tray
Figure 1-4 MVP Gaming Machine with Aristocrat Player Communications Module

Machine Keys
The gaming machine requires keys for the following locks and switches to
establish effective security and correct operation. A key may only be removed
from its lock or key switch after it has been returned to the locked position. Refer
to Figure 1-1 for lock and keyswitch positions. Key and lock types may vary
between markets.
Table 1-2 MVP Video Machine Key Types

Name Function Type
Audit Key Enables entry to the Operator Mode Menu (see
Switch Machine Modes).
Insert the Audit Key and turn it clockwise.
Cabinet Door Allows the operator to open the cabinet door.

Lock Insert the cabinet door key and turn it clockwise,
then lift the latch to release the door.
Jackpot Reset Allows the operator to reset the machine after a

Key Switch - machine fault has been corrected (see Machine
also called the Modes).
Cancel Credit Insert the Cancel Credit key, turn it clockwise then
Key Switch back again.
Logic Cage Allows the operator access to the PCB logic cage.
Lock (if fitted) Insert the logic cage key and turn it clockwise.
Note Acceptor Allows operator access to the note acceptor

Cage Door stacker lock(s) and to remove the stacker.
Lock(s) Turn keys clockwise to open.
(optional)
Note Acceptor Allows the operator to remove the notes from the
Stacker Lock stacker.
Insert the key and turn it clockwise, open the door
and remove the notes.
Bilock Locks
The gaming machines may be fitted with high-security Bilock camlocks and
switchlocks with a unique "U" shaped keyway. The locks feature the Quick
Change Core facility whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to the
lock barrel. Locks may be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without having to
dismantle the lock assembly.

To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and
pull out the lock assembly.
Bilock Key Quick Change Core

Figure 1-5 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features
1.2 Basic Operation

The gaming machine functions are controlled by an advanced software and
hardware platform that gives operators greater control over machine functions,
easier maintenance, and simplified machine setup. New games developed with
the software provide higher quality graphics, new sounds, and a wider variety of
features.
The machine has two major modes of operation: Play mode and Operator mode.
The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, the
Audit key switch is in the OFF position and there are no fault or lock-up
conditions.
The machine is in Operator Mode when the Audit key switch is in the ON
position. The operator mode provides a range of operational procedures, data
displays, and specific machine functions, all of which are fully controlled by the
Operator Mode Menu system and the on-screen guidance. The functions of the
operator mode are explained in detail in the chapter Machine Modes.
When the machine is in operator mode, normal game operation is not possible.
However, demonstration mode and combination test mode enable gameplay
without using currency.

1.2.1 Play Mode

When in Play Mode, the machine:
• operates security and audit features,
• runs self-checking and testing continuously,
• permits gameplay,
• monitors and records gameplay activities continuously,
• displays comments and guidance for players, operators and technicians.
Basic machine operation in Play Mode is shown in Figure 1.6. Depending on the
machine configuration, credits may be registered by inserting coins, tokens, or
bank notes, or by using a cashless system. With a cashless system, credits are
transferred to and from the machine through either a computer link or a smart
card. The machine has security features for screening the currency tendered to
ensure that only valid currency is accepted.
If the currency is accepted by the machine, the playbuttons on the mid trim
become active and flash. The player may then insert more currency, play a game
by pressing one of the flashing playbuttons, or have the machine return the current
credit total by pressing the COLLECT/CASHOUT pushbutton. The player
determines how many credits to wager by pressing one of the BET playbuttons,
and the BET meter on the display screen shows the credits wagered.
Once the player starts a game by pressing one of the active playbuttons, the
machine runs the game sequence and displays the outcome on the screen. If the
result is a winning combination, the player may gamble the win (if the gamble
feature is available); otherwise, the machine increments the credits won. If the
result is not a winning combination, the player may continue gameplay provided
there are credits remaining.
The machine is equipped with electronic audit meters that continuously monitor
and record credit movement and game activity. Electromechanical meters may
also be fitted. The electronic meters are accessed through the Operator Mode.
The information in these meters is used for audit calculations and security
purposes.
If the machine encounters an abnormal condition, it alerts the operator by
automatically entering Machine Lockup. In lockup, gameplay is disabled to
prevent any further player interaction and guidance information is displayed in the
game message area. The lockup condition can be identified by examining the
Current Lockup screen that is accessed from the Operator Mode Menu.

1.2.2 Operator Mode

Within Operator Mode (Audit Key ON), the following options are available:
• machine identification
• metering information
• diagnostic information
• operator setup/selection
• current lockup mode
• miscellaneous
In Operator Mode, the electronic audit meters and the electromechanical meters (if
fitted) do not function. Menu selections may be used to review the machine
details, select new configurations, and carry out machine tests. Refer to the
chapter Machine Modes for detailed information.

CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
PLAYER INSERTS CREDITS
Invalid Currency Coin/Token Bank Note

AUDIT DATA CONTROL
Returned To Player Remote INFORMATION
Credit
Transfer
AUDIT COMMS
REJECT DATA INTERFACE
Machine
Registers Credits
ACCEPT
Machine Checks
Currency Validity
ADD
WIN
Win Credits
To Be Added Player Presses
Selected Pushbutton AUDIT
DATA
COLLECT
PLAY YES
WIN
NO
WIN
Credits are Paid

Remaining to Player
Credit
Machine Displays NO
Game Outcome
X0004B.CDR
Figure 1-6 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode

1.3 Functional Description

All processing by the Aristocrat MVP video gaming machine is carried out on the
Main Board. The Main Board contains the central processor and the game
EPROMs which hold the software required for game generation and video
graphics. All data and control signals to and from the Main Board are distributed
by the Interface Board and the I/O Driver Board.
The Interface Board also distributes regulated low voltage power from the power
supply assembly. The video monitor and the fluorescent lighting system are
powered directly from the power supply assembly.
The operation of the Aristocrat MVP video gaming machine can be divided into
two general areas- Currency Handling and Game Generation. Figure 1-7 provides
a functional diagram.
1.3.1 Currency Handling

The MVP video machine is capable of handling both coin and note entry.
Coin Entry
The function of the coin handling system is to accept and count valid coins or
tokens entered for gameplay. The system is designed to detect invalid coins or
tokens, as well as other attempts to fraudulently register credits. Rejected coins
and tokens are diverted to the chip tray. Valid coins are directed to the hopper or
cash box, and a valid coin signal is sent to the Main Board.
The coin or token must pass several tests to be accepted. The tests include:
• physical size (diameter and width),
• mass,
• composition,
• direction of travel,
• time taken to travel a set distance.
If the coin fails to satisfy any of these conditions it will be rejected by the coin
handling system and/or cause a machine lockup. Refer to the chapter Coin
Handling Assembly for detailed information.
Bank Note Entry

Machines fitted with a note acceptor allow players to register credits by inserting
bank notes (or bills).
The note acceptor consists of the fascia panel (intelligent bezel) which sites the
accept/reject slot for note placement, and the note acceptor which houses the
validation components and drive mechanism for conveying the note. Attached to
the note acceptor is a stacker (Security Removable Cassette) which holds accepted
notes and records details of note operations. The units are located in a dual cage
housing secured to the cabinet. The intelligent bezel displays the operational

status in a series of green LED displays. A display is provided adjacent to the

bezel to indicate valid note denominations.
1.3.2 Machine Conditions

The MVP machine has an extensive system of self-monitoring. If the machine
encounters an abnormal condition, it alerts the operator by automatically entering
Machine Lockup.
In lockup, gameplay is disabled to prevent any further player interaction and
guidance information is displayed in the game message area. The lockup
condition can be identified by examining the Current Lockup screen, that is
accessed from the Operator Mode Menu. Each lockup condition has an associated
help screen that provides information on how to fix the problem and remove the
lockup.

Figure 1-7 Typical Video Machine Functional Diagram

1.4 Specifications
Table 1-3 Physical Characteristics

Dimensions (Typical)
Height of cabinet with high boy top box 1465 mm
Height of cabinet with casino top box 1275 mm
Height of low boy cabinet 895 mm
Height of low boy cabinet with hard meters 975 mm
Width 540 mm
Depth 658 mm
Recommended minimum clearance between machines 180 mm
Weight (typical)
With casino top box and note acceptor approx. 102 kg
Table 1-4 Power Requirements

The voltage selector switch on the power supply assembly may be set for a mains
voltage of either 110/120 V or 220/230/240 V.
Nominal Mains Input Voltage 120 V 240 V
Minimum 99 V AC 220 V AC
Maximum 132 V AC 240 V AC
Frequency 60 Hz 50 Hz
Mains Input Current
Gaming Machine Idle 0.7 A 0.4 A
Gaming Machine Maximum 3.6 A 1.8 A
Gaming Machine Maximum plus Convenience Load 9A 5.8 A
Maximum
Power Consumption at Nominal Voltage
Gaming Machine Idle 84 W 96 W
Gaming Machine Maximum 420 W 480 W
Gaming Machine Maximum plus Convenience Load 1080 W 1152 W
Maximum
Gaming Machine Typical Power Consumption 250 W 260 W
Table 1-5 Environment

Operating Storage
Minimum Temperature 0° C -20° C
Maximum Temperature 50° C 80° C
Relative Humidity 0 - 80% non-condensing 0 - 95% non-condensing

MVP Video Service Manual Installation
________Chapter 2________
Installation
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................... 2-3
2.2 Inspection on Delivery .................................................................. 2-7
2.3 Installation Procedure................................................................... 2-7
2.3.1 Mounting ......................................................................................... 2-7

2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up ................................ 2-7
2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine ......................................................... 2-10

Installation MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions............................................................................................ 2-4
Figure 2-2 Machine Dimensions - Low Boy with Hard Meters............................................... 2-5
Figure 2-3 Machine Footprint and Clearances ...................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-4 Coin Comparator (CC-62 shown)......................................................................... 2-9

2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

The following items are required to install a machine (see Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2,
and Figure 2-3):
• verification of jurisdictional approval.
• a floor plan (only required for new installations).
• a suitable base on which to mount the machine.
• adequate clearance between the sides of adjacent machines to allow the doors
to be opened (a clearance of 180 mm is recommended).
• access to mains power outlets and connection cables of peripheral devices.
• machine keys (if locks are fitted).
Important Note
All mains power wiring must be installed by a qualified
electrician and comply with Australian standard AS3000-1991,
or equivalent national/jurisdictional standards for mains wiring.
WARNING
The gaming machine must be transported and handled with
care. Ensure the machine is not dropped or severely bumped.

High Boy
570
Casino
(Rounded
& Square)
380
1465
Low Boy
895
Mk5S2023.cdr
144
540
658
Note: All dimensions in millimeters
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions

Hard Meters Cover
80
975
Low Boy
895
144
540
658
Figure 2-2 Machine Dimensions - Low Boy with Hard Meters

Mounting holes (4 shown)

34.5 Drill to suit fastener
Holes for Cables
ø53 (2 off)
419
514
Hole for Cash Box

50 (1 off)
326 150
144 Depth of Coin Tray
540
For detailed dimensions, refer to mechanical MACHINE

drawing AO-564815 in the Service Manual - Volume II FOOTPRINT
740 Minimum Base Width

Minimum spacing
between machine
and walls = flush
Minimum spacing
between machines
180
Side face of
adjacent
machine
95
Arc of
Door Swing
150 (Depth of
Door)
CLEARANCES
MVPfoot
Figure 2-3 Machine Footprint and Clearances

2.2 Inspection on Delivery

Inspect all exterior panels of the cabinet for damage that may have occurred
during transportation. Report any damage to your supervisor.
2.3 Installation Procedure

Installation and commissioning of machines must be carried out by an
appropriately licensed technician and must comply with the regulations of
the jurisdictional authority.
The following procedures are for mounting, connecting, and commissioning the
gaming machine into service.
2.3.1 Mounting
WARNING
The gaming machine is a heavy item.
Follow the national standard and code of
practice for manual handling.
Mount the machine to the cabinet base as follows:

1. Position the machine on the cabinet base, aligning it with the cash box and
cable holes (refer to Figure 2-3). Drill holes in the cabinet base to match
four rectangular mounting holes. The machine must be fixed in four
positions, two at the front and two at the back, to meet stability
requirements.
2. Secure the machine to the base using either bolts and nuts or the special-
purpose fasteners provided.
2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up

Perform the following machine connections and checks:
1. Check that the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs) in the logic cage are
firmly seated. The PCBAs are:
Main Board
I/O Board
Communications Configuration Board (where fitted)
LAB Communications Board (where fitted)
Note
For accessing PCBAs, refer to the relevant chapter in the
Service Manual.

2. The machine power supply and monitor isolation transformer (Ceronix only) are
set at the factory for a mains input voltage of 240 V (or 110 V in North
America), unless clearly labelled otherwise. Should there be a need to change
the mains input voltage setting:
WARNING
Make sure the machine is disconnected from
mains power before adjusting voltage settings.
WARNING
Selecting the wrong power supply and/or monitor
isolation transformer voltage will cause
considerable damage to the power supply and/or
monitor transformer.
a. Set the voltage selector switch on the power supply for the correct
mains input voltage. The switch is mounted on the metal housing of
the power supply assembly, which is located at the back of the cabinet,
in the bottom right-hand corner.
b. Where a Ceronix monitor with a manually-switched isolation mains
input transformer is used, set the mains input switch on the
transformer to match the mains input voltage.
3. Make sure that the mains power switch is OFF. Connect the mains power
cable to the machine. The power cable may enter the cabinet either via a
hole in the base of the cabinet or via a hole in the rear wall of the cabinet. A
hole is provided in the base of the cabinet, near the cable entrance, to allow
a clamp to be fitted to the mains cable. The purpose of this clamp is to
prevent the mains power cable from being accidentally disconnected. This
clamp should be fitted if there is a reasonable risk that the mains power
cable may be accidentally disconnected.
WARNING
Visually check that the insulation of the mains power cable is sound.
Check that all machine earth wires (green/yellow stripe or braid) and
screws that were moved during installation are correctly attached.
4 If the machine is fitted with a coin comparator (as opposed to a coin validator),
then a sample coin (or token) must be placed in the coin comparator sensor
assembly (refer to Figure 2-4) which is mounted to the reflector panel on the
inside of the main door. To install a sample coin:
a. Slide (without lifting) the scanner unit to the right.
b. Insert the sample coin into place and carefully release the scanner unit.
The coin should automatically seat itself.
c. Check that the sample coin is seated firmly between the scanner unit
and the ribs of the rail insert.

Scanner Unit
Sample Coin
Rail Insert
Fork of the
Rail Insert
Mk5s2054
Figure 2-4 Coin Comparator (CC-62 shown)
5. Switch ON the machine and close the main door within 5 seconds (see item 6 below).
The monitor and fluorescent lighting system will then be powered up. The machine
will perform self-testing procedures for a few moments and any faults detected will be
highlighted by a message on the video screen. To fix detected faults, refer to Fault
Mode in the chapter Machine Modes.
6. If the monitor exhibits colour aberrations, this may be the result of magnetic
interference. Degaussing the monitor and cabinet, as described below, can remove the
colour aberrations.
a. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse. This time
delay enables the monitor circuit varistors to cool sufficiently and create enough
energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous content and that of the cabinet.
b. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds. Automatic
degaussing will now occur.
c. Should colour aberrations persist, use a degaussing wand to degauss the monitor
and cabinet.
The machine is now ready for configuring or gameplay.
For information on configuring the machine see the chapter Machine Modes.

2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine

Carry out the following procedures to commission the machine:
1. Check that the machine program type and variation match the customer
order. Use the Operator Mode menu and the options described in the chapter
Machine Modes.
2. If the machine is fitted with a hopper, fill the hopper as described below.
Important Note
The procedure for filling the hopper is dependant on house rules.
a. Obtain the correct number of coins required to fill the hopper.

b. Open the cabinet door. If the jurisdiction requires that the hopper be
weighed, turn OFF the machine before removing the hopper.
c. Place the coins in the hopper, and close and lock the cabinet door.
d. In some markets, the hopper refill amount must be recorded in the
machine memory. To do this, insert and turn the Audit Key to enter
Operator Mode, select Record Refill (may be under Miscellaneous
Operations) and press the appropriate buttons to record the refill
amount. Turn the Audit key back to return to Play Mode.
e. Record the number of coins placed in the hopper in the refill register.
3. Where the Operator permits, monitor gameplay operations for any faults:
a. For machines that accept bank notes, insert a valid bank note (in good
condition) and confirm that it is accepted and credited correctly. If the
bank note is not accepted on the second attempt, repeat the test on
another note. If the second bank note is also rejected, refer to the Fault
Finding section in the Bank Note Acceptor chapter of the Service
Manual.
b. For machines that accept coins, check that coins are accepted,
credited, and paid out correctly.
Retrieve bank notes and coins inserted during testing.
4. Machines operating on a network system may now be connected and installed
onto the network. For installation procedure refer to the manual for the
particular communications network used.
5. For machines fitted with a ticket printer, carry out the general maintenance
procedures as detailed in the Printer chapter of the Service Manual or the Care
and General Maintenance chapter of the Operator Manual.
6. Request an Operator to record the values of the hard audit meters (if fitted) and
the soft audit meters (as required by the applicable jurisdictional authority).
7. Log installation data as specified by the appropriate jurisdictional requirements.
The machine may now commence operation.

MVP Video Service Manual Machine Modes
________Chapter 3________
NSW Clubs & Hotels
Machine Modes
3.1 Modes of Operation ...................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Play Mode ...................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Player Operation............................................................................. 3-5

3.2.2 Video Display.................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes ......................................................................... 3-7
3.2.4 Pushbuttons.................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring................................................................. 3-8
3.2.6 Light Tower................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.7 Electro-mechanical Meters (Hard Meters) .................................... 3-12
3.2.8 Electronic Hard Meters ................................................................. 3-13
3.2.9 Electronic Meters (Soft Meters) .................................................... 3-14
3.2.10 Bar Interface Poker System - BIPS Plus ...................................... 3-15
3.3 Operator Mode ............................................................................ 3-17
3.3.1 Machine Identification................................................................... 3-19

3.3.2 Accounting Information................................................................. 3-19
3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu........................................................ 3-25
3.3.4 Self Test Mode ............................................................................. 3-29
3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ............................................... 3-37
3.3.6 Power Save Mode ........................................................................ 3-40
3.3.7 Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu Items .................................... 3-41

Machine Modes MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display ................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations ......................................................3-7
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout .............................................................................3-8
Figure 3-4 Electro-mechanical Meters...........................................................................3-12
Figure 3-5 Electronic Hard Meters -Location.................................................................3-14
Figure 3-6 BIPS Plus - Hotel gaming management system ..........................................3-16
Figure 3-7 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure...................................................3-18
List of Tables:
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu ....................................................................................3-17
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display.......................................................................3-19
Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu........................................................................3-20
Table 3-4 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1 ....................................................................3-20
Table 3-5 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2 ....................................................................3-21
Table 3-6 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 1 ...............................................................3-21
Table 3-7 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 2 ...............................................................3-22
Table 3-8 Reset Periodic Meters ...................................................................................3-22
Table 3-9 Game Replay Display....................................................................................3-22
Table 3-10 Previous Game Jurisdictional Meters Display .............................................3-23
Table 3-11 Game Statistics Display ..............................................................................3-23
Table 3-12 Gamble Statistics Display - Screen 1 ..........................................................3-24
Table 3-13 Collect Statistics Display .............................................................................3-24
Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................................3-25
Table 3-15 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 1 .........................................................3-26
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 2 .........................................................3-26
Table 3-17 Error Log Display.........................................................................................3-27
Table 3-18 Panic Log Display........................................................................................3-27
Table 3-19 Note Acceptor Information Display..............................................................3-28
Table 3-20 Ticket Printer Log Display ...........................................................................3-28
Table 3-21 Typical Cash Out Ticket ..............................................................................3-29
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode Menu ..................................................................................3-30
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode Requirements.....................................................................3-30
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test Display ...........................................................3-31
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Button Test ......................................................................3-31
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test Display ...................................................3-32
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test Display ........................................................3-32
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu.................................................3-33
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions......................................3-33
Table 3-30 Self Test Mode - Sound System Test Display.............................................3-34
Table 3-31 Self Test Mode - Factory Test Display ........................................................3-34
Table 3-32 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test Display................................................3-35
Table 3-33 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result Display.....................................3-35
Table 3-34 Self Test Mode.- Combination Quick Test Display......................................3-36
Table 3-35 Self Test Mode - Printer Test Display..........................................................3-36
Table 3-36 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ..............................................................3-37
Table 3-37 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options Display.......................................3-38
Table 3-38 Operator Setup / Selections - Real Time Clock Setup Display ...................3-39
Table 3-39 Operator Setup / Selections - Sound System Setup Display.......................3-39
Table 3-40 Operator Setup / Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup.................................3-40
Table 3-41 Operator Setup / Selections - Layout Setup Display ...................................3-40
Table 3-42 Power Save Mode Display ..........................................................................3-40
Table 3-43 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu..................................................3-41
Table 3-44 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Displays.....................................3-42

3.1 Modes of Operation

Aristocrat designers have implemented software improvements in response to Mk
V Series I recommendations from customers, players and service technicians.
Improvements continue in development methods and in the range of features that
improve earnings capacity. Special attention has been given to features that make
the new MVP model more user friendly, more serviceable, and more reliable. In
addition, new data items have been added to meet jurisdictional requirements, and
a design priority maintains upwards compatibility for Mk V Series I games.
Improvements include:
• Operator Menu displays are shown in distinctive colours.
• Four comment lines provide clearer guidance for players, operators and service
personnel — line allocation is Game Comment, Game Feature, Player
Instruction, and Jurisdiction and Lockup Messages (see Figure 3-1).
• A single set of game sounds has been selected from Mk V Series I and earlier
models.
• Improved statistics include a Game Specific Statistics display to enable more
accurate game and player evaluations.
• A new Quick Combination Test shows symbol positions without having to play
a game.
• An expanded Game Replay display shows a 10-game history, and each game
has jurisdictional meter readings at game start, game end, and start-of-next
game.
• Improved Panic Log displays include date/time stamping, source program error
location, and user-friendly error description.
• Other improvements include a changed date/time format, enhanced Machine
Identification lines, a Quick Button Test, and new Diagnostic Meters.
The MVP Gaming Machine is operated in two main modes, Play Mode and
Operator Mode. Play Mode permits gameplay while the machine is fully
operational and the cabinet door is closed. Operator Mode allows the operator to
configure the machine, view audit information, carry out machine tests, and reset
machine faults. Turning the Audit Key ON switches the machine from Play Mode
to Operator Mode.

3.2 Play Mode

The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, and
there are no active lockup conditions. In Play Mode the machine:
• shows game displays in readiness for player operation,
• carries out gameplay,
• continuously monitors and records play activities,
• continuously runs the self-test processes,
• displays comments and guidance for players, operators, and technicians.
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display
Figure 3-1 shows the format of a game display. The symbols on the screen will
vary depending on the particular game software being used. The CREDIT, BET,
and WIN game meters show the number of credits applicable at the current stage
of the game. Comments appear in four message lines to guide players and
operators as the game progresses. Machine conditions, including security alerts,
are also displayed in a message area. Examples of messages are:
• Game comment YOU WIN
GOOD LUCK
WELL DONE
• Feature comment FOUR FREE SPINS REMAINING
• Player instruction GAME OVER PLAY NOW

5 ¢ CREDITS PER LINE
• Lockup Message DOOR OPEN MAIN

Lockup messages are listed in Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu.

In Play Mode the machine operates with full security features. For example, the
machine monitors operations and alerts operators should malfunction or tampering
occur. Electronic meters and electromechanical meters (if fitted) record details of
gameplay and machine operations in Play Mode.
Options
Besides being able to alter machine controls to suit house preferences, the MVP
machine provides menu controls for setting important game and player
preferences, including:
• Game percentage,
• Base credit value (a game credit), machine token amount for coin entry, and
acceptable bill ($ note) denominations,
• Links to house and stand-alone progressives in various levels, if fitted.
• Hopper coin-collect limit,
• Game gamble option,
• Volume settings for sounds and tunes.
See Operator Setup/Selection Mode.
Note
Jurisdictional requirements must be followed
when configuring machines.
3.2.1 Player Operation

When the machine is switched on and the cabinet door is closed and locked, the
fluorescent tubes light up and the machine automatically initiates a self-test. If no
faults are detected, gameplay may begin.
Spinning Reel Games

When a player inserts a coin or note, the machine either accepts or rejects the
currency. If the machine accepts the currency, it increments the CREDIT meter on
the game video display by the number of credits. The mid trim pushbuttons
become active and flash. The player may now either insert more currency or press
one of the pushbuttons to play the game. The player selects the number of credits
to bet and this number is shown on the BET meter on the video display. A beep
sound is heard when any of the BET playbuttons are pressed.
The reels then start to spin and after a short interval come to rest. When the
spinning reels stop, the line combinations are evaluated. If the result is a winning
combination, a selected win tune is played. The video display shows the number
of credits won in the WIN meter.
Some games incorporate a win-gamble feature that provide players with the
chance to double their WIN amount. This feature is initiated by pressing the

GAMBLE pushbutton. The GAMBLE feature may be selected a maximum of 5

times in succession. If players do not wish to gamble their WIN, they may press
the TAKE WIN pushbutton. Pressing TAKE WIN adds the WIN to the CREDIT
meter.
Due to the limit on the number of coins that can be held in the hopper, as well as
other payout considerations, there is a limit to the number of coins that the
machine can pay out. This is called the Collect Limit and is set via the Operator
Mode Menu Operator Setup/Selections Machine Options screen display.
A player can collect coins up to the Collect Limit amount by pressing the
COLLECT pushbutton. When the COLLECT button is pressed, the machine
prevents functions such as gameplay and entry of currency until the hopper has
dispensed the coins into the coin tray. The hopper photo-optic detector counts the
coins being dispensed. The CREDIT meter decrements to zero.
When a player presses the COLLECT pushbutton and the value of the game
credits is greater than the Collect Limit:
• the message Call attendant - Cancel Credit $99.99 is displayed ($99.99 is
the value of credits to be paid out).
• the attendant hand pays the value of the credits and then resets the machine
by turning the Jackpot Key ON then OFF.
• the message Credits paid out $99.99 is displayed on the screen.
• the CANCEL CREDIT electronic meters and electromechanical meters
record the number of credits paid out.
• the game CREDIT on the screen and the CREDIT electronic meters and
electromechanical meters are reset to zero.
Pressing the RESERVE pushbutton displays the message MACHINE RESERVED

on the screen. This allows players to reserve a machine for a short period.
Types of Games
Machines generally have one of three game types: multiplier, multiline, and
multiline-multiplier:
Multiplier- A multiplier game allows a player to gamble more than one credit per
game on a single winning line. Each additional credit gambled generally
multiplies the value of the prize by the value of the credits staked.
Multiline- A multiline game allows a player to specify up to 9 lines on which to
bet for a winning combination. Up to 10 credits can be bet on each line. The win
total is calculated by adding each of the win lines.

Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations
3.2.2 Video Display

The video display unit provides high-resolution graphics based on 256 colours.
The unit is able to display attractive game illustrations and animations, as well as
player messages, operator menus and information displays.
The simulated spinning reels take up most of the screen area. The area at the top
of the screen displays CREDIT, BET, and WIN information, as well as the coin
denomination accepted. Between these two areas is the top message display area.
The monitor may be fitted with a touchscreen that enables games to be played by
touching designated areas of the screen.
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes

Sounds and tunes are used, in combination with the graphics and animation, to
increase game appeal.
Different sounds are played to signify various machine conditions, such as alarm,
reel spin/stop, win, lose, double-up win, jackpot bell, coins entering machine, and
coins falling to coin tray. Each game has its own specific sounds and tunes.
The volume of the sound system can be adjusted in the Sound System Setup
menu.

3.2.4 Pushbuttons
A typical layout of the pushbuttons is shown below. The pushbuttons are labelled
and have the following functions: COLLECT, RESERVE, PLAY 1/3/5/7/9
LINES, BET 1/2/3/5/10 CREDITS, TAKE WIN, GAMBLE, and RED and
BLACK, which refer to features of the gamble option.
Each pushbutton has a lamp behind it that may either be lit, unlit, flashing, or
flashing at double speed, depending on the circumstances and the machine mode.
BET 1 BET 2 BET 3 BET 5 BET 10

COLLECT CREDIT CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS
PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE
PLAY 1 PLAY 9
LINE PLAY 3 PLAY 5 PLAY 7 LINES TAKE
RESERVE LINES LINES LINES WIN GAMBLE
RED BLACK
NOTE
Mk5V011A_
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring

Self-test
When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that
continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the
self-test, the machine checks the electronic meter data held in computer memory
and also carries out an audit calculation using essential meter counts.
This self-audit calculation is defined by the formula:
(CASH IN + WINS = CASH OUT + CANCELLED CREDITS + TURNOVER + CURRENT GAME CREDITS).
The memory holds up to three copies of the electronic meter data, METER SET 1,
METER SET 2 and METER SET 3. If the data in one meter set does not match
that in the other two sets, the data of the two identical sets overwrites the single
set.
Security
When the machine is in play mode, it continuously operates the following security
features:
Coin Comparator The coin comparator scans inserted coins and compares them
with a sample coin held in the comparator. Invalid coins are diverted to the coin
tray. For valid coins, a CSENSE output signal is generated and the coins are
directed past the comparator's internal photo-optic detector and on to the coin
accept chute.
Coins passing the opto detector generate a CCREDIT output signal. For a valid
coin to register, a CSENSE pulse must be followed by a CCREDIT pulse. If this
condition is not met, a CERROR output signal is generated. This signal indicates
a Yo-Yo or a coin blockage condition depending on the width of the pulse. On

receiving a CERROR signal, the machine locks up, the error message Yoyo or
Coin Optic Fault is displayed on the screen, and the appropriate audit meter is
incremented. See Section 3.3.7, Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu.
The position of the coin diverter determines whether accepted coins are directed to
the hopper or the cash box. A photo-optic detector is used to monitor the position
of the diverter and generates the output signal CDIVPOS.
The Coin Handling Interface on the I/O Driver Board converts the output signals
CCREDIT, CSENSE, CERROR and CDIVPOS into the form required by the
Main Board. The machine software then analyses these signals to determine the
validity of inserted coins and to check for fault conditions.
If the inserted coin is valid, the appropriate credits are registered in the game
CREDIT display and gameplay may take place. The Jurisdictional Meters CASH
IN and CREDIT and the electromechanical meter CASH IN (if fitted) are
incremented accordingly.
Note that the game display shows accumulations and totals in “credits”, whereas
the electronic meters accumulate in “dollars and cents”. The hard meters CASH
IN and CASH OUT accumulate in “dollars and cents” but only display to the
“whole dollar”  the cents not displayed continue in the accumulation.
All coins go to the hopper until the coins in the hopper reach the level detector
probe, indicating that the hopper is full. At this stage, coins are diverted to the
cash box.
The machine software monitors the signals from the Coin Handling Interface and
unusual conditions and faults are registered by machine lockup, video messages,
and increments in the appropriate Diagnostic Meters. These fault conditions are
COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT and COIN DIVERTER FAULT.
If the machine software indicates that coins intended for the hopper are diverted to
the cash box, or vice versa, the Diagnostic Meter CASH BOX INSTEAD
HOPPER or HOPPER INSTEAD CASH BOX is incremented. These totals allow
adjustment and balancing of the hopper and cash box collections.
Hopper. If the hopper is empty and the player is in credit and presses the
COLLECT pushbutton, the machine locks up and displays a Hopper Empty
message and the electronic meter HOPPER EMPTY increments. The hopper is
refilled in these circumstances according to house rules, after which gamely may
resume.
During a payout, the hopper disc rotates and passes coins onto the coin runner
where they are counted by the hopper photo-optic detector. After passing the
detector, they are deposited in the coin tray for the player to collect. Also:
• the COINS OUT electromechanical meter and the CASH OUT electronic
meter are incremented by the amount paid out.
• the game CREDIT on the screen and the CREDIT electronic meter are
decremented by the amount paid out.
• a payout message is displayed on the screen showing the value paid out.

The machine monitors the hopper operation and the coin’s passage from the
hopper to the coin tray. Unusual conditions and faults are registered by
increments in the Diagnostic Meters, video messages and machine lockups. These
fault conditions are ILLEGAL COIN OUT, HOPPER EMPTY, HOPPER
JAMMED, and HOPPER DISCONNECTED.
Bill (Note) Acceptor The Note Acceptor consists of an optical scanning unit and
a note stacker contained in a high-security housing. The scanning unit achieves a
high percentage of acceptances, and a second-level scanning option can be
initiated for high-denomination notes. During operation, the acceptor registers
acceptances and rejections. Notes accepted increment the CASH IN electronic
meter and electromechanical meter (where fitted). Detailed information is
recorded in the Note Acceptor meters, which may be accessed from Operator
Mode / Accounting Information Menu. These meters record the value and
quantity of each note accepted. A record is also kept of the last five notes
accepted.
The machine monitors the note acceptor operation and unusual conditions and
faults are registered by increments in the Diagnostic Meters, and by display
messages and machine lockups. The lockups and video messages are NOTE
ACCEPTOR ERROR and NOTE ACCEPTOR OUT OF SERVICE. Should the
note stacker door be open, the alarm sounds and the message NOTE STACKER
REMOVED is displayed. A lockup occurs should the note acceptor stacker
become full. The lockup description and video message is NOTE ACCEPTOR
FULL.
The Machine Options menu enables the note acceptor to be configured ON or
OFF and to recognise specific note denominations.
Door Security
A total of eight mechanical and eight optical security switches may be used to
monitor door accesses. Four of the mechanical security switches are battery-
backed to enable door accesses to be detected even when the machine is not
powered.
If a door fitted with a security switch is opened while the machine is powered:
• a DOOR OPEN message is displayed on the screen, specifying which door
is open (a DOOR MISMATCH message refers to a machine fault where the
mechanical and the optical door security switches are not operating
correctly).
• the alarm sound is heard.
• the machine locks up, suspending gamely.
• the appropriate DOOR ACCESSES Diagnostic Meter is incremented.
The condition is reset by closing the appropriate door or by correcting faulty or

poorly aligned mechanical / optical door switches.
The security signals are typically distributed as follows:

Security Mechanical Optical

0 Logic cage Main door
1 Top box ----
2 Mechanical meters ----
3 Cash box ----
4 Main door ----
5 Note stacker ----
Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the individual machine configuration.
3.2.6 Light Tower

A multi-level light tower may be fitted on top of the machine to provide an
additional level of customer service, security and house control. The tower may
have two, three, or four tiers of different colours. The colours and functionality of
the light tower are determined by individual market requirements. The typical
functions of a two-tier and a four-tier light tower are described below.
Two-Tier Light Tower

Typical light tower functions are as follows:
CONDITION DOOR CLOSED DOOR OPEN
Top Light Bottom Light Top Light Bottom Light
Idle OFF OFF OFF FAST FLASH
Service ON OFF ON FAST FLASH
Fault SLOW FLASH OFF SLOW FLASH FAST FLASH
Hand Pays SLOW FLASH SLOW FLASH SLOW FLASH FAST FLASH
The Light Tower indicates one of four possible machine states:

The IDLE state: the default state when no other state exists.
The SERVICE state: the ‘Service’ button has been being pressed by the player to
request service (change, drinks, etc.) (if available).
The FAULT state: the machine will be considered to be in this state when one of
the following conditions exist:
• a lockup fault condition (excluding Main Door Open and the Handpays state),
such as Logic Door Accesses or Note Acceptor Error.
• a non-lockup fault condition, such as Note Stacker Full or Printer Paper Low.
The HANDPAYS state exists when one of the following conditions exist:
• a Jackpot lockup,
• a Cancelled Credit lockup, or
• a Progressive Link Jackpot lockup.
Note
After the Main Door has been closed, the bottom tier light will remain lit
(unless it is otherwise flashing) until the start of the next game.

Four-Tier Light Tower

Typical light tower functions are as follows:
Tier - Status Indicates… Comment
Colour
All Tiers No lights on. Idle state No other state exists and all doors are
closed.
Top Green SLOW FLASH Any security When open door(s) closed, a steady light
door open. remains on until next valid game is played.
Second Red SLOW FLASH Payout exceeds
Hopper Limit or Cancelled Credit or Jackpot lockup.
Jackpot won.
Third Yellow SLOW FLASH Service or Player request for service or machine
Reserved. reserved.
Bottom Blue SLOW FLASH Machine Fault. Continues flashing until lockup removed.
3.2.7 Electro-mechanical Meters (Hard Meters)

The machine is fitted with electro-mechanical meters and electronic meters. These
meters form part of the comprehensive security system by recording the results of
machine operations.
Note
The machine will not function if the hard
meters are not connected.
The eight electro-mechanical meters (hard meters), located at the bottom of the
top box, provide a permanent and cumulative record of essential counts. Low boy
models locate the hard meters above the chip tray.
Figure 3-4 Electro-mechanical Meters

Note
On delivery of a machine, these meters are
not set to zero because of factory tests.
Record the initial meter values before using
the machine.
These meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the meter. They
provide a permanent cumulative record of:
• • TURNOVER: the total number of credits bet in all games played.
• • WIN or CREDITS WON: the total number of credits, excluding
progressive jackpots, that have been won in all games played.
• • CASH BOX: the number of coins that have dropped into the cash box via
the coin-in chute.
• • CANCEL CREDIT: the number of credits that have been hand paid
through the cancelled credits procedure.
• METER 5: this meter is not in use.
• METER 6: this meter is not in use.
• • CASH IN: the total number of credits inserted in the note acceptor and the
coin entry device (whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate).
• • CASH OUT: the total number of credits paid out in coin from the hopper
(whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate).
To read the electro-mechanical meters, insert the top box key into the lock and
turn the key 90° clockwise.
Meter Security
Mechanical meters are monitored for abnormal conditions, cage accesses, and
meter disconnection. Detection of conditions is actioned as follows:
• game play is suspended,
• the alarm sound is heard,
• an appropriate lockup and operator message is actioned, being selected
from: METERS FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, METERS
DISCONNECTED.
• the appropriate electronic meter increments, being selected from: METERS
FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, and METERS DISCONNECTED.
The condition is reset when the machine condition is cleared, the lockup is
removed, and the door is closed. See Fault Mode - Current Lockup.
3.2.8 Electronic Hard Meters

The electronic hard meter (EHM) module replaces electromechanical hard meters
in providing a permanent record of essential counts specified by the jurisdictional
authority. Information is displayed by the EHM LCD unit that provides for two

lines of sixteen characters. The LCD and a backlight are located beneath the
video monitor mounted to the mid trim.
Eight-meter values of ten digits each are displayed by using the EHM control
keyswitch that will be linked to either the Jackpot Reset or the Audit keyswitch.
Top Trim Jackpot
Keyswitch
Audit
Keyswitch
Monitor
EHM
LCD Display
Mid Trim
Figure 3-5 Electronic Hard Meters -Location

The meter values are held in battery-backed EEPROM storage that is able to retain
the data contents for at least 5 years without power. Each meter is stored in three
separate EEPROM areas to ensure greater integrity.
3.2.9 Electronic Meters (Soft Meters)

The electronic meters (soft meters) record a variety of details relating to machine
operation, gamely and player interaction, as well as a variety of statistical counts,
security events and past games. Players have the assurance that there is a record
kept of recent win or pay situations.
When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that
continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the
self-test, the machine checks the electronic meter data held in memory.
Some jurisdictions require electronic metering data to be stored in triplicate in
three separate battery-backed RAM chips. In the case of a meter malfunction,
where none of the meters sets match, the machine displays the error message 3
WAY MEMORY ERROR and the machine locks up. This message indicates a
serious machine malfunction.
Failure in the self audit calculation also causes a machine lockup with the message
SELF AUDIT ERROR being displayed.

Resetting Metering and Self Audit Errors

To clear a metering or self audit error, the memory fault must be rectified and
correct operations re-established with all corrupted meters set to zero. The lockup
is removed by turning the Audit Key ON, following the on-screen guidance, and
then turning the Audit Key OFF to return to gamely. After recovering from a
memory error, some electronic meters are reset to zero. The information held in
these electronic meters includes:
• Accounting Information Menu items (Jurisdictional, Periodic, Game Replay,
Game / Gamble / Collect Statistics).
• Diagnostic Information Menu items (Diagnostic, Error Log, Panic Log, Note
Acceptor Information, Ticket Printer Log).
• Operator Setup / Selections Menu items (Machine Options, Real Time
Clock Setup, Sound System Setup, Reel Spin Speed Setup, Layout Setup,).
3.2.10 Bar Interface Poker System - BIPS Plus

BIPS Plus is a management and gaming promotions system for hotel gaming
venues. The system permits credit transfers and prize redemption from a central
terminal for the venue, and provides a range of reporting and monitoring features.
Options are available to run a variety of promotions directly related to play on the
gaming machines. Different authorisation levels and key-protected access enable
operators and management to make appropriate use of the various features of the
system.
The venue can operate as a cashless system where players purchase credits at the
central cash-register terminal for electronic transfer to the machine selected for the
player. Winnings can be redeemed at the cash register.
Several types of reports are produced which relate to machine performance, cash
and operator management, NSW LAB Report, periodic turnover, and general
trading.

Figure 3-6 BIPS Plus - Hotel gaming management system

3.3 Operator Mode

Operator Mode addresses the jurisdictional and accounting/management
information requirements, allows the machine configuration to be changed, and
facilitates machine testing and fault finding. The Operator Mode Menu is shown
below.
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu
OPERATOR MODE MENU

1 Machine Identification
2 Accounting Information
3 Diagnostic Information
4 Self Test Mode
5 Operator Setup / Selections
6 Power Save Mode
7 Current Lockup
Play 1 Line - Press to select next item

Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous item
Play 5 Lines - Press to choose selected item
Audit Key - Turn off to exit
Main Door is currently opened (See Note 1)
Instructions are given on each screen to guide the operator through the various
menus and options available. Any active lockups are indicated by a flashing
message at the bottom of the screen.
The structure of the information displays is shown in the following diagram.

Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure
3-18
Operator Mode Menu
1. Machine Identification Machine
2. Accounting Information Identification
3. Diagnostic Information
4. Self Test Mode
5. Operator Setup/Selections
Machine Modes
6. Power Save Mode

7. Current Lockup
Accounting
Diagnostic Information
Information Menu
Self Test Menu
Mode
Operator Jurisdic-
Power Save Menu
Setup / tional
Mode Selections Diagnostic Meters
Menu Meters
Lamp Periodic
Test Meters
Error
Log
Machine Button Reset of
Options Test Periodic
Panic Meters
Real Time Log
Coin
Clock Entry Replay of
Setup Test Previous
Bill Games
Acceptor
Sound Hopper Information
System Test
Setup Game
Ticket Statistics
Reel Spin Monitor Printer
Log
Current Active Speed Test
Setup Gamble
Lockup Menu Statistics
and Sound
Layout
Figure 3-7 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure

Effect
Help Displays Setup Test Collect
Statistics
Factory
Test
M5S2021B Combination
Tests
Quick
Combination
Test
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

Printer
Test
3.3.1 Machine Identification

The Machine Identification information provides essential items, such as
Denomination, Tokenisation, and Percentage Return. Entry to the information
display is achieved by turning the Audit key ON and selecting option 1 from the
Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION Explanation

Machine Identification (GMID): 332380 - Unique identification for machine.
Comms Protocol Version No.: 0001 - Communications protocol
identification required by LAB.
Manufacturer No.: 01 - Identification for Aristocrat.
Firmware Identification:
Game EPROM Id.: 0200001V(1995) - Identification for game EPROM.
Character EPROM Id.: Not fitted - Not used.
Other EPROM Id.: Not fitted - Not used.
Base Credit Value: $0.10 - The value of one credit.

Progressive Levels Supported: 0 - Progressive levels.
CCCE Port (P1): Activated - Port for communicating with
subsidiary equipment.
CCCE Transfer Limit: $900.00 - Limit of transfer with Centralised
Cash Control equipment.
Hopper Limit: $80.00 - Maximum value of coins that can
be paid at one time by the hopper.
Theoretical PRT 99 (87.843) - Theoretical percentage return.
Number 99 is the standard option.
Max Possible Win Value (MPWV): 500.00 - Maximum possible win in one
game, disregarding gamble wins.
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu

3.3.2 Accounting Information

The Accounting Information displays provide information for government
authorities, as well as additional financial and statistical details, including periodic
performance details, game replay, and game and gamble statistics. The
Accounting Information Menu is accessed by turning the Audit key ON and
selecting option 2 from the Operator Mode Menu. Most of the information cannot
be altered although some details may be changed through Operator
Setup/Selections Machine Options.

Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION MENU

2.1 Jurisdictional Meters
2.2 Periodic Meters
2.3 Reset of Periodic Meters
2.4 Replay of Previous Games
2.5 Game Statistics
2.6 Gamble Statistics
2.7 Collect Statistics


Jurisdictional Meters
The Jurisdictional Meters provide the financial counts of machine activity. Items
include turnover, total wins and amounts inserted in the coin entry and the note
acceptor devices.
Table 3-4 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1
JURISDICTIONAL METERS Explanation

Meter Meter Meter - Each meter has three sets of recordings that
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 are constantly compared. Differences cause a
metering error.
Turnover $75.00 $75.00 $75.00 - Value bet in all games played.
Total Win $15.00 $15.00 $15.00 - Value won in all games played.
Cash Box $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Value directed to the cash box.
Cancelled Credit $10.00 $10.00 $10.00 - Value paid other than by the hopper.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $100.00 $100.00 - Value of notes and coins inserted.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid out by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used
Credit: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Current amount of credit available to the
player
Play 1 Line - Press to display next meter screen

Reserve - Press to return to previous screen

Table 3-5 Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2
JURISDICTIONAL METERS
Meter Meter Meter
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3
Occurrence Meter 1 0 0 0 - Not used.
Occurrence Meter 3 0 0 0 - Not used
Occurrence Meter 4 0 0 0 - Not used
Power Up 0 0 0 Number of power ups
Games Played 0 0 0 Number of games played
Games since Power Up 0 0 0 Games played since power up
Games since Door Open 0 0 0 Games played since door open
Play 3 Lines - Press to display previous meter screen

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu -
Audit Key - Turn off to exit -
Periodic Meters
The Periodic Meters screens contain the same information items as the
Jurisdictional Meters, but the values held usually relate only to a specified period
determined by the club management. The periodic meters can be reset by
selecting the appropriate option from Screen 1.
Table 3-6 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 1
PERIODIC METERS Explanation

Since: Tue May 11 12:23:42 1997
Meter Meter Meter - Periodic meters show values since
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 the last time the periodic meters were
reset.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $100.00 $100.00 - Value inserted in note acceptor and
coin entry devices.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used
Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter screen

Play 5 Lines - Press to reset periodic meters

Table 3-7 Periodic Meters Display - Screen 2
PERIODIC METERS
Since: Tue May 11 12:23:42 1997
Meter Set Meter Set Meter Set
1 2 3
Occurrence Meter 3 0 0 0 Not used
Occurrence Meter 4 0 0 0 Not used
Power Up 0 0 0 Number of power ups
Games Played 0 0 0 Number of games played
Games since Power Up 0 0 0 Games played since power up
Games since Door Open 0 0 0 Games played since door open

Play 5 Lines - Press to reset periodic meters
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu -
Audit Key - Turn off to exit -
Table 3-8 Reset Periodic Meters
RESET PERIODIC METERS Explanation
Bet 1 Key Press to reset Periodic Meters The following message appears when
key pressed:
Credit must be zero to reset periodic meters Periodic meters have been reset
Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu

Game Replay
The Game Replay screen allows the operator to replay previous games and to view
the Credit, Bet, and Win information for those games.
Table 3-9 Game Replay Display
REPLAY OF PREVIOUS GAMES Explanation

-
No. of games available to replay 36 The system can replay the last 36 games
Replay Game Number 2 Replay Game will replay one of the 36 games in full.
Meters are displayed for a specific game by pressing
Play 7 Lines
Play 1 Line - Press to select next game
Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous game
Play 5 Lines - Press to replay selected game
Play 7 Lines - Press for meters of last game

Table 3-10 Previous Game Jurisdictional Meters Display
Jurisdictional Meters of Last Game Played Explanation

Start of End of Start of - Select the REPLAY GAME option to
Game Game next see the game replayed. The VIEW
Game GAME METERS option shows the
states of the game meters for the game
replayed.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $101.00 $100.00 - Value inserted in note acceptor and coin
entry devices.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: 0 0 0 Not used
Credit: $1.00 0 $1.00 Current amount of credit available to the
player
Occurrence Meter 1 0 0 0
Power Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Played 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Since Power Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Since Door Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Play 1 Line - Press for meters of the 2nd last game

Game Statistics
This screen provides statistics on Games Played and Money Won for each Line
and Bet combination.
Table 3-11 Game Statistics Display
GAME STATISTICS Explanation
Bet Lines Games Money Bet Lines Games Money - Statistics for each Bet and
Played Won Played Won Line.
1 1 215 $21.50 2 1 50 $10.00

1 5 2 5
1 10 2 10
1 15 56 $28.00 2 15 5 $5.00
1 20 2 205
(Continues for each Bet and Line amount)


Gamble Statistics
This screen provides statistics on the number of times Gamble or Take Win was
selected for different Win amounts.
Table 3-12 Gamble Statistics Display - Screen 1
GAMBLE STATISTICS Explanation
Win Amount Gambled Take Win - Statistics for Gamble and

Take Win options.
Chosen Won
1 -4 0 4 1 1
5 -9 0 Red Red
10 - 19 0 1 0
20 - 29 0 Black Black
30 - 49 0
50 - 99 0 3 Heart Heart
Reel 3
100 - 199 0
200 - 499 0 Diamond Diamond
500 - 999 0
1000 - 1999 0 Spade Spade
2000 - 4999 0
5000 + 0 Club Club
Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu

Collect Statistics
This screen provides statistics on the number of times Collect was selected for
different Win amounts.
Table 3-13 Collect Statistics Display
COLLECT STATISTICS Explanation
Collect Amount (Credits) Times Collected - Statistics for Collect option.
$0 - 10 12
$11 - 20 6
$21 - 30 2
$31 - 40
$41 - 50
$51 - 75 3
$76 - 100
$101 - 200
$201 - 300
$301 - 500
$501 +
Audit Key - Turn of to exit

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu

The Diagnostic Information Menu items provide a record of abnormal operational
events, such as device faults, security door accesses, and operational logs. The
menu is accessed by turning the Audit key ON and selecting option 3 from the
Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information Menu
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION MENU
3.1 Diagnostic Meters

3.2 Error Log
3.3 Panic Log
3.4 Note Acceptor Information
3.5 Ticket Printer Log


Audit Key - Turn off to exit.

Table 3-15 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 1
DIAGNOSTIC METERS Explanation
Coin Optics Faults 0 - Increments if the software detects that the comparator
opto detector is blocked, or an inexplicable set of
changes occur in the opto detector.
Coin Acceptor Faults 0 - Increments if a coin acceptor fault is detected.
Coin Diverter Faults 0 - Increments after five consecutive instances of coins
going to hopper instead of cash box, or to cash box
instead of hopper.
Yoyo Attempts 116 - Increments when the coin comparator indicates a coin
travelling in the upward direction.
Main Door Accesses 0 - Increments when the main door is opened.
Cash Box Accesses 0 - Increments when the cash box door is opened.
Logic Accesses 0 - Increments when the logic security cage is opened.
Top Box Accesses 0 - Increments when the top box is opened.
Note Acceptor Accesses 0 - Increments when the note acceptor door is opened.
Illegal Coin Out 0 - Increments when the machine is not in hopper collect,
but a coin passes the hopper optic.
Hopper Empty 0 - Increments when hopper is in hopper collect and two
consecutive 4-second attempts to pay out a coin fail.
Hopper Jammed 0 - Increments when the hopper optic is blocked for more
than 200 ms.
Hopper Disconnected 0 - Increments when hopper is disconnected (checked
every second).
Cash Box Instead Hopper $0.00 - Increments when coins intended for the hopper are
diverted to the cash box.
Hopper Instead Cash Box $0.00 - Increments when coins intended for the cash box are
diverted to the hopper.
Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter
screen
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Meters Display - Screen 2
DIAGNOSTIC METERS
Mechanical Meters Disc: 0 - Increments if meters are disconnected.
Mechanical Meters Faults: 0 - Increments if a short circuit is detected
in the meters.
Mechanical Meters Cage Accesses: 0 - Increments if the meter security cage is
opened.
Printer Faults: 0
Port 1 Failures: 0
Port 2 Failures: 0
Port 3 Failures: 0
Port 4 Failures: 0
Port 5 Failures: 0
Port 6 Failures: 0


Error Log Display

This screen display shows the date, time, and type of the most recent error
messages. The log holds information on the last one hundred errors.
Table 3-17 Error Log Display
ERROR LOG Explanation

Event number 0 is the most
recent event and 99 is the oldest.
Event # Time Stamp Error Type -
day date hh:mm:ss The log registers lockup events
only
0 26-Mar-98 12:56 Logic Door open
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Play 1 Line - Press to scroll forward by one line
Play 3 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one line
Play 5 Lines- Press to scroll forward by one page
Play 7 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one page
Panic Log Display

Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the
machine cannot recover.
Table 3-18 Panic Log Display
PANIC LOG Explanation

PSR/PC Description -
4F43919B C:\penguin\system\drv\com.c Communication Board not connected Data items are program
counter, source module,
and error description
Play 1 Line- Press to display panic log
Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the
machine cannot recover.

Bill (Note) Acceptor Information

This screen provides a record of the number of notes of each denomination
received, the last five notes accepted, and the total value of notes received.
Table 3-19 Note Acceptor Information Display
NOTE ACCEPTOR INFORMATION Explanation

Number of Notes Meters since: - Information on notes input.
Received Tue May 11 12:23:42 97
$ 1 Notes Received:
$ 5 Notes Received: 7 7
$ 10 Notes Received: 650 650
$ 20 Notes Received: Meters and Periodic Meters are
Note Acceptor periodic meters
$ 50 Notes Received: 10 10 displayed on the right side of
the screen under the time
stamp
$ 100 Notes Received:
TOTAL VALUE OF $7135.00 $7135.00

NOTES RECEIVED
LAST FIVE NOTES RECEIVED
Last: $5
Second Last: $10
Third Last: $10
Fourth Last: $50
Fifth Last: $50

Ticket Printer Log

A list of tickets printed by the gaming machine is maintained and displayed by the
Ticket Printer Log function.
Table 3-20 Ticket Printer Log Display
PRINTER LOG Explanation

-
Event # Sequence # Date Time Amount Details of tickets printed
are displayed in
sequential number order
000 08 19-Mar-98 18:50 $ 25.00

000 07 19-Mar-98 18:21 $ 525.00
000 06 19-Mar-98 17:45 $ 125.00
000 05 19-Mar-98 17:35 $ 25.00
000 04 19-Mar-98 17:20 $ 225.00
000 03 19-Mar-98 16:50 $ 20.00
000 02 19-Mar-98 16:46 $ 25.00
000 01 19-Mar-98 15:51 $ 25.00

A typical Cash Out Ticket layout is shown below.
Table 3-21 Typical Cash Out Ticket
3.3.4 Self Test Mode

Self Test Mode addresses the repair and maintenance tasks for the MVP machine.
The items on the Self Test Mode Menu are designed to test various machine
components and features.
The Self Test Mode Menu is accessed by opening the main door, turning the audit
key ON, and selecting option 4 from the Operator Mode Menu. This mode can
only be accessed when player credits are zero, the main door is open, and no other
lockups are active.

Table 3-22 Self Test Mode Menu
SELF TEST MODE MENU
4.1 Lamp Test 4.6 Sound Effect Test

4.2 Button Test 4.7 Factory Test
4.3 Coin Entry Test 4.8 Combination Test
4.4 Hopper Test 4.9 Quick Combination Test
4.5 Monitor Test 4.10 Printer Test

Table 3-23 Self Test Mode Requirements
SELF TEST MODE
Entry to this mode is not permitted unless:
(a) Credit is zero

(b) Main door is open
(c) No other lockups active

Lamp Test
This screen allows the operator to test the pushbutton lamps, animation lamps and
light tower lamps. The state of individual lamps can be set to either on, off,
flashing slow, or flashing fast. The operator can then observe the lamps to verify
correct operation.

Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test Display
TEST MODE - LAMP TEST Explanation

Select any/all lamp(s) for
tests.
Light Tower Lamp # 1 2 3 4
Animation Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Player Key Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
ALL
CURRENT FUNCTION ON OFF FLASH SLOW FLASH FAST
Play 1 Line - Press to select next lamp

Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous lamp
Play 7 Lines - Press to select function (on/off/flash)
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Note main door must be
open to enter Test Mode
Button Test
This screen allows the operator to test the function of each playbutton.
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Button Test
TEST MODE - BUTTON TEST Explanation

-
Button Function Description Button press is registered on screen
Reserve display
Play 1 Line
Play 3 Lines
Play 5 Lines
Play 7 Lines
Play 9 Lines
Take Win
Gamble
Not Used
Not Used
Bet 10 Credits
Bet 5 Credits
Bet 3 Credits
Bet 2 Credits
Bet 1 Credit
Collect
(Press any Button to test)


Coin Entry Test

This screen allows the operator to test the coin entry devices. The operator selects
the state of the coin comparator and coin diverter, then enters coins and observes
the changes in the display readings.
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test Display
TEST MODE - COIN ENTRY TEST Explanation

- Tests for coin entry devices. Choose
States, enter coins, and observe
changes in display readings.
COIN ENTRY
Reject State: Chip Tray Changes to Chip Tray or Internal
Validator O/P: Inactive
Optic A: Unblocked
Optic B: Unblocked
CASH BOX
Diverter State: Cash Box Changes to Cash Box or Hopper
Optic A: Not Used
Optic B: Unblocked
MESSAGE
Open main door to test reject state

Play 1 Line - Press to change reject state Play 1 Line not displayed until main
Play 3 Lines - Press to change diverter state door fully opened
Hopper Test
In this test, the Collect button is pressed to activate a hopper payout of 10 coins.
The door must then be closed and the 10 coins reinserted. Any error messages
will be displayed on the screen.
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test Display
TEST MODE - HOPPER TEST Explanation

- Test attempts to pay 10 coins from the
hopper after pressing Collect Key.
Hopper Test Payout: 0
Coins Reinserted: 0 Door must be closed and the 10 coins

reinserted.
Last Hopper Event: None - Any error messages will be displayed on

screen.
Collect Key - Press to activate payout

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Exit only possible after coins paid and
reinserted.
If Payout Limit is $0.0, test is not operable

Monitor Test
This screen allows a range of tests to be conducted on the video monitor. The
parameters checked include picture alignment, distortion, and colour purity. The
operator inspects the display to decide whether the tests are passed or failed.
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu
TEST MODE - VIDEO MONITOR TEST MENU

4.5.1 Colour Balance Test 4.5.7 Mode Colours Test
4.5.2 Grey Scale Test 4.5.8 Screen Regulation Test
4.5.3 12.5% White Screen Test 4.5.9 Red Colour Purity Test
4.5.4 Grid Linearity Test 4.5.10 Green Colour Purity Test
4.5.5 Magenta Grid Linearity Test 4.5.11 Blue Colour Purity Test
4.5.6 Basic Colours Test 4.5.12 Black Colour Purity Test
4.5.13 White Colour Purity Test
While in a test, press any button to exit

Play 1 Line - Press to select next test
Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous test
Play 5 Lines - Press to choose selected test
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions
SELF TEST MODE - VIDEO MONITOR TEST DESCRIPTIONS

TEST DESCRIPTION
-
Colour Balance Test - Tests the shading of primary colours to confirm the adjustment of colours
Grey Scale Test - Tests the colour guns are equal in intensity
12.5% White Screen Test - Displays a slightly lighter colour than black
Grid Linearity Test - Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen
Magenta Grid Linearity Test - Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen using
magenta colour
Basic Colours Test - Displays four coloured rectangles - red, green, blue, white
Mode Colours Test - Displays the full range of 256 colours available
Screen Regulation Test - Displays a flashing white box
Red Colour Purity Test - Activates all red pixels
Green Colour Purity Test - Activates all green pixels
Blue Colour Purity Test - Activates all blue pixels
Black Colour Purity Test - Activates all black pixels
White Colour Purity Test - Activates all white pixels

Sound Effect Test

This screen allows the operator to change the volume of the sound system.
Table 3-30 Self Test Mode - Sound System Test Display
TEST MODE - SOUND SYSTEM TEST Explanation

- Permits change to volume settings
except alarm sound. Plays the range
of machine sounds. Changes can be
made as test is in progress.
IIIIIIII
IIIIIIII
IIIIIIII
Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume

Play 3 Lines - Press to decrease volume
Play 5 Lines - Press to play machine tunes
Factory Test
The Factory Test option automatically conducts several tests simultaneously.
Tests conducted include coin validator, coin diverter, door switch, video monitor
tests, and sound system tests. Failed tests are displayed on the screen.
Table 3-31 Self Test Mode - Factory Test Display
TEST MODE - FACTORY TEST Explanation

- Automatically executes several tests
Test Start Time: Tue May 11 09:51:04 1997: to occur together. Includes coin
Current Time: Tue May 11 09:58: 50 1997 validator, coin diverter, door switch,
Cycle Count: 1 video monitor tests. and sound
Test Description : Coin Entry Validation Test system tests.
- Failed tests are displayed on screen.

Each test is identified.
Play 1 Line - Press to start factory test

Combination Test
The Combination Test enables the reel symbols to be seen and the combination
positions checked. After selecting a set of finishing positions as a request target
(by pressing the pushbuttons, Play 1 Line, Play 3 Lines, Play 5 Lines), the test is
activated by pressing the Play 7 Lines pushbutton. The resultant game display
must match the request reel positions. A check of the graphic animations and
sound displays, applicable to any winning combination on display, can be carried
out.
Table 3-32 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test Display
SELF TEST MODE - COMBINATION TEST

KEY
Play 1 Line Play 3 Lines Play 5 Lines Play 7 Lines Reserve
Next Reel Step Forward Step Backward Go Exit
0 20 10 19 11
Table 3-33 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result Display

EXPLANATION
- Result of combination
test, after choosing reel-
finishing positions.

Combination Quick Test

This test allows the operator to check the WIN amount for any combination of reel
positions, without actually spinning the reels.
Table 3-34 Self Test Mode.- Combination Quick Test Display
SELF TEST MODE - COMBINATION TEST

Win = 0 (Bet I per Line by default)
KEY
Play 1 Line Play 3 Lines Play 5 Lines Play 7 Lines Reserve Collect
Next Reel Step Forward Step Backward Go Exit More *
0 20 10 19 11
Game Display
* When COLLECT is pressed, additional keys and functions are displayed
Printer Test
The printer device outputs the range of characters to enable inspection.
Table 3-35 Self Test Mode - Printer Test Display
PRINTER TEST Explanation
******************************TEST PRINT***************************** Printer outputs upper

and lower case
characters, and the range
of special characters
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ!@#$%^&*()
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode

The Operator Setup / Selections Menu enables the various machine options to be
set to individual house preferences. The settings can be viewed and changed by
pressing the appropriate buttons.
Entry to this menu is achieved by turning the audit key ON and selecting option 5
from the Operator Mode Menu. This option is only available when player credits
are zero, the main door is open, and no other lockups are active.
Table 3-36 Operator Setup / Selections Menu
OPERATOR SETUP / SELECTIONS MENU

5.1 Machine Options
5.2 Real Time Clock Setup
5.3 Sound System Setup
5.4 Reel Spin Speed Setup
5.5 Layout Setup

Machine Options
Note
Approval from the jurisdictional authority is required
before the items in the Machine Options screen can be
changed.
The security logic cage must be open to save changes to machine options.

Table 3-37 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options Display
MACHINE OPTIONS
IMPORTANT: These items can only be changed after consulting with the Jurisdictional
Authority.
MACHINE ID 332280 Accept $1 Notes NO

BASE CREDIT VALUE $0.10 Accept $5 Notes YES
TOKEN VALUE $1.00 Accept $10 Notes YES
PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99 87.843 % Accept $20 Notes YES
ENABLE CCCE YES Accept $50 Notes NO
COLLECT LIMIT $80.00 Accept $100 Notes NO
HOPPER REFILL $120.00 ENABLE NOTE YES
ACCEPTOR
GAMBLE YES
HOPPER / PRINTER SELECT PRINTER
VENUE NAME "AAAAAAAAAA"

SERIAL NUMBER "123456789876"
Play 5 Lines - Press to increment a digit

Play 7 Lines - Press to select another digit
Play 1 Line - Press to select next option
Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous option
Bet 1 Credit - Press to save new settings
Explanation of Terms
MACHINE ID: a number between 0 and 999999.
BASE CREDIT VALUE: the value of one credit. Changing this value will reset
the jurisdictional meters.
TOKEN VALUE: the value of the coin or token accepted by the machine. Must
be an integer multiple of the base credit value.
PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99: the Theoretical Percentage Return (TPR)
variation; Number 99 represents a TPR of 87.843%. Other variations may be
selected.
ENABLE CCCE: enables / disables the Centralised Cash Control Equipment.
COLLECT LIMIT: the maximum amount of coins that can be paid from the
hopper after pressing COLLECT. If credit amount is greater, a Cancel Credit
hand pay must be made.
HOPPER REFILL: the amount of coins to be placed into the hopper when empty.
GAMBLE: enables/disables gamble option.
HOPPER / PRINTER SELECT: selects either the hopper or the printer option.
ENABLE NOTE ACCEPTOR: enables/disables the Note Acceptor.
Accept $1-$100 Notes: allows the note acceptor to be configured to accept
specific note denominations. The denominations selected will be illuminated
on the Note Acceptor mid-trim display by the denomination back light.

Real Time Clock Setup

This screen allows the real time clock to be set.
Table 3-38 Operator Setup / Selections - Real Time Clock Setup Display
REAL TIME CLOCK SETUP Explanation

- Sets time and date.
SECOND: 43
MINUTE: 20
HOUR: 12
DATE: 31
MONTH : JANUARY
YEAR: 1995
Play 1 Line - Press to choose next item

Play 3 Lines - Press to choose previous item
Play 5 Lines - Press to increase item value
Play 7 Lines - Press to decrease item value
Sound System Setup

This screen allows the sound volume to be set.
Table 3-39 Operator Setup / Selections - Sound System Setup Display
SOUND SYSTEM SETUP Explanation

- Sets sound volume.
Default level is low.
IIIIIIII
IIIIIIII
IIIIIIII
Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume item

Play 3 Lines - Press to decrease volume item
Play 5 Lines - Press to play machine tunes

Reel Spin Speed Setup

This option enables operators to select the reel spin speed.
Table 3-40 Operator Setup / Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup
REEL SPIN SPEED SETUP Explanation

- Alters the reel spin speed
SPEED FAST
Play 5 Lines - Press to select reel speed

Layout Setup
This option, if available, provides operators the choice of selecting the normal or
the charcoal background for the game display.
Table 3-41 Operator Setup / Selections - Layout Setup Display
LAYOUT SETUP Explanation

- Alters the game layout
and colours
LAYOUT NORMAL
Play 5 Lines - Press to select new layout

3.3.6 Power Save Mode

Power Save Mode enables the machine to be placed in a cost-saving state in which
the machine is turned ON, but power is turned OFF to the video monitor and all
fluorescent lamps. Gamely is disabled in this mode.
Power Save Mode can only be entered when player credits are zero, the main door
is opened, and no other lockups are active. The Power Save screen is shown
below.
Table 3-42 Power Save Mode Display
Explanation
Audit Key - Turn off to START Power Save Mode Machine is running but power is
cut to the video monitor and all
fluorescent lights.
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu without
entering Power Save Mode
Audit Key - Turn on again to EXIT Power Save Mode.

Turn Reset Key to reset lockup detected in
Power Save Mode

To exit from the power save function, turn the Audit Key ON. Turn the Jackpot
(Reset) Key ON and then OFF to reset the lockups detected.
3.3.7 Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu Items

The MVP gaming machine has an extensive system of self-monitoring and
automatically enters fault mode when abnormal conditions are detected. In fault
mode, the game message area displays guidance information and the game is
disabled to prevent any further player interaction.
Entry to the Current Active Lockup Menu is achieved by turning the Audit Key
ON and selecting option 7 from the Operator Mode Menu. The menu is displayed
and the conditions requiring attention are highlighted by the characters ***. Each
lockup condition has an associated help screen outlining the procedure for fixing
the fault.
The Current Active Lockup Menu is shown below, followed by a summary of the
associated help screens.
Table 3-43 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu
CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP MENU
Jackpot Hopper Empty P1 - SEF Fail

Cancel Credit Hopper Jammed P2 - SEF Fail
Printer Cancel Credit Hopper Disconnected P3 - SEF Fail
***Main Door Open/Mismatch Illegal Coin Out P4 - SEF Fail
Cash Box Door Open 3 Way Memory Error P5 - SEF Fail
Top Box Door Open Game EPROMs Changed P6 - SEF Fail
Logic door Open Meters Disconnected Power Save
Note Acceptor Door Open Meters Faulty Note Acceptor Error
***Yoyo Meters Cage Open Note Acceptor Failed
Coin Acceptor Fault Machine Options Note Acceptor Full
Coin Optic Fault Battery #1 Low Note Acc Stacker
Coin Diverter Fault Battery #2 Low Note Acceptor OOS
Battery #3 Low
Cash Box Optic Fault Printer Disconnected
Printer Fault
Paper Depleted
The characters *** indicate active lockups

Play 1 Line - Press to select next lockup
Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous lockup
Play 5 Lines - Press to see selected lockup help

Table 3-44 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Displays
CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP HELP SCREENS

LOCKUP HELP Screen Explanation and Advice
Jackpot - No jackpot currently available on this machine.
Cancel Credit - To reset Cancel Credit: - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Printer Cancel Credit To reset Printer Cancel Credit - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Main Door Open / - To reset either of these faults, close the Main Door. With a MISMATCH
Mismatch condition it is possible that either the optic or mechanical door switch is faulty or
poorly aligned.
Cash Box Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Cash Box Door.
Top Box Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Top Box Door.
Logic Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Logic Cage door.
Note Acceptor Door - To reset this fault, close the Note Acceptor Door.
Open
Yoyo - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Acceptor Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Optic Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Diverter Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Cash Box Optic Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Hopper Empty - Check if the hopper in empty - if so, refill the hopper. To reset this fault, turn the
reset key ON then OFF.
Hopper Jammed - Clear the reason for the hopper jam - check the hopper coin out sensor. To reset
this fault, turn of the reset key ON then OFF.
Hopper Disconnected - Reconnect the hopper. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Illegal Coin Out - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
3 Way Memory Error - To reset this fault, turn the Audit key ON to enter Operator Mode, and follow the
instructions on the screen.
Game EPROMs - To reset this fault, turn the Audit key ON to enter Operator Mode, and follow the
Changed instructions on the screen.
Meters Disconnected - To reset this fault: - Reconnect the mechanical meters.
Meters Faulty - To reset this fault: - Fix the faulty mechanical meter.
Meters Cage Open - To reset this fault: - Close the mechanical meter security cage door.
Machine Options - To reset this fault: - Enter machine options setup menu.
Printer Disconnected To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Check looming and reconnect the
Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Printer Fault To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Power down the gaming machine, -
Check the looming and reconnect the Printer, - Power up the gaming machine, -
Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Printer Paper Depleted To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Remove the Printer, - Insert new
paper roll, - Replace the Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key
switch ON then OFF.
Battery #1 Low Battery low has been detected, to reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
If the same battery is detected low again within the next hour Battery #n is to be
replaced. The machine is required to be shutdown as soon as possible (say within
the next 15 minutes).
Battery #2 Low As Battery #1 above
Battery #3 Low As Battery #1 above
P1 - SEF Fail - FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P1
To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P1.
To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P5, then turn the
reset key ON then OFF.
P6 - SEF Fail - FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P6. To reset this fault: - Fix
cap or equipment attached to PORT P6, then turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Power Save - Exit from Power Save Mode by turning the Operator Mode key ON. The Power
Save Mode lockup can be cleared by turning the reset key ON then OFF.

Note Acceptor Error - Note Acceptor - Communications Error.

To reset this fault: - Disconnect then reconnect power to the note acceptor.
- Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor Failed - To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect power to
the note acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor Full - To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect power to
the note acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor Stacker Stacker Removed. To reset this fault: - empty the stacker. Replace the stacker.
Disconnect and then reconnect the power to the note acceptor.
Note Acceptor OOS Note Acceptor Out Of Service. To reset this fault: - Reconnect the note acceptor,
then - Turn the reset key ON then OFF, or - Disable the note acceptor machine
option.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Cabinet, Door and Top Box
________Chapter 4________
Cabinet, Door and Top Box
4.1 General Description ................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Technical Description .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.1 Cabinet and Door ....................................................................... 4-6

4.2.2 Top Box.................................................................................... 4-20
4.3 General Maintenance ............................................................. 4-25

Cabinet, Door And Top Box MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
External View ....................................................................................................4-4
Internal View......................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment .....................................................................4-8
Figure 4-4 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement ....................................................4-9
Figure 4-5 Bilock Key and Quick Change Core.............................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Bilock Camlock ............................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-7 Bilock Switchlock..........................................................................................4-11
Figure 4-8 Cash Box Chute: Removal and Replacement .............................................4-11
Figure 4-9 Logic Cage ...................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting System and Artwork ...........................4-15
Figure 4-11 Warning Label ............................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-12 Playbutton: Exploded View.........................................................................4-18
Figure 4-13 Coin Tray....................................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-14 Top Box......................................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-15 Two-tier Light Tower - exploded view. .......................................................4-24

4.1 General Description

The gaming machine cabinet, top box, and cabinet door are of welded pressed
sheet metal construction. The cabinet provides security to the inside of the
machine and a rigid structure for mounting the various machine components. The
cabinet door is secured to the cabinet with three high-strength hinges and latches
to the cabinet with a security three-point latch. A steel panel, fitted inside the
cabinet door, provides mounting for the coin handling system and the door
fluorescent ballasts.
The major components of the machine are located either within the cabinet, on the
cabinet door, or in the top box. The following components are detailed in this
chapter (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2):
In the cabinet:
• key switches,
• cabinet door security,
• main door latch assembly,
• cash box chute,
• logic cage,
• game display shelf.
On the cabinet door:

• cabinet door fluorescent lighting,
• mid-trim, coin entry and playbuttons,
• cabinet door security,
• cabinet door artwork
• reflector panel,
• monitor mask,
• coin tray.
In the top box:

• top box shell,
• top box door,
• fluorescent lighting and reflector,
• top box door artwork,
• light tower (optional).

Light Tower
Top Box
Jackpot Key
Switch
Top Trim
Audit Key
Switch
Monitor
Main Door
Lock
Mid Trim
Main Door
Latch Access
Speakers x 2
Coin Tray
- External View

Light Tower
Highboy
Top Box
Top Trim
Logic cage
Mid Trim
Coin
Comparator
Bill acceptor
Power Supply
Assembly
Coin Chuting DANGER
CHANGING TUBE . FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CA USE S ERIOUS
DAMAGE OR INJURY
WARNING
TUB E SOCKETS A RE VERY HOT
Illuminator
Panel
DR
PP.C
HO
Fluoro
Ballast
Coin Tray
Hopper
Side-Lighting
MVPcab
Fluorescent Tube Cash Box
and Reflector Chute
Mechanical Door
Mains Switch Switch
- Internal View

4.2 Technical Description

The following sections describe the function of each component and outline
procedures for adjusting, removing and replacing, and assembling and
disassembling components.
4.2.1 Cabinet and Door

The cabinet is comprised of a one-piece shell (back and two sides) with separate
top and base sections. The parts are interlocked and welded together with
strengthening gussets and rails for rigidity. The cabinet door is mounted on three
high-strength hinges. Various brackets and plates are welded to the assembly to
provide mounting for other machine components.
Cabinet (Main) Door

The cabinet (or main) door is fabricated from sheet steel. The structure is welded
and bolted together, using three cross braces for rigidity. Mountings are provided
in the door for the coin handling system, artwork, lighting, coin tray, speakers, and
other devices.
The door is mounted to the cabinet on three high-strength hinges on the left-hand
side of the machine. The door is located on the right-hand side with a three-point
latch mechanism.
Adjustment Procedures:
The hinges are bolted to the cabinet and can be adjusted vertically to ensure that
the door fits neatly to the cabinet.
Removal and Replacement Procedures:

To remove the door, door hinges and hinge pins:
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine.
2. Disconnect all looms between the door and the rest of the machine.
3. Remove the nut and bolt securing the door stay.
4. Lift the door off the three hinge pins and remove.
CAUTION
The door is a heavy item; follow the national standard and
code of practice for manual handling.
5. The hinges and hinge pins can be removed from the door and cabinet,
respectfully, by removing the bolts securing them.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

Door Latch Bar and Lock

The latch bar assembly and cabinet door lock are mounted to the inside of the
cabinet wall. The latch bar may be adjusted up or down to ensure that the cabinet
door closes and locks correctly.
The adjustment procedure is as follows:
Adjusting the Door Latch:

2. Disengage the note acceptor dual cage housing and pivot it forward to
provide easier access to the door latch.
3. Loosen the two mounting nuts, move the latch bar up or down as required,
then tighten the nuts.
4. Check that the cabinet door closes and locks correctly.
Removing the Keyed Lock from the Cabinet:

2. Disengage the note acceptor dual cage housing and pivot it forward to
provide easier access to the lock components latch.
3. Remove the cam nut, cam washer and cam from the end of the lock.
4. Remove the rotation-limiting washer from the lock. Note the position of the
stops on the rotation-limiting washer - it will make replacement easier.
5. Remove the lock nut and lock washer from the lock barrel.
6. Withdraw the lock barrel from the outside of the housing.

The procedure for lock removal is the same for all keyed locks.
Cabinet Security
The cabinet door incorporates security monitoring in the form of a mechanical
switch and an optical sensor.
Note
In some markets, the optical sensor is not fitted.
If both security devices do not provide the correct signals to the Main Board, an
alarm will sound, gameplay will be disabled, and the appropriate machine lockup
message will be displayed on the monitor screen.
The mechanical door switch is located in the bottom corner of the cabinet, beside
the mains switch box. When the door is properly closed, the switch is activated
and sends a signal to the Main Board indicating that the door is closed.
The photo-optic sensor consists of an emitter and detector. The emitter is
mounted to the right-hand side of the cabinet on a small bracket. The detector is
mounted to the cabinet door. When the door is properly closed, the emitter and

detector will be aligned. When aligned, the sensor sends a signal to the Main
Board indicating that the door is closed.
If the door is properly closed and a Door Mismatch - Main message is
received from the optical sensor, then the sensor may require adjustment.
The emitter may be adjusted as follows (refer to Figure 4-3):
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Loosen the two screws fastening the emitter.
3. Move the emitter slightly in either direction.
4. Tighten the screws fastening the emitter.
5. Close the door and see if the Door Mismatch signal is activated. If the
optical switch is still misaligned, repeat steps 1 to 5.
Emitter
Cabinet
Screw
Loom
Mk5V026b
Figure 4-3 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment
The optical sensor may be removed as follows (refer to Figure 4-6):

2. Unplug the optical switch looms from the Interface Board.
3. Remove the two screws and the clamp plate fastening the emitter to the
cabinet.
4. Remove the two screws fastening the detector to the cabinet door.
5. Remove the optical switch and looms from the machine.
Replacement of the optical switch is a reverse of the removal procedure. After

replacement of the optical switch, adjust its alignment as previously described.
Removal of the mechanical door switch:

2. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, prise the mechanical switch from the cabinet.
3. Unplug the switch connectors.
The switch is replaced by firmly pushing it back into position.

Key Switches
The Jackpot Reset and Audit key switches are used to access and reset the
machine's software. The key switch functions are covered in detail in the chapter
Machine Modes.
The key switches are fixed to a common plate mounted to the inside wall of the
cabinet. The switches are connected by a loom to the Interface Board which
transfers the switch signals to the Main Board for processing.

Removal of the key switches is as follows (refer to Figure 4-3):
2. Unplug the key-switch loom from the Interface Board.
3. Remove the two nuts fastening the assembly to the cabinet wall.
4. Remove the key-switch assembly from the cabinet.
5. The individual key switches may be removed from the assembly:
a. Unplug or de-solder the loom from the key switch.
b. Remove the lock nut and washer from the switch body.
c. Pull the switch from the mounting plate.
Audit (Operator)
Key Switch
Lock Washer (2)

Lock Nut (2)
Studs (attached
to mounting plate)
Mounting Plate
KEPS Nut (2)

Cancel Credit
(Jackpot) Key
Switch
A191-048.cdr Loom
Figure 4-4 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement
Bilock Locks
Gaming machines may be fitted with Bilock camlocks and switchlocks from the
Australian Lock Company Pty. Ltd. These high-security locks feature a unique
“U” shaped keyway. The locks also offer the Quick Change Core (QCC) facility,
whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to the lock barrel. This
allows locks to be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without having to dismantle the
lock assembly.

The non-combination lock body is fitted by Aristocrat at the factory. The keyed
core is fitted on-site by an authorised Bilock agent, who is responsible for all
service and rekeying of locks.
The keyswitches may be either 2-position or 3-position. The 3-position switch
allows two functions to be combined on a single switch. The key panel is labelled
to show which direction to turn the key to activate the desired function.
To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and
pull out the lock assembly.
The following figures show a Bilock key and a Quick Change Core, a camlock,
and a switchlock.
Bilock Key Quick Change Core

Figure 4-5 Bilock Key and Quick Change Core
Figure 4-6 Bilock Camlock

Figure 4-7 Bilock Switchlock
Cash Box and Chute

Once the hopper is full, further coins entered into the gaming machine are
collected in the cash box, which is located inside the cabinet base. A door in the
cabinet base provides access to the cash box for the clearance of coins. Coins
enter the cash box via the cash box chute, which is located at the bottom of the
cabinet. The chute is moulded from plastic.

To remove the cash box chute (refer to Figure 4-4):
2. Remove the hopper from the machine (refer to the chapter Hopper).
3. Remove the self-tapping screw securing the chute to the base of the cabinet.
4. Pull the chute from the cash box hole in the cabinet base.
Cash Box Chute
Cabinet Base
Cash Box
Mk5V029c Hole (in Base)
Figure 4-8 Cash Box Chute: Removal and Replacement
Logic Cage
The logic cage is a steel enclosure with a hinged door in the front. The cage
houses the machine logic PCBAs and the Interface Board. The door of the cage
has a sliding latch that allows a security seal to be fitted. The door is fitted with a
battery-backed microswitch used for signaling the machine software that the logic
cage door has been opened. In addition, one or two security key locks may also be

fitted to the logic cage door. A small electric fan for cooling the PCBAs may be
mounted on the outside of the cage. The logic cage sits below the game display
shelf. It slots into the shelf at the back and is fastened to it by two screws at the
front. Within the logic cage are brackets and plastic guides for locating the
PCBAs. The Interface Board is mounted at the back of the logic cage. When a
PCBA is fitted into the logic cage, it travels along the guides and is aligned with
the corresponding multi-way connector on the Interface Board.

To remove the logic cage and Interface Board (refer to Figure 4-5):
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the hopper
from the machine (refer to the chapter Hopper).
2. Open the logic cage door; the door flips down and is spring loaded to stay
completely open.
3. Carefully lever the PCBAs out using the extractors. Standard Electrostatic
Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be followed when removing
PCBAs. The PCBAs should be immediately placed into anti-static bags.
4. Disconnect all of the looms from the Interface Board. Make sure the
connectors are labelled to facilitate replacement.
5. Remove the two screws attaching the logic cage to the game display shelf.
6. Gently pull the logic cage from the machine; the tabs at the back of the cage
will disengage from the shelf. Remove the logic cage and Interface Board
from the machine.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedures:

To disassemble the logic cage:
1. Remove the logic cage as previously described.
2. The Interface Board is removed by removing the screws securing it.
3. The door catch, microswitch, and fan unit (if fitted) are removed by
removing the screws securing them.
4. The PCB guides are removed by pulling them from their location holes.
Assembly is a reversal of the disassembly procedure.
Security
Microswitch
PCB Guides
S2logi2b
Door Catch
Interface Board
Figure 4-9 Logic Cage

Game Display Shelf

The game display shelf is a pressed sheet metal assembly that is bolted to the
inside of the cabinet. The shelf provides both a strengthening cross brace to the
cabinet structure and an area on which to mount the video monitor.

To remove the game display shelf from the machine:
2. Remove the hopper from the machine (see chapter - Hopper).
3. Remove the note acceptor dual cage assembly (see chapter - Note Acceptor).
4. Remove the video monitor assembly (see chapter - Video Monitor).
5. Remove the logic cage as previously described.
6. Remove the two shoulder bolts fastening the monitor socket to the shelf.
Note the orientation of the socket for re-assembly.
7. Remove the four nuts fastening the shelf to the back and sides of the cabinet.
8. Lift the front of the shelf off its mounting brackets, and then pull it from the
cabinet.
Door Fluorescent Lighting and Artwork

The cabinet door is equipped with a fluorescent lighting system for illuminating
the door artwork.
The artwork panel is located in the cabinet door and held in place by a 10 mm
Perspex illuminator panel and the Illuminator Panel Assembly – See Figure 4-7.
Two 6 W fluorescent tubes are housed in side-lighting reflectors located at either
end of the illuminator assembly. The reflectors partially surround each fluorescent
tube to provide protection and direct the fluorescent light forward into the
illuminator panel and through the artwork. The side-lighting reflectors can be
rotated out from the illuminator assembly to enable the fluorescent tube to be
replaced.
The panels are held in place by screws at the top and by rubber spacers pressed
into a channel behind the panels at the bottom.
Note
Fluorescent tubes are 6 W to AS1201 (IEC 81)
standard.
WARNING
High voltages are present when the machine is
switched ON. These voltages may be lethal.

To remove a fluorescent ballast:


2. One ballast is located on either side of the coin chute mounting panel on the
inside of the door.
3. To remove the ballast mounted to the outside of the panel, disconnect all
looms from the ballast, then squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to
disengage the plastic clips, and remove the ballast.
4. To remove the ballast mounted to the inside of the panel, disconnect all
looms to components on the coin chute mounting panel, then remove the
panel from inside the door:
• Remove the screw that secures the panel to the bracket on the right-hand
side, nearest the door hinge.
• Disconnect all looms to components on the panel.
• Press down on the panel to disengage from under the coin entry slot on
the door mid trim
• Carefully remove the coin-chute mounting panel from the locating slots.
5. Disconnect the looms from the ballast on the inside of the panel.
6. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and
remove the ballast.
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.

To replace a cabinet door fluorescent tube:
1. Take note of the Danger and Warning guidance and act accordingly.
Warning
When the lighting system is working, the
fluorescent tube and reflector become very hot.
2. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine.

3. Remove the coin chute mounting panel from inside the door, as described
above.
4. Rotate the side-lighting reflector out and away from the illuminator
assembly to expose the fluorescent tube.
5. Withdraw the tube from the upper and lower tube housing and remove from
the machine.
6. Insert the new fluorescent tube, and rotate the side-lighting reflector back to
the original position.
7. Switch ON the machine, check the lighting system, and close and lock the
main door.

Monitor Fluorescent
Mask Tube (2 off)
Playbutton
Bodies
Illuminator
Panel Assembly
MK5S222D Side-Lighting
Reflectors
Artwork Perspex
Panel Illuminator
Panel
Figure 4-10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting System and Artwork
DANGER
CHANGING TUBE. FAILURE TO
COMPLY MAY CAUSE SERIOUS
DAMAGE OR INJURY
WARNING
TUBE SOCKETS ARE VERY HOT
MK5S259
Figure 4-11 Warning Label

To remove the artwork panel and illuminator panel from the cabinet door:
2. Remove the coin-chute mounting panel, as described previously.
3. Loosen the screws that clamp the top of the panels in position.
4. Remove the rubber spacers from the channel behind the panels.
5. Carefully remove the three panels from the door.
Mid-Trim Panel
The mid-trim panel is fabricated from sheet steel. The function of the trim is to
act as a strengthening brace for the door assembly and to provide an area for the
playbuttons and coin entry to be mounted.
The mid-trim panel is attached to the door assembly by studs and screws. It can
be removed from the door for repair or replacement. Some game conversions on
machines require the mid-trim panel to be replaced to accommodate different
playbutton configurations.

To remove the mid-trim panel from the door of the machine:
2. Remove the reflector panel as described above as part of the procedure for
replacing a fluorescent tube.
3. Unplug all of the playbutton microswitches from the playbutton bodies (see
Playbuttons in this chapter). Mark each switch for easy identification.
4. Remove the nuts on either side of the mid-trim panel that attach it to the
door.
5. Pull the mid-trim panel from the door.
Playbuttons
The playbuttons function as the interface between the player and the machine.
Various games have different configurations of playbuttons, and the playbuttons
themselves may be either square, double square, rectangular, or double
rectangular. The playbuttons are mounted onto the mid-trim panel.

To replace a playbutton lamp (refer to Figure 4-7):
2. Grasp the microswitch and lamp holder unit and pull it down, out of the
body of the playbutton.
3. Pull out the faulty lamp, and push in the replacement lamp.
4. Replace the microswitch and lamp holder unit by inserting it into the body
of the playbutton, then push the microswitch and lamp holder up into the
playbutton body until it snaps into place.
5. Switch ON the machine, close and lock the cabinet door and check the
button lamp.

To remove a playbutton from the mid-trim panel (refer to Figure 4-7):

2. From the underside of the body, squeeze together the two legs of the
playbutton, then from the top of the button (with the legs of the playbutton
still together) withdraw the lens/pushbutton assembly. The spring is loose
in the playbutton and drops away when the lens/pushbutton assembly is
removed.
3. Remove the lock nut securing the playbutton body to the mid-trim panel.
4. Lift the playbutton from the mid-trim panel.
To replace a playbutton into the mid-trim panel (refer to Figure 4-7):

2. Place the body of the button into the correct hole in the mid trim panel.
3. Screw the lock nut onto the playbutton body to secure it into the mid-trim
panel.
4. Place the spring into the lower section of the pushbutton (between the legs)
and hold it there.
5. Squeeze the two legs together, then place the pushbutton into the body of the
playbutton.
6. Push the pushbutton down into the body until the legs pop out under the
body and hold the spring and pushbutton in place.
7. Place the lamp holder and microswitch into the body and push upwards until
the unit clips into place.
8. Confirm that all playbuttons light up correctly (refer to the chapter Machine
Modes).
If a playbutton does not light up when it should, check the connections and the
bulb.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedures:

To disassemble the playbutton (refer to Figure 4-10):
1. Remove the pushbutton assembly from the playbutton (as previously
described).
2. Place a small screwdriver between the lens cover and the pushbutton and
prise the lens cover off.
3. Turn the pushbutton upside-down, the lens and label should drop out.
To assemble the playbutton (refer to Figure 4-7):

1. Place the correct label between the lens cover and the lens.
2. Place the lens cover, complete with label and lens, onto the pushbutton and
clip into place.
3. Replace the lens/pushbutton assembly into the playbutton, as previously
described.

Clear Lens Cover
Printed Label
Lens
Pushbutton
Spring
Body
Mid Trim Panel
Coin Entry
Spacer
Lock Nut
Lamp
Lampholder
Bill Entry
Microswitch
Figure 4-12 Playbutton: Exploded View
Top Trim Panel

The top trim of the cabinet door is fabricated from sheet steel. If a player
communications unit is fitted, it is located in the top trim. A cut-out in the trim
panel provides an area for players to insert identification cards into the card reader
and for viewing the LCD display. Where a player communication unit is not
fitted, the top trim is used to hold an artwork panel.

To remove the top trim panel and artwork from the door.
2. Remove the bolts securing the top trim to the door.
3. Pull the top trim panel and artwork off the door.

Monitor Mask
The monitor mask is moulded from high-strength plastic. The mask and a foam
tape gasket match the contour of the monitor to provide a protective seal against
moisture and intrusion.
The mask is held in position by screws at the top and by the mid trim panel at the
bottom.

To remove the monitor mask:
2. Remove the screws from the top of the mask.
3. Gently ease the monitor mask up and out of the door.
Coin Tray
The coin tray provides a receptacle for coins or tokens that are dispensed by the
machine hopper, and also for coins or tokens that are rejected by the coin handling
system. The tray mounts onto the lower section of the door and is held in position
with four screws, which are inserted from the inside of the door. It consists of
three components that are held together by locating tabs. The four mounting
screws must be removed before the coin tray can be disassembled.
Removal, Disassembly, and Replacement Procedures:

To remove the coin tray from the machine (refer to Figure 4-8):
2. Remove the four screws that secure the coin tray to the door.
3. Gently pull the coin tray assembly from the door.
4. The end caps can be removed from the chip tray by pressing the front panel
of the chip tray in until the locating tabs disengage.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. When replacing the coin tray,
the location tabs should be aligned with the corresponding slots on the bottom of
the cabinet door.

Figure 4-13 Coin Tray
4.2.2 Top Box

Machines may be fitted with one of several variations of top box. The top box
consists of a welded steel shell with a door at the front, and it is bolted to the roof
of the cabinet.
The door of the top box is fabricated from steel; except for the rounded variation
in door shape which is moulded from plastic. The door is mounted to the top box
by four locating tabs that fit into slots provided on either side of the top box shell.
The bottom of the top box door is angled to fit underneath the top of the cabinet
door when closed. This design ensures that the top box door cannot be removed
unless the main door is open.
The top box provides an area for displaying the game pay table and also increases
the visual impact of the machine. The game pay table is displayed by a
polycarbonate artwork panel contained within the top box door. This panel is
backlit by a fluorescent lamp located within the top box.
Mechanical meters, stand-alone progressive systems, and communication
interfaces may also be housed in the top box.
Top Box Door

To remove the door from the top box (refer to Figure 4-9):
2. Holding the door by its sides, push it upwards to disengage the location tabs,
then pull the door from the top box shell.

To replace the door, locate the tabs on the top box door in the slots provided in the
top box shell, then pull the door downwards into position.
Artwork
The polycarbonate artwork panel located in the top-box door displays the game
pay table and acts as an attraction to players. It is backlit by the top box
fluorescent lighting system.

To remove the artwork panel from the top box door (refer to Figure 4-9):
1. Open the cabinet door, switch OFF the machine, and remove the top box
door.
2. Remove the two screws securing the lower trim of the door. Pull the trim
from the door.
3. Gently slide the polycarbonate artwork panel out of the door.
Top Box Shell
Top Box
Door
Fluorescent
Ballast
Artwork Panel
Lower Trim
Fluorescent Tube
A191024Y
Reflector Panel
Figure 4-14 Top Box

Fluorescent Lighting
The top box is equipped with fluorescent lighting for illuminating the top box
artwork panel and the top trim artwork. The fluorescent tube is mounted on the
front of a reflector panel inside the top box. The tube is driven by an electronic
fluorescent ballast, which is mounted to the back of the reflector panel. The
fluorescent ballast receives 24 V DC from the power control assembly via a loom.
The fluorescent tube is 15 W to AS1201 (IEC 81) standard.

WARNING
High voltages are present when the machine is switched
ON. These voltages may be lethal.
To replace the top box fluorescent tube (refer to Figure 4-9):

door.
2. To remove the fluorescent tube, rotate it 90° and pull it clear of its socket.
3. Insert the replacement fluorescent tube.
4. Replace the top box door, switch ON the machine, and close and lock the
main door. Check that the lighting system is operating properly.
To remove the top box reflector panel (refer to Figure 4-11):

door.
2. Disengage the T-section clip that locates the top of the reflector panel.
3. Remove the screw securing the reflector panel, then pull it forward, out of
the top box.
4. Unplug the looms from the fluorescent ballast and electromechanical meters
(if fitted).
5. Remove the reflector from the top box.
To replace the top box fluorescent lamp ballast (refer to Figure 4-11):
door.
2. Remove the reflector panel to gain access to the ballast.
3. Disconnect the looms from the ballast.
4. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and
remove ballast.
Light Tower
A light tower may be fitted to machines to provide an additional level of security,
customer service and house control. The light tower is screwed to the roof of the

top box (or the roof of the cabinet where a top box is not used) so that it may be
seen from a distance. Light towers are available with either two, three, or four
tiers. The tiers of the light tower illuminate in response to player requests
(change, reserve, etc) through the playbuttons and/or machine conditions (door
open, jackpot, etc). The colour of the light tower tiers and the corresponding
messages and functions may vary from machine to machine. Refer to Chapter 3 -
Machine Modes for a description of the light tower messages.
The light tower consists of coloured plastic bushes surrounding either two, three,
or four lamps. The assembly is held together by a metal shaft around which the
circular bushes are seated.
Note
The light tower may be disassembled in place or removed
from the top box as a single unit.
Disassembly, Replacement, and Removal Procedures:

To disassemble the light tower and replace components (refer to Figure 4-12):
2. Note the position, colour and display of each tier.
3. Remove the screw fastening the light tower cap and remove the cap.
4. The individual bushes and lamps can now be removed and replaced as
required.
5. Replace the light tower cap and screw and fasten the assembly together.
6. Switch ON the machine, close and lock the cabinet door, and check that the
light tower is functioning correctly.
To remove the light tower assembly (refer to Figure 4-12):

door.
2. Unplug the loom from the connector at the bottom of the light tower.
3. Remove the screws securing the light tower to the top box.
4. Withdraw the light tower from the roof of the top box.

Hex Nut
Light Tower Cap
Shaft
Lamp
Coloured
Bushes
Lamp Holder
Spacer
Earth Link
Connector to loom
from Mechanical
Meters Board
Mk5S2010.CDR
Screws through
roof of Top Box / Cabinet
Figure 4-15 Two-tier Light Tower - exploded view.

4.3 General Maintenance

For the general maintenance of the cabinet, cabinet door and top box, the
following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine servicing:
• Clean the exterior of the machine using a non-abrasive household cleaning
solution.
• Check that the cabinet door and top box door are not damaged.
• Check that all cabinet earth leads are in good condition and securely
connected.
• Check the condition of the artwork panels. Replace if necessary.
• Check that the machine security features (eg: cabinet door security switch)
are functioning correctly and are not damaged.
• Check the condition of the monitor mask and its sealing gasket. Replace if
necessary.
• Check the fluorescent lighting system works correctly. Replace any faulty
components if necessary.
• Check that all playbuttons function correctly. Replace if necessary.
• Check that there are no foreign objects in any of the security locks.
• Check that all doors and latches close and lock correctly. Adjust if
necessary.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Power Supply Assembly
________Chapter 5________
Power Supply Assembly
5.1 Physical Description................................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Basic Operation ....................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Functional Specification.......................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1 Input Requirements ............................................................................. 5-6

5.3.2 Output Requirements .......................................................................... 5-7
Mains GPO ............................................................................................................ 5-7
Monitor Output ....................................................................................................... 5-7
Generic Output 24 V DC........................................................................................ 5-7
Fluoro Output 24 V DC .......................................................................................... 5-7
Output 12 V DC ..................................................................................................... 5-7
Overcurrent Protection........................................................................................... 5-7
Overvoltage Protection .......................................................................................... 5-8
Inrush Current........................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.3 Control Signals .................................................................................... 5-9
Low-Power Mode Signal ........................................................................................ 5-9
Power Fail Signal ................................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.4 Physical Connections .......................................................................... 5-9
External Mains Switch Outputs .............................................................................. 5-9
Off-Line Converter Output ..................................................................................... 5-9
Fluorescent Lamp Outputs .................................................................................. 5-10
5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures............................................... 5-11

Fuses ................................................................................................................... 5-11
Power Supply Assembly ...................................................................................... 5-11
5.5 General Maintenance ............................................................................. 5-12

Power Supply Assembly MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location ........................................................................ 5-3
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly....................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram............................................................. 5-5
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution ........................................................................... 5-6
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Mains Connector to Power Supply Assemblyr ................................................5-9
Table 5-2 - Connector for Secondary Output 24 V .........................................................5-10
Table 5-3 - Connector for Secondary Output 12 V .........................................................5-10
Table 5-4 - Connector for Fluorescent Lamp Outputs....................................................5-10


The power supply assembly provides power to the electronic and electrical devices
within the machine. It also performs electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering
and protects the system from adverse input disturbances such as lightning and
voltage fluctuation.
The power supply metal enclosure is divided into two separate areas by an internal
metal bracket. The area on one side of the bracket accommodates the mains filter,
switches, fuses, surge protection, the solid-state relay, and wiring between the
components mounted to the metal enclosure. The area on the other side of the
bracket accommodates the off-line power supply, which consists of a switched
mode power converter PCBA.
To provide easy access to the mains switch, it is located in a separate switch box
that is positioned towards the front of the cabinet. The switch box is linked to the
power supply box using mains cable. The mains ON/OFF switch controls the
power to all equipment in the cabinet, apart from any equipment that may be
powered from the GPO outlet.
Power Supply
Assembly
Mains Switch
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location

24 V DC Output 12 V DC Isolated Output
Connectors for
Fluorescent Ballasts 150 mm
Power Converter PCBA
GPO
Mains Ventilation
Monitor
Connector Output, Area used for
and Fuse Switch, high-voltage
and Fuse assembly
Mains Voltage 300 mm

Selector
Front view View from right

Mains Input
127 mm
Mains
Switch
5s2pwr05
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly
The power supply assembly consists of the following components:

• Mains switch (located in the switch box).
• Mains input socket.
• EMI filter and surge protection device.
• Switched mode power converter PCBA, internally fused.
• Mains selector switch. This switch is used to select the correct mains input
voltage of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC.
• Generic 24 V DC output socket (connects to the Interface Board to provide
power for the low voltage components of the machine).
• 12 V DC output socket. This outlet provides power for subsidiary
equipment.
• 24 V DC switchable output for the electronically driven fluorescent lighting
system.
• Separately fused, switched mains output for the monitor
• Solid-state relay for switching monitor and fluorescent lamps to low-power
mode.
• General Purpose Outlet (GPO). This outlet is separately fused and switched
and used to provide mains power for any accessories or test equipment that
may need to be connected during maintenance.

5.2 Basic Operation

The power supply assembly receives 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC mains
input via a standard IEC socket.
The mains input is switched, filtered, and surge protected before connection to the
monitor and the off-line power supply.
The off-line power supply unit consists of a switched mode converter on a PCB.
It provides power outputs of 12 V DC and 24 V DC and the control signal Power
Fail. The low-power mode feature, whereby power is switched off to the monitor
and fluorescent tubes, is not used in the U.S. machine configuration.
The 24 V output is used to power the Main Board, the electronic ballasts for the
fluorescent tubes, and all other machine components requiring low-voltage power.
The 12 V output is used to power LAB subsidiary equipment or other machine
peripherals.
A separately switched and fused mains GPO outlet is provided via an IEC female
connector.
The power supply operation and distribution are shown in the following diagrams:
Mains Switch Box
Low Power Mode

Signal from
IEC Socket Main Board
Zero Cross
(Mains Input) Switch
Fuse
Live
FILTER Monitor
Output
Neutral
Switch
Ground
24 V DC
Fuse
Ballast
Interface Output x 2
Switch
Fuse
24 V DC
Mains Switched Mode
Output Power Converter
12 V DC
IEC Female Outlet A191-000.cdr
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram

12 V DC isolated Subsidary Equipment

Low Voltage
Output from
Power Supply
Assembly
24 V DC Fluorescent Ballasts
Interface PCB
24 V DC
24 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 22.5 V DC
12 V DC 5 V DC isolated 5 V DC 22.5 V DC 12 V DC
+/-12 V DC isolated 5 V DC
5 V DC isolated
+/-12 V DC isolated
Main PCB I/O Driver PCB

Machine Components
and Peripherals
5s2pwr03
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution
5.3 Functional Specification
WARNING
The mains voltage selector switch must be set for the correct
voltage range before power is connected to the machine.
Selecting the wrong voltage will cause irrevocable damage to
the machine.
5.3.1 Input Requirements

The power supply assembly is designed to accept a nominal mains input voltage
of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC. The mains input voltage defines
the monitor outlet voltage and the GPO outlet voltage. The mains selector switch
must be set to the correct mains input voltage before power is connected. This
switch is mounted on the metal housing of the power control assembly. The input
voltage ranges and current requirements are as follows:
220 V AC - 10% to 240 V AC + 10%, 50 Hz at 6 A maximum (198-264 V AC)
or
110 V AC - 10% to 120 V AC + 10%, 60 Hz at 10 A maximum (99-132 V AC)
Physical Connection
Mains input is via a standard IEC socket mounted on the metal housing.

5.3.2 Output Requirements

Mains GPO
Voltage and Current
+0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1 A.
Physical Connection
Mains output is via a standard female IEC socket. This output is separately
switched and fused. This fuse is externally accessible.
Monitor Output
Voltage and Current
+0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1.2 A.
Physical Connection
The monitor output is provided via a Molex Minifit Junior 6-pin connector plug
mounted on the metal housing. This output is separately fused, and the fuse is
externally accessible.
Generic Output 24 V DC
Provides power to the Interface Board for distribution to the Main Board, the I/O
Driver Board, and other low-voltage machine components and peripherals.
Maximum current is specified considering present requirements and allowing for
future flexibility.
Vout = +24 V DC +/-5%
Iout = 0.5 to 15.0 A continuous
Ripple = 200 mVp-p, measured at 0-20 MHz
Fluoro Output 24 V DC
Provides power for the fluorescent lighting system.
Vout = +24 V DC +/-5%
Output 12 V DC
Provides power for subsidiary equipment. Isolation of 3 kV is required between
this output, other secondaries and primary.
Vout = +12 V DC +/-5%
Overcurrent Protection
Generic Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the
range 17.1 A to 22 A. The response time for the overcurrent circuit is between 20
and 150 ms. Shorter response times can cause malfunction due to short circuit
glitches.

The power will recover if the overcurrent duration is shorter than the recovery
time. If the overcurrent duration is longer than the recovery time, the power
supply shuts down and has to be switched off/on for 1-3 seconds to recover.
During shutdown state, the output 24 voltage is less than 1 V DC.
Current limits are stated for no load condition in the fluoro 24 V output. Generic
output protection includes a 2 A current margin dedicated to the fluoro lamps.
Therefore, the current limits can be reduced by up to 2 A depending on the fluoro
load.
Fluoro Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current above 2 A.
The response time for the overcurrent circuit is specified in seconds. Shorter
times can cause malfunction of the electronic ballast and result in the fluoro tube
not starting. The output will recover when the overcurrent is removed.
Output 12 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the range 3.1-
7 A. The power will recover when the overcurrent is removed.
Overvoltage Protection
All peripherals connected to the 24 V output rail are protected against an
accidental increase of the output voltage. When the voltage rises above 28±1 V,
the entire power supply will shut down.
Inrush Current
Some peripherals exhibit significant inrush current when first powered. The
power supply has to cope with these temporary transients and remain stable.
Maximum steady-state current drawn from the 24 V output is 14.45 A. If a
Westrex printer is fitted, it causes an additional current spike that increases the
maximum current to 17 A. The steady-state current limitation for the output is
17.1 A. Therefore, the off-line converter is capable of handling the current
demands of normal machine operation.

5.3.3 Control Signals

Low-Power Mode Signal
This signal is generated by the Main Board and is used to switch the machine to
low-power mode. This feature is not used in this machine.
Power Fail Signal

The power fail signal provides a warning to the system of imminent mains failure.
The power supply is designed such that one full missing period of mains (50 Hz or
60 Hz) cannot have any effect on the correct operation of the power supply
assembly. The PFAIL signal is generated by the power converter PCBA when the
input mains rectified voltage drops below a threshold. This feature maintains the
+24 V DC output within regulation for a minimum of 25 ms following a power
fail signal. This allows enough time for mechanical meters to finish counting and
for the CPU to back up the audit data held in the machine RAM before the power
shuts down.
After mains voltage recovery, PFAIL can be inactivated when the level of the
24 V output reaches at least 22.5 V.
5.3.4 Physical Connections

External Mains Switch Outputs
The mains switch is connected to the power supply box via a 4-pin AMP, Mate-N-
Lock compatible, universal connector. This connector is used for its high current
capability per pin.
The pin functions of this connector are shown below.
Table 5-1 Mains Connector to Power Supply Assemblyr

Pin Signal Comments
1 N ret Mains neutral line switched
2 A ret Mains active line switched
3 A Mains active line to the mains switch
4 N Mains neutral line to the mains switch
Off-Line Converter Output

Two secondary output connectors are provided: one for the 24 V DC output and
the control signals, the other for the 12 V DC output.
The secondary output 24 V and the control signals are connected to the power
supply assembly via a Molex Minifit Junior 14-pin connector soldered directly to
the PCBA. The socket fits into an opening in the metal housing and connects, via
a loom, to the 16-way Minifit Junior connector P29 on the Interface Board.

The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Table 5-2 - Connector for Secondary Output 24 V

Pin Function Comments
1 LowPower low power mode (input)
2 OUTFAIL Output 24 V correct (output)
3 output 24 V power for machine, +24 V
8
9 PFAIL mains voltage missing (output)
10 output GND24 ground, +24 V
The secondary output 12 V is connected via a 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior

compatible header soldered directly onto the power supply PCBA. The socket fits
into an opening in the metal housing.
The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Table 5-3 - Connector for Secondary Output 12 V

Pin Function Comments
1 output 12 V isolated power, +12 V
3  
4  
Fluorescent Lamp Outputs

Voltage and Current
24 V DC ±5% at 0 A to 2.0 A for all outputs.
Physical Connections
Two 24 V outputs are provided to power the top box fluorescent lamp and the
cabinet door fluorescent lamps. The electronic ballasts used provide the
possibility of daisy chaining the 24 V power rail for future adaptability. Outputs
are via 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior compatible connectors, which are mounted on
the metal housing. The pin functions are shown in the table below.
Table 5-4 - Connector for Fluorescent Lamp Outputs

Pin Signal Function
1  
2 GND 24 V ground, 24 V
3  
4 +24 V power for fluorescent lamps, +24 V

5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures

Fuses
The switched mode power supply fuse is an internal non-serviceable component.
If this fuse is blown, the power supply box must be shipped to the manufacturer
for service (contact the nearest Aristocrat office).
The monitor fuse and the GPO fuse are externally accessible and may be replaced
as described below (see Figure 5-2):
WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the power supply
assembly even when the machine is switched OFF. The mains
input cable must be unplugged before attempting to replace a
fuse.
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO
switch.
2. Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly.
3. Remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder by unscrewing it in an
anticlockwise direction. The fuse should spring out of the holder.
4. Remove the blown fuse and insert the new fuse into the cap. Insert the fuse
cap into the holder, screwing it in an clockwise direction. Do not
overtighten.
5. Switch ON the mains switch and the GPO switch. Check that both the
monitor and the mains GPO have power. Close and lock the cabinet door.
Power Supply Assembly

To remove the power supply assembly from the machine (see Figure 5-2):
WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the Power Supply Assembly
even when the machine is switched OFF. The mains input cable
must be unplugged before attempting to remove the power supply
assembly.
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO
switch.
2. Remove the hopper to gain access to the power supply assembly (refer to the
chapter Hopper).
3. Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly.
4. Unplug all other looms and connectors from the power supply assembly.
5. Remove the screw securing the earth lead from the power supply assembly
to the cabinet.

6. Unscrew the two screws that secure the power supply assembly to the
cabinet base. One of these screws is positioned below the mains input plug
and cannot be removed while the plug is connected.
7. Pull the power supply assembly forward and remove from the cabinet.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Ensure that the earth lead is
correctly replaced.
Note
Run a complete machine test after replacing the power supply
box or any power supply component.

The following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine
maintenance:
• Check that all connections to the power supply box are secure.
• Remove any dust or dirt accumulating on the power supply assembly.

MVP Video Service Manual Coin Chute Assembly
________Chapter 6________
Coin Handling Assembly
6.1 Overview ................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 CC-62 Coin Comparator........................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 6-4

6.2.2 Functional Description................................................................ 6-5
6.2.3 Replacing the Sample Coin........................................................ 6-8
6.2.4 Adjustment Procedures.............................................................. 6-9
6.2.5 Removal and Replacement ...................................................... 6-11
6.2.6 CC-62 Comparator Connector Pinouts .................................... 6-12
6.2.7 Fault Finding ............................................................................ 6-13
6.3 Condor Coin Validator ........................................................... 6-14
6.3.1 Basic Operation........................................................................ 6-14

6.3.2 Removal and Replacement ...................................................... 6-16
6.3.3 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts.............................. 6-17
6.3.4 Fault Finding ............................................................................ 6-17
6.4 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor.......................... 6-18
6.4.1 Physical Description ................................................................. 6-18

6.4.2 Basic Operation........................................................................ 6-18

Coin Chute Assembly MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 6-1 CC-62 Coin Chute Assembly - Location ........................................................6-5
Figure 6-2 CC-62 Coin Comparator - Exploded View .....................................................6-6
Figure 6-3 CC-62 Sensor Coil Arrangement ...................................................................6-7
Figure 6-4 CC-62 Sensor Assembly................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-5 CC-62 Comparator - accept/reject adjustment ..............................................6-9
Figure 6-6 CC-62 Null Field Adjustment........................................................................6-10
Figure 6-7 Condor Coin Handling Assembly .................................................................6-14
Figure 6-8 Condor Coin Validator ..................................................................................6-16
Figure 6-9 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor ..................................................6-18
List of Tables
Table 6-1 J1 - Connects to the Interface Board ............................................................6-12
Table 6-2 J2 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Emitters....................................................6-12
Table 6-3 J3 - Connects to the Accept Solenoid Coil ....................................................6-12
Table 6-4 J4 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Detectors..................................................6-12
Table 6-5 J5 - Connects to the Sensor Coils.................................................................6-12
Table 6-6 Fault Finding..................................................................................................6-13
Table 6-7 Condor Validator Interface Signals................................................................6-17
Table 6-8 Fault Finding..................................................................................................6-17

6.1 Overview
The coin handling system consists of a coin comparator/validator for determining
the validity of inserted coins, a coin diverter and coin chuting for directing the
coins to the correct destination, and a photo-optic module for monitoring the
position of the coin diverter. The handling system is fitted and adjusted at the
factory to suit a specific coin denomination.
The coin entry, located on the cabinet door trim, is designed to accept a specific
coin denomination for a particular machine. It will not accept oversized or bent
coins. The coin entry ensures that the coin is directed into the
comparator/validator correctly.
The coin comparator/validator, coin chuting and diverter solenoid are mounted to
a panel on the inside of the cabinet door (see Figure 6-1). Coins inserted into the
machine pass through the comparator/validator. The comparator/validator sends
signals to the Main Board, via the Interface Board and Driver Board, that allow
the machine software to determine the validity of the coins. Accepted coins are
directed to the accept chute, and rejected coins are directed to the chip tray via the
reject chute.
The coin diverter solenoid is powered from the 24 V DC supply. The Coin
Comparator/Validator receives 12 V DC derived from the 24 V DC supply using a
switch mode regulator on the Driver Board.
One of several comparators/validators may be fitted as part of the coin handling
assembly. A coin comparator compares the properties of inserted coins with the
properties of a sample coin installed in the comparator. A coin validator, on the
other hand, compares the properties of inserted coins with preset limits stored in
the validator software.
The machine is compatible with the following coin comparators/validators:
1. Coin Mechanisms Inc. CC-62 or CC-46 Coin Comparator.
2. Condor CN133A Validator.
3. S7 Coin Validator in single coin mode.
The CC-62 comparator and Condor validator are described in this chapter.

6.2 CC-62 Coin Comparator
6.2.1 Basic Operation

The operation of the coin chute assembly is shown in Figure 6-1.
Once in the sensor assembly, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter,
thickness, and mass.
The sensor assembly is connected to the comparator PCBA via a wiring loom.
The comparator PCBA compares the inserted coin with the sample coin held
within the sensor assembly.
Rejected Coins
If the comparator rejects the inserted coin, it is sent to the chip tray via the reject
chute.
Alarm
If the comparator accepts the inserted coin, it is directed to the coin accept chute.
As the coin exits the sensor assembly, it passes the comparator photo-optic sensor.
If the comparator detects a slow moving coin, or a coin travelling in the wrong
direction:
• the machine is shut down
• an alarm is sounded
• the machine displays a fault message
Accepted Coins
If the coin passes normally, a credit signal is sent to the Main Board via the Coin
Handling Interface section of the I/O Driver Board and the electronic and
electromechanical credit meters are incremented.
The coin diverter solenoid directs the accepted coins to the hopper. If the hopper
is full, the coin diverter solenoid redirects the accepted coins to the cash box via
the cash box feed chute. A photo-optic sensor is used to monitor the position of
the coin diverter.
Components
The CC-62 Coin Comparator consists of two modules: the sensor assembly and
the comparator PCBA, which are connected via a wiring loom. The CC-62
contains the following major components (see Figure 6-2):
• sensor coil
• dampener arm
• coin accept solenoid
• photo-optic emitter and detector
• comparator PCBA
• wiring loom.

Comparator Bracket
- connects to underside
of door mid trim Sensor Assembly
Slide
Comparator PCBA
To
Repla
Coin
ce
Reflector Panel
Diverter Solenoid
Coin Diverter Loom to

Interface Board
Loom to
Power Supply
t
t en
Accepted
as sc
Coins into
ll re
Ba uo
Hopper
Fl
Rejected
Coins into
Chip Tray Cutout for Hopper
Coin Chute
Accepted
Mk5S2050.cdr
Coins into
Cashbox Spring-loaded Locating Tabs
Figure 6-1 CC-62 Coin Chute Assembly - Location
6.2.2 Functional Description

The comparator PCBA performs the following functions:
• drives the sensor coils
• monitors the pick-up coil for valid coins
• activates the coin accept solenoid when a valid coin is detected
• monitors the coin travel using photo-optic sensors
• provides signals to the Main Board indicating when a valid coin has been
detected, when a coin has left the sensor assembly, and when incorrect coin
travel has been detected.

6-6
Coin Chute Assembly

Dampner Arm
Rail & Insert Counterweight
Sample Coin
Fixing Nut
Torsion Spring
Figure 6-2 CC-62 Coin Comparator - Exploded View
Wiring Loom
Main Plate
Coin Comparitor PCB
Sensor Coil
Retaining Shield Base Plate
Mounting Bolt
Cover
Joins the Sensor Coil

Wiring Loom
J2 (5-Way)
J3 (3-Way)
J4 (2-Way)
Joins the J5 (2-Way)
Wiring
Photo-Optic Loom
Emitter
Mounting Stud

Coin Accept
Adjustable Rail
Cover Plate Solenoid
mk5s2051
Photo-Optic Joins the

Detector Wiring Loom
Coin Exit
Adjustable Guide
When a coin enters the sensor assembly, it hits a weighted lever which slows
down the passage of the coin. Weights on the lever can be changed to suit the
coin denomination.
The coin then passes the scanner unit (see Figure 6-3), which contains three sensor
coils, L1, L2 and L3. L1 and L3 are driven by the comparator PCBA to create a
magnetic field. The central coil, L2, is a pick-up coil used to monitor the
magnetic field. The sample coin sits between L1 and L2 and disturbs the
magnetic field. When a coin that is identical to the sample coin passes between
L2 and L3, it disturbs the magnetic field in exactly the same way as the sample
coin. The result is a momentary null field in the middle. This null is detected by
the comparator and registered as a valid coin.
Oscillator
L1 L2 L3 Null Field
when identical
Player's coins are in line
Sample Coin Coin
Pick-Up Coil
cc46_02
CC-46 Coin Comparator
Figure 6-3 CC-46 Sensor Coil Arrangement
When the comparator registers a valid coin, it sends a CSENSE signal to the
Driver Board and activates the coin accept solenoid. This solenoid is attached to a
gate that opens when the solenoid is activated, allowing the valid coin to fall
directly into the accept chute.
As the coin exits the sensor assembly, it passes through the internal photo-optic
sensor. This sensor consists of two emitter/detector pairs that allow the CC-62
comparator to detect the speed and direction of the passing coin.
If the coin is travelling in the wrong direction or is travelling too slow, then a
CERROR signal is sent to the Driver Board and the machine locks up. The
CERROR pulse indicates a Yoyo or Coin Blockage condition depending on the
length of the pulse. The lockup condition will be either Yoyo, Coin Acceptor
Fault, or Coin Optic Fault.
If the coin passes normally then a CCREDIT signal is sent to the Driver Board.
When the machine is paying out, the Main Board sends the signal NECOINBLK
to disable the coin comparator. If any coins are inserted in the coin entry during
this time, the comparator directs them to the reject chute.

6.2.3 Replacing the Sample Coin

To replace the sample coin (refer Figure 6-4):
2. Slide the scanner unit (on the sensor assembly) to the right on the rail insert
until the sample coin can be removed.
Note
In some markets the sample coin is sealed
into position. Permission may be required to
remove the sample coin.
3. Insert a newly minted sample coin in the scanner unit.

4. Carefully release the scanner unit.
5. Check that the sample coin is seated firmly between the scanner unit and the
fork of the rail insert.
6. Switch ON the machine, and close and lock the cabinet door.
Sample Sensor
Coin Assembly
Rail Insert
Fork of the
Rail Insert
Mk5s2055
Figure 6-4 CC-62 Sensor Assembly

6.2.4 Adjustment Procedures

Two types of adjustments may be made to the coin comparator:
• accept/reject adjustment,
• null field adjustment.
Note
These are field adjustments only. More accurate
adjustments require workshop equipment.
Accept/Reject Adjustment
The accept/reject adjustment is performed by turning the accept/reject
potentiometer at the front of the comparator PCBA (see Figure 6-5). This
adjustment is normally required when:
• the comparator has just been installed,
• the accept/reject ratio becomes unacceptable,
• slugs or coins are being accepted incorrectly,
• the denomination of the sample coin has been changed.
To adjust the accept/reject ratio of the coin comparator:

1. Check that the coin comparator has the correct sample coin installed.
2. Turn the accept/reject potentiometer completely clockwise (see Figure 6-5).
The comparator should reject all coins.
3. Repeatedly insert coins as you slowly turn the potentiometer anti-clockwise
in small steps, until the coins are continuously accepted.
4. Repeatedly insert a slug and check that it is rejected. If the slug is accepted,
repeat steps 2 and 3 then insert the slug again.
J2 - To Primary
Sensing Coils Accept / Reject
J3 - To Photo Potentiometer
Optic Emitter
J4 - To
Accept Coil
+ Reject Accept
J5 - To Photo-
Optic Detector
J1 - To
Interface Board
mk5s2052
Figure 6-5 CC-62 Comparator - accept/reject adjustment

Null Field Adjustment

The null field adjustment is normally a factory adjustment and should not be
required unless the comparator has been dropped or handled roughly. The null
field adjustment aligns the two sensor coils to ensure the comparator is operating
at its best.
To adjust the null field of the coin comparator:

1. Remove the sensor assembly from its installed position without
disconnecting the wiring loom. You need to have access to both sides of the
coin comparator.
2. Remove the sample coin from the coin comparator.
3. Set a high quality digital multimeter to measure in the range of 0 to
200 mV AC.
4. Connect the multimeter probes to the test pin (pin 4 of the 5-way connector
J2 on the comparator) and to the machine ground.
CAUTION
The allen head screws are screwed into
plastic. Take extreme caution to prevent
stripping of the thread.
5. Rotate the allen screws on the back of the comparator (see Figure 6-6) until
the voltage on the test pin is a minimum. Normally this should be below
20 mV AC.
6. Remove the probes and re-install the sample coin.
Allen Head Screws
63
dm0
Figure 6-6 CC-62 Null Field Adjustment

6.2.5 Removal and Replacement

To remove the comparator sensor assembly (see Figure 6-4):
2. Carefully unplug the connectors from the sensor assembly. Do not pull on
the wires.
3. Push the assembly upwards, to the full extent of the top locating groove.
This action causes the sensor unit to come free of the bottom locating
groove.
4. Swing the bottom of the unit outwards.
5. Pull the sensor assembly downwards and clear of the coin chute assembly.
To replace the sensor assembly, reverse the above procedure.
To remove the coin comparator PCBA:

2. Carefully unplug the connectors from the comparator PCBA. Do not pull on
the wires.
3. The unit is mounted to the panel by a single bolt through the center. To
remove, simply remove the nut at the front of the unit and then carefully pull
the assembly clear of the mounting bolt.
To replace the comparator, reverse the above procedure

6.2.6 CC-62 Comparator Connector Pinouts

The connectors J2, J3, J4, and J5 on the left of the comparator PCBA are
connected via a loom to the sensor assembly. The connector J1 on the right of the
comparator PCBA connects to P12 on the Interface Board.
The coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board receives the signals from the
coin comparator and solenoid optics and converts them into the form required by
the Main Board. For a description of the coin handling interface refer to the I/O
Driver Board chapter.
The signals to and from the coin comparator are shown in the following tables.
Table 6-1 J1 - Connects to the Interface Board

Pin Function
1 Inhibit (YL)
2 +12 V DC (RD)
3 Not Connected
4 Credit Output (BL)
5 Error Output (OR)
6 Sense Output (GN)
7 GND Common (BK)
Table 6-2 J2 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Emitters

Pin Function
1 Anode 0 V DC (BK)
2 Cathode + 1.2 V DC(RD)
Table 6-3 J3 - Connects to the Accept Solenoid Coil

Pin Function
1 Coil Return 0 V DC (GN)
2 Coil Supply +12 V DC (GN)
Table 6-4 J4 - Connects to the Photo-Optic Detectors

Pin Function
1 Return 0 V DC (BK)
2 LED 2 Collector (VL)
3 LED 1 Collector (OR)
Table 6-5 J5 - Connects to the Sensor Coils

Pin Function
1 L1 (YL)
2 L3 (RD)
3 L2 (WH)
4 Test Pin (for null field adjustment)
5 L2 (BK)

6.2.7 Fault Finding
Table 6-6 Fault Finding

Fault Probable Cause Corrective Action
Coins continually rejected. A. Sample coin not in the Check that the sample coin is
correct location in the correctly located.
comparator.
B. Comparator not Check that the comparator has
working. power. If it has, replace the
comparator.
Coins jamming in the cash The cash box chute is Unblock / realign the chute and
box feed chute. blocked or misaligned. tighten the fixing screws.
All coins are going to the The diverter solenoid 1. Check that the solenoid has
cash box and the hopper is is not working. power.
empty. 2. Check that the coin diverter has
not jammed.
3. Check that the hopper probe is
not permanently grounded.
Rejected coins not falling Coins jammed in the Carefully clear the reject chute.
into the coin tray. reject chute.
Coins accepted by the The photo-optic Check that the module and its
comparator but not module in the connectors are secure.
registered as credits. The comparator is faulty. Replace if necessary.
machine locks up.

6.3 Condor Coin Validator

The operation of the coin chute assembly is shown in Figures 6-7 and 6-8.
The Condor Coin Validator CN133A is pre-programmed to accept a specific coin
type and cannot be reprogrammed in the field. The validator is clearly labelled
with the pre-programmed coin type.
Once in the validator, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter,
thickness, and magnetic properties.
The validator uses two sets of sensors for coin discrimination: opto and inductive.
This combination gives a high degree of security.
Validator Bracket
- connects to underside Condor Validator
of door mid trim
Coin Chute
Mounting Panel
Diverter Solenoid
Coin Diverter Loom to

Interface Board
Loom to
Power Supply
t
t en
Accepted
as sc
Coins into
ll re
Ba uo
Hopper
Fl
Rejected
Coins into
Chip Tray Cutout for Hopper
Coin Chute
Accepted
MVPcondr.cdr
Coins into
Cashbox Spring-loaded Locating Tabs
Figure 6-7 Condor Coin Handling Assembly
The inductive sensor pair has been designed to achieve a linear field independent
of coin position. In a typical validator, the coin position relative to sensors is
critical for accurate discrimination.
Two inductive sensors are positioned on opposite sides of the coin path and are
switched between in-phase and anti-phase as the coin passes. The network
impedance is affected by the coin thickness and conductivity. The resulting
amplitude change is measured by a microcontroller and forms the basis of the
inductive discrimination. The readings are compared against preset limits stored
in the validator.

The opto system measures coin diameter. There are three longitudinal IR beams
across the coin path. A 16-bit timer uses a 3-point measurement system to obtain a
precise measurement of diameter. The resulting calculation of diameter is
compared against preset limits. Like the inductive sensors, the opto sensors are
part of a closed loop system that maintains very fast triggering for accurate timing.
It also ensures that slight variations, which occur from mechanism to mechanism
(such as component tolerance), are irrelevant.
Rejected Coins
If both sets of sensor readings are not within the required limits, the validator
rejects the inserted coin and sends it to the coin reject tray.
Accepted Coins
If both sets of sensor readings are within the required limits, the coin is deemed
true, the Valid Advance Coin Signal (VACS) output pulse is generated, and the
coin accept solenoid is activated. This solenoid is attached to a gate that opens
when the solenoid is activated, allowing the valid coin to fall directly into the
accept chute.
As the coin exits the validator, it passes a photo-optic sensor and a CREDIT
output pulse is generated.
Accepted coins are directed to either the hopper or the cash box, depending on the
position of the coin diverter, which depends on whether or not the hopper is full.
Alarm
If the validator detects a coin travelling in the wrong direction (yo-yo) or a failed
or blocked credit or reject optic, an Alarm output pulse is generated.
On receiving this Alarm signal:
• the gaming machine shuts down
• an alarm is sounded
• a fault message is displayed on the screen
Inhibit All
For greater functionality and overall security, the host machine can send the
INHIBIT ALL signal to prevent the validator from accepting any coins or tokens.
Self Calibration
The validator automatically recalibrates itself in relation to its environment
approximately every 210 seconds.
Diagnostics
At power up, the validator automatically runs a self diagnostic test on the
following critical areas:
• Inductive Coils
• Reflective Sensors
• Diameter Opto Sensors
• Credit Opto Sensors

If there is a failure in any one of these areas, the LED will flash red continuously
and the validator will not accept any coins until power is removed and the fault
condition corrected.
Debris Flap
The CN133A Validator incorporates a debris flap that allows direct access to the
coin path for inspection and the clearance of coin jams.
6.3.2 Removal and Replacement

To remove the validator:
2. Carefully unplug the loom from the validator to the Interface Board. Do not
pull on the wires.
3. Push the assembly upwards, to the full extent of the top-locating groove.
This action causes the validator to come free of the bottom-locating groove.
4. Swing the bottom of the unit outwards.
5. Pull the validator downwards and clear of the coin chute assembly.
To replace the sensor assembly, reverse the above procedure.
Coin Entry
Locating Pin
(4 off)
Debris Flap
Connector
for Loom
to Machine
Accepted
Coins
Rejected
Coins
Figure 6-8 Condor Coin Validator

6.3.3 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts

The connector J1 on the right of the validator connects to P12 on the Interface
Board.
The coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board receives the signals from the
coin validator and solenoid optics and converts them into the form required by the
Main Board. For a description of the coin handling interface refer to the I/O
Driver Board chapter.
The signals to and from the coin validator are shown in the following table.
Table 6-7 Condor Validator Interface Signals

Pin Signal Description
1 0V Ground
2 VACS Generated when valid coin is sensed
3 Alarm Yo-yo or optic blocked
4 Credit Generated when valid coin exits validator
5 Keyed Pin
6 +12V Power from I/O Driver Board
7 Inhibit Inhibit signal from host machine
6.3.4 Fault Finding

Fault Probable Cause Corrective Action
Coins continually rejected. Validator fault 1. Check that the validator has
power.
2. Remove any blockage or debris
from the validator.
3. Otherwise, replace the validator.
All coins are going to the The diverter solenoid 1. Check that the solenoid has
cash box and the hopper is is not working. power.
empty. 2. Check that the coin diverter has
not jammed.
3. Check that the hopper probe is
not permanently grounded.
Rejected coins not falling Coins jammed in the Carefully clear the reject chute.
into the reject tray. reject chute.

6.4 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor
6.4.1 Physical Description

Figure 6-9 shows the diverter solenoid and the photo-optic sensor, mounted on the
door reflector panel.
Coin Comparator /
Validator Assembly
Wires to
Main Board
Diverter Reflector Panel
Solenoid
Plunger
Tab Mk5S2053D
Photo-Optic Loom to
Sensor Driver Board
Figure 6-9 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor

The solenoid plunger is mechanically linked to the coin diverter in the coin chute
assembly. When no power is applied to the solenoid, the plunger is extended and
valid coins fall into the hopper. When 24 V DC is applied to the solenoid, the
plunger retracts, causing the diverter to redirect valid coins to the cash box. A tab
at the lower end of the plunger interrupts the beam in the photo-optic sensor when
the plunger is fully extended. When this beam is interrupted, the signal CDIVPOS
to the Driver Board is set to high.
In this way, the machine software can indirectly monitor the destination of
accepted coins by monitoring the position of the diverter. If the machine software
detects that five consecutive coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cash
box, or vice versa, the machine locks up with the fault message COIN
DIVERTER FAULT.


For general maintenance of the coin handling system:
• Coin Comparator
• Clean the rail inserts and surrounding areas using a clean dry cloth or a soft,
long-bristle paint brush.
• Remove the sample coin and clean the sensor coils, housing and surrounds.
Replace the sample coin.
Note
In some markets the sample coin is sealed
into position. Permission may be required to
remove the sample coin.
• Coin Validator
• Open the debris flap and clean the coin path using a clean dry cloth or a soft,
long-bristle paint brush.
• Coin Chute Assembly

• Check that all assembly bolts and nuts are tight.
• Clean the coin chuting with a clean dry cloth or a soft, long bristle paint
brush.
• Photo-optic Sensor
• Remove the photo-optic sensor and clean the photo-optic detector and LED
faces with a clean dry cloth or a soft, long-bristle paint brush.
• Check that the photo-optic sensor is seated correctly.
• Check that the loom sockets are secure.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Hopper
________Chapter 7________
ADH Hoppers
7.1 Overview ................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Aristocrat Disc Hopper ............................................................ 7-3
7.2.1 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 7-6

7.2.3 Fault Finding .............................................................................. 7-8
7.2.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures..................................... 7-9
7.2.5 Disassembly and Assembly Procedures .................................. 7-10
7.2.6 Test Procedure......................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7 General Maintenance ............................................................... 7-11

Hopper MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 7-1 ADH Hopper Location ....................................................................................7-3
Figure 7-2 ADH Hopper- rear view ..................................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 ADH Hopper - Exploded View........................................................................7-5
List of Tables
Table 7-1 Fault Finding....................................................................................................7-8

7.1 Overview
The gaming machine may be fitted with an Aristocrat Disc Hopper.
7.2 Aristocrat Disc Hopper

The Aristocrat Disc Hopper (ADH) is mounted onto a base plate that slides into a
guide plate on the base of the cabinet (see Figure 7-1). It is locked in position by a
spring-loaded release pin.
When the hopper is pushed into position, a socket at the back of the hopper
automatically connects to a plug on the cabinet base. This socket provides power
and control signals to the Hopper PCB, which controls the hopper.
The Hopper PCB drives a 24 V DC motor, which rotates the disc within the
hopper through the gearbox. The motor and gearbox are one assembly and are
replaced as one unit.
Top Handle
Position
of the
Bill Acceptor
Side Handle
Guide
Guide
Spring Loaded Hopper Platform

Release Pin
Removal Path
Figure 7-1 ADH Hopper Location

Casting
Second Coin
Wiper Leaf
Spring Screws
Second Coin
Wiper Leaf Spring
Photo-optic Detector
(Position X)
Socket Photo-optic Detector
(Position Y)
Spring Loaded
Motor Release Pin
Gearbox
5S2HOP01.CDR
Hopper PCB
Figure 7-2 ADH Hopper- rear view
Hopper Parts
The stationary parts of the hopper are (see Figure 7-3):
• the casting — with gearbox, side handle, and motor attached
• the casting plate — which is bolted to the casting with one fixed and three
spring-loaded bolts
• the bowl — with internal baffles, coin slider, and probe which is secured to the
casting plate.
The parts of the hopper that are rotated by the motor are:
• the disc
• the spigot
• the coin stirrer.


Retaining
Screw
Baffle
Bowl
Hopper Bowl Second Coin
Second Coin Mounting Wipe-off Spring
Wiper Leaf Spring Fixed Bolt
Figure 7-3 ADH Hopper - Exploded View
Disc Pins Spigot
Coin Wiper Coin Stirrer

Pawl
Photo-optic
Dectector
Coin Runner
Coin Slider
Central
Spindle Bolt Probe
Coin Slide Springs
Disc Securing Screw

Hopper
Coin Chute Floating Disc
Hopper Bowl Support Bearing (3)
5S2HOP03.CDR
Mounting
Coin Runner Spring Loaded Refuse Opening
Retaining Nuts Bolt Drive Boss
Hopper Platform
Hopper
7-5
The Hopper PCB transmits two outputs from detectors:

• Output to the machine from a probe, which detects when the hopper is full.
• Output to the machine from a photo-optic detector, which detects coins as they
are dispensed from the hopper.
The photo-optic detector is mounted in one of two positions: Position X or

Position Y in Figure 7-2.

The hopper holds and dispenses coins. Coins entering the machine are fed into
the hopper bowl or the cash box chute through the coin handling system. Coins
are fed into the cash box when the hopper is full.
The hopper dispenses coins into the coin tray when the player has sufficient
credits and presses the COLLECT/CASHOUT pushbutton. Coins are dispensed
via the hopper coin chute which juts out through the slot in the door reflector
panel. The hopper can pay out any number of coins above the token value and
below the collect limit. The token value is the coin value accepted by the
machine, and the collect limit is the maximum value of coins that can be paid
from the hopper.
If the player presses the COLLECT/CASHOUT pushbutton when the number of
coins in credit is greater than the collect limit, the machine locks up. The credits
are paid as a book pay by the cashier, and the machine must be reset using the
Jackpot Reset (Cancel Credit) key.
If the player presses the COLLECT/CASHOUT pushbutton when the number of
coins in credit is less than the cancel credit amount but greater than the number of
coins in the hopper, all coins in the hopper are dispensed. The machine then locks
up. The attendant must refill the hopper and reset the machine before the balance
of coins is dispensed.
If the machine pays out too many coins, or not enough, the machine locks up and
cannot be played until the problem has been fixed.


Coin Dispensing
On receiving a drive signal from the Main Board, the Hopper PCB starts the
hopper motor. The motor rotates the disc in an anticlockwise direction.
As the disc turns, the coins are caught between the disk pins and the edge of the
spigot. If there is more than one coin between two pins on the disc, the excess
coins are cleared by the second coin wiper.
The second coin wiper pawl ejects the pay-out coins from the rotating disc into the
hopper coin chute. For each coin entering the hopper coin chute, the photo-optic
detector sends a signal to the Main Board. The coin runner guides the coins into
the hopper coin chute.
The individual coins exciting the hopper interrupt the photo-optic detector, which
sends a signal to the Main Board, via the Hopper PCB and the Interface Board.
The Main Board counts the optic interrupts, and when the correct payout number
is reached, it terminates the hopper drive signal to the Hopper PCB. The Hopper
PCB stops the motor, which is then held by an electronic brake. The second coin
wiper pawl prevents the next coin from falling from the disc.
Hopper Full Detection

A probe is fitted onto the hopper bowl to detect a full hopper (see Figure 7-3).
When the coins reach the probe, they create an electrical circuit through the coins
to ground. The probe is monitored by the Main Board. If the probe indicates that
the hopper is full, the software operates the diverter solenoid (situated on the front
of the inner door) which diverts the coins to the cash box. The position of the
probe in the hopper can be adjusted to alter the maximum coin level.
Coin Jamming Prevention

A spigot and coin stirrer, friction fitted to the disc, keep the coins moving in the
hopper bowl (see Figure 7-3). A spring-loaded coin slider prevents the hopper
from jamming due to coin stacking.
Two baffles, secured with spring-loaded bolts, control the coin level in the bowl.
The casting plate is connected to the casting by four bolts. The top bolt is fixed,
but the other three are spring loaded. This is to prevent serious damage to the
casting if there is a large coin jam in the bowl.
An opening on the hopper casting allows dirt and foreign objects to escape.
In the event of a coin jam, the motor will automatically stop and then restart after
about eight seconds. If this does not remove the jam:
• the motor automatically stops.
• the machine locks up.
• the software displays a fault message on the video monitor.

Hopper Interface Signals

The Aristocrat Disc Hopper interfaces with the Main Board via the 14-way Minifit
connector P25 on the Interface Board.
7.2.3 Fault Finding

Fault Probable Cause Action
Too many coins being The leaf spring holding Tighten the leaf spring fixing screws or
dispensed and the the second coin wiper replace the spring.
machine locks out. pawl is bent or loose.
Hopper not working. A. No power is supplied. 1. Check that power is reaching the hopper.
B. Faulty connector. 2. Check that the connector is not damaged
and is correctly seated.
C. Hopper is not in the 3. Check the hopper mounting spring-
correct location. loaded bolt is in the correct position.
D. Motor is faulty. 4. Replace the motor and gearbox
assembly.
Coins jamming at the Coin jam at top of coin Rotate the disk backwards by inserting
top of the coin chute chute fingers through gaps in the casting and
exerting finger pressure.
Coin runner is loose or Place the coin runner point as close as
not in the correct possible to the disk and tighten the
position. securing nuts. Also check if the shims are
damaged.
Coins stacking at the Bottom coin slide Check if the springs are hooked into the
bottom of the bowl. springs are not secure. hopper spring fixing holes.

7.2.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures
CAUTION
Always use the handles to lift the hopper.
Never lift the hopper by the motor and the
end of the bowl, as this action may bend the
motor spindle.
CAUTION
Avoid handling the second coin wiper leaf
spring. If this spring is damaged, it may
cause an incorrect coin payout and the
machine to lock out.
To remove the hopper from the cabinet (see Figure 7-1):

2. Lift the spring-loaded release pin.
3. Rotate the hopper 90° by sliding the left-hand side outwards. This action is
necessary because part of the hopper bowl actually sits behind the note
acceptor (where fitted).
4. Slide the hopper straight out of the machine.
5. Lift the hopper by grabbing the handle with one hand and placing the other
hand under the base of the bowl.
Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty
equipment.
To replace the hopper in the cabinet:

1. Lift the hopper by its handles.
2. Slide the hopper into the guides on the base of the cabinet until the hook on
the right hand side is in place.
3. Push on the hopper handle to pivot the hopper 90° until the spring-loaded
pin is engaged in the retaining hole.
4. Switch ON the machine, and close and lock the cabinet door.
Note
Run a complete machine test after replacing
the hopper.

7.2.5 Disassembly and Assembly Procedures

Disassembly Procedure
To disassemble the hopper (see Figure 7-3):
1. Remove the bowl assembly:
a. Remove the four spring-loaded bolts that attach the casting plate to the
base of the hopper.
b. Disconnect the hopper probe at the side of the bowl.
c. Remove the photo-optic detector and the fixed bolt that restrains the
wire to the detector.
d. Pull away the bowl (still attached to the casting plate) from the base of
the hopper.
2. Remove the two coin-runner retaining nuts.
3. Remove the hopper coin chute.
CAUTION
If shims are fitted under the coin runner,
ensure they are not damaged when
removing the coin runner or coin chute. Do
not discard the shims.
4. Remove the coin runner.

5. Remove the second coin wiper pawl and the second coin wipe-off spring.
CAUTION
Ensure that the spring-loaded bearings do
not fall out from their mountings in the
casting when removing the disc.
6. Remove the disc:

a. Remove the centre bolt that holds the disc assembly in place.
b. Remove the coin stirrer and spigot.
c. Remove the four securing screws from the centre of the disc and
withdraw the disc from the drive boss.
7. To remove the motor/gearbox unit:
a. Disconnect the motor PCB and loom from the hopper PCB.
b. Remove the nuts securing the motor/gearbox mounting bracket to the
disc and spindle housing.
c. Tap out the drive pin, and remove the bolts securing the
motor/gearbox unit to the bracket.

Assembly Procedure
To assemble the hopper:
1. Replace the disc:
a. Slide the drive shaft end of the disc into the driving boss, ensuring the
slot on the shaft engages with the drive pin in the gearbox.
b. Insert the four disc securing screws in the centre of the disc and tighten.
c. Place the second coin wiper pawl in position, insert the screws and
tighten.
d. Place the second coin wiper spring in position, insert the two securing set
screws and tighten.
e. Place the spigot and coin stirrer in position.
f. Insert the centre bolt through the centre hole of the spigot and coin stirrer
and tighten onto the driving boss.
g. Place the coin runner on the two studs. Screw on the two nuts and
washers, but do not tighten. Locate the point of the coin runner as close
as possible to the spigot without rubbing, and ensure free running of the
disc underneath the coin runner. Use shims if required.
h. Slide the hopper coin chute under the two bolts holding the coin runner
and tighten the nuts.
2. Replace the bowl assembly:
a. Place the bowl assembly (still attached to the casting plate) in position on
the base of the hopper.
b. Insert the four spring-loaded bolts into the casting plate and tighten.
c. Place the photo-optic detector in position, insert the screw and tighten.
d. Place the fixed bolt in position so that it restrains the wire for the photo-
opto detector, and tighten.
7.2.6 Test Procedure

To test the hopper after servicing, follow the hopper test procedure outlined in the
chapter Machine Modes.
7.2.7 General Maintenance

For the general maintenance of the hopper:
1. Remove any dust from the photo-optic detector with a soft paint brush or by
blowing through a drinking straw. Dirt accumulating on the detector can
result in faulty coin counting.
2. Check that the second coin wiper leaf spring has not been bent away from
the second coin wiper pawl. Replace if necessary.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Video Monitor
_______Chapter 8_______
Video Monitors and Touch Screen
8.1 Overview .................................................................................. 8-3
8.2 General Description ................................................................ 8-3
8.3 Tatung Monitor ........................................................................ 8-4
8.3.1 Physical Description ................................................................... 8-4

8.3.2 Technical Description ................................................................. 8-6
8.3.3 Adjustment Procedures.............................................................. 8-8
8.4 Ceronix or Kristel .................................................................. 8-11
8.4.1 Technical Description ............................................................... 8-11

8.4.2 Adjustment Procedures............................................................ 8-13
8.5 Removal and Replacement Procedures .............................. 8-13
8.6 General Maintenance ............................................................ 8-14
8.7 Touchscreen Option ............................................................. 8-15
8.7.1 Touchscreen Operation............................................................ 8-15

8.7.2 Performance............................................................................. 8-16
8.7.3 Machine Interface..................................................................... 8-16
8.7.4 Touchscreen Specifications ..................................................... 8-17
8.7.5 Notes on Handling.................................................................... 8-18
8.8 Degaussing............................................................................. 8-19

Video Monitor MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 8-1 Tatung Video Monitor Assembly ....................................................................8-5
Figure 8-2 Monitor Assembly – Kristel and Ceronix ......................................................8-12
Figure 8-3 Video Monitor Assembly...............................................................................8-14
Figure 8-4 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor.........................................................................8-15
Figure 8-5 Capacitive Sensing – operation....................................................................8-16
Figure 8-6 Touchscreen Connection .............................................................................8-17
List of Tables
Table 8-1 Adjustments and Functions - Picture Control PCB .........................................8-8
Table 8-2 Adjustment and Functions - CRT PCB............................................................8-9
Table 8-3 Adjustment and Functions - Main Monitor PCB ..............................................8-9
Table 8-4 Touchscreen Control Signals ........................................................................8-17

8.1 Overview
The video monitor consists of a metal chassis manufactured by Aristocrat, a
cathode ray tube from RCA Thompson or Philips, and electronics supplied by
either Tatung, Ceronix, or Kristel. This chapter provides a description of the three
monitor types. For full servicing details refer to the manufacturer’s manual.

The video monitor is a 20" (51 cm) VGA type capable of up to 640 x 480 pixel
resolution (the resolution used is 640 x 400 pixels). The major components of the
video monitor assembly are: the cathode ray tube (CRT), the video monitor
printed circuit boards (PCBs) and the video monitor chassis. The Ceronix monitor
assembly also includes an isolation transformer because it can not run directly
from the mains supply.
The CRT and video PCBs are all mounted onto a common metal chassis that
slides along the game display shelf into the cabinet (refer to Figure 8-3). The
video monitor assembly is secured in place by a single screw, inserted from the
underside of the game display shelf.
The slide-in chassis system enables the video monitor assembly to be removed and
replaced easily, and also to connect to the rest of the machine via a single, self-
aligning, multi-pin connector on the back of the chassis. This connector transmits
the monitor power and the video drive signals from the video controller, which is
built into the ARM250 microprocessor.
The PCBs associated with the monitor assembly are (refer to Figure 8-2):
• Picture Control PCB
• Main Monitor Chassis PCB
• CRT Neckboard PCB.
The Picture Control PCB provides for picture adjustment and is located at the
front of the monitor assembly for easy access.

8.3 Tatung Monitor

The Picture Control PCB is located at the front of the monitor assembly for easy
access. It provides the following controls and adjustments for the monitor picture:
R871 - Brightness. R671 - Horizontal Position.
R670 - Horizontal Hold. R770 - Vertical Hold.
R772 - Vertical Size. R773 - Vertical Position.
VR2 - Horizontal Size. R958 - Contrast.
The following controls and adjustments are available on the Main Monitor PCB:
R111 - Power Supply Voltage. R651 - ZD602 Anode Voltage.
R650 - Horizontal Frequency. R652 - Horizontal Position.
R714 - Vertical Linearity. VR1 - Pincushion.
VR3 - Pincushion.
The following controls and adjustments are available on the CRT PCB:
R950 - Red Gain. R952 - Green Gain.
R953 - Blue Gain. R938 - Red Background.
R937 - Green Background. R936 - Blue Background.

RED GAIN
* Not a field R950
adjustment
GREEN GAIN
R952
CRT Earth CRT Anode BLUE GAIN
Strap R953
* RED BACKGROUND R938
* GREEN BACKGROUND R937

* BLUE BACKGROUND R936
CRT PCB
Monitor
Chassis
Monitor
Connector
CRT Chassis
Picture Control PCB Monitor Main PCB
Note: Not field adjustments
POWER SUPPLY
BRIGHTNESS R871
VOLTAGE R111
HORIZONTAL ZD602 ANODE
POSITION R671 VOLTAGE R651
HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
HOLD R670 FREQUENCY R650
VERTICAL HORIZONTAL POSITION
HOLD R770 R652
VERTICAL VERTICAL
SIZE R772 LINEARITY R714
VERTICAL PINCUSHION VR1
POSITION R773
HORIZONTAL PINCUSHION VR3
SIZE VR2
CONTRAST R958
5s2mon03
Figure 8-1 Tatung Video Monitor Assembly

8.3.2 Technical Description

The video monitor electronics consist of the following circuits:
• Sync Interface circuit.
• Vertical circuit.
• Horizontal circuit.
• Power supply.
The sync interface circuit synchronises the operation of the vertical and horizontal
circuits for video display on the CRT. The video circuit interfaces video inputs to
the monitor, sets the gain (gain is the proportion of multiplication between the
input signal and output signal of the amplifier) of the video, generates beam
current for the CRT anode and controls CRT blanking (blanking is the turning off
of the scan lines as they traverse back from the end of the screen back to the
beginning again).
The vertical circuit controls the size and position of the vertical raster (raster is
the scan lines which are visible on the screen) on the CRT. The vertical circuit
also initiates vertical blanking via the video circuit.
The horizontal circuit controls the size and position of the horizontal raster on the
CRT and also initiates horizontal blanking via the video circuit.
The power supply circuit supplies the required voltage from an isolated supply.
Sync Interface Circuit

The sync interface circuit consists of two comparators that receive the vertical and
horizontal sync signals from the Main Board (via the Interface Board). The
electronics takes the signals from the Main Board and synchronises their operation
so that the vertical and horizontal circuits operate in unison.
Vertical Circuit
The vertical circuit consists of:
• Vertical control circuit.
• Vertical output circuit.
• Vertical auto bias circuit.
The vertical control circuit receives the vertical sync pulse from the sync circuit
and initiates the vertical oscillator. The output from the vertical oscillator is
converted to a linear vertical ramp current by a ramp generator.
The output from the vertical control circuit drives the vertical output circuit. The
vertical output circuit consists of a power driver which drives the vertical
deflection yoke of the CRT. The vertical output circuit produces evenly spaced
horizontal lines on the CRT.
The vertical auto bias circuit monitors the power driver output and sends a
feedback signal to the vertical control circuit to maintain the output at the required
level.

Horizontal Circuit
The horizontal circuit consists of:
• Horizontal control circuit.
• Horizontal driver circuit.
• Horizontal output circuit.
The horizontal control circuit incorporates a variable sync delay and a phased loop
to generate the horizontal timing. The horizontal position (H.POSI) adjustment on
the picture control PCB sets the sync delay time to control the horizontal raster
position on the CRT.
The horizontal sync pulse is used to trigger a saw tooth generator in the horizontal
control circuit. The output from saw tooth generator is gated with the delayed
sync pulse to control the horizontal oscillator. The output of the horizontal
oscillator is applied to the horizontal driver.
The horizontal driver converts the output from the horizontal control circuit to the
high base current necessary to drive the horizontal output circuit.
The horizontal output circuit consists of a transistor, this transistor produces a
linear ramp current in the CRT horizontal yoke which provides the horizontal
raster. The output from the transistor is also applied to the flyback transformer.
The flyback transformer (FBT):
• Generates a 25 kV potential for the anode of the CRT.
• Provides the focus voltage and the filament power for the CRT.
• Provides beam current to the horizontal size control circuit.
• Provides the flyback pulse to the video circuit for blanking.
The anode voltage multiplied by the beam current is the power that lights up the
phosphor on the CRT.
The horizontal size control circuit has the following inputs:
• H.SIZE adjustment from the picture control PCB.
• Beam current from the flyback transformer.
• Vertical deflection voltages from the vertical output circuit.
These inputs are combined to produce the diode modulator control voltage. This
voltage controls the current flow in a diode placed in series with the horizontal
yoke. Maximum current flow in the diode determines maximum horizontal size
on the CRT.
Power Supply
The monitor incorporates a switching regulated power supply circuit, which
receives mains voltage directly from the machine power supply assembly. This
circuit generates all required operating voltages for the monitor.


Adjusting the Monitor Picture
The monitor picture can be modified in various ways, most of the adjustments are
available on the picture control PCB for easy access. Other adjustments are
available on the CRT and Main Monitor PCBs. Refer to Figure 8-1.
The tables below describe the controls and functions available on the Picture
Control, CRT, and Main Monitor PCBs.
Table 8-1 Adjustments and Functions - Picture Control PCB

Adjustment Function
Brightness (BRIGHT) The brightness adjustment controls the bias of the amplifier.
Changing the brightness moves the colour outputs further up
toward colour saturation or down toward black.
Horizontal Position (H.POSI) The horizontal position adjustor controls the position of the
picture area from left to right.
Horizontal Hold (H.HOLD) The horizontal hold adjustor controls the horizontal oscillator
frequency. Changing the H.Hold
Vertical Hold (V.HOLD) The verticals hold adjustor controls the vertical oscillator
frequency. Changing the V.Hold
Vertical Size (V.SIZE) The vertical size adjustor controls the size of the picture area
from top to bottom.
Vertical Position (V.POSI) The vertical position adjustor controls the position of the
picture area from top to bottom.
Horizontal Size (H.SIZE) The horizontal size adjustor controls the size of the picture
area from left to right.
Contrast (CONTRAST) The contrast adjustor controls the gain of the amplifier. The
contrast control changes the range of colour outputs making it
either narrower or wider. The wider the range the more
difference (contrast) between dark and light colours.

Table 8-2 Adjustment and Functions - CRT PCB

Adjustment Function
Red Gain (R GAIN) The red gain adjustor controls the proportion of amplification for
the red signal. Increasing the red gain will enhance the red
section of the colour spectrum
Green Gain (G GAIN) The green gain adjustor controls the proportion of amplification
for the green signal. Increasing the green gain will enhance the
green section of the colour spectrum.
Blue Gain (B GAIN) The blue gain adjustor controls the proportion of amplification
for the blue signal. Increasing the blue gain will enhance the
blue section of the colour spectrum
Red Background (R K) The red background adjustor controls the proportion of red in
the background.
Green Background (G K) The green background adjustor controls the proportion of green
in the background.
Blue Background (B K) The blue background adjustor controls the proportion of blue in
the background.
Table 8-3 Adjustment and Functions - Main Monitor PCB

Adjustment Function
R111 - Power Supply Voltage power supply voltage adjustment.
R651 - ZD602 Anode Voltage X-Ray protection.
R650 - Horizontal Hold Frequency of horizontal oscillator

Frequency
R652 - Horizontal Position Synchronisation delay, positions picture on the screen.
Centring
R714 - Vertical Linear Linearity of vertical output.
VR1 - Pincushion Corrects pincushion distortion.
VR3 - Pincushion Phase adjustment.

Basic Monitor Settings

The basic monitor setup settings are described below. Complying with these
procedures will provide an initial reference point for fine tuning the monitor
picture. The following procedures require the monitor to be removed from the
machine and connected to it via a monitor extension lead to allow access to the
PCBAs whilst the monitor is powered.
WARNING
High voltages are present at the rear of the
monitor when the monitor is powered.
Adjustment of the video monitor should be carried out in conjunction with the
monitor tests available in the Operator Mode Menu Self Test Mode Monitor
Test. Refer to the chapter Machine Modes.
1. Select the Basic Colours Test from the Monitor Test menu. In this
procedure only the white section of the screen is used.
2. With the basic colours displayed (Red, Green, Blue and White) set the
contrast (R958) and brightness (R871) controls on the picture control PCB
to minimum.
3. Remove the monitor as previously described and set R Gain (R950), G Gain
(R952), B Gain (R953), R K (R938), G K (R937), and B K (R936) on the
CRT PCB to approx. 65% max.
4. Adjust the Screen control on the flyback transformer until an image appears
on the screen.
5. Adjust the R K, G K and B K until the image appears closest to 'white'.
6. On the picture control PCB set the contrast to approx. 65% max. and the
brightness control to maximum.
7. Readjust the R K, G K and B K controls to give a clean white image.
8. Adjust Red Gain, Green Gain and Blue Gain for an image closest to white.

8.4 Ceronix or Kristel
8.4.1 Technical Description

Refer to separate Ceronix or Kristel service manuals.
Power Supply
Kristel
The monitor incorporates a power supply regulator circuit, which receives mains
voltage directly from the machine power supply assembly. This circuit generates
all required operating voltages for the monitor.
Ceronix
The Ceronix monitor requires isolated mains input, which is supplied by an
isolated transformer box mounted on the inside of the monitor chassis. A power
supply regulator circuit converts the isolated mains input to the voltages required
by the monitor.

CRT Earth CRT Anode

Strap
CRT Neckboard
PCB
Monitor
Chassis
Monitor
Main Monitor Self-aligning
CRT Chassis PCB Connector
Picture Control PCB
HORIZONTAL
SIZE
VERTICAL
SIZE
VERTICAL
POSITION
HORIZONTAL
POSITION
MASTER GAIN
(CONTRAST) stopmon
Figure 8-2 Monitor Assembly – Kristel and Ceronix


The Picture Control PCB is located at the front of the monitor assembly for easy
access. It provides the following controls and adjustments for the monitor picture:
• Horizontal Raster size
• Vertical Raster size
• Vertical Picture position
• Horizontal Picture position
• Video Gain (Contrast)
These controls can be adjusted only to a limited amount. The brightness will be
maintained throughout the life of the unit by the auto-brightness circuit.
All colours are automatically adjusted by the auto bias circuit and will remain
constant throughout the life of the unit.
Pincushion distortion is automatically adjusted using the auto bias circuit.

To remove the monitor assembly from the machine:
WARNING
High voltages are present at the rear of the monitor when the machine
is ON. Switch OFF the machine before removing the monitor.
CAUTION
The monitor assembly is a heavy item (approximately 20 kg). Care
should be taken when removing the monitor assembly to prevent
personal injury or damage to the monitor.
To remove the monitor:

2. Remove the locating screw from the underside of the game display shelf.
3. Gently pull the monitor assembly from the machine. The steel frame of the
monitor assembly has openings at either side to facilitate handling.

Monitor Locating
Bolt (4 off)
CRT
CRT PCB
Main Monitor PCB
Isolation
Transformer
(Ceronix only)
Multi Pin
Connector
Picture Monitor
Control PCB Chassis
(Tatung shown) M5S2mon.CDR
Figure 8-3 Video Monitor Assembly

For general maintenance of the video monitor:
• Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces.
• Clean the monitor screen with a soft cloth and suitable cleaning agents.
• Check that all connectors are secure.
• Check that all monitor assembly PCBs are secure and properly connected.
• Check that the monitor and monitor mask fit correctly when the cabinet door
is closed.

8.7 Touchscreen Option

The monitor may be fitted with a touchscreen that enables games to be played by
touching designated areas of the screen. The touchscreen is attached to the
monitor screen and a touchscreen controller in mounted within the monitor
chassis. The controller has an RS-232 interface with the gaming machine and all
data signals are wired into the existing self-aligning connector at the rear of the
monitor assembly. The controller also receives 12 V DC power from the monitor.
8.7.1 Touchscreen Operation

The MicroTouch ClearTek touchscreen uses analog capacitive touch technology.
At the core of this technology is an all-glass sensor with a transparent, thin-film
conductive coating fused to its surface. A proprietary glass overcoat is applied
over the conductive coating, completely protecting and sealing the entire sensor.
Along the edges is a narrow, precisely printed copper electrode pattern that
uniformly distributes a low voltage, AC field over the conductive layer. This
electrode is taped over on the completed touchscreen to protect it. When a finger
makes contact with the screen surface, it “capacitively couples” with the voltage
field, drawing a minute amount of current to the point of contact. The current
flow from each corner is proportional to the distance to the finger, and the ratios
of these flows are measured by the controller and used to locate the touch.
Figure 8-4 All-Glass Capacitive Sensor

Figure 8-5 Capacitive Sensing – operation
8.7.2 Performance
The ClearTek touchscreen has a resolution of 1,024 x 1,024 touch points. The
controller averages the entire area of finger contact to a single point, giving users
pixel-by-pixel control when touching the screen. The touchscreen records a touch
within 8-15 ms of finger contact. This performance gives users virtually instant
response. Because the point of capacitive coupling occurs exactly when a finger
makes contact with the screen surface, only the slightest touch is required to
register.
The touchscreen is also very robust, allowing it to perform in contaminated
environments. Contaminants such as grease, water, and dirt will not interfere with
the capacitive screen’s speed, accuracy, or resolution. In addition, the controller
will not respond to continually slow-moving (not moving) objects on the screen
(eg. food particles). The touchscreen is also fitted gasket to prevent liquids or
other contaminants from getting into the monitor assembly.
The touchscreen employs a solid-state sensor with no active or moving
components. Its all-glass overcoat allows it to be resistant to scratches from sharp
objects and not show wear over time. The ClearTek ASIC-based controller
enables it to eliminate noise from EMI, drifting caused by temperature shifts and
humidity, and damage from static discharges.
8.7.3 Machine Interface

The touchscreen controller has an RS-232 interface with the gaming machine
Main Board. The interface signals are wired into the self-aligning connector at the
back of the monitor. The pins used for the touchscreen signals are shown in the
table below.

Table 8-4 Touchscreen Control Signals

Pin Name Function
8 Touchscreen 0 V Reference signal for serial (RS-232) data
7 Touchscreen RS-232 Rx RS-232 serial data from the touchscreen assembly
9 Touchscreen RS-232 Tx RS-232 serial data to the touchscreen assembly
The touchscreen signals, along with the monitor signals, connect via a loom to
connector P26 on the Interface Board. Serial Channel 0 is configured on this port
to provide RS-232 communication with the Main Board.
The touchscreen controller is powered from the monitor’s power supply. The
12 V DC power is taken from the Monitor Main Board.
Figure 8-6 Touchscreen Connection
8.7.4 Touchscreen Specifications

Power Requirement 12 V DC
Power Consumption Less than 2 W
Resolution 1024 x 1024 touchpoints
Baud Rate 2400 baud between controller and game
Response Time 8 ms – 15 ms
Touch Contact Requirement 3 ms
Accuracy ±1% error
Output Communications Bi-directional asynchronous RS-232C serial
communication
Operating Temperature Range 0°C - 55°C
Operating Humidity Range 0-95% non-condensing

8.7.5 Notes on Handling

The touchscreen has black tape protecting the electrodes at the edge of the screen.
This tape must not be removed.
When unpacking a monitor, always lift directly out of the carton and place base-
down on a flat bench.
If you need to place the monitor face-down, make sure there is sufficient padding on
the bench and no stray pieces of metal or sharp objects around, so as to prevent
scratching of the touchscreen face.
NEVER "roll" the monitor from being base-down to face-down, as the edges of
the touchscreen are delicate and the overall weight of the monitor is substantial.
There is a very good chance you will crack or break the edge of the touchscreen,
rendering it useless.
When installing the monitor into your machine, take care not to knock or bang the
taped edges of the touchscreen - this area is delicate.
Check the cabinet door to ensure that no pressure is applied to the taped area.
Excessive pressure on the taped area may result in edge breakages or vibrational
wear damage to the electrode pattern. Never slam the cabinet door onto the
screen.
The monitor must ALWAYS be transported in the original packaging.
Monitors returned to MicroTouch Australia for repairs will only be accepted if they
are returned in the original packaging. This is to provide maximum protection for
the monitor, and minimise the chances of any freight damage.
CAUTION
There is also the associated safety risk of tube
implosion when shipped in inadequate packaging.
Periodically clean the touchscreen with water, isopropyl alcohol, Windex, or a

similar non-abrasive cleaner. Ensure the use of grit-free cleaning cloths.

8.8 Degaussing
Magnetic interference can cause colour aberrations on the monitor screen. To
restore the colour purity of the monitor picture, the monitor and cabinet need to be
degaussed.
Note that the monitor colour aberrations can occur due to normal delivery
movements, installation operations, and through leaving the main door open
during power-up processes.
The monitor assembly is fitted with an automatic degaussing coil and circuitry that
emits a degaussing pulse during power up, provided the machine has been without
power for 30 minutes. This time delay enables the circuit varistors to cool
sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous
content and the cabinet.
To carry out degaussing:
1. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse.
2. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds. Automatic
degaussing will now occur.
3. If the aberration persists, due to the presence of a particularly strong
magnetic field, it will be necessary to make use of a degaussing wand.
Follow the standard field procedures for degaussing-wand usage.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Ticket Printer
_______Chapter 9________
Serial Ticket Printer
9.1 Technical Description .............................................................. 9-3
9.1.1 Physical Description ................................................................... 9-3

9.2 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 9-10
9.2.1 Paper Roll Replacement .......................................................... 9-10

9.2.2 Ribbon Cassette Replacement................................................. 9-12

Ticket Printer MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure 9-1 Location of Printer ..........................................................................................9-3
Figure 9-2 Printer - Physical Description .........................................................................9-4
Figure 9-3 Printed Ticket Examples - 1 ...........................................................................9-8
Figure 9-4 Printed Ticket Examples - 2 ...........................................................................9-9
Figure 9-5 Replacing the Paper Roll..............................................................................9-11
Figure 9-6 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette....................................................................9-12
List of Tables:
Table 9-1 Printer Specifications.......................................................................................9-5
Table 9-2 Print Formats...................................................................................................9-5

Note
The information provided in this chapter is a
general overview of the Westrex serial
printer. Full servicing details can be
obtained from the Westrex Service Manual.

The printer module is located at the bottom of the cabinet. It is positioned by a
guide plate on the floor of the cabinet and is secured by two screws. The printer
interfaces with the machine logic via a loom that connects to one of the serial
channels on Interface Board. Machines fitted with a printer may also be fitted
with a Himec hopper. Figure 9-1 shows the location of the printer module.
Printer Screw (2)
printr2.cdr
Figure 9-1 Location of Printer

The major components of the printer module are as follows (refer to Fig 9-2):
• Chassis assembly,
• Electronic controller PCB,
• Take-up unit,
• Westrex 4800 serial printer with:
• Electric motor, gear train and encoder gear,
• Print head and drive shaft,
• Paper and ribbon feed mechanisms,
• Bail.
Take Up Unit Motor

& Gear Train Paper Handler
Cut / Feed Switch Paper Roll

(2 Ply)
Journal
Journal Paper Spool
Bail Activation Take Up
Mechanism Unit
Bail (Closed Chassis
Position)
Receipt Paper 4-Way

Connector
Print Head (Power)
Drive Shaft
Motor & Gear 25-Way
Train Connector
Ribbon (Data)
Cassette
Drive Pin
Printer
Platform Mk5V082
Figure 9-2 Printer - Physical Description

Table 9-1 Printer Specifications

Parameter Value
Print method Impact, 9-pin dot matrix.
Print speed Up to 185 characters per second (CPS).
Paper feed Friction rollers.
Paper Width: 83mm (3.25"); Diameter: 100mm (4"), 2-ply,
Aristocrat Part No. 6213-563356
Inking Replaceable ribbon cassette.
Ribbon cassette Aristocrat Part No.. 6213-563357 (Black)..
Power requirements 24V DC ± 5%, 1.5 A (3.0 A peak).
Input interface RS232C serial interface, variable baud rate, default is 2400 baud.
Printer:
The dot matrix print head is used with the following print formats:
Table 9-2 Print Formats

Parameter Value
Font matrix 4 x 9 or 5 x 9 normal; 8 x 9 or 10 x 9 elongated.
Columns 60 (19.5 characters per inch) or 66 (21.5 characters per inch).
Printer area width 78mm (3.07") on the 83mm (3.25") wide paper.
CAUTION
The printer is controlled from the machine
software. The variable printer formats can
be changed via the printer EEPROM
parameters. However, attempting to change
any of the standard parameters may cause a
malfunction.
Electronic Controller PCB:

The electronic controller PCB is mounted within the printer chassis. It
communicates with the Main Board logic of the machine via the RS-232 interface
configured on COM3. This communications channel has six input/output signals
including data I/O. Refer to the chapter Communications Configuration Board for
further details.
Paper Roll:
The paper is two-ply self carbonating, the inner ply goes to the journal spool (copy
- yellow colour). The outer ply is cut and deposited to the coin tray after printing
(original - white colour).
When the paper is running low, the machine will display a Printer Paper Low
message until the paper is renewed.
Figure 9-3 shows the paper path through the feed rollers. The two plies of paper
must follow their correct paths to ensure correct operation and that the journal
copy is not cut off with the original and deposited into the coin tray.

Ribbon Cassette:
The average life expectancy of a ribbon cassette is 1.5 million characters. The
ribbon cassette should be replaced when the printouts become unclear. The
printer will not function if a ribbon cassette is not installed.
CAUTION
Never add ink to a used cassette, always
replace it with a new one.
Take-up Unit:
The take-up unit is mounted on top of the chassis. It provides a motor driven shaft
for the journal paper to spool onto, as well as a shaft for mounting the two-ply
paper roll.

Depending on the machine software configuration, the printer can provide the
following:
• A ticket showing the customer's winnings (which would usually be
redeemable from the cashier).
• A printout of audit information.
• A printout of machine security events such as:
• Main door opening,
• Logic cage door opening,
• Cash box door opening,
• Mechanical meter accesses
• Resetting of the electronic meters - both before and after the reset.
The printer module receives data, control signals, and 24 V DC power from the
machine via the Interface Board.
Movement of the print head (left to right and right to left) is provided by a
mechanical drive shaft on which the print head is mounted. The drive shaft is
driven by the electric motor and gear train. The drive motor mechanism includes
an encoder gear and sensor which derives timing pulses from the motor. The
electronic controller PCB uses the timing pulses to determine the exact position of
the print head along the drive shaft.
The printing process is achieved by the print head needles striking the inked
ribbon and leaving a corresponding dot on the paper. Printed characters are
formed by combinations of print head needles, the activation of the needles is
controlled by the printer electronics.

Each complete movement (left to right or right to left) of the print head constitutes
a print cycle (a printed line). To complete a print cycle the drive shaft rotates four
times and the encoder gear rotates 24 times (geared 6:1 reduction ratio between
motor and drive shaft). Thus, each print cycle contains a fixed number of encoder
pulses, a print head needle can be energised on every other encoder pulse. A print
cycle includes the actual printing time and the time needed to change the direction
of the print head movement.
Paper is friction fed from one printed line to the next by the feed roller. The feed
roller is controlled by a pawl and solenoid mechanism which activates the feed
roller once for each revolution of the drive shaft by a cam on the drive shaft.
Ribbon advancement is controlled by the ribbon feed assembly which is driven off
the same cam as the line feed mechanism.
The bail cuts off the receipt from the paper roll. It is activated by reversing the
motor drive direction and energising a solenoid (cutter lockout solenoid). A lever
arrangement driven by a drive shaft cam operates the blade mechanism to cut the
paper. When the motor drive direction is reversed again, the blade mechanism is
retracted and normal printing operations can resume.
Note
The paper cutting mechanism is designed to
cut single ply paper only.
The take up unit consists of a separate chassis which is secured to the printer
chassis. The take up unit has a paper handler for mounting the journal ply of the
paper roll and provides an electric motor, shaft, gear train and clutch assembly for
the journal paper, the Cut/Feed switch is also mounted to the take up unit. The
motor runs faster than actually required to spool the journal, the clutch providing
slippage to keep the tension of the journal spool constant regardless of the
diameter of the spool. The motor is driven by the electronic controller PCB.
The following diagram provides examples of cash, audit meter and test printouts.
The information printed on the tickets may vary somewhat between machines due
to customer and gaming authority requirements.

Venue:
Address:
Not Configured
Not Configured
Permit No: Not Cfg.
TEST PRINT
Terminal No: 0418000f Date: 12/12/94
Firmware No: 04100041V Time: 12:00 S
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1234567890
CURRENT METERS
MAIN METERS
12/12/94 12:00
MASTER PERIOD
12/12/94 12:00 12/12/94 12:00
$ 0.00 Cash Box In $ 0.00
$ 0.00 Hopper In $ 0.00
$ 0.00 Hopper Refills $ 0.00
$ 0.00 Hopper Out $ 0.00
$ 0.00 Cash Tickets Out $ 0.00
$ 0.00 Net Revenue
$ 0.00 Net Hopper
Current Credit: $ 0.00
GAME METERS
Game ID: Not Configured
Game Name: Not Configured Venue: Not Configured Permit No: Not Cfg.
Address: Not Configured
Games Played: 0 Money Played: $ 0.00 Terminal No: 0418000f Date: 12/12/94
Games Won: 0 Money Won: $ 0.00 Firmware No: 04100041V Time: 12:00 S
MISCELLANEOUS METERS CASH TICKET

Door Accesses Faults Comms Errors
Cash Ticket Amount:
Main:
Logic:
1 Coin In:
0 RAM:
0 CRC:
0 Validation:
0
0
$2.50
Cashbox: 0 System: 0 Timestamp: 0 Amount in Words:
Topbox:
Meters: 0
1 TWO dollars and FIFTY cents
Voucher Number: 1
Machine Status: GAME DISABLED Universal Time : 12:00:00 12/12/94
13c3
Certificate Number: 1199 0455 4521
Ticket Number: 9 Authorisation Number:0000 1235 748
Mk5V169
Figure 9-3 Printed Ticket Examples - 1

Figure 9-4 Printed Ticket Examples - 2


To remove the printer from the machine (refer to Fig 9-1):
2. Disconnect the loom connector from the printer.
3. Remove the two screws securing the printer module to the cabinet base.
4. Slide the printer to the right until the location tabs are disengaged from the
machine base and lift the printer from the machine.
Note
It is advisable to run a printer test or a
complete machine test after replacement.
9.2.1 Paper Roll Replacement

It is not necessary to remove the printer from the machine to replace the paper roll.
To remove the paper roll (refer to Fig 9-4):
2. Tear through both plies of paper at the tear point.
3. Remove the journal spool by lifting it off the take-up unit. Remove the
paper from the journal spool and replace the spool into the take up unit, it
should snap into place.
4. Remove the old paper roll, retaining the roller pin for the new paper roll.
CAUTION
Take care not to damage the Paper Low
micro-switch when handling the paper roll.
To replace the paper roll:

1. Insert the roller pin through the centre of the new paper roll.
2. Place the paper roll into the paper handler. Make sure the paper can unroll.
3. Direct the 2-ply paper down into the guide slot until the paper stops against
the feed mechanism. It may be easier to remove the journal spool while
guiding the paper into the guide slot.
4. The paper can now be advanced automatically through the printer.
5. Turn the machine power ON. After a few seconds, press the Feed switch
(shown in Figure 9-2) until about 150 mm (6") of paper is extended beyond
the bail. You may need to help feed the paper into the feed mechanism
(through the guide slot) until it is picked up by the feed mechanism.
6. Lift the bail and pull both plies out of the bail slot.
7. Separate the two plies and guide the journal paper back through the bail slot,
then up and through the journal slot.

8. Split the journal spool, wrap the paper over the spool ①, then clip the other
end of the journal spool over the paper and spool to secure it ②. Advance
the journal spool by hand until the journal paper is taut.
9. Guide the receipt paper back through the bail slot and close the bail. Press
the Cut switch (shown in Figure 9-2) to verify.
10. The paper is now loaded.
2-Ply Paper
Roll
Paper Handler
Journal
Spool
Roller Pin
Journal Paper Tear Point

Journal Slot
Bail Slot
Guide
Receipt
Paper
Feed
Mechanism
Bail
Ribbon Cassette Printer
Paper Path Through Printer
2
1
Loading Journal Paper

onto Journal Spool
Mk5V167
Figure 9-5 Replacing the Paper Roll

9.2.2 Ribbon Cassette Replacement
Note
Use only the specified ribbon cassettes to
ensure print quality and ribbon life.
To replace the ribbon cassette (refer to Fig 9-5):

2. Lift the bail, and remove the used cassette by pulling it from the chassis and
off the drive pin.
3. Before inserting the new cassette, turn the knob anti-clockwise until the
ribbon is taut.
4. Open the bail, mount the cassette onto the drive pin whilst keeping the
ribbon between the platen and the print head. When the cassette is properly
mounted it will snap onto the chassis.
5. Make sure the ribbon is threaded through the guide slot and is taut.
6. Lower the bail. The ribbon cassette is now loaded.
Platen Guide Slot
Ribbon
Print Head
Bail
Print
Head
Ribbon
Cassette
Drive Pin
Mk5V168
Ribbon
Cassette
Knob
Figure 9-6 Replacing the Ribbon Cassette


General maintenance for the Serial Printer consists of the following activities:
2. While depressing the Feed switch (shown in Figure 9-2), switch the
machine power ON.
3. After a few seconds, the self-test will start printing. Once printing, the
feed switch can be released.
4. Check the print quality of the self-test. If the printout is not clear,
replace the ribbon cassette.
5. Check that all connectors are secure.
6. Make sure that receipts are falling correctly into the coin tray.
7. Check that the journal is being rolled properly onto the journal spool.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Note Acceptor
______Chapter 10______
Bank Note Acceptor
10.1 Technical Description ............................................................ 10-3
10.1.1 Overview .................................................................................. 10-3

10.1.3 GL5 Non-isolated Serial Interface .......................................... 10-11
10.2 Installation and Machine Conditions .................................. 10-14
10.2.1 Configuration Setup ............................................................... 10-14

10.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators ................................................. 10-14
10.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................. 10-15
10.3.1 Clearance of Embedded Bank Note Acceptor Stacker .......... 10-15

10.3.2 Removing Bank Note Acceptor Stacker ................................. 10-15
10.3.3 Bank Note Acceptor Jams...................................................... 10-15
10.4 Care and Maintenance ......................................................... 10-17
10.4.1 Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 10-17

10.4.2 Periodic Maintenance............................................................. 10-17
10.4.3 Video Level Calibration .......................................................... 10-18

Note Acceptor MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 10-1 Bank Note Acceptor Location.....................................................................10-4
Figure 10-2 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide .............................................10-5
Figure 10-3 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly.................................................10-6
Figure 10-4 Input/Output Connector..............................................................................10-7
Figure 10-5 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................................10-8
Figure 10-6 Stacker .......................................................................................................10-9
Figure 10-7 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays ..............................................10-10
Figure 10-8 GL5 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages..........................................10-11
Figure 10-9 GL5 Protocol - Request for Re-transmission Message............................10-12
Figure 10-10 GL5 Protocol - Hex Code Messages......................................................10-13
List of Tables
Table 10-1 Bill Acceptor Fault Finding.........................................................................10-17

10.1.1 Overview
The Aristocrat Bank Note Acceptor and ancillary items provide advanced
solutions for the entry, security, analysis, and accounting of note currency. It
communicates with the Main Board via generic serial channel 1 (which is
configured through connector P18 on the Interface Board).
The full system provides a range of features, including:
• A bank note acceptor for entry, sensing and acceptance of note currency.
The unit is equipped with a microcontroller, RAM memory, and an
operating system.
• A stacker unit holds accepted notes in a highly secure environment. It is
electronically linked to the bank note acceptor. A memory module within
the stacker stores identification, diagnostic, and accounting information.
• The Aristocrat Dual Cage Assembly houses the bank note acceptor and
stacker while allowing note entry to be conveniently placed on the mid
trim. The assembly is located at the front of the cabinet. The stacker may
be accessed by opening the main door.
• An EGM number (house number) is provided by utilising a serialised,
integrated circuit embedded within the main cable connected to the host
machine. The number allows the tracking of units for maintenance,
accounting and operational control.
• The illuminated Intelligent Bezel facilitates player recognition of the note
insertion area and displays acceptable note denominations. The bezel also
provides maintenance error messages for abnormal events occurring in the
acceptor and the stacker.
• Diagnostics information on machine operations and historical details are
available through the RS-232 port.

The embedded bank note acceptor consists of an optical scanning unit linked to a
bank note stacker for the entry and storage of a range of note denominations. The
bank note acceptor dual-cage assembly, which houses the bank note acceptor and
stacker, is located in the cabinet, below the monitor shelf.
The note entry channel is situated on the mid trim, together with the pushbuttons,
coin entry assembly, and note-denomination display panel. The bank note
acceptor stacker can be accessed for removal and emptying by opening the cabinet
door and then opening the bank note acceptor security cage door.
Two options are available for processing bank note acceptor stacker information.
The units may be withdrawn from the dual cage assembly, emptied, notes counted,
and details for control and operations obtained from the Aristocrat Operator Mode

Menu functions. Alternatively, the stacker may be connected to the Soft Drop
Analyzer system which automatically processes the information stored within the
stacker memory module. This system is under development.
Bill Acceptor
Top Catch
Bill Acceptor
Notes Stacker
Cage Lock(s)
Dual Cage
Assembly
Note Stacker
Cage Door
Note
Stacker
Mk5s2031a
Mechanical Door
Mains Switch Switch
Figure 10-1 Bank Note Acceptor Location
Security
The note stacker is fitted with a lock, and two additional locks may be fitted to the
stacker cage door. A communications link between the note stacker and the bank
note acceptor is monitored by the machine software. When the stacker cage door
is lowered to gain access to the stacker, this link is broken and the machine will
lock up with the error message Bank Note Stacker Removed being displayed on
the screen.
Mechanics and Transport

The bank note acceptor employs four mounting posts which interface to the dual
cage assembly. The dual cage housing holds the stacker and allows it to travel in
multi axes for installation, in-position maintenance, and removal.
The main bank note acceptor housing supports and aligns the drive rollers and
drive stepper motor while providing mounts for the other subassemblies of the
unit. The drive rollers provide motive power to the drive belts which transport the
notes or coupons past the circuitry and out of the unit.

Clip
Lower Guide
26 Way
Note Transport Connector
Belt and (to Machine)
Drive Roller
Magnetic Read
Head
Upper Guide
Location
Pins
Optical Scanners
Self-aligning
Pressure Roller Connector
Bezel to Stacker
Figure 10-2 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide
The two drive belts are individually tensioned to assure a reliable and straight
feed. The belt path is interrupted to provide an area suitable for the detection of
stringing devices or tails by the side looking sensor detection system.
Upper and Lower Guide Assemblies

The upper guide assembly supports and locates the pressure rollers that force the
note to the drive belts for traction. It also supports and locates part of the
validation circuitry which examines the note as it passes through the unit. The
upper guide clips into position on the main unit and is pivoted at its lower end.
This allows the note channel to be opened so that maintenance and cleaning
operations can be carried out and any jammed notes can be removed.
The lower guide assembly provides the lower half of the note channel which steers
the note onto the drive belts and pressure rollers. The lower guide also supports
and locates additional validation circuitry and the magnetic read head. The guide
assembly is integrated into the housing assembly, and the unit is factory aligned to
the upper guide for accurate sensing operations.
Aristocrat Dual Cage Assembly

The bank note acceptor dual-cage housing is pivot-hinged at the base and held in
position by the top catch.

Dual Cage Bill Acceptor

Catch & Spring Retaining Clip
Bill Acceptor Connector

to Machine
Note Stacker Lock

(up to 2 Locks)
Bill Stacker Bill Acceptor

Door Location Pin
& Slot (4)
Bill Dual Cage

Stacker Assembly
bacc001
Dual Cage Stop
Location & Pivot
Figure 10-3 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly
The dual cage design ensures the stacker is protected when gameplay is occurring
and when the main door is opened for maintenance and day-to-day routine
operations.
The design enables the cage assembly to be pivoted to improve the various access
operations. The outer cage assembly remains firmly affixed by the base retaining
pin during pivotal movements.
Note Entry
Operation commences when a note of a suitable denomination, as indicated on the
note entry display, is inserted in the bank note acceptor. The note may be inserted
either end first and either face up. The unit grips the inserted note and moves it
over the magnetic head and optical system.
The note is evaluated and either accepted or rejected. If the note is accepted,
credits are issued only after the note has exited the bank note acceptor and reached
the security stacker. If the note is rejected, it is returned to the player.
A note should only be given three read attempts before it is classed as unreadable.

Electronics Assembly
The electronics assembly provides the intelligence that controls all functional,
validation, communications, diagnostic, and display functions. The bank note
acceptor electronics consists of a microprocessor board mounted on the main
board. The assembly is mounted on the electronics tray, which can be removed
for repair and replacement. The electronics tray also serves as a mount for a self-
aligning connector that electronically connects the bank note acceptor to the
stacker.
The main electronics board contains the input connector (see Figure 10-4) which
connects to the host machine, the top-accessed DIP switch for bank note acceptor
functional setup, and the status LED display.
Figure 10-5 displays a block diagram of the bank note acceptor electronics.
-24 VDC / POWER 13 1 GROUND
+24 VDC / POWER 14 2 INTERRUPT
OUT OF SERVICE 15 3 DATA
SERIAL / PULSE SEL 16 4 $1 CREDIT
SEND 17 5 ACCEPT ENABLE
ACCOUNT NUMBER 18 6 RS-232 GROUND
PROGRAM 19 7 RS-232 TXD
CREDIT OUT 20 8 RS-232 RXD
CREDIT COMMON 21 9 TTL RXD
CREDIT RELAY 22 10 TTL TXD
CREDIT RELAY 23 11 LED POWER / ANODE
ENABLE IN 24 12 ENABLE COMMON
VND215b
Figure 10-4 Input/Output Connector
Microcontroller
The microcontroller is a Dallas Semiconductor 5000 configured as an integrated
assembly mounted on a SIMM printed circuit board with a 10-year battery-backed
32 kbytes RAM, and a real time clock. The microcontroller runs at 16 MHz
enabling a range of advanced functions to be implemented.

Operating System and Software Distribution

Within the first 4 kbytes of memory space of the microcontroller is the unit’s
Operating System (OS) which controls all machine functions. Within the OS is
the encoded security number, Factory Security Number (FSN), which must be
input if a software upgrading takes place.
The OS also has a module that records machine identification, summary
information on performance, and amounts of note denominations accepted. This
information is transferred to the stacker memory.
Lower
Microprocessor Guide
Board Optics
72 Pin SIMM Connector PCB
2 x 6 Way
Connectors
Bill Acceptor
Main Board Lower
Magentic
18 Way Guide 10 Pin
Read Head
Ribbon Interface Piggy
PCB
PCB Back
12 Way 2 x 5 Way Self
Connector Aligning Connectors
Power
Note 12 Way Self Supply Bezel
Stacker Aligning PCB PCB
Connector
6 Way 10 Way
Connector Ribbon
Upper
Electric
Guide
Motor
Optics
PCB
Mk5V142b
Figure 10-5 Interconnection Diagram
Scanning System
The scanning transport mechanics consist of a continuous timing belt and a
pressure roller configuration. The timing belts are organised to provide an area of
optical inspection within the currency channel so that vertical and horizontal
inspections are possible. The horizontal analysis is performed by the Side
Looking Sensors (SLS) and is used exclusively for the detection of tails and/or
strings attached to bank notes or coupons. Any unusual activity detected by the
SLS system is cause for automatic rejection and reporting.
Stacker
The stacker is designed for the storage and control of bank notes.
Housed within the stacker is a special memory device that has a serial
communications interface and is supported by a 10-year lithium battery for non-
volatile memory storage. The unit records the following groups of information:

• System identification: this item is copied from the unique Software Serial
Number embedded in the cable attaching the host machine to the unit. The
number equates to a property asset number and identifies the machine and the
stacker for accounting and maintenance purposes. The number is recorded in
the stacker during the Power On Reset procedure if the unit is empty
(physically and electronically). The number is checked if the stacker is
removed and replaced, as might occur during maintenance activities.
• Note transaction information: Each note transaction and note denomination
is recorded.
• Diagnostics: fault information is analysed and stored in the stacker module.
After processing, maintenance personnel may be targeted to specific machines
to perform maintenance.
Spring Loaded
Pressure Plate
Compartment
for Cassette
Handle Controls and
Electronics
Stacker Drive
Mechanism
Clear Plastic Blind Mate

Label Connector
Container and
Memory Module
Hinged Steel Door

VND213
and Lock
Figure 10-6 Stacker
Stacker Physical Description

The stacker features a self-aligning connector that provides electrical connection
and aligns the stacker to the bank note acceptor. Access to the stored notes is only
possible by unlocking the hinged steel door at the rear of the module with a
tubular security key.
The stacker assembly is a sturdy, locked steel box capable of storing 500 stacked
currency notes.
The interior of the stacker contains a spring loaded pressure plate which supports
the note stack and a pair of note support rails on which presented notes lie prior to

the stacking operation. The front surface of the stacker incorporates a handle and
a clear plastic label retainer.
An upper cavity is created in the box which contains the stacker drive mechanism
sealed from the note compartment. The compartment contains a blind mate
connector to the bank note acceptor, and the memory module for electronically
storing stacker identification, diagnostic and content information.
A motor/pusher plate assembly within the stacker accomplishes note stacking.
The unit consists of a motor driven, slider-crank mechanism. On receipt of the
appropriate signal from the bank note acceptor, the motor turns through one
revolution which cycles the pusher plate through one complete linear extension-
retraction cycle. On extension, the pusher plate moves the note past the note
support rail against the pressure plate. On retraction, the note is trapped below the
support rail and held there by the pressure plate.
Intelligent Bezel
The bezel assembly is mounted to the uppermost portion of the upper guide
assembly. The assembly provides currency alignment and guidance into the bank
note acceptor transport mechanism.
To facilitate the player recognition of the note insertion area, eight green LEDs
flash in a “runway” type effect when the machine is in idle mode. A ninth, red
LED flashes if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason.
Selected green LEDs flash to indicate machine conditions requiring attention. See
Machine Condition Indicators in this chapter.
Red LED: Bill Acceptor Fault
Green LED: Row 4

Green LED: Row 3
Green LED: Row 2 Note
Green LED: Row 1
Denominations
Accepted
NOTE
Mk5V051A
Figure 10-7 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays

10.1.3 GL5 Non-isolated Serial Interface

The serial communication protocol used to interface with the bank note acceptor
conforms to the Mars GL5 standard. This interface provides one-way
communications with the control system; where messages are sent, via the DATA
line, from the bank note acceptor to the control system in response to the control
lines. Three control lines are used, ACCEPT, SEND (from the control system to
the bank note acceptor), and INTERRUPT from the bank note acceptor to control
system.
In normal operation, the control system activates the ACCEPT line by pulling it
low, and the bank note acceptor is ready to accept money. After the validation
process, a DENOMINATION message for successful evaluation or a REJECT
message for unsuccessful processing is ready to be sent to the control system.
The bank note acceptor pulls the INTERRUPT line low and informs the control
system of its intention to send a message. The control system responds (T1) by
dropping the SEND line low which grants permission to the bank note acceptor to
send data. After the SEND line becomes low (T2), data comes out via the DATA
line in a serial fashion with 1 start bit, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit, at 600 baud rate.
After the control system receives the last bit (T4) it raises the SEND LINE high.
The bank note acceptor responds (T3) by raising the INTERRUPT line high which
completes the transmission of the first message.
If the validation is not successful, the bank note acceptor sends the REJECT
message to the control system and then waits for another note to be input. The
REJECT message also tells the controller of the end of the communication
session.
T6
ACCEPT
T5
INTERRUPT
T1 T3
SEND
T2 T4
DATA 600 BAUD
8-BIT DATA
First message Second message Third message
DENOMINATION VEND/RETURN if stacker full or
or REJECT if note is accepted cannot stack
after note is VEND
VND221
Figure 10-8 GL5 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages

Should the validation be successful, a DENOMINATION message is sent to the

control system which then has to determine whether to accept or return the note.
If the note is going to be returned, the control system raises the ACCEPT line (T5)
after the INTERRUPT line goes high, and keeps the ACCEPT line high for a time
duration (T6). This state tells the bank note acceptor to return the note. The
rejection occurs when the bank note acceptor reverses the transport and returns the
note with the RETURNED message.
ACCEPT
INTERRUPT
T1 T3
SEND
T2 T4
DATA 600 BAUD
8-BIT DATA
Message Repeat of the
previous message
VND222
Figure 10-9 GL5 Protocol - Request for Re-transmission Message
If the control system decides to accept the note, the absence of the RETURNED
pulse on the ACCEPT line is interpreted by the bank note acceptor as an
acceptance. The note then passed through the transport system to the stacker with
the message VEND.
In both cases, a second message, RETURN or VEND, is ready to be sent to the
control system by the bank note acceptor, and the same timing sequence is
repeated for the control lines. The communication session then ends.
A possible third message, STACKER FULL or FAILURE (the bank note acceptor
and stacker cannot stack a note) can be sent to the control system, and the timing
sequence is repeated for the message. The communication session then ends.
The control system can request re-transmission of the previous message from the
bank note acceptor. Retransmission timing (T4), after a message is received,
occurs when the control system raises the SEND line and keeps it high for a time
(T3).

GL5 HEX CODE MESSAGES
$1 CREDIT 81H
$2 CREDIT 82H
$ 5 CREDIT 83H
$ 10 CREDIT 84H
$ 20 CREDIT 85H
$ 50 CREDIT 86H
$ 100 CREDIT 87H
VEND 89H
RETURNED 8AH
REJECT 8BH
FAILURE 8CH
STACKER FULL 8DH
JAM-STACKERLESS 8DH
SRC STACKER REMOVED 8EH
SRC STACKER ATTACHED 8FH
Figure 10-10 GL5 Protocol - Hex Code Messages
The replica of the previous message is sent by the bank note acceptor and this
process will be repeated as often as requested by the control system.

10.2 Installation and Machine Conditions
10.2.1 Configuration Setup

Bank Note Acceptor configuration options are established by the use of DIP
switches and the Operator Mode Menu settings. To enable note denominations, it
is necessary to set the required note values in both the bank note acceptor DIP
switches and the Operator Mode menu options.
The DIP switches are conveniently located at the top of the bank note acceptor
housing and are accessible when the main door is opened and the bank note
acceptor is pivoted froward.
The main function of the DIP switches is to set the accepted note denominations.
The allocation of functions to each DIP switch depends on the specific software
loaded in the Bank Note Acceptor.
The settings for accepted note denominations are found in the Operator Mode
Menu Operator Setup / Selections Menu Machine Options (refer to the
chapter Machine Modes for more information).
The mid trim provides players with an illuminated panel that identifies the
accepted note denominations (see Figure 10-7).
10.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators

The bank note acceptor’s operational details are indicated by the intelligent bezel
displays on the mid trim and by several Operator Mode menu displays. The alarm
sounds for error conditions.
Intelligent Bezel Indicators

The intelligent bezel displays eight green LEDs (2 rows of four, with a wide to
narrow shape) which flash in a runway type effect when the machine is in idle
mode of operation. A ninth, red LED (behind a circle, slash character, and $ sign)
will flash if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason.
Malfunctions flash different rows of the green LEDs. The pair of LEDs nearest
the player is row number 1. The pair nearest the note entry channel is row number
4. The bezel error messages are:
Row 1: Hardware fault. Row 2: Stacker full.
Row 3: Jam in stacker. Row 4: Jam in currency channel.
Operator Mode Menu Indicators

Several Operator Mode menu displays provide bank note acceptor information
that addresses note entry history, machine status, accounting/audit/statistics data,
and error and lockup information (refer to the chapter Machine Modes for further
information).


The dual cage assembly supports the retaining pins located on each side of the
bank note acceptor assembly (see Figure 10-3). Electrical connection is through a
single connector which supplies both power and communications. The connector
is easily accessed from the side of the unit when the main door is open.
Connection to the bank note stacker is automatically made through a blind mate
connector located at the bottom of the bank note acceptor unit. The bank note
stacker automatically disconnects from the bank note acceptor when the dual cage
door is lowered.
10.3.1 Clearance of Embedded Bank Note Acceptor Stacker

The procedure for the clearance of notes from the bank note acceptor stacker will
be strictly controlled by the house.
The stacker unit and the bank note acceptor unit can be accessed and removed
independently. The stacker is accessed by opening the cabinet door and the
stacker cage door. The cabinet door is fitted with a mechanical security switch
and dual locks may be fitted to the stacker cage door.
10.3.2 Removing Bank Note Acceptor Stacker

To remove the stacker:
1. Open the cabinet door. The machine lockup Bank Note Acceptor Door
Open occurs.
2. Unlock and open the stacker cage.
3. Hold the stacker handle and withdraw the stacker from the machine.
4. After the stacker is withdrawn, the stacker door must be unlocked before the
notes can be withdrawn. Each stacker may be numbered to assist accounting
and control operations.
10.3.3 Bank Note Acceptor Jams

If a jam occurs, the unit is usually able to clear itself within a short period as an
automatic process comes into effect. The unit runs the motor forward and then
reverses in an attempt to clear the jam. This routine continues for five attempts.
Should the jam persist, a fault message is initiated and a machine lockup occurs.
CAUTION
The Bank Note Acceptor is controlled by
complex electronics. Unqualified personnel
must not interfere with the unit.

The scanning and transport channel of the bank note acceptor passes currency in a
direct process to the stacker. Should a note become lodged within the scanning
channel, the following steps will enable the jam to be cleared:
CAUTION
Ensure the power is turned off before any
maintenance procedures are carried out on the
bank note acceptor, stacker and dual cage
doors.
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF machine power.

2. Disconnect the bank note acceptor loom.
3. Release the bank note acceptor outer cage top catch, and pivot the assembly
forward.
4. Unclip the upper guide of the bank note acceptor to gain access to the
scanning channel. If this does not enable the jam to be removed, the bank
note acceptor can be removed from the housing to enable complete access to
the unit.
5. Pull back the retaining clip (see Figure 10-3) to release the bank note
acceptor locating pin. Lift the bank note acceptor up and out from the back
of the housing.
6. Open the upper guide and remove any obstruction.

10.4 Care and Maintenance
10.4.1 Troubleshooting
The following guide provides possible solutions to faults that may be encountered
during normal use. Also refer to Removal and Replacement in this chapter.
Table 10-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding

Fault Remedy
Note jammed in unit Open the scanning channel and remove the note.
Note repeatedly skews and jams Pressure rollers have incorrect tension. Belts are not
adjusted properly. Make adjustments to the roller tension
and transport belts.
Display electronics are non The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power.
functional Ensure that all leads are correctly connected and power
has been turned on.
Note is not transported into the The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power.
unit Reconnect the power.
There may be a jam in the scanning channel. Remove the
note from the channel.
The bank note acceptor has been inhibited from further
operation by the game and machine software. Remove
any current machine locks. See Machine Modes.
Low acceptance rate Perform a Video Level Calibration
10.4.2 Periodic Maintenance

The bank note acceptor and stacker require only a minimal amount of maintenance
which can be provided while the units are in operating positions.
Occasional wiping of the plastic bezel surface is all that is required to remove
surface deposits and smudges. A soft lint-free cloth dampened with a 90%
solution of isopropyl alcohol is recommended for cleaning.
CAUTION
Caution must be exercised not to flood the bezel area with liquids due
to the electronics in the bezel unit and because liquids must not seep
down into the bank note acceptor units below the bezel area.
Do not use a solvent other than isopropyl alcohol as permanent
damage to the bezel assembly and other items may result.
Over a period of time, dirt from the surface of the notes will accumulate on the
pressure rollers, drive belt surfaces and bank note acceptor optics. These areas
should be cleaned to ensure reliable operation.
The procedure to clean rollers, belt surfaces, and validation optics is as follows
(see Removal and Replacement Procedures in this chapter):

1. Power down the bank note acceptor and disconnect the electrical cable from
the side of the bank note acceptor assembly.
2. Remove the bank note acceptor from the dual cage housing.
3. Swing open the upper guide assembly to give complete access to the note
channel.
4. Using a soft lint-free cloth dampened with 90% isopropyl alcohol, wipe the
note channel surfaces on both the upper and lower guides to remove any
surface dirt. Pay particular attention to the optics area and the magnetic
head when removing deposits from the surfaces.
5. On the upper guide assembly, clean the surface of the pressure rollers. The
belt surface may be cleaned by using a thumb to rotate one of the drive
rollers while holding the cleaning cloth against the surface of the belt.
Again, caution should be used to prevent excess liquid from reaching the
bank note acceptor internals.
10.4.3 Video Level Calibration

Should the bank note acceptor exhibit an unusually low level of acceptance, a
video level calibration can be performed as described below.
Video Level reference paper (Part No. CBV-1000) is required for this procedure.
Do not use any other paper to perform this procedure.
Video Adjustment Procedure
1. Remove power to the bank note acceptor or alternatively open the currency
channel while power is applied.
2. Locate the DIP switches at the top of the bank note acceptor. Turn DIP
switch 9 ON (away from the front bezel).
NOTE
Step 4 must be executed within 5 seconds of Step 3.
3. Apply power to the bank note acceptor or alternatively close the currency
channel.
4. Insert the video level calibration paper into the note entry area.
5. The bank note acceptor will step the paper out as it performs the video
calibration. The procedure is complete when the paper is fully ejected.
6. Turn DIP switch 9 OFF.
7. Remove then reconnect power to the bank note acceptor or, alternatively,
open and close the currency channel.
8. Re-install the bank note acceptor, and test its operation.
The video level adjustment procedure is now complete.

MVP Video Service Manual Main Board
________Chapter 11________
Main Board
Part Nos 410388 or 410389
11.1 Introduction ............................................................................ 11-3
11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ....................................... 11-4
11.3 Functional Description .......................................................... 11-4
11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor.......................................................... 11-9

11.4.2 Video ...................................................................................... 11-10
11.4.3 Sound..................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.4 Keyboard Port ........................................................................ 11-11
11.4.5 Reset...................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.6 Internal I/O ............................................................................. 11-12
11.4.7 External I/O Expansion........................................................... 11-13
11.4.8 Memory .................................................................................. 11-13
11.4.9 Battery Backup Circuit............................................................ 11-15
11.4.10 Real Time Clock..................................................................... 11-15
11.4.11 Temperature Measurement.................................................... 11-16
11.4.12 Security .................................................................................. 11-16
11.4.13 Machine Peripherals............................................................... 11-17
11.4.14 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry ................................ 11-19
11.4.15 DES Encryption Device .......................................................... 11-19
11.4.16 Serial Channels ...................................................................... 11-19
11.4.17 Communication Configuration Board ..................................... 11-20
11.4.18 Interface with the Power Control System ............................... 11-20

Main Board MVP Video Service Manual
11.4.19 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface ......................................... 11-21

11.4.20 Debugging .............................................................................. 11-21
11.4.21 Mechanical Switches .............................................................. 11-22
11.4.22 Interface Board....................................................................... 11-22
11.6 Description of Connectors .................................................. 11-24
11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board.................................... 11-24

11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ......................................... 11-26
11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22.............................................. 11-28
11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ......................... 11-30
List of Figures
Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board ..............................................................................11-4
Figure 11-2 System Architecture ...................................................................................11-5
Figure 11-3 Main Board Block Diagram ........................................................................11-7
Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board Layout.........................................................................11-8
List of Tables
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics ..............................................................11-14
Table 11-2 Optical Security - Typical Assignment.......................................................11-16
Table 11-3 Mechanical Security - Typical Assignment................................................11-17
Table 11-4 Hopper Control Signals .............................................................................11-18
Table 11-5 Coin Handling Signals ...............................................................................11-18
Table 11-6 SPI Channel Signals..................................................................................11-19
Table 11-7 SPI Channel Allocations ............................................................................11-19
Table 11-8 Power Control System Signal Lines ..........................................................11-20
Table 11-9 Communications Configuration Board Connector - P23 ...........................11-24
Table 11-10 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ..........................................................11-26
Table 11-11 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 ..............................................................11-28
Table 11-12 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21..........................................11-30

11.1 Introduction
The Main Board provides central control of the gaming machine. The board is
fitted with an ARM RISC microprocessor which interfaces with other equipment
in the machine via the Interface Board.
The machine may be fitted with one of two Main Boards: Part No. 2501-410388
or Part No. 2501-410389. The main difference between these boards is that
PCBA 410388 is fitted with three batteries, whereas PCBA 410388 is fitted with
only one battery. Refer to the wiring diagram to see which Main Board is fitted.
The main features of the Main Board are as follows:
• ARM RISC microprocessor operating at 12 MHz (combines CPU, memory
management, I/O Interface, audio and video on a single chip)
• on-board power supply regulator
• audio amplifier for speaker
• game EPROMS
• security monitoring of machine door activities
• serial channels
• temperature sensing
• watchdog timer and reset
• surface mounted technology
• flexible design allows for future changes to the machine configuration.

The Main Board contains an ARM RISC microprocessor that interfaces with a
number of subsystems via the Interface Board. Figure 11-2 provides a block
diagram illustrating the electronics system architecture. The system is available in
various configurations to meet specific machine requirements.
The Main Board, along with the other major PCBAs, is located within the security
logic cage (see Figure 11-1). The logic cage is a lockable, steel box located
beneath the monitor shelf. It provides security and protection for the PCBAs.
The Main Board slides on guides within the cage and connects directly to the
Interface Board via three 96-way DIN 41612 connectors. Connectors are provided
on the Main Board for the Communications Configuration Board and an optional
memory expansion PCBA.

Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board
11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations

For further information and for reference, the following additional information on
the Main Board is provided in Volume II:
• Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams.
• Board Layout. Drawings of both Main Boards showing the location of the
components.
• I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and
integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

The Main Board interfaces with the following devices (depending on machine
features) via the Interface Board:
• MkV Series II I/O Driver Board P/No 410311
• Video Monitor / Touchscreen
• Mechanical Meter Board
• Power Supply Assembly
• Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps
• Animation Lamps
• Network Interface
• Link Progressive System
• Player Marketing Module
• Security Devices
• Money Management Devices

• Printer
• Cooling Fan
• Mechanical Security Switches
• Optical Security Switches
• Key Switches
• Optional I/O Connector
• Debug Port
Figure 11-2 System Architecture
11.3.1 Main Board Functions

The Main Board has the following capabilities and functions:
∗ Core processor and memory.
• CPU (ARM250 32 bits RISC ASIC operating at 12 MHz).
• On Board EPROMs.
• External Memory Board Interface.
• DRAM (a minimum of 1 Mbyte or 2 Mbyte as a build option).
• Power audio amplifier and sound volume control circuitry.
∗ Non-volatile storage.
• EEPROMs (2).
• SRAM for Electronic Meters (three devices).
∗ 8 bit I/O Expansion via the Interface Board.
∗ Interrupt System.
• Interrupt glue logic.

• Timers and Operating System Tick logic.

∗ Coin Handling System.
• Coin Chute.
• Hopper Interface.
∗ Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI).
• SPI bus driver and multiplexer circuitry.
∗ Internal Read/Write control registers.
∗ Security.
• Security switches (up to 8 optical and 8 mechanical switches).
∗ Communications.
• DES Encryption.IC
• Four serial channels (two DUART's). One channel is configured for FIP and
RS232; the other three are configurable for Note Acceptor, Serial Printer,
Touch Screen, RS232, TTL, DACOM5000, or other signal levels.
• Mikohn Link Progressive pulse interface
∗ Power Control System.
• Onboard DC-DC converter (+24 V to +5 V).
• Power supply supervisor and reset circuitry..
• Interface with the Solid State Relay (SSR).
• Status monitoring.
∗ Reset System
∗ Diagnostics.
• Circuitry for test, diagnostics and debugging (used in conjunction with the
External Memory board).
∗ Real Time Clock (RTC).
∗ Mechanical Switch Inputs.
• Five mechanical switch inputs for Cancel Credit/Reset, Audit, Handle, etc.
∗ Temperature Sensor.
∗ Video System.
∗ Sound System.


This section begins with two diagrams: a block diagram introducing the various
functional subsystems of the Main Board and a layout diagram indicating the
location of components on the Main Board. These diagrams are followed by a
description of the various functions and components of the Main Board.
Figure 11-3 Main Board Block Diagram

Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board Layout

11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor

CPU
The ARM250 microprocessor communicates with on board peripherals via a high
speed 32 bit memory bus, an 8 bit I/O bus, and a serial (SPI) interface (see
Figure 11-3). The ARM250 contains the following 5 major blocks within a single
chip:
• the ARM250 CPU
• I/O controller (IOC)
• video controller (VIDC)
• memory controller (MEMC)
• I/O expansion block (IOEB).
The ARM250 is a complete computer system on a chip comprising a 32-bit RISC

microprocessor, a memory controller with DRAM interface, a bit-mapped video
controller and an I/O controller. It is suitable for wide range of cost-sensitive
embedded control, portable and consumer game applications - particularly those
which require a video display.
The device is designed to drive up to 4 Mbytes of DRAM directly at 12 MHz, and
at this speed it can sustain approximately 10 MIPS.
I/O Data Bus

The ARM250 is designed to be easily interfaced to standard 8 bit peripheral chips.
The majority of the I/O is handled by the internal I/O controller, with some extra
functionality provided by the I/O expansion block. All I/O addresses in the
ARM250 are memory mapped.
The peripheral address bus is simply the latched address lines. These are buffered
to reduce loading and to avoid slowing down EPROM access.
Diagnostic LEDs
The ARM250 has 4 open collector I/O bits. These are connected to 4 easily
visible diagnostic LEDs to indicate diagnostic software status. The configuration
of the circuit ensures that when the CPU is in reset, or when the software does not
run, all the LEDs will be turned on. Therefore, faulty LEDs will be easily detected
and not interpreted as incorrect diagnostic code.
Interrupt System
The interrupt system of the ARM250 functions with two main interrupts, FIQ and
IRQ. Several external inputs are multiplexed internally to generate either a FIQ or
IRQ interrupt.
FIQ is defined as the "fast interrupt" and is used for real time processing. IRQ is
defined as the "slow interrupt" and is used for slower interrupts.
Specific registers are provided to enable the programmer to read the source of the
interrupt without reading all the devices.

FIQ is of higher priority than IRQ and can interrupt an IRQ service routine. IRQ
cannot interrupt FIQ. The priority of different interrupts is determined in software
after reading the status registers.
I/O Expansion Port Interrupts.
The I/O expansion port has 4 interrupts: IL0, IF, FL, and FH0 (schematic
IO_IN). Pull-up/down resistors pull unused interrupts to their inactive state. EMC
filtering is provided by 1 kΩ resistors and 100 pF capacitors to prevent spurious
interrupts.
ARM250 Timers
The ARM250 has 4 built-in timers. These run off a 2 MHz clock and can time
intervals from 500 ns to 32.768 ms. Four primary clocks exist within the board:
72 MHz, 48 MHz, 25.175 MHz, and 32.768 kHz. All other clocks are derived
from these.
• Primary Clock. The ARM250 uses a primary clock of 72 MHz which is
internally divided to provide 36 MHz for the memory controller, 36 MHz or
24 MHz for the video, 12 MHz for the CPU, 8 MHz and 2 MHz for the I/O
controller. The 72 MHz clock has a tight duty cycle specification of 45/55%.
• System Clock. The CPU core (ARM2aS) and memory controller (MEMC) of
the ARM250 have an optional clock input to allow higher speed operation. A
48 MHz clock on the SYSCLK input of the ARM250 is divided by 3 giving
16 MHz CPU and memory operation.
• Video Clock. The video clock may be either 36 MHz, 24 MHz or an optional
external crystal input. The external crystal is 25.175 MHz for VGA. The
clock selected for the video clock is output on the VIDCLK pin and input on
the CLKVID pin, which are normally connected together.
• Time Clock. The real time clock chip uses a 32.768 kHz crystal to keep time.
The 8 MHz IOCLK output from the ARM250 is divided by 2 to 4 MHz for the
DES encryption chip, by 512 to 15625 Hz for the SPI, and by 4096 to
1953.125 Hz for the operating system timer interrupt. The 12 MHz ARM250
keyboard clock output CLKKB, and the 2 MHz CLK2 IOC are not used.
11.4.2 Video
The ARM250 has a built in video controller which directly drives a monitor. The
video system conforms to the IBM VGA standard (mode 2) and gives a resolution
of 640 x 400 pixels with 8 bits per pixel.
Each video output signal from the ARM250 is a current sink with respect to the
filtered video 5 V DC supply. The RGB signals (Red, Green and Blue) generate a
voltage across a sense resistor and a common super diode, formed by a PNP
transistor. The voltage across the sense circuit is converted to an output current
per colour by a PNP transistor emitter follower. The RGB monitor output
components are protected from transients by a three diode circuit for each colour
signal. A 220 Ω load resistor limits the maximum unterminated voltage at each
transistor collector; this ensures the transistor does not saturate and disturb the

sense resistor signal. In normal use the RGB outputs generate an analogue 0.7 V
peak signal into an external 75 Ω load. The sync signals have TTL levels.
11.4.3 Sound
The ARM250 has a built in stereo audio interface, requiring only filtering and
amplification to drive a speaker. Sound data is accessed directly from DRAM and
output to the audio D/A converters. The board implements a single channel of
sound, because stereo is not required.
The Main Board provides monophonic audio with the following characteristics:
• Bandwidth : 200 Hz to 5.5 kHz ±10%.
• Power output: 4 W RMS.
• Frequency response shape: fourth order pole at 5.5 kHz ±10%.
• The volume is controllable via software with a resolution of 4 bits.
The power amplifier features are:

• Overload protected
• Short circuit protected
• Connected to the +24 V DC power supply.
A separate ground for the audio system has to be provided. It is connected to the
digital ground (+5 V ground) and the power ground (+ 24 V ground) at one point
only.
Volume Control
The volume control circuit uses a 4 bit control to give 16 levels. The lowest level
turns the sound off. The 74HC4066 switch is powered from +5 V DC, and
requires that the inputs are below +5 V DC at all times. The output of the
previous filter stage is decoupled with a 0.1 µF capacitor and biased around 2.5 V
DC.
Audio Power Amplifier

The TDA2006 audio power amplifier has overload/short circuit protection and is
powered from +24 VDC. The speaker output is filtered using a surface mount
ferrite bead and a 100 pF ceramic capacitor.
11.4.4 Keyboard Port

The ARM250 has a built-in serial communications port, the KART (Keyboard
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter). The KART is used only for debugging.
The data format is fixed at 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 2 stop bits and no parity. Unlike
a normal UART, the KART has no data buffering.

11.4.5 Reset
The Main Board has 2 reset signals, RESETL and RESET. When reset is asserted
it has a nominal period of 200 ms (guaranteed 140-280 ms).
• RESETL is the MAX705 reset output, valid for all supply voltages from 0-5 V
DC. It is used in the battery backed circuits to prevent glitches during power
up/down, while RESET is used every where else.
• RESET is the normal active low reset, generated by buffering RESETL. It is
not valid between 0-2 V DC, as it is driven from HCMOS logic, which does
not operate under 2.0 V DC.
Watchdog Timer
The MAX705 incorporates a watchdog timer to reset the Main Board if the CPU
does not strobe the watchdog input with an I/O access to RDCS1. The watchdog
timeout period is nominally 1.6 seconds, and is guaranteed to be 1.0 to 2.25
seconds. The manual reset input (from the BTEST GAL) is asserted if the
watchdog output trips (WDO) or if the external reset input is asserted.
The MAX705 voltage comparator also checks the battery voltage.
All devices that can be reset are reset to give the board a well defined power up
state.
• The 74HC273 direct write registers are reset to 0x00.
• The ARM250 has 2 reset pins, RST and POR, and is reset through POR. RST
is a bidirectional pin driven from POR. When POR is asserted the CPU is reset
and RST is also asserted. RST is connected to the optional memory expansion
board, which is reset by the Main Board reset, but can also reset the CPU by
asserting RST.
• Peripheral I/O devices are reset
• I/O Expansion interface is reset
• Battery test GAL outputs are disabled.
11.4.6 Internal I/O

When an I/O access to an address between 0x3010000-0x3011FFF takes place the
ARM250 I/O select pin AEN is asserted. AEN is further decoded to select
individual peripherals and read/write registers. The memory expansion board also
uses NAEN and is responsible for selecting decode addresses that do not conflict
with those on the Main Board.
I/O accesses to the static RAMs and external I/O boards use S2 and DACK
respectively.
An I/O access in the range 0x3010000 to 302FFFF is a PC I/O access.

11.4.7 External I/O Expansion

Two expansion interfaces are provided:
• I/O expansion through the interface board allows two general purpose 8-bit I/O
boards, and one security subsystem board to be added, using 96 way DIN41612
connectors.
• The 32 bit memory expansion interface on the Main Board has a I/O port;
however, this interface is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the
system.
I/O Boards
Twelve address lines are provided, to access 4 kbytes of I/O space on the I/O
boards. The 8 bit I/O data bus is buffered onto the I/O boards. I/O is accessed
using chip select DACK.
Peripheral PCBs take +5 V DC power from the Main Board. They may also
derive +5 V DC from the +24 V DC supply, independent of the Main Board;
however, care must be taken to avoid damage to both boards if the power supply
on either board fails.
Memory Expansion Board

The memory expansion interface has an I/O port. The I/O select line AEN
provides for 8-bit I/O expansion, which can be used to implement bank selection
page register, or any other interface.
11.4.8 Memory
The Main Board has six types of memory:
• DRAM provides memory for graphics, sound and other software requirements.
• DRAM Emulator.
• EPROM contains the game software.
• SRAM provides memory for metering.
• EEPROM contains high reliability configuration data.
• The Real Time Clock also contains a number of bytes of SRAM.
DRAM
The Main Board has 2 Mbyte of dynamic RAM as standard. The ARM250 can
address a maximum of 4 Mbytes of DRAM, using its built in DRAM controller.
The ARM250 directly drives the multiplexed address lines (RA[9:0]), row and
column (RAS, CAS[3:0]) strobes, output (OE[1:0]), and write enable
(WE[1:0]) signals.
The Main Board must have at least 1 Mbyte of dynamic RAM fitted, with the
other 1 Mbyte being optional. Using 4 Mbit DRAMs the maximum possible (in 4
devices) is 2 Mbytes. The first bank of DRAMs is dual pitched to allow the use of
16 Mbit DRAMs allowing 4 Mbytes to be fitted in only 2 chips. As this is the
maximum addressable, the second bank would not be fitted.

DRAM Emulator
The DRAM emulator logic detects an access to the interrupt vector table and
substitutes either ROM or a fixed branch instruction (to EPROM) in place of the
DRAM.
EPROM
The data bus for EPROMs is 32 bit wide. The Main Board contains sockets for 8
EPROMs, which can be configured to 1, 2, or 4 Mbit chips and each is 16 bit
wide. This allows a maximum of 4 Mbytes of EPROMs, which is also the
ARM250 addressing limit.
To expand the memory beyond 4 Mbytes, the on-board EPROMs can be replaced
by an external memory PCB which sits onto the main board
Meters SRAM
The Main Board provides 32 kbytes of Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
with battery back-up for the electronic meters.
The SRAM contains machine metering information, such as money in/out, game
history, etc. It is critical that this data is preserved reliably, and various
jurisdictions require multiple backups of the data.
Three standard low power SRAMs are fitted to the board. The data is usually
replicated three times, so that each chip contains identical data. Each memory is
checked against the other to verify that the stored data is correct.
Each chip is mapped to the same address, and the chip selected depends on the
bank select register. Access is mutually exclusive, increasing security with only
one chip visible in the CPU address space at a time. If the CPU crashes and
overwrites memory only one of the three devices can be corrupted. On reset the
bank select register selects bank 0, which does not exist. The SRAMs are at banks
1,2,3.
Each of the SRAM chips may be powered from a separate battery, further
reducing the possibility of losing data.
EEPROMS
The system implements two sets of serial EEPROMs. The minimum requirements
are 128 bytes per EEPROM. The type selected is to be compatible with types
providing 256 byte and 512 byte depth.
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics

No. Socketed Write protected Comment
1 No Yes To replace DIP switch , surface mount version
2 Yes No For game options, DIP package
3 Yes No For network address, DIP package
The Main Board has three serial EEPROMs. Write protection is implemented
with a resistor.

Memory Expansion Port

The memory expansion port is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the
Main Board. The memory expansion PCB allows for up to 4 Mbytes of EPROM
to be directly addressed together with signals to accommodate paged memory,
external DRAM emulation and debug facilities. When the signal REPLACE is
asserted from the expansion board it disables the on board EPROM, via address
decode GAL U22.
The external memory PCB interfaces with the Main Board via a 96-way
DIN41612 connector.
11.4.9 Battery Backup Circuit

The Main Board has at least one lithium battery for the meter SRAM, Real Time
Clock and the security circuit on the I/O Driver Board (refer to the chapter I/O
Driver Board for details). Optional second and third lithium batteries may be used
for additional meter SRAMs. Each battery is mounted in a socket with a security
tie wrap.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Dispose of used batteries
according to manufacturer’s instructions.
A resistor and diode combination in series prevents reverse charging of the

battery. A lithium battery can potentially explode if reverse charged.
The Main Board includes circuitry to test each battery under CPU control. The
test places a resistor load on the battery and checks the voltage after a short delay
(about 40 ms). The load is enabled from a monostable so that a fault in the
software will not discharge the battery.
The battery end life is at 2.0 V DC, below which the memory and logic are no
longer guaranteed to work. The test will indicate a battery fail at 2.5 V DC.
Replacing Battery
When the battery is changed, power will be maintained for a limited time by the
decoupling capacitors. A connector is provided to allow for external battery
backup during battery replacement.
11.4.10 Real Time Clock

The Main Board uses the Dallas DS1202 Real Time Clock (RTC). It uses a
standard Dallas 3 wire interface, which is shared with the Dallas temperature
measuring chip (DS1620). The real-time clock, meter RAM #0, and the battery-
backed security circuit on the I/O Driver Board are powered from the same
battery.

11.4.11 Temperature Measurement

The temperature of the Main Board is measured with a Dallas DS1620
temperature sensor. This device reads the temperature and gives a digital output
accurate to ½°C. It shares the same 3 wire interface as the Dallas DS1202 RTC,
using only a separate reset line. It has an operating temperature range of -55°C to
+125°C.
11.4.12 Security
The system caters for two types of security inputs, optical and mechanical, with 8
of each. The sensor circuit is designed such that an external optional add-in
security module (on the Interface Board) is able to share the sensors.
The add-in security module has the capability of monitoring both the optical and
mechanical inputs during normal operation and while the power is off. The
security system also allows for the time stamping and logging of security events
Optical Security
The Main Board provides the necessary circuitry to interface eight IR LED
emitter/photo-transistor detector pairs. The optical security sensors are monitored
by the Main Board when the machine is powered.
Sensor sharing between the Main Board and the optional security module is
accomplished by the use of diodes.
The following emitters and detectors are used:
• Emitter. LD271A with a beam width of 50° and a frequency of 950 nm.
• LED current: 15 mA ±20%
• Driving Source: +5 V DC logic supply
• Current is on at reset.
• Detector. BPW77N with a beam acceptance of ±10° and a peak sensitivity at

850 nm.
• Output Signal: 10 K 5 % resistor pull up to +5 V DC.
• Driving Source: +5 V DC logic supply.
Table 11-2 Optical Security - Typical Assignment

Switch No. Function Switch No. Function
0 Main door 4 Not used
1 Not used 5 Not used
Mechanical Security
The system provides the necessary circuitry to interface 8 mechanical security
switches.
Up to four of the mechanical security inputs can be used for security breach
detection while the power is off. When the power is on, a random number is

written to a battery-backed register on the Driver Board. A breach of security

(opening of the switch) while the power is off causes the register to reset. When
the power is restored the absence of the original number indicates a security
breach. If a changeover switch is used, the closing of the normally open contact
will also reset the register.
The mechanical security sensor interface has the following specification:
• Switch type: Single pole, changeover
• Secure state: normally closed
• Driving Source: +5 V DC
Table 11-3 Mechanical Security - Typical Assignment

No. Function Monitored by...
0 Logic Cage Battery-backed circuit on Driver Board.
1 Top Box Battery-backed circuit on Driver Board.
2 Mechanical Meters Battery-backed circuit on Driver Board.
3 Cash Box Battery-backed circuit on Driver Board.
4 Main Door Main Board only when machine is powered.
5 Note Stacker Main Board only when machine is powered.
6 Not used Spare.
7 Not used Spare.
11.4.13 Machine Peripherals

The Main Board can drive the following peripheral equipment:
• Hopper
• Coin handling
• Note acceptor
• Printer
• Mechanical meters.
Hopper Interface
The Main Board can interface with the Aristocrat Disc Hopper or the Himec
Hopper via the Interface Board.
The hopper receives 24 V to power the motor and an isolated 5 V to run the logic.
The isolated 5 V is derived from the 12 V supply using a linear regulator on the
Main Board. This voltage is also supplied, via the Interface Board, to other
peripheral boards requiring isolated 5 V.
The following table details the hopper interface signals.

Table 11-4 Hopper Control Signals

Signal Name Function I/O Note
/EHOPCOIN Coin output detector I From hopper photo-optic detector
/EHOPON Hopper motor drive O +24 V driver output
/EHOPHI Hopper high probe I Detects hopper full
/EHOPLO Hopper low probe I Not used with ADH
P24V +24 V power for motor
/EHOPTEST Hopper sensor test O output from Main Board
/EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output I Not used with ADH
/EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction control O Not used with ADH
HOP5V +5 V from Main Board O Converted from +12 V
GNDA Power and signal ground.
Coin Handling System

Coin Chute Assembly
The Main Board interfaces with the coin chute assembly via the I/O Driver Board.
The Main Board receives the signals "NOD1A", "NOD1B", "NOD2A", "S7
ALARM", and "AUDIT" from the coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board.
It sends the control signals "NEODLEDON", "NECOINBLK", and
"NECOINDIV" to the I/O Driver Board, which converts these signals into the
form required by the coin chuting.
All inputs have EMC R/C filtering, with a cut-off frequency of 3.4 kHz.
Coin Diverter Solenoid

The coin diverter solenoid output circuit has the following specifications:
• Switches 200 mA at 24 V
• Open collector NPN (low side drive) output
• Short circuit protected (up to +24 V)
• Diode protected against back EMF
Table 11-5 Coin Handling Signals

Signal Name Function
+24v Coin diverter solenoid power
+5v Power for solenoid photo optic sensor
GND Ground
NOD1A Coin optic detector 1A, to Main Board
NOD1B Coin optic detector 2B, to Main Board
NOD2A Cash box optic detector, to Main Board
S7ALARM Simulated valid coin output to Main Board
AUDIT Audit pulse out for DACOM3000
/EODLEDON NOD LED enable from Main Board.
/ECOINBLK Coin block solenoid output from Main Board
/ECOINDIV Coin diverter signal from Main Board.
Refer to the chapters on the Coin Chute Assembly and the Driver Board for
further details.

11.4.14 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry

The Main Board implements a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus for
communicating with the I/O Driver Board and other external peripheral devices.
The SPI bus is multiplexed into eight separate channels. Only one channel is
accessible at any given time.
Table 11-6 SPI Channel Signals

Name Type Description Comment
SCLK OUTPUT SPI Clock Serial bit clock. Common for all
the channels.
SIOEx OUTPUT SPI Channel x Enable line for the channel
Strobe It has to be one independent line
per channel
SPIRST OUTPUT SPI Clear Reset line to the channel. Channel
#7 has no reset. Mechanical
meters are reset separate to all
other channels
SPIRST2 OUTPUT SPI Channel 2 Reset mechanical meters
Clear
SPIDINx INPUT SPI Channel x It has to be one independent line
Data Input per channel
SPIDOUT OUTPUT SPI Data Output Common line for all the channels
SPI Channels Functional Description

The board has seven SPI channels selected via three bits in an output register.
Channel 0 is defined as the reset or null state. Data written to channel 0 will be
read back in its bitwise inverted state as a diagnostic test.
The seven channels are allocated as follows:
Table 11-7 SPI Channel Allocations

Channel 1 Top box distribution board (Optional)
Channel 2 Mechanical meters board (Optional)
Channel 3 not used
Channel 4 Door inputs, via I/O Driver PCB
Channel 5 Door outputs, via I/O Driver PCB
Channel 6 Main board slow I/O
Channel 7 Main board security registers.
11.4.15 DES Encryption Device

The Main Board may be fitted with a CALMOS or Western Digital 20C03 DES
encryption IC.
11.4.16 Serial Channels

The board has four serial channels, referred to as channels 0-3, which may be used
to communicate with peripheral equipment and external network interfaces. The
serial channels are implemented via two PC compatible DUART’s. The serial
debug channel is implemented on the ARM250 and is described elsewhere.

Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a Fluorescent Interface Panel (FIP) and

an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are configurable via the
Communications Configuration Board (CCB).
The serial ports are implemented using two industry standard 16C452 UARTs.
Each of the three generic serial channels (channels 1 to 3) has 1 receive data, 1
transmit data, 3 input and 3 output handshake lines.
The maximum baud rate supported is 9600 baud, except on channel 2 which uses
fast optocouplers.
11.4.17 Communication Configuration Board

Serial channels 1 to 3 are configured through the Communications Configuration
Board (CCB) plugged into the 72 pin SIMM socket on the Main Board. The CCB
converts the opto-coupled UART I/O to any of the following signal levels:
• RS232
• Current loop (Open collector)
• Note acceptor interface
• Serial printer
• TTL compatible level
• DACOM 5000
• External network interface
• Touchscreen
• Other
Refer to the chapter Communications Configuration Board (CCB) for a detailed

description.
11.4.18 Interface with the Power Control System

Signal inputs and outputs
The Main Board has several signal lines to interface with the power control
system as shown in the following table:
Table 11-8 Power Control System Signal Lines

Signal Name Type Comment
/SSR1 Output Control signal for the solid state relay to switch to low power
mode, open collector active LOW
/PFAIL Input Power Fail signal, open collector active LOW
/EPSU2OVR Input Output power 24 V correct, from power supply assembly
GND Power + 24 Volt ground from the PMS
Power Lines and Grounding Scheme

The Main Board receives +24 V DC from the power control assembly, via the
Interface Board.

The +24 V is supplied to the:

• I/O Driver Board
• Audio power amplifier.
• Coin handling modules.
• Note acceptor (if fitted)
• Printer (if fitted)
• Mechanical meters (if fitted)
• Handle (if fitted)
The Main Board uses a Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) to generate 5 V
DC and an isolated +/-12 V DC from the 24 V. The 5 V DC is used to supply the
logic circuits, as well as the I/O expansion boards and the optional security
subsystem board. The +/-12 V DC is supplied to the generic serial channels.
The 24 V DC input and the 5 V DC output are EMC filtered using ferrite beads
and ceramic capacitors.
The Main Board also receives 12 V DC from the I/O Driver Board. This supply is
passed through a linear regulator on the Main Board to generate the isolated 5 V
DC supply required by the hopper.
The power supply has overcurrent protection for current > 6.5 A for +5.1 V. The
power supply is ‘folded back’ when overloaded. Power is resumed once the
overload is removed.
All outputs are protected from short circuit. The power is resumed after removal
of the short circuit. The power supply also shuts down if the junction temperature
of the regulator reaches 150°C.
11.4.19 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface

The Main Board provides an optically coupled, open-collector pulse interface to a
Mikohn Link Progressive system.
The output is the standard Mikohn interface:
• Switches 20 mA at 24 V.
• Optically isolated.
• Reverse protection diode.
11.4.20 Debugging
DEMON
The ARM source level software debugger DEMON requires three modifications
to the Main Board to run.
1. The watchdog must be disabled
2. The DRAM emulator must be disabled, as DEMON modifies the interrupt
vectors in the first page of memory.

3. The interrupt from UART U71 channel 0 must be inverted and connected to
the CPU interrupt IL2. IL2 can generate either a IRQ or FIQ, but for
DEMON generates a FIQ.
The Main Board is fitted with switches to enable and disable the watchdog and
DRAM emulator, as although DEMON requires these features, normal game
software does not.
The memory expansion port contains a number of extra signals intended for
debugging purposes.
The CPU TEST signal implements the ARM250 tri-state test mode when it is
asserted. The CPU reset signal can act as both a reset from the CPU and a reset to
the CPU.
• The 72 MHz CPU clock oscillator supports the tri-state enable/disable.
• All nodes are accessible on the solder side of the board for ATE testing.
• The ARM250 keyboard serial channel with signals KIN and KOUT is used for
a debug interface.
11.4.21 Mechanical Switches

The board senses the status of five mechanical switches (signals MSWITCH0 to
MSWITCH4) in addition to the eight mechanical security switches. MSWITCH0
is the Audit reset switch, MSWITCH1 is the Jackpot reset switch, and
MSWITCH2, MSWITCH3, and MSWITCH4 are spare. The spare switches may
be used for an optional handle. The specifications for the inputs are:
• The switch current is 5 mA from the 5 V logic supply.
• The circuit is filtered for EMC (0.1 µF ceramic is recommended). Input
filtering provides EMC protection.
• The signals are connected to the internal SPI channel via a low-pass filter and
sensed with HCMOS logic levels.
11.4.22 Interface Board

The Main Board is connected to the Interface Board directly through three 96-way
male right-angle DIN41612 connectors:
Optically Isolated Connector

All the I/O signals in this connector are optically coupled. It contains the UART
serial communication channels, SPI channels, Mikohn interface, hopper interface,
and control signals for the power supply. It also provides connection to the power
supply for +24 V, +5 V, +12 V DC, and ±12 V.
Miscellaneous Connector
This connector contains the coin chute interface, video and audio signals, power
control system solid state relay, and the serial debug. It also connects to the +24 V
and +5 V power supply.

Security and I/O Expansion Connector

The connector contains both optical and mechanical security signals, mechanical
switch signals, and I/O expansion signals. It also provides connection to the +24
V power supply.
CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive
devices (ESDs) such as PCBs, take care to
avoid physical contact with components. Do
not place ESDs on metal surfaces. PCBs
should be handled by their edges. Care must
be taken to avoid flexing the PCB, as this
may lead to physical damage.
CAUTION
Turn the machine power off before removing
PCBs from the logic cage.
Removal
To remove the Main Board:
2. Open the logic cage door.
3. Standard Electro Static Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be
followed when handling PCBAs.
4. Lever the PCBA out of the runners using the board extractors, and withdraw
the board from the logic cage.
5. The PCBA should be placed in an antistatic bag immediately.
Note
You must place a fault tag on any faulty
boards.
Replacement
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Both sides of the
replacement PCBA should be inspected for any signs of physical damage.

11.6 Description of Connectors

11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board
A 72-pin SIMM socket is used to connect the CCB:
Table 11-9 Communications Configuration Board Connector - P23

Pin Pin Name Description
1 CFG2 DTR0 output signal through opto emitter
2 GNDI Ground
3 CFG4 RTS1 output signal through opto emitter
4 CFG1 DTR0 output signal through opto collector
5 SIN1 Input from channel 1 connector
6 CFG3 RTS1 output signal through opto collector
7 SOUT1 Output to channel 1 connector
9 CTS1 Input from channel 1 connector
11 DSR1 Input from channel 1 connector
12 CFG8 SOUT1 output signal through opto emitter
13 CFG7 SOUT1 output signal through opto collector
14 CFG10 CTS1 input signal through opto cathode
15 I1 Input from channel 1 connector
16 CFG11 DSR1 input signal through opto anode
17 CFG9 CTS1 input signal through opto anode
18 CFG12 DSR1 input signal through opto cathode
19 RTS1 Output to channel 1 connector
20 CFG13 SIN1 input signal through opto anode
21 DTR1 Output to channel 1 connector
22 CFG14 SIN1 input signal through opto cathode
23 O1 Output to channel 1 connector
24 P12VI +12v power
25 CFG20 RTS2 output signal through opto emitter
26 N12VI -12v power
27 CFG19 RTS2 output signal through opto collector
28 GNDI Ground
29 CFG18 SOUT2 output signal through opto emitter
30 CFG17 SOUT2 output signal through opto collector
31 CFG16 SOUT2 output signal through opto base
32 CFG15 Opto Vcc
33 SIN2 Input from channel 2 connector
35 SOUT2 Output to channel 2 connector
36 CFG29 SIN2 input signal through opto anode
37 CTS2 Input from channel 2 connector
38 CFG30 SIN2 input signal through opto cathode
39 DSR2 Input from channel 2 connector
41 I2 Input from channel 2 connector
42 CFG31 CTS2 input signal through opto anode
43 RTS2 Output to channel 2 connector
44 CFG32 CTS2 input signal through opto cathode
45 DTR2 Output to channel 2 connector
(continued …)

(… continued from)
Pin Pin Name IC-Pin No. Description
46 CFG33 U137-1 DSR2 input signal through opto anode
47 O2 P20-A8 Output to channel 2 connector
48 P12VI +12v power
49 CFG34 U139-2 DSR2 input signal through opto cathode
50 GNDI Ground
51 CFG24 U133-3 RTS3 output signal through opto emitter
52 N12VI -12v power
53 SIN3 P20-A9 Input from channel 3 connector
54 CFG23 U133-4 RTS3 output signal through opto collector
55 SOUT3 P20-C10 Output to channel 3 connector
56 CFG26 U134-3 DTR3 output signal through opto emitter
57 CFG25 U134-4 DTR3 output signal through opto collector
58 CFG28 U135-3 SOUT3 output signal through opto emitter
59 CTS3 P20-A10 Input from channel 3 connector
60 CFG27 U135-4 SOUT3 output signal through opto collector
61 CFG35 U138-1 CTS3 input signal through opto anode
62 CFG36 U138-2 CTS3 input signal through opto cathode
63 DSR3 P20-C11 Input from channel 3 connector
64 CFG37 U140-1 DSR3 input signal through opto anode
65 I3 P20-A11 Input from channel 3 connector
66 CFG38 U140-2 DSR3 input signal through opto cathode
67 RTS3 P20-C12 Output to channel 3 connector
68 CFG39 U139-1 SIN3 input signal through opto anode
69 DTR3 P20-B12 Output to channel 3 connector
70 CFG40 U139-2 SIN3 input signal through opto cathode
71 O3 P20-A12 Output to channel 3 connector
72 GNDI Ground

11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20

This connector interfaces with P1 on the Interface Board.
Table 11-10 Optically Isolated Connector - P20

PIN Pin Name Comment
A1 SIN1 Receive data, serial channel 1
B1 N12VI -12V from main board, isolated
C1 ---
A2 CTS1 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 1
B2 GNDI Ground of ±12 voltage, isolated
C2 SOUT1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1
A3 I1 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 1
B3 P12VI +12V from main board, isolated
C3 DSR1 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 1
A4 O1 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 1
B4 DTR1 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 1
C4 RTS1 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 1
C5 ---
C6 SOUT2 Transmit data, serial channel 2
C9 ---
A13 ---
B13 ---
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 ---
B15 ---
C15 ---
A16 ---
B16 ---
C16 ---
(continued ...)

(... continued from)

A17 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
B17 GNDA Ground
C17 /ESPIDIN1 Data from top box
A18 /ESPIDIN5 Serial data input to main logic from serial input driver. Open collector
output.
B18 GNDA Ground
C18 /ESPIDIN4 Serial data input to main logic from serial output driver. Open collector
output.
A19 ESPIRST SPI reset signal
B19 GNDA Ground
C19 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
A20 ESCLK Serial clock
B20 GNDA Ground
C20 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
A21 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
B21 GNDA Ground
C21 /ESIOE1 Serial output enable to top box
A22 /ESIOE5 Serial output enable #5 which selects SPI output driver.
B22 GNDA Ground
C22 /ESIOE4 Serial output enable #4 which selects SPI input driver.
A23 /EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output, hopper
B23 GNDA Ground
C23 ---
A24 /EHOPHI Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper
B24 GNDA Ground
C24 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
A25 /EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction, hopper
B25 GNDA Ground
C25 /EHOPLO Detects hopper low, hopper
A26 /EHOPTEST Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper
B26 GNDA Ground
C26 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
A27 ---
B27 GNDA Ground
C27 VCC +5V
A28 EPSU2SND ---
B28 GNDA Ground
C28 /EPSU2OVR ---
A29 /ESPARE01 Spare output signal
B29 GNDA Ground
C29 /EHANDLE ---
A30 P24VA +24V
B30 GNDA Ground
C30 P24VA +24V
A31 EMIKOHNP Mikohn signal
B31 P12V +12V from driver board
C31 P12V +12V from driver board
A32 ---
B32 GNDA Ground
C32 EMIKOHNN Mikohn signal

11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22

Table 11-11 Miscellaneous Connector - P22

A1 /ES2OVERDE Door detector on Mk4 (never used)
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 /EODLEDON NOD1 LED enable
A2 S7ALARM S7 Alarm or Coin Comparator coin valid
B2 /ECOINDIV Coin Divert Drive (NPN trans. to GND)
C2 /ECOINBLK Coin Comparator enable (switches power through NOD) / S7 Inhibit
A3 NOD1B NOD1 Coin output B / S7 Coin output 5
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 NOD1A NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out.
A4 CVP0 S7 Coin output
B4 NOD2B NOD2 Coin output B
C4 NOD2A NOD2 Coin output A
B5 GNDD Ground
C5 CVP1 S7 Coin output
A6 /SSR1 solid state relay for ballast and monitor On/Off (LED cathode)
B6 CVP4 S7 Coin output
A7 RS232TX serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 FIPOUT Serial Transmit Data out
A8 RS232RX serial 0, nonisolated receiver
B8 RS232RTS nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0
C8 RS232CTS nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0
A9 ---
B9 RED Red, video
C9 REDGND red colour signal ground
A10 BLUE Blue, video
B10 GREENGND blue colour signal ground
C10 GREEN Green, video
A11 BLUEGND green colour signal ground
B11 VSYNC Vsync, video
C11 SYNCGND synchro signal ground
A12 SPEAKER Audio output
B12 ---
C12 HSYNC Hsync, video
A13 SPEAKER2 Stereo speaker output
B13 SPKRGND speaker signal ground
C13 P24VSND +24V, single track on PCB
A14 GNDD Ground
B14 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
C14 GNDD Ground
A15 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
A16 GNDD Ground
C16 GNDD Ground
(continued ...)


B17 GNDD Ground
A18 ---
B18 KOUT Serial data OUTPUT from ARM250
C18 KIN Serial data INPUT from ARM250
A19 ---
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 ---
A20 ---
B20 ---
C20 ---
A21 ---
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ---
A22 ---
B22 ---
C22 ---
A23 ---
B23 GNDD Ground
C23 ---
A24 ---
B24 ---
C24 ---
A25 ---
B25 GNDD Ground
C25 ---
A26 VBATE External battery backup
B26 ---
C26 /PFAIL Power fail signal, active low
A27 /MIKOHN Emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
A28 ---
B28 ---
C28 ---
A29 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
C29 ---
A30 ---
B30 ---
C30 ---
A31 ---
B31 GNDD Ground
C31 ---
A32 ---
B32 ---
C32 ---

11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21

Table 11-12 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21

A1 MSWITCH1 mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 MSWITCH0 mech. switch, AUDIT RESET
A2 MSWITCH4 mech. switch, spare
B2 MSWITCH3 mech. switch, spare
C2 MSWITCH2 mech. switch, spare
A3 ---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
A4 MSS0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NC
B4 OPRIS0 Door security detector output, no driver/buffer exists.
C4 EMCS0 door optical emitter
A5 EMCS1 Emitter 1 Drive signal, security 1
B5 GNDD Ground
C5 MSSO0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NO
A6 MSSO1 Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NO
B6 MSS1 Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NC
C6 OPRIS1 Receiver 1 Sense signal, security 1
A7 OPRIS2 Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 EMCS2 Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2
B8 MSSO2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO
C8 MSS2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC
A9 MSS3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NC
B9 GNDD Ground
B10 EMCS4 Emitter 4 Drive signal, security 4
C10 MSSO3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO
B11 GNDD Ground
B13 GNDD Ground
B14 OPRIS7 Receiver 7 Sense signal, security 7
A15 ---
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 ---
A16 VBAT0 Backup battery 0
B16 ---
C16 ---
(continued ...)


A17 RNW CPU, read not write signal
B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---
A18 /EIF CPU, IF interrupt
B18 EFHO CPU, FH0 interrupt
C18 /DACK CPU, data acknowledge
A19 /EFL CPU, FL interrupt
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 /EIL0 CPU, IL0 interrupt
A20 /ERESET CPU, external reset output
B20 /EIOW CPU, IO write signal
C20 /EIOR CPU, IO read signal
A21 EA13 CPU, address bus
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ECLK8M CPU, clock signal
B22 EA11 CPU, address bus
C22 EA12 CPU, address bus
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
A26 ---
B26 ---
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
A28 ED5 CPU, data bus
B28 ED6 CPU, data bus
C28 ED7 CPU, data bus
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 P24VD +24V
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 P24VD +24V
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Interface Board
________Chapter 12________
Interface Board
Part No. 410315 Issue B
12.1 Physical Description ............................................................ 12-3
12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ............................................ 12-3
12.2 Technical Description .......................................................... 12-5
12.2.1 Keying .................................................................................... 12-6
12.3 Description of Connectors .................................................. 12-7
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3 .............................. 12-7

12.3.2 Driver Board, P4................................................................... 12-13
12.3.3 Optional I/O Expansion Card / LAB Comms, P5 .................. 12-15
12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6......................................................... 12-17
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24 ................................................. 12-17
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11.................................. 12-19
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12 .............................................................. 12-20
12.3.8 Bank Note Acceptor LEDs, Backlight and Security, P13...... 12-21
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18. ......................... 12-21
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21 .............................................................. 12-23
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16 ......................................................................... 12-23
12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19.............................................................. 12-24
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20 .............................................................. 12-24
12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23................................................ 12-25
12.3.15 Hopper, P25 ......................................................................... 12-25
12.3.16 Video, P26............................................................................ 12-25
12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27 .................................................. 12-26
12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28 ...................... 12-26
12.3.19 Power Supply, P29............................................................... 12-27

Interface Board MVP Video Service Manual
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30 .................................................. 12-27
12.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ........................... 12-28
List of Figures
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ........................................................12-4
List of Tables
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections.......................................................................12-6
Table 12-2 Keying of Connections.................................................................................12-6
Table 12-3 Main Board Connector P1 ...........................................................................12-7
Table 12-4 Main Board Connector P2 ...........................................................................12-9
Table 12-5 Main Board Connector P3 .........................................................................12-11
Table 12-6 Driver Board Connector P4 .......................................................................12-13
Table 12-7 Optional I/O Expansion Card Connector P5..............................................12-15
Table 12-8 Mechanical Meters Connector P6 .............................................................12-17
Table 12-9 Security Connectors P8, P22, P24 ............................................................12-17
Table 12-10 Logic Door Security Connector P8 ..........................................................12-18
Table 12-11 Security No.3 to No.5 Connector P22 .....................................................12-18
Table 12-12 Security 6 & 7 Connector P24 .................................................................12-19
Table 12-13 Pushbuttons and Lamps 1 Connector P10 .............................................12-19
Table 12-14 Pushbuttons and Lamps 2 Connector P11 .............................................12-20
Table 12-15 Coin Handling Connector P12.................................................................12-20
Table 12-16 Bank Note Acceptor Connector P13 .......................................................12-21
Table 12-17 Serial Channel 0 Connector P14.............................................................12-21
Table 12-18 Serial Channel 2 Connector P15.............................................................12-22
Table 12-19 Generic Serial Channel 3 Connector P17 ...............................................12-22
Table 12-20 Generic Serial Channel 1 Connector P18 ...............................................12-23
Table 12-21 DACOM 5000 Connector P21 .................................................................12-23
Table 12-22 Mikohn Connector P16............................................................................12-23
Table 12-23 SPI Channel 1 Connector P19 ................................................................12-24
Table 12-24 DACOM 3000 Connector P20 .................................................................12-24
Table 12-25 Spare Voltage 24 V DC Connector P23 ..................................................12-25
Table 12-26 Hopper Connector P25............................................................................12-25
Table 12-27 Video Connector P26 ..............................................................................12-25
Table 12-28 Mechanical Switches Connector P27......................................................12-26
Table 12-29 Audit, Jackpot Switch & Door Security Connector P28 ...........................12-26
Table 12-30 Power Supply Connector P29 .................................................................12-27
Table 12-31 Optional Fan DC 12 V Connector P30 ....................................................12-27


The Interface Board is a single printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) mounted
vertically at the base of the cabinet, partly enclosed within the logic cage. The
Interface Board is used to electrically connect the Main Board, the I/O Driver
Board, and all peripheral PCBAs and subsystems.
The Main Board and I/O Driver Board connect directly to the Interface Board
within the logic cage. The Communication Configuration Board and the optional
I/O Expansion Board connect directly to the Main Board, within the logic cage.
All other PCBAs and peripherals are connected to the Interface Board via ribbon
cables or wire looms.
The component layout of the Interface Board is shown in Figure 12-1.
12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations

the Interface Board is provided in Volume II:

if_lay1.cdr
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location


The Interface Board provides electrical connection for the following boards and
connectors:
• MkV Main Board
• MkV Series II I/O Driver Board
• MkV Series II Slant Top Mechanical Meter Board
• MkV Series II Power Supply Assembly
• I/O Expansion Board / LAB Comms Board
• Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps
• Coin Handling
• Speakers
• Video Monitor / Touchscreen
• Networks
• Security Switches
• Jackpot / Audit Key Switches
• Bank note Acceptor
• Mikohn Progressives
• Hopper
• Printer
• Cooling Fan
• Spare Power Connector
• Spare Switch Connector
• SPI Channel 1

The following table lists the function and type of each connector on the Interface
Board.
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections

Designator Function Type of Connector
P1 MkV Main Board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P4 MkV Series II Driver II Board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P5 Expansion I/O - LAB board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P6 Mechanical meter 26 way ribbon cable
P8 Logic door security 4 way Minifit
P10 Door buttons and lamps 1 24 way Minifit
P11 Door buttons and lamps 2 20 way Minifit
P12 Coin handling, speaker, and door opto 24 way Minifit
P13 Note acceptor LED’s, backlight and security 14 way Minifit
P14 Serial channel no. 0 12 way Minifit
P15 Generic serial channel no. 2 16 way Minifit
P16 Mikohn 4 way Minifit
P17 Generic serial channel no. 3 16 way Minifit
P18 Serial channel no. 1 (note acceptor) 20 way Minifit
P19 SPI channel 1 26 way ribbon cable
P20 DACOM 3000 20 way ribbon cable
P21 DACOM 5000 10 way ribbon cable
P22 Security no. 3-5 24 way Minifit
P23 Spare 24 V DC 4 way Minifit
P24 Security no. 6 & 7 14 way Minifit
P25 Hopper 14 way Minifit
P26 Video, touchscreen 16 way Minifit
P27 Mechanical switch - handle 12 way Minifit
P28 Audit/jackpot switch and door opto emitter 14 way Minifit
P29 MkV Series II power supply 16 way Minifit
P30 Fan 4 way Minifit
12.2.1 Keying
To prevent connectors being connected to the wrong sockets, keying may be
provided for the Minifit Junior headers outside the logic cage. The holes of keyed
pins remain on the PCB with solder pad removed. The location of keyed pins, if
present, is shown in the following table:
Table 12-2 Keying of Connections

Designator Keyed pins Designator Keyed pins
P10 11, 14 P22 8, 14
P11 2, 18 P23 3
P12 ---- P24 2, 10
P13 2, 11 P25 4, 9
P14 2, 8 P26 10, 12
P15 2, 7 P27 3, 8
P16 1 P28 2, 4
P17 7, 10 P29 2, 15
P18 12, 17
Note: This is an optional feature that may or may not be implemented.

12.3 Description of Connectors
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3

P1, P2 and P3 interface with three 96-pin DIN connectors on the Main Board.
Main Board, P1
The connector P1 fits to P20 on Main Board.
Table 12-3 Main Board Connector P1

Pin Pin Name Comment
C1 ---
C2 SOUT1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1
C5 ---
C9 ---
A13 ---
B13 ---
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 ---
B15 ---
C15 ---
A16 ---

B16 ---
C16 ---
A17 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
B17 GNDA Ground
C17 /ESPIDIN1 Data from top box
A18 /ESPIDIN5 Serial data input to main logic from serial input driver.
Open collector output.
B18 GNDA Ground
C18 /ESPIDIN4 Serial data input to main logic from serial output driver.
Open collector output.
A19 ESPIRST SPI reset signal
B19 GNDA Ground
C19 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
A20 ESCLK Serial clock
B20 GNDA Ground
C20 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
A21 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
B21 GNDA Ground
C21 /ESIOE1 Serial output enable to top box
A22 /ESIOE5 Serial output enable #5 which selects SPI output driver.
B22 GNDA Ground
C22 /ESIOE4 Serial output enable #4 which selects SPI input driver.
A23 /EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output, hopper
B23 GNDA Ground
C23 ---
A24 /EHOPHI Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper
B24 GNDA Ground
C24 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
A25 /EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction, hopper
B25 GNDA Ground
C25 /EHOPLO Detects hopper low, hopper
A26 /EHOPTEST Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper
B26 GNDA Ground
C26 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
A27 ---
B27 GNDA Ground
C27 VCC +5V
A28 EPSU2SND ---
B28 GNDA Ground
C28 /EPSU2OVR ---
A29 /ESPARE01 Spare output signal
B29 GNDA Ground
C29 /EHANDLE ---
A30 P24VA +24V
B30 GNDA Ground
C30 P24VA +24V
A31 EMIKOHNP Mikohn signal
B31 P12V +12V from driver board
C31 P12V +12V from driver board
A32 ---
B32 GNDA Ground
C32 EMIKOHNN Mikohn signal

Main Board, P2

A1 /ES2OVERDE Door detector on Mk4 (never used)
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 /EODLEDON NOD1 LED enable
A2 S7ALARM S7 Alarm or CC16 coin valid
B2 /ECOINDIV Coin Divert Drive (NPN trans. to GND)
C2 /ECOINBLK CC16 Enable (switch’s power through NOD) / S7 Inhibit
A3 NOD1B NOD1 Coin output B / S7 Coin output 5
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 NOD1A NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out.
B4 NOD2B NOD2 Coin output B
C4 NOD2A NOD2 Coin output A
B5 GNDD Ground
A6 /SSR1 solid state relay for ballast and monitor On/Off (LED
cathode)
B6 CVP4 S7 Coin output
A7 RS232TX serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 FIPOUT Serial Transmit Data out
A8 RS232RX serial 0, nonisolated receiver
B8 RS232RTS nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0
C8 RS232CTS nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0
A9 ---
B9 RED Red, video
C9 REDGND red colour signal ground
A10 BLUE Blue, video
B10 GREENGND blue colour signal ground
C10 GREEN Green, video
A11 BLUEGND green colour signal ground
B11 VSYNC Vsync, video
C11 SYNCGND synchro signal ground
A12 SPEAKER Audio output
B12 ---
C12 HSYNC Hsync, video
A13 SPEAKER2 Stereo speaker output
B13 SPKRGND speaker signal ground
C13 P24VSND +24V, single track on PCB
A14 GNDD Ground
C14 GNDD Ground
B15 GNDD Ground
A16 GNDD Ground
C16 GNDD Ground
B17 GNDD Ground
A18 ---
B18 KOUT Serial data OUTPUT from ARM250
C18 KIN Serial data INPUT from ARM250

A19 ---
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 ---
A20 ---
B20 ---
C20 ---
A21 ---
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ---
A22 ---
B22 ---
C22 ---
A23 ---
B23 GNDD Ground
C23 ---
A24 ---
B24 ---
C24 ---
A25 ---
B25 GNDD Ground
C25 ---
A26 VBATE External battery backup
B26 ---
C26 /PFAIL Power fail signal, active low
A27 /MIKOHN Emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
A28 ---
B28 ---
C28 ---
A29 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
C29 ---
A30 ---
B30 ---
C30 ---
A31 ---
B31 GNDD Ground
C31 ---
A32 ---
B32 ---
C32 ---

Main Board, P3

A1 MSWITCH1 mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 MSWITCH0 mech. switch, AUDIT RESET
A2 MSWITCH4 mech. switch, spare
B2 MSWITCH3 mech. switch, spare
C2 MSWITCH2 mech. switch, spare
A3 ---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
B4 OPRIS0 Door security detector output, no driver/buffer exists.
C4 EMCS0 door optical emitter
B5 GNDD Ground
A6 MSSO1 Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NO
B7 GNDD Ground
B8 MSSO2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO
B9 GNDD Ground
B10 EMCS4 Emitter 4 Drive signal, security 4
C10 MSSO3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO
B11 GNDD Ground
B13 GNDD Ground
B14 OPRIS7 Receiver 7 Sense signal, security 7
A15 ---
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 ---
A16 VBAT0 Backup battery 0
B16 ---
C16 ---
B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---

B19 GNDD Ground

B21 GNDD Ground
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
A26 ---
B26 ---
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 P24VD +24V
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 P24VD +24V
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V

12.3.2 Driver Board, P4

The Driver Board connects directly to the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin
vertical connector.
Table 12-6 Driver Board Connector P4

Pin Signal Function
A1 GNDA Signal/power ground
B1 GNDA Signal/power ground
C1 AUDIT Connected to DACOM 3000
A2 PBIN1 Push Button Input 1
B2 /ESPIDOUT SPI Data Out from Main Board
C2 /ESIOE4 SPI Channel 4 (Door output) Enable
B3 PBIN3 Push Button Input 3
C3 /ESIOE5 SPI Channel 5 (Door output) Enable
C4 ESCLK SPI Clock
C5 /ESPIDIN4 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
C6 /SPIDIN5 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
B7 PBLMP1 Push Button Lamp Output 1
C7 ESPIRST SPI Reset from Main board
A8 GNDA Signal/power ground
C8 GNDA Signal/power ground
A9 PBLMP2 Push Button Lamp Output 2
C9 PBLMP4 Push Button Lamp Output 4
A10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
B10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
C10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
A11 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
B11 VCC +5 volts from Main board
C11 VCC +5 volts from Main board
B12 P12V +12 volts for main board and coin comparator
C12 P12V +12 volts for main board and coin comparator
C13 PBLMP8 Push Button Lamp Output 8
C15 MSSO0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally open
C16 MSS0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally closed


A20 S7ALARM S7 signal to the main board
B22 CCREDIT Coin credit pulse
A23 CSENSE Coin Sense output from coin validator
B23 CERROR Coin Error signal from coin validator
A24 ACCUMPRICE Accumulated coin output from S7 validator
B24 S7ERROR S7 error signal from S7 validator - also connected to S7ALARM
of main board
C24 /ECOINDIV Coin diverter signal from main board
A25 CDIVPOS Coin diverter position from coin chute
B25 CENABLE Coin validator enable signal
C25 /ECOINBLK Coin block solenoid output from main board
A26 /ERESET Reset
A27 /CDIVERT Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute
B27 DNOMLED1 Note Acceptor Denomination LED 1
C27 /EODLEDON NOD LED enable form main board
A28 DNOMLED2 Note Acceptor Denomination LED 2
C28 VBAT0 Battery 0 output from main board
C29 NOD2A Cash box Optic Detector 2A
C30 NOD1B Coin Optic Detector 1B
A31 BKLITE BACC Back Light output
B31 NOD1A Coin Optic Detector 1A
C31 P24VA +24 V power
A32 P24VA +24 V power
B32 P24VA +24 V power
C32 P24VA +24 V power

12.3.3 Optional I/O Expansion Card / LAB Comms, P5

The optional I/O Expansion Board or LAB Communications Board connects to
the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin vertical connector.
Table 12-7 Optional I/O Expansion Card Connector P5

A1 ---
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 ---
A2 ---
B2 ---
C2 ---
---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
B4 ---
C4 ---
A5 ---
B5 GNDD Ground
A6 ---
B6 ---
C6 ---
A7 ---
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 ---
A8 ---
B8 ---
C8 ---
A9 ---
B9 GNDD Ground
C9 ---
A10 ---
B10 ---
C10 ---
A11 ---
B11 GNDD Ground
C11 ---
A12 ---
B12 ---
C12 ---
A13 ---
B13 GNDD Ground
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 GNDD configuration pin, specify card number
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 VCC configuration pin, specify card number
B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---


B19 GNDD Ground
B21 GNDD Ground
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
A26 VBATE external battery backup
B26 /PFAIL power fail signal
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 ---
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 ---
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V

12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6

Table 12-8 Mechanical Meters Connector P6
This connector is located within the logic cage and facilitates the connection of the
electromechanical meters and also security switch 2.
Pin Pin Name Function
1 P24VA +24V
2 GND Ground
3 P24VA +24V
4 GND Ground
5 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
6 GNDA Isolated ground
7 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
9 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
10 VCC +5V from mainboard, converted from 24V
11 ESCLK Serial clock
13 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
15 GND Ground
16 VCC +5V from mainboard, converted from 24V
17 MSS2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC
19 MSSO2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO
21 EMCS2 Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2
23 OPRIS2 Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2
25 GND Ground
26 ---
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24

The security system monitors the optical and mechanical switch inputs during
normal operation. Mechanical switches 0 to 3 can operate while the power is off.
The security signals are typically distributed as follows:
Table 12-9 Security Connectors P8, P22, P24

Security Mechanical Optical
0 Logic Cage Main Door
1 ---- ----
2 Mechanical Meters ----
3 Cash Box ----
4 Main Door ----
5 Note Acceptor Cover ----
6 ---- ----
7 ---- ----
Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the
individual machine configuration.

Logic door security, P8

Table 12-10 Logic Door Security Connector P8
The function of the Logic Door security switch system is to detect access to the
logic system whilst power is off.
Pin Pin Name Comments
1 MSS0 Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NC
2 GND Ground
3 MSSO0 Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NO
4 ----
Security No.3 to No.5, P22

Table 12-11 Security No.3 to No.5 Connector P22
1 ----
3 GND Ground
5 ----
7 GND Ground
8 (Keyed)
11 GND Ground
12 ----
13 ----
14 (Keyed)
16 GND Ground
18 GND Ground
20 GND Ground
23 GND Ground
24 ----

Security 6 and 7, P24

Table 12-12 Security 6 & 7 Connector P24
1
2 (Keyed)
4 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 ----
10 (Keyed)
11 GND Ground
14 GND Ground
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11

Pushbuttons and lamps 1, P10
Table 12-13 Pushbuttons and Lamps 1 Connector P10
1 P22V5 +22.5 V for lamps
2 PBLMP1 Pushbutton lamp output 1
11 (Keyed)
13 P22V5 +22.5 V for lamps
14 (Keyed)
15 PBIN1 Pushbutton input 1

Pushbuttons and lamps 2, P11

Table 12-14 Pushbuttons and Lamps 2 Connector P11
1 P22V5 +22.5V for lamps
2 (Keyed)
10
18 (Keyed)
20
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12

Table 12-15 Coin Handling Connector P12
1 P24VA +24V
2 GNDA Ground
3 S7ALARM S7 error signal from S7 validator
4 CDIVPOS Coin diverter position from coin chute
5 CENABLE Coin validator enable signal
6 /CDIVERT Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute
7 P12V +12V from driver board
8 CVP0 S7 Coin output
11 SPEAKER Audio output
12 SPEAKER2 Stereo speaker output
13 VCC +5V for NOD’s
14 GND Ground
15 CCREDIT Coin credit pulse
16 CSENSE Coin sense output from coin validator
17 CERROR Coin error signal from coin validator
18 ACCUMPRICE Accumulated coin output from S7 validator
19 GND Ground
22 OPRIS0 Door opto detector
23 SPKRGND1 Speaker ground 1
24 SPKRGND2 Speaker ground 2

12.3.8 Bank Note Acceptor LEDs, Backlight and Security, P13

Table 12-16 Bank Note Acceptor Connector P13
2 (Keyed)
3 DNOMLED5 Note acceptor denomination LED 1
6 BKLITE Note acceptor denomination LED 4
9 DNOMLED4 Note acceptor back light
11 (Keyed)
14 GND Ground
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18.

Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a FIP (Fluorescent Indicator Panel)
display and an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are
configurable via the Communications Configuration Board on the Main Board.
Serial channel 0, P14

Table 12-17 Serial Channel 0 Connector P14
1
2 (Keyed)
3 P12V +12V DC supply from driver board
4 RS232TX serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
5 RS232RX serial 0, nonisolated receiver
6 GND Ground
7
8 (Keyed)
9 RS232CTS nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0
10 RS232RTS nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0
11 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
12 FIPOUT Serial Transmit Data out

Generic serial channel 2, P15

Table 12-18 Serial Channel 2 Connector P15
1 P24V +24V
2 (Keyed)
3 SIN2 Receive data, serial channel 2
4 SOUT2 Transmit data, serial channel 2
5 CTS2 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 2
6 DSR2 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 2
7 (Keyed)
8 GND Ground
9
10 I2 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 2
11 P12VI +12V isolated, from main board
12 N12VI -12V isolated, from main board
13 GNDI Ground ±12V isolated
14 RTS2 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 2
15 DTR2 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 2
16 O2 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 2
Generic serial channel 3, P17

Table 12-19 Generic Serial Channel 3 Connector P17
1 P24V +24V
7 (Keyed)
8 GND Ground
9 ----
10 (Keyed)
13 GNDI Ground ±12V isolated

Generic serial channel 1 (Bank Note Acceptor), P18

Table 12-20 Generic Serial Channel 1 Connector P18
1 P24V +24V
3 SOUT1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1
8 GND Ground
9 GND Ground
10 not used
11 not used
12 (Keyed)
15 GNDI ground ±12V isolated
17 (Keyed)
20 not used
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21

DACOM 5000/BIPS is a current loop connection with a source voltage of 24 V,
and it is connected via a 10-way ribbon cable IDC header. The DACOM
interface is configured on serial channel 3 through the Communications
Configuration Board.
Table 12-21 DACOM 5000 Connector P21

9 Connected to pin 10 on interface board
10 Connected to pin 9 on interface board
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16

Table 12-22 Mikohn Connector P16
P16 is used for the Mikohn link progressive interface.
(Keyed)
1 EMIKOHNP collector of Opto
2 EMIKOHNN emitter of Opto

12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19

Table 12-23 SPI Channel 1 Connector P19
Pin Signal Function
1 ---
2 ---
3 ---
4 ---
5 ---
7 ---
9 ---
10 ---
15 /ESIOE1 Serial output enable to top box
16 ---
17 ESPIRST Reset signal to top box
19 /ESPIDIN1 Data from top box
21 P24VA +24V
23 P24V +24V
25 P24VA +24V
26 P24VA +24V
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20

The purpose of this connector is keep compatibility with previous gaming
machines. It merges certain signals defining the state of the machine and can be
connected to the DACOM 3000 Interface Board.
Table 12-24 DACOM 3000 Connector P20
1 MSS4 Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC, door switch
3 NESPARE01 Spare output signal
5 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
6 /MIKOHN emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000
7 /PFAIL power fail signal of 24V
8 NOD1A NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out., coin input
9 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
10 AUDIT Signal from driver board
11 GND Ground
12 ----
13 GND Ground
14 ----
15 GND Ground
16 MSWITCH0 mech. switch, AUDIT RESET
18 MSWITCH1 mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET
19 P24V +24V

12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23

Table 12-25 Spare Voltage 24 V DC Connector P23
Provides a spare 24 V DC output.
1 P24V +24V
2 P24V +24V
3 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
12.3.15 Hopper, P25

Table 12-26 Hopper Connector P25
The hopper interface has the following pin assignment:
1 P24VA +24V
2 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
3 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
4 (Keyed)
5 /EHOPHI Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper
6 /EHOPLO Detects hopper low, hopper
7 GNDA Ground
8 HOP5V +5V from main board, converted from 12V
9 (Keyed)
10 /EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction, hopper
11 /EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output, hopper
11 /EHOPTEST Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper
13
14 GNDA Ground
12.3.16 Video, P26

Table 12-27 Video Connector P26
The video connector enables the connection of a VGA standard monitor.
1
2 HSYNC Hsync, video
3 BLUE Blue, video
4 GREEN Green, video
5 RED Red, video
6 GNDE Chassis ground
7 RS232RX Serial 0, nonisolated receiver
8 RS232TX Serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
9 SYNCGND GND, video
10 (Keyed)
11 VSYNC Vsync, video
12 (Keyed)
13 BLUEGND Blue return, video
14 GREENGND Green return, video
15 REDGND Red return, video
16 GND Ground

12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27

Five mechanical switches are available in addition to the eight mechanical security
switches. P27 provides for three spare switches that may be used for an optional
handle.
Table 12-28 Mechanical Switches Connector P27

1 P24V +24V
2 /EHANDLE Handle
3 (Keyed)
4 ----
5 MSWITCH4 Mech. switch, spare
6 GND Ground
7
8 (Keyed)
10 GND Ground
12 GND Ground
12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28

P28 provides for the Jackpot reset switch and the Audit switch, as well as the
cabinet top cover optical emitter, the cabinet top cover mechanical security switch,
and a spare 24 V output.
Table 12-29 Audit, Jackpot Switch & Door Security Connector P28
1 P24V +24V
2 (Keyed)
3 MSS4 Door security
4 (Keyed)
5 GND Ground
6 EMCS0 door optical emitter
7 GND Ground
8 P24V +24V
9 GND Ground
10 GND Ground
11 MSWITCH1 Audit reset
12 GND Ground
13 MSWITCH0 Jackpot reset
14 GND Ground

12.3.19 Power Supply, P29

Table 12-30 Power Supply Connector P29
1 /SSR1 Low power mode
2 (Keyed)
3 /EPSU2OVR Output 24V correct
4 P24VS +24V
5 P24VS +24V
6 P24VS +24V
7 P24VS +24V
8 P24VS +24V
9 Future expansion
10 /PFAIL Missing mains detection
11 GNDS Ground
12 GNDS Ground
13 GNDS Ground
14 GNDS Ground
15 (Keyed)
16 GNDS Ground
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30

This connector is used to power an optional fan that may be mounted to the logic
cage. The purpose of this fan is to relieve possible heat dissipation problems
within the logic cage.
Table 12-31 Optional Fan DC 12 V Connector P30

Pin Signal Function
1
2 P12V +12V DC supply from Driver Board
3 (Keyed)
4 GNDA Ground


CAUTION
devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to
avoid physical contact with components.
PCBAs should be handled by their edges.
ESDs should not be placed on metal
surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take care
to avoid flexing the PCBA, as this may lead
to permanent damage.
Removal
The procedures for removing and replacing the Interface Board are detailed in the
chapter Cabinet, under the section describing how to remove and disassemble the
logic cage.
Note
equipment.
Run a complete machine test after replacing the Interface Board.

MVP Video Service Manual I/O Driver Board
______Chapter 13______
I/O Driver Board
410311 or 410415
13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations............................ 13-3
13.2.1 Power Supply ........................................................................... 13-6

13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps .......................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface............................................................ 13-7
13.2.4 Security Switches ..................................................................... 13-9
13.4 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................. 13-11

I/O Driver Board MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location ........................................................................13-3
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram ..............................................................13-4
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout...........................................13-5
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals .................................................................13-7
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals ....................................................13-8
List of Tables
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation ...........................................................13-8
Table 13-2 LED Functions.............................................................................................13-9
Table 13-2 Security Switch Functions ...........................................................................13-9
Table 13-4 Connector Pin Assignments ......................................................................13-11


The MVP gaming machine may be fitted with one of two I/O Driver Boards:
MkV Series II I/O Driver Board Part No. 2501-410311
or
MkV Series II I/O Driver Board II Part No. 2501-410415
The Driver Board 410415 is an updated version of 410311 with additional
components to protect against electromagnetic interference (EMI).
The I/O Driver Board is located inside the logic cage where it connects directly to
the Interface Board. Nylon slots are provided on the inside of the logic cage to
guide the I/O Driver Board into position.
Logic Cage
Main Board
I/O Driver Board
I/O Expansion Board or

LAB Communications Board
(if fitted)
Interface Board
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location
13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

the I/O Driver Board is provided in Volume II:


The I/O Driver Board provides an interface between some of the machine
equipment and the Main Board via the Interface Board. The SPI Bus on the Main
Board is connected to the I/O Driver Board, allowing the Main Board to address
all I/O attached to the I/O Driver Board. The following machine equipment is
connected to the I/O Driver Board.
• Mechanical Security Switches
• Lamps
• Pushbuttons
• Note Acceptor LEDs
• Coin Management Devices
+24 V +22.5 V
12 V
+5 V +12 V
Regulator
GND
5S2DRV01.cdr
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram

MKV SERIES 2 DRIVER 2
U1 L5
PCBA 2501-410415 ISSUE A01
C20 0801-410414 REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C50
C6 C72
U10 U15
L1
C55 R131 R139 R157
C51 R127 R130
R140 R158
D1 D2
+ C48 + C52
R141 C65
D9 R85
R106 R142 R159
J1
C32 C56 R160 R163
A B C D C31 R69
D6 D10 D13 D16 D19 D22 C63
32 C7 C12 R30 C26 R115 JP1
Y1 C66 R164
C1
30 R146 LED1
R2
R3
C72 is a 100 nF capacitor.

D7 D11 D14 D17 U8 R165
R11 R21 R31 R41 C67
VR01 R108 R120 R126 LED2
R10 R20 R54

C21
1A
VR02 R4 R12 R22 R40 C62
VR03 R32 D3 D4 D5 D8 D12 D15 D18

R121
1B
VR05 R133 R143

C22 R109
VR04 C53 LED3
C2 C8 C13 R42 R56 R134
VR07 C3 C9 C14 C23 C27 C33 C40 R84 R122
U2 R86 R103 U9 R123 R153
NOD: 2B
U13 U14
20 D24
R72 R135
R5 R13 R23 R33 R73
VR08
R43 R87 C49
VR09 R26 R44 R74
VR10
VR06 R25 R35 R46 R58 R57 R125
VR12 R24 R34 R45 R59 C41 R124
VR14 C45 C54 C57 C64
R75
VR13 U11 U16
R15 R76 R99 R110 R116 R144
R147
R16 U3 U6
R77 R88
C10
R14 C39 C61 R166
10
C15 C24 C28 C34 R60 R89 C60
R36 R47 R61 R148 C70
L2 C16 C35 R62
C71
C29 C37
L3 C17 C46
R48 R78 C42 R149 R167
L4 C18 R49 R79 R168

R96 R150
VR11
R50 R80 R117 R129 R169
VR15 R90 R100 R111 Q2 R145
R64 R63
VR16 U4 R97
1 R18 R28 R38 R52 R66 R101 R112 R118 U12 R151 R155 U17
R19 R17 R27 R37 R51 R65 R81 Q1 U7 C58 C68
A B C D R170
R6
R91
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout

R7 R82
R8 R83 R92
C4 C38 C43 C47
R9 C11 C19 C25 C30 C36

R29 R39 R53 R67
C5 R94 R98
R171
Shaded components are not present on 410311. VR01-VR16 are voltage suppressors.
C59
C69
LEISURE INDUSTRIES R102 R113 R119 R138 R152 R156
1996
R128
R162
DRIVLAY1.CDR
I/O Driver Board
13-5
13.2.1 Power Supply

The I/O Driver Board receives 24 V DC from the power supply assembly and
5 V DC from the Main Board. The 24 V DC is reduced to 22.5 V DC by voltage
dropping diodes and supplied to the pushbutton lamps, switches, note acceptor
LEDs, and note acceptor backlight lamps.
A switched-mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board is used to generate 12 V DC
from the 24 V DC supply. This voltage is supplied to the coin handling system,
the Main Board, and the optional fan.
13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps

The I/O Driver Board drives the pushbutton lamps and receives the inputs from
the player pushbutton switches.
Sixteen pushbutton lamp outputs are available. The lamps are rated at 24 V DC
and 2 W. The lamp outputs are latched into two latches. During the power-up
phase, the latches are reset to ensure all lamps are off. The lamps are driven by
drivers with short-circuit protected outputs. The I/O Driver Board sinks the lamp
current to drive the lamps. Each driver can sink a maximum of 700 mA at
24 V DC. The lamps are supplied with 22.5 V rather than 24 V to increase their
lifetime.
All lamp outputs include warm-up resistors (2.4 kΩ, 0.6 W) to protect the lamp
drivers against high current peaks when the lamps are turned on.
Similarly, sixteen pushbutton switch inputs are provided. The 24 V DC
pushbutton switch signals are converted to TTL levels by voltage dividers and
then input to latches. These inputs are filtered to reduce ‘bouncing’ of the signal
caused when players strike a pushbutton.
Animation lamps and light tower lamps, if fitted, are driven in the same manner.
The I/O Driver Board also provides outputs for seven note acceptor LEDs and one
note acceptor backlight.
EMI Protection (410415 only)

Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVSs) are included on all sixteen pushbutton
lamp outputs to protect against electromagnetic interference (EMI).
The only other addition to the 410311 circuit is a 100 nF capacitor used with the
NERESET signal. This component also protects against EMI.

13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface

A switch mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board generates 12 V DC ± 5% from
the +24 V supply to power the coin handling system.
The coin handling system interfaces with the I/O Driver Board via the 24-pin
connector P12 on the Interface Board. This connector also distributes the signals
to the speakers and the door optical security sensor.
The coin handling interface section of the I/O Driver Board generates the signals
“NOD1A”, “NOD1B”, "NOD2A", "S7 ALARM", and "AUDIT" and transfers
these to the Main Board. It receives the signals “NEODLEDON”,
“NECOINBLK” and “NECOINDIV” from the Main Board and converts these into
the form required by the coin handling system.
The coin interface is compatible with the following coin systems:
1. Coin Mechanisms Inc. CC-62 or CC-46 Coin Comparator, with separate
diverter and diverter position detector.
2. Condor CN133A Validator, with separate diverter and diverter position
detector.
3. S7 Coin Validator in single coin mode, with separate diverter and diverter
position detector.
The signals to and from the coin handling assembly are shown in Figure 13-3 and
explained in Table 13-1. Timing diagrams for the output signals to the Main
Board are shown in Figure 13-4.
Jumper Link
LED 1-3
JP1
cc46_cd.cdr
Main Board I/O Driver Board Coin Handling

Assembly
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals

Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation

Signal Name Explanation
CSENSE Coin Sense Signal from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
CCREDIT Credit Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
CERROR Error Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
ACCUMPRICE Accumulated Price output from S7 Validator (Active Low)
S7ERROR Error Signal Output from S7 Validator (Active High)
CDIVPOS Coin Diverter Position Detect from Optics
NODLEDON Test Optics Signal from Main Board
NCOINBLK Disable/Enable Coin Comparator from Main Board
NOD1A Upper Coin Optic to Main Board
NOD1B Lower Coin Optic to Main Board
NOD2B Cashbox Optic to Main Board
S7ALARM Simulated Valid Coin Pulse to Main Board
AUDIT Audit Signal input to Main Board
CENABLE Enable/Disable Output to Coin Comparator from Driver Board
25ms 25ms
NOD1A NOD1A
NOD1B NOD1B
NOD2B NOD2B
S7ALARM S7ALARM
AUDIT AUDIT
Valid Coin 500ms Yo-Yo
NOD1A
NOD1B
NOD2B
S7ALARM
AUDIT
Coin Fault
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals
Jumper Link (JP1)

To configure the logic properly, the jumper link JP1 should be connected for the
CC-62 coin comparator and open for the CC-46 coin comparator, S7 coin
validator, or Condor coin validator.

Diagnostic LEDs
Three LEDs are located on the front of the board to indicate the status of certain
conditions (see the table below).
Table 13-2 LED Functions
Condition Red-LED1 Red-LED2 Green-LED
No Activity Off Off Off
Valid Coin to Hopper Pulse Pulse Off
Valid Coin to Cashbox Pulse Pulse Pulse
Error (or Yo-Yo) Continuous Continuous Off
Fault Continuous Continuous Continuous
13.2.4 Security Switches

The four battery-backed security switches 0 to 3 are monitored by a security
circuit on the I/O Driver Board. The circuit is battery-backed (by the battery on
the Main Board), and it can indicate to the system software if security has been
breached.
The battery-backed security signals are typically allocated as follows:
Table 13-3 Security Switch Functions

Security Location
0 Logic Cage
1 Top Box
2 Mechanical Meters
3 Cash Box
Note:
The specific machine configuration will
determine which of these switches are
actually fitted.

CAUTION
devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to
avoid physical contact with components.
PCBAs should be handled by their edges.
ESD items should not be placed on metal
surfaces.
CAUTION
When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid
flexing the PCBA. Flexing may cause
physical damage.
Removal
To remove the I/O Driver Board
3. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be
followed when removing PCBAs.
4. Release the I/O Driver Board from its connected position using the extractor
handles. Withdraw the board from the logic cage.
5. Place the I/O Driver Board on an antistatic bag immediately.
Note
A Fault Tag must be placed on any faulty
boards.
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.

13.4 Connector Pin Assignment

A 96-way DIN41612 connector provides all inputs and outputs to the Interface
Board. The actual PCB layout has a 128-way (4 x 32) DIN connector footprint
which has the same three rows as the 96-way DIN connector plus an additional
row. The pins on the fourth row are used for optional signals like stepper lamps
and spare input.
The pinout of this connector is shown below.

Note: Row D is the additional row on the 128-way connector:
Table 13-4 Connector Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Function
1A GND Signal/power ground
1B GND Signal/power ground
1C AUDIT Audit pulse out for DACOM3000
1D GND Signal/power ground
2A PBIN1 Push Button Input 1
2B NESPIDOUT SPI Data Out from Main Board
2C NESIOE4 SPI Channel 4 (Door output) Enable
2D GMNVLD Game Valid - Spare lamp driver output for stepper
3B PBIN3 Push Button Input 3
3C NESIOE5 SPI Channel 5 (Door output) Enable
3D PNOW Play Now - Spare lamp driver output for stepper
4C ESCLK SPI Clock
4D ICOIN Insert Coin - Spare lamp driver output for stepper
5C NESPIDIN4 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
5D LHLMP1 Left Hand Lamp 1 - side animation lamp driver output for stepper
6C NSPIDIN5 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
7B PBLMP1 Push Button Lamp Output 1
7C ESPIRST SPI Reset from Main board
8A GND Signal/power ground
8C GND Signal/power ground
9A PBLMP2 Push Button Lamp Output 2
9C PBLMP4 Push Button Lamp Output 4
10A +22.5V +22.5 volts for lamp
10B +22.5V +22.5 volts for lamp
10C +22.5V +22.5 volts for lamp
10D +22.5V +22.5 volts for lamp
11A +22.5V +22.5 volts for lamp
11B +5V +5 volts from Main board
11C +5V +5 volts from Main board

11D +5V +5 volts from Main board

12B +12V +12 volts for main board and coin comparator
12C +12V +12 volts for main board and coin comparator
12D +12V +12 volts for main board and coin comparator
13C PBLMP8 Push Button Lamp Output 8
15C MSSO0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally open
15D SPAREIN1 Spare Button Input 1
16C MSS0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally close
18C MSS1 Mechanical security switch 1 normally closed
18D
19D
20A S7ALARM Simulated valid coin output to main board
21D
22B CCREDIT Coin credit pulse
22D
23A CSENSE Coin Sense output from coin validator
23B CERROR Coin Error signal from coin validator
23D
24A ACCUMPRICE Accumulated coin output from S7 validator
24B S7ERROR S7 error signal from S7 validator
24C NECOINDIV Coin diverter signal from main board
24D
25A CDIVPOS Coin diverter position from coin chute
25B CENABLE Coin validator enable signal
25C NECOINBLK Coin block solenoid output from main board
25D
26A NERESET Reset signal from main board
27A NCDIVERT Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute

27B DNOMLED1 Note Acceptor Denomination LED 1

27C NEODLEDON NOD LED enable form main board
27D
28A DNOMLED2 Note Acceptor Denomination LED 2
28C BAT0 Battery 0 output from main board
28D BAT0 Battery 0 output from main board
29C NOD2A Cash box Optic Detector 2A
29D DIN5 SPI Din 5 for SPI 5 Expansion
30C NOD1B Coin Optic Detector 1B
30D DOUT5 SPI Dout 5 for SPI 5 Expansion
31A BKLITE BACC Back Light output
31B NOD1A Coin Optic Detector 1A
31C +24V +24 volts power
31D +24V +24 volts power
32A +24V +24 volts power
32B +24V +24 volts power
32C +24V +24 volts power
32D +24V +24 volts power

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Communications Configuration Board
________Chapter 14________
Communications Configuration Boards -
Part Nos. 410165, 410217, 410314
14.4 Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. 14-8

Communications Configuration Boards MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ......................................14-3
Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ............................14-5
List of Tables
Table 14-1 CCB PCBA Part Numbers...........................................................................14-4
Table 14-2 Channels and Port Numbers .......................................................................14-4
Table 14-3 RS485 Interface Signal Lines......................................................................14-6
Table 14-4 CCB 72-pin connector to Main Board..........................................................14-8


The Communications Configuration Board (CCB) is located within the logic cage
where it connects to the Main Board via a 72-pin SIMM socket (refer to Fig 14-1).
The CCB is used to configure the internal serial communications ports 1, 2 and 3
for various signal levels.
Each channel connects to a 16-way Minifit connector on the Interface Board.
Channel 3 also connects to a 10-way ribbon cable connector for the DACOM.
Communications
Configuration Board
Logic Cage
72-Pin SIMM
Socket
Main Board
5S2coms2.CDR Interface Board
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location
the Communications Configuration Board is provided in Volume II:


The Main Board has four serial channels - 0, 1, 2 and 3. Channel 0 has a non-
isolated interface to a FIP display (stepper only) and an RS232 interface. This
channel is reserved for future communications with a Touchscreen interface or a
Serial Keno Panel interface. Channels 1, 2 and 3 are fully isolated and can be
configured using the Communications Configuration Board.
The CCB plugs into the Main Board via a standard 72-pin SIMM socket and
converts the opto-coupled UART serial and I/O signals into the desired signal
levels. There are several different CCBs used to configure the communications
channels for different signals to suit different markets. The table below shows the
CCB part numbers and the associated configuration.
Table 14-1 CCB PCBA Part Numbers

PCBA Number Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
410217 Note Acceptor RS232 DACOM
410165 Note Acceptor RS232 RS232
410314 Note Acceptor RS485 Generic
The connectors on the Interface Board used for the serial channels are as follows:
Table 14-2 Channels and Port Numbers

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
P14 P18 P15 P17
The external network connections for DACOM (where used) are routed via an
external network interface board.
The serial channels are supplied with isolated ±12 V at 100 mA from the Main
Board, as well as +5 V to run the logic circuits.

FIP Display
Serial Channel 0
DACOM/BIPS
Opto-Isolators
Serial Channel 1 Devices:

Communications Bill Acceptor
Serial Channel 2 Configuration IGT Interface
Board RS 232
Serial Channel 3 RS 485
DACOM 5000
Touch Screen
Other...
+12 V
-12 V
A191 035 CDR
Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram
Bank Note Acceptor Interface

The note acceptor interface provides TTL/CMOS communication (serial input
only from note acceptor) with handshaking.
The data transfer rate is 600 baud fixed, 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no
parity. This port uses the 16-way Minifit connector P18 on the Interface Board.
The serial communication protocol used with the note acceptor conforms to the
Mars GL5 standard (see the Bank Note Acceptor chapter). The serial protocol is
'one way' in that the note acceptor sends to the host an ASCII code, depending on
the type of note inserted or the status of the note acceptor. The host enables,
disables or accepts the note via two control lines - ACCEPT ENABLE and SEND.
The connection supports several functions within the note acceptor and a subset of
these signals that is specifically related to the serial GL5 interface.
RS232 Interface
This interface provides RS232 communications between the Main Board and an
external interface board. The channel has six I/O signals, including data I/O. The
opto LED drivers on the Main Board are configured to an OFF state when the line
is inactive or not connected to minimise power consumption. This port can be run
at a minimum 9600 baud rate.
DACOM Interface
DACOM is a current loop connection with a source voltage of 24 V. Normally,
DACOM transfers data at 2400 baud, 8 bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
The Interface Board provides the 10-way header P21 for connection to a DACOM
5000 system parallel to the Channel 3 connector.

Generic Interface
The term “generic” means that this port is not dedicated any specific physical
interface. This port is connected to an external communication interface board.
The signals are connected to the opto couplers on the external communication
interface board. The primary use of this channel is for the Mikohn Link
Progressive display, which is connected through an interface communications inlet
board.
RS485 Interface
Channel 2 is configured with an RS485 interface capable of full duplex, point-to-
point connection between the main board and an interface board.
Normally a RS485 driver must be able to supply 60 mA for multidrop network
which exceeds the maximum load (30 mA) for one channel of the CCB. So this
interface is for only one line connection for internal communication. The
interface will have open circuit fail safe for receiver and AC termination for both
receiver and transmitter lines.
A differential pair of signals is provided for each of Transmit data and Receive
data and the port is capable of operating at 19200 baud rate.
The port uses JP2 connector on the MVP interface board and the following signal
lines are provided.
Table 14-3 RS485 Interface Signal Lines

Pin No. Pin Name Description
1 SIN2 Serial In+ Input Differential input positive for serial data input
2 SOUT2 Serial In- Input Differential input negative for serial data input
3 CTS2 Serial Out+ Output Differential output positive for serial data output
4 DSR2 Serial Out- Output Differential output negative for serial data putp8t
5 I2 No connection
6 RTS2 No connection
7 DTR2 No connection
8 O2 No connection
9 P12V +12volt
10 M.C. No connection
11 N12V -12volt
12 GNDI ground

CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs)
such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBAs by
their edges. Do not place ESD items on
metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCBA. Flexing may
cause physical damage.
To remove the Communications Configuration Board (refer to Figure 14-1):

4. Release the Main Board using the extractor pins, and withdraw it from the
logic cage.
5. Locate the Communications Configuration Board sitting perpendicular to
the Main Board in the top left.
6. Remove the board by lifting it upwards while holding the Main Board
steady.
Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty PCBAs.
To replace the Communications Configuration Board:

followed when replacing PCBAs.
2. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag.
3. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage.
4. Press the Communications Configuration Board into position on the Main
Board.
5. Slide the Main Board into the correct logic cage grooves and gently move
the board into position on the Interface Board. Close the logic cage door.
6. Switch the machine on, and close the cabinet door.
Note
Run relevant machine tests after replacing
the Communications Configuration Board.

14.4 Connector Pin Assignments

This table lists the input/output signals between the Communications
Configuration Board and the Main Board. The pin assignments for the serial
channel connectors P14, P15, P17, and P18 are listed in the relevant sections of
the Interface Board chapter.
Table 14-4 CCB 72-pin connector to Main Board

Pin Pin Description
1 CFG2 PDA0 output signal through opto emitter.
2 GNDI Ground.
3 CFG4 RTSA1 output signal through opto emitter.
4 DFG1 PDA0 output signal through opto collector.
5 SINA1 Input from channel 1 connector.
6 CFG3 RTSA1 output signal through opto collector.
7 SOUTA1 Output to channel 1 connector.
8 CFG6 DTRA1 output signal through opto emitter.
9 CTSA1 Input from channel 1 connector.
10 CFG5 DTRA1 output signal through opto collector.
11 DSRA1 Input from channel 1 connector.
12 CFG8 SOUTA1 output signal through opto emitter.
13 CFG7 SOUTA1 output signal through opto collector.
14 CFG10 CTSA1 input signal through opto cathode.
15 IA1 Input from channel 1 connector.
16 CFG11 DSRA1 input signal through opto anode.
17 CFG9 CTSA1 input signal through opto anode.
18 CFG12 DSRA1 input signal through opto cathode.
19 RTSA1 Output to channel 1 connector.
20 CFG13 SINA1 input signal through opto anode.
21 DTRA1 Output to channel 1 connector.
22 CFG14 SINA1 input signal through opto cathode.
23 OA1 Output to channel 1 connector.
24 P12VI + 12V power.
25 CFG20 DTRB0 output signal through opto emitter.
26 N12VI - 12V power.
27 CFG19 DTRB0 output signal through opto collector.
28 GNDI Ground.
29 CFG18 SOUTB0 output signal through opto emitter..
30 CFG17 SOUTB0 output signal through opto collector.
31 CFG16 SOUTB0 output signal through opto base.
32 CFG15 Opto Vcc.
33 SINB0 Input from channel 2 connector.
34 CFG22 RTSB0 output signal through opto emitter.
35 SOUTB0 Output to channel 2 connector.
36 CFG29 SINB0 input signal through opto anode.
37 CTSB0 Input from channel 2 connector.
38 CFG30 SINB0 input signal through opto cathode.
39 DSRB0 Input from channel 2 connector.
40 CFG21 RTSB0 output signal through opto collector.
41 IB0 Input from channel 2 connector.
42 CFG31 CTSB0 input signal through opto anode.
43 RTSB0 Output to channel 2 connector.
(continues …)

(continued …)
44 CFG32 CTSB0 input signal through opto cathode.
45 DTRB0 Output to channel 2 connector.
46 CFG33 DSRB0 input signal through opto anode.
47 OB0 Output to channel 2 connector.
48 P12VI + 12V power.
49 CFG34 DSRB0 input signal through opto cathode.
50 GNDI Ground.
51 CFG24 RTSB1 output signal through opto emitter.
52 N12VI - 12V power.
53 SINB1 Input from channel 3 connector.
54 CFG23 RTSB1 output signal through opto collector.
55 SOUTB1 Output to channel 3 connector.
56 CFG26 DTRB1 output signal through opto emitter.
57 CFG25 DTRB1 output signal through opto collector.
58 CFG28 SOUTB1 input signal through opto emitter.
59 CTSB1 Input from channel 3 connector.
60 CFG27 SOUTB1 output signal through opto collector.
61 CFG35 CTSB1 input signal from opto anode.
62 CFG36 CTSB1 input signal from opto cathode.
63 DSRB1 Input from channel 3 connector.
64 CFG37 DSRB1 input signal through opto anode.
65 IB1 Input from channel 3 connector.
66 CFG38 DSRB1 input signal through opto cathode.
67 RTSB1 Output to channel 3 connector.
68 CFG39 SINB1 input signal through opto anode.
69 DTRB1 Output to channel 3 connector.
70 CFG40 SINB1 signal through opto cathode.
71 OB1 Output to channel 3 connector.
72 GNDI Ground.
CAUTION
Do not attempt component level repair
without access to a workshop facility.
For general maintenance of the Communications Configuration Board:

• Make sure that all contacts on the PCBA and in the SIMM socket on the
Main Board are clean.
• Check that the connectors are in good condition and secure.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Hard Meters
______Chapter 15______
Hard Meters
EMM Part No. 410366, 250
EHM Part No. 410337, 385, 345
15.1 Electromechanical Meters ..................................................... 15-3
15.1.1 General Description.................................................................. 15-3

15.1.2 Operational Description............................................................ 15-3
15.1.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures................................... 15-9
15.1.4 Connector Pin Assignment....................................................... 15-9
15.1.5 General Maintenance ............................................................. 15-11
15.2 Electronic Hard Meters ........................................................ 15-12
15.2.1 General Description................................................................ 15-12

15.2.2 Operational Description.......................................................... 15-13
15.2.3 Displaying Meter Values......................................................... 15-13
15.2.4 EEPROM Bit Error Procedure ................................................ 15-14
15.2.5 Warning Messages ................................................................ 15-14
15.2.6 Block Diagram ........................................................................ 15-15
15.2.7 Electronic Hard Meter SPI Board (ESB)................................. 15-16
15.2.8 Data Storage Board (DSB)..................................................... 15-16
15.2.9 Input/Output Connectors ........................................................ 15-18
15.2.10 DSB Connectors .................................................................... 15-21
15.2.11 Removal and Replacement Procedures................................. 15-23
15.2.12 General Maintenance ............................................................. 15-23

Hard Meters MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure 15-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location ................................................15-4
Figure 15-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram .........................15-4
Figure 15-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder
Sides ...............................................................................................................15-6
Figure 15-4 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Block Diagram .........................15-7
Figure 15-5 Electormechanical Meter Board - 410250 Detailed Block Diagram ...........15-7
Figure 15-6 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Component and Solder
Sides ...............................................................................................................15-8
Figure 15-7 Electronic Hard Meters - location .............................................................15-13
Figure 15-8 Electronic Hard Meter Board - block diagram ..........................................15-16
Figure 15-9 Data Storage Board - block diagram........................................................15-18
List of Tables
Table 15-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ......................................................15-9
Table 15-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface ..............................................................15-10
Table 15-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface.................................................................15-10
Table 15-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface..........................................................................15-10
Table 15-5 S1 - Security Interface...............................................................................15-10
Table 15-6 Optional Interface to Gamble Feature J3 (410250)...................................15-11
Table 15-7 Connections for EHM SPI .........................................................................15-19
Table 15-8 Connections for Pulse Interface – ESB Output .........................................15-20
Table 15-9 Connections for Tower Lamps ..................................................................15-20
Table 15-10 Connections for Pulse Interface – DSB Input..........................................15-21
Table 15-11 Connections for EHM Switch Input..........................................................15-22
Table 15-12 Connections for LCD Display ..................................................................15-22

15.1 Electromechanical Meters
15.1.1 General Description

The Electromechanical Meter Board is mounted to the reflector panel in the top
box (refer to Figure 15-1). It is a conventional double sided PCB connected to the
Main Board using a 26-way ribbon cable via the Interface Board.
The PCB provides physical location for up to nine electromechanical meters and
connection for a further seven. There are 16 meter outputs which can be
configured to drive various components. Eight outputs are used for the standard
set of meters. The ninth drive is reserved. The remaining seven outputs are open
to configuration. The PCB also acts as an interface for security, meter drive
outputs and a light tower, if used.
Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

the Electromechanical Meter Board is provided in Volume II:
15.1.2 Operational Description

The functions provided by the Electromechanical Meter Board are as follows
(refer to Block Diagram Fig 15-2):
• Serially interface up to nine electromechanical meters with the Main Board.
(For Part No. 410366 only)
• Provide overcurrent protection to the meter drivers.
• Allow connection to meter drive outputs, backwards compatible with
previous gaming machine models.
• Expandable for up to another seven electromechanical meters.
• Interface to light tower lamps.
• Interface to electromechanical meters security.
• Capability for detecting meters connected/disconnected.
• Capable of being configured for less than nine electromechanical meters;
allows depopulation of the board (Meters not provided with Part No.
410250).

Top Box
Top Trim
Electromechanical
Meters PCB
Monitor
Figure 15-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location
6-Way Loom
Light Tower
7-Way Loom
Serial Interface Security
Interface
J4 S1
Interface Board Electromechanical
and 26-Way
J1 Meter Board
Main Board Ribbon Cable Meter Drive Outputs
J3 J2 M1 - M6
10-Way Ribbon Cable
10-Way Ribbon Cable Additional Meters

(7 Max.)
Optional
Mk5V130.CDR
Figure 15-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram
Serial Interface
The Electromechanical Meter Board communicates with the Main Board logic via
the Interface Board. The Main Board sends a stream of data, clocked to the chip,
to the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB circuitry reads the data and
increments the appropriate meter. The logic signals from the Main Board are
optically coupled.

The interface also allows for data from the Electromechanical Meter Board to be
sent to the Main Board logic in the event of meter failure, disconnection or
security access.
Connection is via a 26-way ribbon cable header to connector P6 on the Interface
Board.
Overcurrent Protection
An 'intelligent' power switch is used for switching power on and off through the
meter drive outputs. The power switch used incorporates built-in overcurrent
sensing and protection.
Meter Drive Outputs

The meter drive output interface allows the connection of systems requiring
electromechanical meters drive pulses for audit functions. DACOM systems may
be connected to the machine in this way.
Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.
PCB Expansion:
An expansion interface has been incorporated into the PCB design to allow an
additional set of up to seven electromechanical meters. These meters can be
configured through the machine software to identify various machine functions.
Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.
Light Tower Interface:

When a light tower is used, it is connected to the machine via the interface with
the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB directs the lamp control signals
from the Main Board logic (via the Interface Board) to the light tower lamps
through four of the extra seven meter drive outputs.
Connection is via a 6-way wafer connector.
Security Interface:
The security interface provides a connection for the Electromechanical Meter
Board to a mechanical security switch for monitoring meter accesses.
Connection is via a 7-way wafer connector.
Meter Detection:
Data received from the Main Board logic is written to an output chip and then read
back. If there is a discrepancy between the initial data written and the data read
back, there is a fault. The Electromechanical Meter Board will then inform the
Main Board logic of a malfunction.
PCB Configuration:
The Electromechanical Meter Board may be configured to meet specific market
requirements. For example, when the PCB requires less than eight meters, the
fifth meter is omitted to depopulate the PCB.

Optional Mechanical
Security Switch
Figure 15-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder Sides

6-Way Loom
Light Tower
7-Way Loom
Serial Interface Security
Interface
J4 S1
Interface Board Electromechanical
and 26-Way
J1 Meter Board
Main Board Ribbon Cable Meter Drive Outputs
J3 J2 M1 - M6
10-Way Ribbon Cable
10-Way Ribbon Cable

Gamble Feature Gamble
(7 Max.) Lamps
Mk5V130A.CDR Optional
Figure 15-4 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Block Diagram
Additional functional detail is shown in the diagram following.
Serial Interface
from MPU To Security Interface
To Meter Drive Outputs

RC Filter Input
1.5 MHz Logic TPIC
2802
Serial
Input Output
to MPU Gamble Feature
TPIC
Filter
2802
and
Tower Lamps
Mk5V130B.CDR
Figure 15-5 Electormechanical Meter Board - 410250 Detailed Block Diagram
The Texas Instruments TPIC2802 Intelligent-Power switch with over-current

protection is used. Power supply provides 24 VDC ±5% for lamps (Is = 1A) and 5
VDC ±5% for logic (regulated) (Icc = 100 mA). The logic signals are optically
coupled from the main board and the inputs are connected via a Schmitt Trigger.
The baud rate (bit clock) of the SPI is 8KHz ±20%.

15-8
Hard Meters
C14
U9 C10 C13
R8 RN2 J5 C7
C11
C1 U2 MKV MECH MTR TWR
J2 C6 J1
410250-A-O
U3 U4 R1 C3
C12
R2 C2
C5 U5 U6 R6
CF1 R3 REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J4 J3 C4 LK2
U7 Q1 R12
LK1
R5 R14 R9 R10
R4
R11
C8 C9 RN1
J1
C14
Figure 15-6 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410250 Component and Solder Sides

CAUTION
such as PCBs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBs by
metal surfaces. When handling PCBs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCB. Flexing may
To remove the Electromechanical Meter Board:

1. Open the cabinet door, and turn OFF the machine.
2. Remove the top box door and reflector panel (refer to the chapter - Cabinet,
Door and Top Box).
3. Disconnect the looms from the Electromechanical Meter Board.
4. Remove the screws securing the board.
15.1.4 Connector Pin Assignment
Table 15-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board

1 P24VA +24V
2 GND Ground
3 P24VA +24V
4 GND Ground
5 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
7 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
9 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
15 GND Ground
25 GND Ground
26 ---

Table 15-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface

Pin Signal Name Description
1 Meter5 Open collector, active 'low' Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max.
4 GND Ground.
6 ---
8 +24VDC + 24V DC supply.
Table 15-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface

9 GND Ground.
Table 15-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface

2 Top lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max.
3 Second lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max.
4 Third lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max.
5 Fourth lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max.
Table 15-5 S1 - Security Interface

1 MSS2 Mechanical switch, contact - NC.
2 GND Ground.
3 MSS02 Mechanical switch, contact - NO.
4 EMCS2 Opto LED enable signal.
5 GND Ground.
6 OPRIS2 Opto detector signal.
7 GND Ground.

Table 15-6 Optional Interface to Gamble Feature J3 (410250)

1 Meter 10 Open Collector, active low Vsat ⌫ 1.8V, 1A maximum
8 + 24 V DC
9 GND
10 + 24 V DC
CAUTION
For general maintenance of the Electromechanical Meter Board:

• Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure.

15.2 Electronic Hard Meters
15.2.1 General Description

The electronic hard meter (EHM) module provides a permanent record of
accounting information, such as turnover, total wins, and money in/out. Meter
values are displayed on a LCD. A security switch is fitted to the module to detect
tampering.
There are three different versions of electronic hard meter assemblies used in
MVP upright machines.
The first assembly, part number 2501- 565460, is for use in machines with an SPI
interface.
The second assembly, part number 2501- 565461, is for use in 500 wide machines
with a pulse interface.
The third assembly, part number 2501- 565617, is for use in 540 wide machines
with a pulse interface.
The SPI assembly contains two PCBAs. The first board is called the Data Storage
Board (DSB). The part number is 2501-410337. This board will handle eight
parallel pulse inputs and store the number of pulses. It will also display the meter
value on an LCD display. The second board is called the EHM SPI Board (ESB).
The part number is 2501-410345. This board interfaces to the gaming machine
SPI and converts the signals into pulses.
Both pulse assemblies contain just one PCBA, part number 2501-410385. The
board is identical to the DSB mentioned above, except for a 16-way header that is
changed to one with ejectors. The only difference between the two pulse
assemblies is the lengths of the looms required.
The LCD mounts on to the front of the DSB. The ESB (where used) mounts on
the back of the DSB. The entire assembly is housed within a metal cover and
mounted to the mid trim (see Figure 15-7).

Top Trim Jackpot

Keyswitch
Audit
Keyswitch
(one of these
Monitor is also the
EHM Switch)
EHM
LCD Display
Mid Trim
Figure 15-7 Electronic Hard Meters - location
Assembly Drawings
Assembly drawings of the EHM module are included in Volume II of the Service
Manual, under Mechanical Drawings.
15.2.2 Operational Description

The EHM module is designed to replace the mechanical meters.
The DSB stores the data for up to eight meters of ten digits each. It has a pulse
interface, with each pulse width a minimum of 24 ms and a minimum of 24 ms
between pulses.
The meter values are stored in memory capable of retaining its content for at least
5 years without any power.
The module displays the meter values when a keyswitch is turned. This switch is
called the EHM switch and is combined with either the Jackpot Reset or Audit
keyswitch using a three position switch.
The display is a sixteen characters by two lines LCD display with LED backlight.
The module is capable of displaying its meter value even when the machine power
is off; however, the backlight will not be on.
The power consumption of the EHM module is less than 1 W.
15.2.3 Displaying Meter Values

Normal operation is when the machine power is ON. When the EHM switch is
turned on, the LED backlight will light up and the first meter value and name will
be displayed. The EHM switch can be combined with either the Jackpot or Audit
switch using a three position switch.

The display then cycles through all the meter values, displaying each one for ten
seconds.
If the EHM switch is turned off and then back on within 2 seconds, the next meter
value is displayed. This allows the operator to step through the meter values
quickly.
When the EHM switch is turned OFF, the display and backlight remain on for a
further two seconds before turning off.
When the machine power is off, the electronic hard meters operate the same
except without the backlight.
If the machine is incrementing its meters while the meters are being displayed, the
display will show “COUNT” on the bottom left and updates the display every 10
counts or 0.5 seconds.
There are three copies of each meter value stored in EEPROM.
The number of meter pulses is held in a buffer in RAM, this is called the meter
buffer. There is one meter buffer for each meter. One meter buffer is saved every
twenty seconds. When the machine is turned off, all non zero meter buffers are
saved into the EEPROM.
The procedure for saving meter pulses is as follows:
1. Check meter1 buffer value.
2. If meter1 buffer value is non-zero, then read the first meter1 value from
EEPROM.
3. Compare the first meter1 value with the second and third meter1 values.
4. If there is no error, add buffer value to meter1 value and then save the three
sets of meter1 value.
5. If meter1 buffer value is zero, then do nothing. If the meter is not enabled,
again do nothing.
6. After 20 seconds, check meter2 buffer value and repeat the above procedure.
Continue until all meter values are updated.
15.2.4 EEPROM Bit Error Procedure

The Error Checking and Correction (ECC) code corrects all single and double bit
errors in a digit. Each digit is stored as a twelve bit number. There are ten digits
for each meter stored in a block. Each meter is stored three times in three logical
blocks in two separate EEPROMs.
When greater than two bit errors are detected in a block, the firmware will then
move this block of data to a new unused location in the EEPROM.
15.2.5 Warning Messages

Warning messages will be displayed for five seconds before any meter values.
The first warning message is “Battery Flat, Replace Battery”. The message will
appear when the battery has gone so low that operation can cause problems

regardless of whether the gaming machine is on or off. The display will stay on
for five seconds and then switch off. This will force the replacement of the battery
by service staff.
The second warning message is “Meter Battery Low”. This will give a warning
that the battery needs to be replaced.
The third warning message is “Memory Low, Replace Meter”. This will give a
warning that there are only a few blocks of EEPROM left.
The fourth warning message is “Replace Meter”. This means that the module has
run out of memory. With the ECC, it will still allow the module to work, but the
integrity of the data may be reduced. It will work properly until there are no more
correctable error bits in a digit. However there are three sets of data and so using
a majority rule algorithm it is still possible to retrieve the correct values.
The fifth warning message is “Meter Fault”. This message will appear when
there is something wrong with the meter.
The sixth warning message is “Meter Power Fault”. This message will appear
when there is something wrong with the power to the meter.
The seventh warning message is “Call Service”. This message will appear when
there is something wrong with the EEPROM.
15.2.6 Block Diagram

The Electronic Hard Meters block diagram is shown in Figure 15-2 below. When
the gaming machine uses a pulse meter interface, the ESB is not needed.

Figure 15-8 Electronic Hard Meter Board - block diagram
15.2.7 Electronic Hard Meter SPI Board (ESB)

The ESB converts the gaming machine SPI signals into pulses to communicate
with the DSB.
There are two MC33298 integrated circuits on the ESB that convert the SPI
signals to parallel outputs. The first IC provides eight outputs for the meters. The
second IC provides four outputs to the light tower lamps.
15.2.8 Data Storage Board (DSB)

The DSB has a single chip microcontroller that does all the interfacing. The
microcontroller interfaces directly to the LCD module, the eight pulse inputs, two
EEPROMs, and two voltage comparators.
The LCD interface has an eight bit data interface, three control signals and an
output to turn the backlight on and off. There is a trimpot to adjust the LCD
contrast.
The microcontroller connects to the eight pulse inputs via eight optocouplers.
These optocouplers interface to the 24 V meter pulse and provide ESD and EMI
protection.

The two EEPROMs are connected to the microcontroller’s MICROWIRE

interface which is similar to SPI. The MICROWIRE operates at 500 kHz.
One of the dual-voltage comparators monitors the 5 V and 24 V power rails from
the machine. The thresholds are 3.9 V for the 5 V rail and 20.8 V for the 24 V
rail. The accuracy is 3%.
The second dual-voltage comparator monitors the battery voltage. The two
thresholds are 2.4 V and 2.6 V. The battery is mounted in a socket on the DSB.
The power supply will supply 5 V when switched on from a 2 V to 5 V input.
When the machine power is switched off, the capacitor C5 supplies enough power
to the microcontroller for it to save all the data into the EEPROMs. It has enough
energy to save the data even if the battery is removed.
The battery has enough capacity to last for five years when the machine is on for
twelve hours a day, and the battery is used to display the meter value once a month
when the machine is off.
The “power on flip flop” turns the power supply on when ever the 5 V is present
or the STEHM switch is activated. It can only be turned off when 5 V is absent
and the STEHM switch is deactivated.
A tamper switch is mounted on the DSB and monitored directly by the gaming
machine Main Board.
Detailed Block Diagram of Data Storage Circuitry

The protection devices for the LCD are only required when the LCD is mounted
remotely from the EHM module.

Pulse Meter Input

Opto
Tamper Switch Isolated EEPROM
Eight
Meter
Tamper Input
Switch
EEPROM
24V Power Input

Power
Fail
Detect
5V Power Input
Switch Input
On Off LCD
Contrast
Adjust
Battery Power
Power Supply
Enable Backlight
Enable
LCD Display
Interface
Battery
Protection Devices
(optional)
LCD Display
Figure 15-9 Data Storage Board - block diagram
15.2.9 Input/Output Connectors

The ESB has three connectors: the MkV Series 2 SPI, ESB Pulse output, and
Tower Lamp.
The DSB has three connectors: the DSB Pulse Input, EHM switch and LCD.
ESB Connectors
EHM SPI Connector - J2
This 26-way ribbon cable header connector provides the interface between the
MkV Series II Interface Board and the ESB. The other end of the ribbon cable
connects to P6 on the Interface Board.

The table below shows the pin assignment of this connector.
Table 15-7 Connections for EHM SPI

Pin Signal Name Function
1 P24VA +24V DC
2 GND Ground
3 P24VA +24V DC
4 GND Ground
5 ESPIDIN2 Data from meters board
7 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meters board
9 ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meters board
10 VCCIN +5V in from Main Board, converted from 24V
13 ESPIDOUT Data output to meters board
15 GND Ground
16 VCCIN +5V in from Main Board, converted from 24V
25 GND Ground
26 NC No Connect
Notes:
• The input logic signals are filtered
• The inputs are connected via a Schmitt Trigger
• The baud rate (bit clock) of the SPI is 8 kHz ±20%
• The connector type is a ribbon cable connector (2.54 mm pitch)
ESB Pulse Output Connector – J3

This 16-way DIL straight female header provides the interface for the pulse
outputs and power for the ESB. The other end of the ribbon cable connects to P6
on the Interface Board.
There are eight pulse meter signals, three tamper switch signals, power and
ground. The tamper switch common is grounded on this board.
The pinouts for this connector are shown in the table below.

Table 15-8 Connections for Pulse Interface – ESB Output

1 METER1 Pulse Output, Open Collector, active low Vsat ≈ 1.8V, 1A max
9 MSS_COM Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - Common
10 P24VA +24V DC from Main Board
11 VCCIN +5V from Main Board, converted from 24V
12 VCCIN +5V from Main Board, converted from 24V
13 GND Ground
14 GND Ground
Tower Lamps Connector - J1

This 6-way Minifit Junior connector provides an interface to the tower lamps.
Table 15-9 Connections for Tower Lamps

1 24VF +24V DC filtered and current limited
2 TLAMP1 1st top lamp control, Open Collector, active low Vsat ≈ 1.8V,
1A max
3 TLAMP2 2nd top lamp control, Open Collector, active low Vsat ≈
1.8V, 1A max
4 TLAMP3 3rd top lamp control, Open Collector, active low Vsat ≈
1.8V, 1A max
5 TLAMP4 4th top lamp control, Open Collector, active low Vsat ≈ 1.8V,
1A max
6 24VF +24V DC filtered and current limited

15.2.10 DSB Connectors

DSB Pulse Input Connector – J1
This 16-way header provides the interface for the pulse inputs and power for the
DSB. This header is mounted on the underside of the board.
When the DSB is used with the ESB, this header is a 16-way box header and
connects directly to J3 on the ESB. This DSB has part number 2501-410337.
When the DSB is used on its own, this header will be a 16-way header with
ejector levers. The part number for this DSB is 2501-410385. A loom connects
the header to P2 on the Backplane.
There are eight pulse meter signals, three tamper switch signals, power and
ground.
Table 15-10 Connections for Pulse Interface – DSB Input

1 METER1 5k Input Impedance, (+24V -VIN) < 1V off, (+24V -VIN)
> 4V on, Turnover
> 4V on, Total Wins
> 4V on, Cashbox
> 4V on, Cancelled Credits
> 4V on, Money In
> 4V on, Money Out
> 4V on, Cash In
> 4V on, Cash Out
9 MSS_COM Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - Common
10 P24VA +24V DC in from Main Board or ESB
11 VCCIN +5V in from Main Board or ESB
12 VCCIN +5V in from Main Board or ESB
13 GND Ground
14 GND Ground

EHM Switch Input Connector - J2

This is a 2-way wafer connector (2.54 mm pitch) for the EHM switch input. This
EHM switch is used to activate the EHM module to display the meter data.
Table 15-11 Connections for EHM Switch Input

1 SWITCHIN Active low with pull up resistor.
2 GND Ground
LCD Interface Connector - J3

This 16-way connector provides the interface between the LCD and DSB.
Table 15-12 Connections for LCD Display

1 GND Ground
2 VCC + 5 V power
3 VEELCD LCD Contrast Input
4 LCD_RS Register Select: H for Data; L for instruction
5 LCD_RW Read/ Write: H read from module; L write into module
6 LCD_E Enable
7 DB0 Data Bus 0
8 DB1 Data Bus 1
9 DB2 Data Bus 2
10 DB3 Data Bus 3
11 DB4 Data Bus 4
12 DB5 Data Bus 5
13 DB6 Data Bus 6
14 DB7 Data Bus 7
15 LED+ LED Backlight +
16 LED- LED Backlight -

CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs) such as
PCBs, take care to avoid physical contact with
components. Handle PCBs by their edges. Do not place
ESD items on metal surfaces. When handling PCBs,
take care to avoid flexing the PCB. Flexing may cause
physical damage.
To remove the Electronic Hard Meter assembly:

1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine
2. Remove the screw securing the EHM metal housing to the door mid trim.
3. Remove the four screws that locate the EHM PCBAs within the housing,
and carefully remove the PCBAs from the housing.
4. Disconnect all looms from the EHM assembly.
CAUTION
For general maintenance of the Electronic Hard Meters:

• Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Progressive Jackpot Systems
______Chapter 16______
Progressive Jackpot Systems
16.1 Overview ................................................................................. 16-3
16.2 SPI (410254) plus SEI (410227).............................................. 16-4
16.2.1 Progressive SPI Display Controller Board (410254) ................ 16-5

16.2.2 SPI Display Boards .................................................................. 16-7
16.2.3 DC - DC Converter Board ........................................................ 16-8
16.2.4 Progressive SEI Board (410227).............................................. 16-8
16.3 SEI (410252) .......................................................................... 16-14
16.3.1 Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board (410252) .............. 16-14

Progressive Jackpot Systems MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 16-1 SPI Standalone and SEI Link Progressive Jackpot System - block
diagram ......................................................................................................16-4
Figure 16-2 SEI Board - data flows .............................................................................16-11
Figure 16-3 Cashcade - data flows..............................................................................16-12
Figure 16-4 Mikohn Comms Inlet Board - block diagram ............................................16-15
Figure 16-5 Progressive Interface Board Connections................................................16-17
List of Tables
Table 16-1 SPI Display Controller - connection to P19 on Interface Board...................16-6
Table 16-2 SPI Display Controller - connector J2 pinout...............................................16-6
Table 16-3 SPI Display Controller - connector J3 pinout...............................................16-7
Table 16-4 SPI Display Board -connector J1 pinout......................................................16-7
Table 16-5 SPI Display Board -connector J2 pinout......................................................16-8
Table 16-6 SEI Board Configurations............................................................................16-9
Table 16-7 DIP Switch Settings ...................................................................................16-10
Table 16-8 Mikohn Interface........................................................................................16-13
Table 16-9 Machine Interface......................................................................................16-13
Table 16-10 CDS Display Interface .............................................................................16-13
Table 16-11 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface .......................................................16-14
Table 16-12 Connector J5 Pinout................................................................................16-17
Table 16-15 RS422 Communications with Mikohn Controller (J7)..............................16-19
Table 16-16 Drop Loom Connectors J1, J2, J3, J4.....................................................16-19
Table 16-17 Cashbox Security J9 ...............................................................................16-19

16.1 Overview
Aristocrat gaming machines can be configured in a variety of ways to provide for
Standalone Progressive Jackpots, Link Progressive Jackpots, and/or Mystery
Cashcade Jackpots.
This chapter describes two different jackpot configurations:
• The first configuration provides for Standalone Progressive Jackpots controlled
by SPI signals from the Main Board, via a SPI Controller Board (Part
No.410254), and Linked Progressive and Cashcade Jackpots controlled by an
external controller, via a Serial Equipment Interface (SEI) Board. This SEI
board (Part No.410227) is used where an LAB Communications Board is fitted
to the Interface Board.
Note: The Standalone system or the Link system may be used separately.
• The second configuration provides for Standalone, Link Progressive, and/or
Cashcade Jackpots controlled by an external controller via an SEI Board. This
SEI board (Part No.410252) is used where the machine is not fitted with an
LAB Communications Board.
Standalone Progressive Jackpots are specific to individual machines and

independent of games played on other machines. Several standalone jackpot
levels are available. Each jackpot amount is accumulated from a small percentage
of each game played as specified in the game combination. A jackpot is won
when a game outcome matches one of the jackpot combinations. When a jackpot
is won, the current amount of the jackpot is paid to the player and the jackpot is
reset to its starting amount, which is also specified in the game combination.
In a Link Progressive Jackpot system, a number of machines are linked together
through a Link Progressive Controller, which is external to the gaming machine.
As each game is played, pulses are sent to the Controller from each of the gaming
machines, initiating the accumulation of a small percentage of the bet amount to
develop a Link Jackpot amount. The jackpot is won when a game outcome
matches the Link Jackpot combination. The winning machine sends pulses to the
Link Progressive Controller, and the jackpot value is transmitted from the
Controller to the winning machine’s display unit.
In a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot system, a number of machines are linked together
through a Controller, which is external to the gaming machine. As each game is
played, pulses are sent to the Controller from each of the gaming machines,
initiating the accumulation of a Cashcade Jackpot amount, which is shown on a
central display unit connected to the Controller. The jackpot is won when the
Cashcade Jackpot amount reaches some randomly selected value between
predetermined limits. The jackpot value is transmitted from the Controller to the
winning machine.
Machines may be configured to offer several different combinations of standalone
and link jackpots. Typical configurations provide two, three, or four jackpot
amounts (termed Double, Triple, or Quad Jackpots).

16.2 SPI (410254) plus SEI (410227)

As an example, the system components and information data flows in a Triple
Standalone with Mikohn Link system are shown in Figure 16-1.
The progressive jackpot displays consist of one large 7-cell 7-segment display and
two smaller 6-digit 7-segment displays.
The two 6-digit displays are driven and controlled by SPI signals from the Main
Board and the amounts displayed represent the Standalone Progressive jackpots.
SPI Channel 1 is used to communicate with the SPI Display Controller Board
which in turn drives the SPI Display Boards.
The larger display is driven and controlled by signals from the Mikohn Link
Progressive Controller and the amount displayed is the Link Progressive Jackpot.
A CDS type display is typically used for this display. The Mikohn Progressive
Controller receives pulses generated from the game software indicating the
machine turnover and whether a jackpot has been won. Signals from the Mikohn
Controller are sent to a CDS Display Controller Board which in turn drives the
CDS Display Board.
A block diagram of this system is shown in Figure 16-1.
LAB Comms
DC-DC Mikohn Mikohn
Power Supply
Converter Controller 1 Controller 2
Board
J4 J5 J10
P5 J1
J6
LAB SEI Board
MkV Series II Comms (Link Progressive) Mystery
Interface Board Board P6 J2 J3 Jackpot LED
J9 J8
J1
CDS
Progressive SPI Display
Display Controller Controller
Board
J3
Standalone Jackpot Standalone Jackpot

Display Board Display Board
Link Jackpot
Display Board
jpotcirc.cdr
Figure 16-1 SPI Standalone and SEI Link Progressive Jackpot System - block diagram

16.2.1 Progressive SPI Display Controller Board (410254)

The Progressive SPI Display Controller Board (Part No.410254) and display
boards are used to show the progressive standalone jackpot values. The SPI
Display Control Board enables the machine to communicate with up to four
display boards, each with either 6 or 7 digits.
The 26-way connector J1 on the display control board is connected to the port P19
on the Interface Board. This port provides SPI communication (channel 1) and
24 V power for the SPI Display Control Board.
The SPI channel is multiplexed to eight channels, four of which are used for
external peripherals.
The display control board may also be connected to a secondary display control
board.

Table 16-1 SPI Display Controller - connection to P19 on Interface Board

Pin No. Signal Function
1,3 Not connected
2,4 Not connected
5,7,9 Not connected
6,8,12,14,18,20,22,24 GND Reference ground
10,16 Not connected
11 SCLK Serial clock from Main Board
13 /SPITXD Serial data input to Display Controller
15 NSIOE Serial output enable from Main Board
17 NRESET Reset signal from Main Board
19 /SPIRXD Serial output data from Display Controller
21,23,25,26 24 V DC +22 V DC supply
Signal characteristics are as follows:

• SCLK, SPITXD, NRESET are all open collector outputs from Main Board.
All signals are opto isolated on the Main Board
• NSIOE is an open collector output from Main Board and requires a 1K pull-up
resistor on the display board. Opto isolated on Main Board.
• SPIRXD is an open collector output from the display board. Opto isolated on
the display controller board.
The 26-way connector J2 on the display controller board provides for connection
to a secondary display controller board.
Table 16-2 SPI Display Controller - connector J2 pinout

1,3 Not connected
2,4 Not connected
5,7,9 Not connected
6,8,12,14,18,20,22,24 GND Reference ground
10,16 Not connected
11 BSCLK Buffered Serial clock from Main Board
13 /BSDOUT Buffered Serial data input to secondary Display Board
15 NTBOXEN Enable for secondary Display Board
17 NRESET Reset signal for secondary Display Board
19 /TBSDIN Serial output data from secondary Display Board
21,23,25,26 24 V DC +24 V DC supply
Signal characteristics are as follows:

• BSCLK, BSDOUT, NTBOXEN, NRESET are all buffered outputs (tri-state)
from the display control board.
• TBSDIN is an open collector output signal from secondary display controller
board.
The 10-way connector J3 on the display control board provides the interface with
the 6- or 7-segment display boards. Up to four display boards can be connected to
the display controller. The display boards are selected by asserting the
corresponding NDISPL 1..4 signal.

Table 16-3 SPI Display Controller - connector J3 pinout

2 VCC + 5VDC supply for controller logic
8,10 GND GND for controller logic
6 BSCLK Serial data clock output
4 BSDOUT Serial data output
1,3,5,7 NDISPL1..4 Enable signal for 1 - 4 display boards - output
9 DATARET Serial data input signal from display board 1.-.4
All output signals are opto isolated on the display boards.

DDRET inputs are open collector signals from the serial out pins of the display
boards and are opto isolated on the display boards.
The SPI has a speed of 7.812 kHz and the controller logic is able to update single
digits. As required by the driver chip, 2 bytes are sent to the display controller to
update one digit. To update all 7 digits, a 14 byte-long data block is required. On
SPI channel 1, only 2 bytes can be transmitted to the display controller at a time.
Consult the Main Board details on bus timing limitations for the SPI bus.
16.2.2 SPI Display Boards

The SPI Display Boards enable the machine to display the jackpot values for
Standalone Progressive Systems. The displays typically have 6 or 7 digits and
come in three sizes: small, medium and large.
Each display board incorporates logic that continuously refreshes the display.
The signals that interface with the display controller board are opto isolated.
Each display board is supplied with 12 V DC converted from the 24 V DC supply
by the DC-DC Converter Board. In addition, the controller board supplies 5 V DC
for on-board logic.
Input Interface
The 10-way connector J1 on the display board provides the main interface with
the SPI Display Controller Board.
All input signals are opto isolated on the display boards and DDRET is an opto
isolated output signal from the display boards.
Table 16-4 SPI Display Board -connector J1 pinout

2 IVCC Isolated + 5VDC supply from controller logic board
8,10 IGND Isolated GND from controller logic board
6 BSCLK Serial data clock input
4 BSDOUT Serial data input
1,3,5,7 NDISPL1..4 Enable signal for 1 4 display boards - input
9 DDRET Serial data output signal from display board # 1..4

Output Interface
The 20-way connector J2 on the SPI Display Board provides the interface from
one display board to the next.
Table 16-5 SPI Display Board -connector J2 pinout

2 IVCC Isolated + 5VDC supply from controller logic board
8,10 IGND Isolated GND from controller logic board
6 BSCLK Serial data clock input
4 BSDOUT Serial data input
1 NDISPL2 Enable signal for second display board - output
3 NDISPL3 Enable signal for third display board - output
5 NDISPL4 Enable signal for fourth display board - output
7 GND Passed as GND to the next display
9 DATARET Serial data output signal from display board # 1..4
16.2.3 DC - DC Converter Board

The gaming machine only supplies 24 V DC, and it is necessary to create a
12 V DC supply line to supply power to the CDS Display Controller and SPI
Display Boards (note that a 24 V DC supply line is also required).
A 24 V DC to 12 V DC Converter Board is used for this purpose. The board uses
a switching regulator as the chief component of the design.
The connector P23 on the Interface Board is connected via a loom to the 4-way
connector P1 on the 24 V DC to 12 V DC Converter Board.
16.2.4 Progressive SEI Board (410227)

Overview
The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) Board (Part No.410227) enables LAB
RS-422 Communications to be converted to DACOM 5000 signals for a Mikohn
CON2 pulse system. The SEI Board can also receive information back from the
controller such that when a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot is won the Subsidiary
Equipment Function line is activated until the jackpot is reset, causing the
machine to lock up. The SEI Board allows for both Mystery Cashcade and Link
Progressive Jackpot games to be connected to the gaming machine.
The SEI Board can also be used to connect the gaming machine to a BIPs Cashless
Transfer system. To support the BIPS interface, the serial ports have to provide 2-
way communication ports (Mikohn CON2 controllers only require one-way
communication ports).
The SEI Board is mounted on a plate and the assembly is then mounted into the
subsidiary equipment board mounting plate.
The table below shows the possible board configurations:

Table 16-6 SEI Board Configurations

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Pulse Progressive system Serial Progressive BIPs System
system
P5 and P6 inputs P5 input P1 in/output
two DACOM 5000 inputs RS-422 in/out DACOM 5000 in/output
two pulse outputs CDS display output CDS display output
CDS Display output
LED out
Functional Description
The SEI Board is controlled by a Zilog Z8S180 microprocessor. This
microprocessor has two embedded UART channels which support two serial ports
on the SEI Board. An external DUART is used to provide two additional serial
ports.
Therefore, four channels are provided for the DACOM 5000 or RS-422/485
communication interface. Jumper link J11 is used to select between DACOM
5000 and RS-422/485.
The baud rates of these ports are as follows:
• DACOM 5000 type interface: up to 9600 baud max.
• RS-422/485 type interface: up to 19200 baud max.
The Z8S180 is an 8-bit microprocessor. It supports operating frequencies up to

16 MHz and provides two Asynchronous Serial Communication Interface (ASCI)
channels. The Z8S180 can address up to 1 Mbyte of memory. There are 32 Kbyte
RAM and 64 Kbyte ROM available on the SEI Board.
In case of power failure or brown outs, the power supply to the SEI Board is
guaranteed for another 20 ms. This gives time for the status/data of the system to
be stored in a non volatile RAM.
Option 1 - Jackpot Pulse System

The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) has two connections, one to Port P5
and one to Port P6 on the LAB Communications Board.
It also has two pulse outputs and two serial inputs to the two different progressive
systems Mystery Cashcade and Link Progressive. An LED is used to indicate that
pulses are being sent.
The SEI translates the LAB Communication Protocol to either the M09, Link
Progressive protocol or the M00, Cashcade Jackpot Protocol, or both depending
on how the interface is configured.
The SEI is configurable to allow for the jackpot type to be set, i.e. one Link
Progressive and one Cashcade, or two Cashcade interfaces.

The SEI has the ability to identify the machine so that they correspond to each of
the Mikohn CON2 machine ID numbers. This is done by using DIP switches that
allow for up to 40 ID numbers for each CON2 controller. When a Cashcade
jackpot is won by a machine, the SEI in that machine activates the Subsidiary
Equipment Function Line until the jackpot is reset, this will cause the machine to
lock up.
The DIP Switch settings for the two CON2 controllers are shown below.
Table 16-7 DIP Switch Settings

CON2-1 CON2-2
SWITCH Data Bit Description SWITCH Data Bit Description
1-6 0-5 Machine ID 1-6 0-5 Machine ID

7 6 Spare 7 6 Spare
8 7 Controller 8 7 Controller
Type type
DIP switch bit 8 enables each of the CON2 interfaces to be configured as a Link
Progressive or Cashcade type controller.
The SEI has the capability of driving a CDS Display for the Link Progressive
Jackpot Prize.
Mystery Cashcade
Where the machine is configured for Mystery Cashcade jackpots without Linked
Progressive jackpots, the SEI has only one connection (to P5) on the LAB
Communications Board. In addition, the CDS display is not required. A block
diagram of a Cashcade system is shown in Figure 16-3.
Mystery Cashcade Jackpot Light

A connection is provided for an external LED to advise the player the machine is
still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot.
Option 2 - Jackpot Serial System

An RS-485 Interface is also implemented on the SEI Board. This allows for serial
communication between a controller and the machine. The RS-485 Port is
connected parallel to the J10 port (DACOM 5000) and replaces the same.
Option 3 - BIPs Cashless Transfer System

The SEI has a standard interface that allows for connection to a BIPs system. In
this case, the bi-directional port J1 of the SEI connects to the port 1 (P1) on the
LAB Board and the bi-directional port J10 (DACOM 5000) on the SEI connects to
the BIP system.

Power Supply
The SEI board is supplied with 12 V DC. An on-board rectifier and switch mode
power supply regulator provide the logic with 5 V DC.
The power supply is monitored and if the 12 V DC supply is missing more than a
half wave (more than 20 ms delay), the POWER FAIL OUTPUT (PFO) signal is
activated. From the time PFO becomes active, the system has about 100 ms to
save the status of the current activities on the board and stops processing until
PFO and RESET inputs become inactive again.
SEI Board Connections
CDS Display
Controller
Optically Isolated
Transmission
at 9600 baud
RS-422 communications J9
at 9600 baud Machine ID
P5 or P1 J1 and Option
Dipswitches
SEF
LAB
Subsidiary
PWR GOOD
Communication Equipment
Board Interface
P6 SEF J2
CON2-1 CON2-2
J5 J4 J6 J10
J3 J8
Power Supply
LED
Optically Isolated RS-422/485 port

Optically Isolated
Pulsed Output 19200 baud
Input at 2400 baud
jpotflow.cdr
Connection to first Connection to second

Controller System Controller System
(Mikohn CON2-1) (Mikohn CON2-2)
Figure 16-2 SEI Board - data flows

Cashcade option
RS-422 communications Subsidiary

at 9600 baud
P5 J1 Equipment J8 Power
Interface Supply
SEF
LAB PWR GOOD J3
Communication LED
Board
J5 J4
Optically Isolated Optically Isolated

jpotflo2.cdr
Pulsed Output DACOM 5000 Input
at 2400 baud
Mikohn CON2
Controller
Figure 16-3 Cashcade - data flows
Pulsed Interface to Mikohn CON2 controller

The controller has an optically isolated connection to the interface. The basic link
protocol (M09) is a 100 ms header followed by 50 ms pulses for each credit
played. A 200 ms header is used to specify a Jackpot hit - used only by Link
Progressive games, and followed by 50 ms pulses for the Jackpot type won, i.e.
Jackpot 0 has one 50 ms pulse, and Jackpot 3 has four 50 ms pulses.
To reset a combination hit a coin pulse must be sent, i.e a 100 ms header followed
by a 50 ms pulse.
The basic Mystery Cashcade protocol (M00) is 50 ms pulses for each credit
played. No headers are required for this protocol.
Two pulsed outputs are provided via J5 and J6 on the SEI Board.
Mystery Jackpot Light

A connection for an external LED is available to advise the player the machine is
still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot. The jackpot light connects to J8 on the
SEI Board.
CON2 to Interface
The machine receives information from the controller via an optically isolated
DACOM 5000 input.
This machine sends out the current Jackpot value, which is continuously updated,
as well as the Jackpot win, and the machine ID.
Two interfaces are provided via J4 and J10 on the SEI Board.

Table 16-8 Mikohn Interface

Pin Number Description
1 RxD
2 COMMON
3 TxD
Interface to Machine
The interface between J1 on the SEI and the machine is shown below.
Table 16-9 Machine Interface

1 Common
2 RX Data +
3 RX Data -
4 TX Data +
5 TX Data -
6 Power Good +
7 Power Good -
8 Sub. Equipment Function +
9 Sub. Equipment Function -
10 NC
Interface to CDS Display

The connection to the CDS Display controller is via a DACOM 5000 uni-direction
port, as shown in the table below.
The display controller board connects to J9 on the SEI Board.
Table 16-10 CDS Display Interface

1 RxD
2 RxD
3 COMMON
4 COMMON
5 TxD
6 TxD
7 COMMON
8 COMMON
9 RxD
10 RxD
Mikohn Serial Interface

The SEI Board has one RS-422 port (J7) to support the Mikohn Serial Protocol
CON2 RS-422/485 interface. The RS-422/485 is used instead of DACOM
5000 to talk to a CON2 controller. The optical isolation for this interface is on
the Comms Inlet board. The SEI Board provides the RS-422/485 signals to the
Comms Inlet board.

The table below shows the pinout of the RS-422/485 connector.
Table 16-11 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface

1 GND
2 TxDN
3 TxDP
4 DTRN
5 DTRP
6 RxDN
7 RxDP
8 DCDN
9 DCDP
10 NC
Power Input
The SEI receives 12 V DC at 0.5 A from the LAB Power Supply Unit. Power is
connected to J3 on the SEI Board.
16.3 SEI (410252)

The Mikohn Progressive Interface Communications (Comms) Inlet Board (Part
No.410252) interfaces to controllers such as Mikohn’s Super Controller (Con2).
The Mikohn controller provides for Link Progressive Jackpots and/or Cashcade
(Mystery) Jackpots.
16.3.1 Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board (410252)

The Mikohn Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board is housed within the
Comms Inlet Filter Box, which is located at the base of the cabinet. The board
allows the gaming machine to interface with up to four progressive controllers.
Serial Channel 3 on the Interface Board is used to communicate with the Mikohn
Controller; however, the Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board is still required
as the channel is generic, and not specific.
The main section of the Progressive Interface allows the machine to
transmit/receive data to/from the controller. The transmit channel will be disabled
when the machine is in reset, or if the signal loom connecting the machine to the
Progressive Interface is disconnected.
The serial interface between machine and controller is implemented with a RS422
port - one transmit channel together with enable line, and one receive channel.
The maximum speed is 9600 baud as this is the limit of the Main Board.

The second section on the Progressive Interface provides the Mikohn controller
with four (4) isolated pulses which the controller requires in order to determine
how much money is being played.
The board receives an isolated 12 V DC supply directly from the machine power
supply unit. It is rectified then regulated to 5 V DC for use on the board.
Finally, the cashbox mechanical security switch signals are brought into the
machine via the Progressive Interface Comms Inlet Board. The cash box signals
are protected by EMI/RFI filters and metal oxide varistors on the board before
going to the Interface Board.
The Data Signals from the Mikohn Controller are protected by transient voltage
suppressors and 3 kV isolation transformers.
Security
3-5 J9
J6 EMI Filter
P22
Varistors
Generic Serial Cash Box
Channel 3 Security
P17
J8 Transient
Mikohn Pulse
Voltage
P16
Suppressors
RS422
Communication
J7
Voltage Rectifier
and Regulator
Power Supply
Isolated 12 V DC J5 Mikohn
Controller
J1 J2 J3 J4
Mikohn Cash Pulse
prog252a.cdr
Figure 16-4 Mikohn Comms Inlet Board - block diagram

Removal and Replacement Procedures
CAUTION
such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBAs by
metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCBA. Flexing may
The Comms Inlet Filter Box consists of three main metal parts: the main housing,
the central metalwork, and the cover.
To remove the Progressive Communications Inlet Board from the machine:
2. Remove the hopper from the machine.
4. Locate the Comms Inlet Filter Box mounted to the base of the cabinet,
against the back wall.
5. Disconnect the three looms from the top of the box.
6. Remove the three screws securing the cover to the main housing, and
remove the cover.
7. Carefully lift up the central metalwork and attached PCBA, disconnect the
looms from the underside of the PCBA, then remove the PCBA and
metalwork.
8. The PCBA is fixed to the central metalwork using two metallic spacers, two
nuts, and two stand-offs. Remove the PCBA from the central metalwork,
and place the PCBA in an anti-static bag.
9. Remove the screws securing the main housing to the base of the cabinet, and
remove the base.
Note
PCBs.
To replace the Progressive Communications Inlet Board and housing, reverse the
above procedure.

Input/Output Connectors
The following diagram shows the connections to the Progressive Interface Comms
Inlet Board. Connectors J5, J6, and J8 are on the solder side and the remaining
connectors J1, J2, J3, J4, J7, and J9 are on the component side.
Looms connected to the J5, J6, and J8 on the top of the PCBA are internal to the
machine cabinet. Looms connected to the J1, J2, J3, J4, J7, and J9 on the
underside of the PCBA exit via the cashbox.
Loom to Serial Channel 3 (P17)

and Mikohn Pulse (P16) Loom to isolated 12 V DC Loom to Security (P22)
on Interface Board on Power Supply Assembly on Interface Board
J8 J5
J6
prog252b
J1 J2 J3 J4 J7 J9
Looms (up to 4) to Mikohn Controller Loom to Mikohn Controller Loom to Cashbox

All outputs carry same pulse output RS422 Communications Security Switch
Figure 16-5 Progressive Interface Board Connections
Power Interface
Power Interface (isolated)
The board receives 12 V DC directly from the power supply assembly.
Table 16-12 Connector J5 Pinout

Connector J5 Connects to Power Supply Assembly
POWER
Pin Name Pin
1 12 V DC 1
2 GND Ground 12 V
Power Interface (non isolated)

See connector J8 in the Input Interface section.

Input Interface
Generic Interface
The 7-pin connector J8 on the Progressive Interface connects the input and output
lines and the non-isolated power to the board. This connector interfaces with
connectors P16 (Mikohn Pulse) and P17 (Serial Channel 3) on the Interface
Board.

Connector J8 Connects to 12-way connector P17 (Serial
GENERIC Channel 3) on the Interface Board
Pin Name Pin
1 Sin3 1
2 Sout3 2
5 P12VI 9
6 Mach_Gnd 12
7 RTS3 6
Connects to 2-way connector P16 on the
Interface Board
3 EmikohnP 1
4 EmikohnN 2
Sout3 is the output of an Opto-isolator while Sin3 is the input of the same type of
Opto-isolator. RTS3 is used to enable the RS422 Transmit line.
Pins 3 and 4 of J8 connect to P16 on the Interface Board: these two pins take the
machine cash pulse. This pulse is converted into four identical pulses that are
then transferred to any of (a maximum of) four Progressive controllers as required.
Pins 5 and 6 are provide a non-isolated 12 V DC supply and GND taken from the
Main Board.
Filtered Cashbox Security

Connector J6 takes the filtered cashbox security signal to MSS3 on the Interface
Board.

Header J6 Connects to 24-way connector P22
CASHIN (Security) on the Interface Board
Pin Name Pin
1 Cashin(1) 21
2 Cashin(2) 9
3 NC NC

Output Interface
RS422 Communications
A 14-way ribbon cable header is required to connect to the Master Mikohn
controller. This header transfers the RS422 from the Progressive Interface Board
to the controller. RxDA+ and RxDA- take data from the controller to Sin3 of the
machine. TxDA+ and TxDA- transmit data from Sout3 of the machine.
Table 16-15 RS422 Communications with Mikohn Controller (J7)

Connector J7 Connects to Mikohn Controller Connector J3
RS422 14-way R/C Header
Pin Name Pin
1 NC 1
2 NC 2
3 IOGnd 3
4 IOGnd 4
5 TxDA- 5
6 NC 6
7 TxDA+ 7
8 NC 8
9 RxDA- 9
10 NC 10
11 RxDA+ 11
12 NC 12
13 NC 13
14 NC 14
Mikohn Cash Pulse

The Mikohn cash pulse from the machine is split four ways. Four 2-pin
connectors are provided and may be used as required. Each of the four outputs is
isolated from the other three.
Table 16-16 Drop Loom Connectors J1, J2, J3, J4

Connectors J1, J2, J3, Connects to Mikohn Controller #1, #2, #3, & #4
and J4
Pin Name Pin
1 EmikP Data
2 EmikN Machine ID
Cashbox Security
The external cashbox security signal connects to J9 on the Progressive Interface
Board. The signal is filtered before being sent to the Interface Board via J6.
Table 16-17 Cashbox Security J9

Connector J9 CASHBOX Connects to external Cashbox signal
Pin Name Pin
1 NC NC
2 Cashbox(1) 1
3 Cashbox(2) 2

Notes

MVP Video Gaming Machine LAB Communications Board
______Chapter 17______
LAB Communications Board -
Part No. 410174
Note:
Chapter includes LAB Communications PSU Fusing and Serial
Interface Card Mounting Chassis (PSU Chassis)

17.1.2 Basic Operation........................................................................ 17-5
17.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description ................................................. 17-7
17.4 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................. 17-10

LAB Communications Board MVP Video Gaming Machine
List of Figures
Figure 17-1 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout ....................................17-5
Figure 17-2 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ...........................................17-6
Figure 17-3 LAB PSU Chassis ......................................................................................17-7
Figure 17-4 LAB PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring...............................17-8
List of Tables
Table 17-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout ........................................................................................17-3
Table 17-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout...................................................................................17-4
Table 17-3 Interface Board Bus Connector to LAB Communications Board...............17-10


The LAB Communications Board is located inside the logic cage and is
perpendicularly mounted to the Interface Board via a 96-way right-angled
DIN41612 connector. It consists of one bi-directional and five unidirectional
RS422 serial ports which may be used to communicate with various types of
subsidiary equipment.
The LAB Communications Board is designed to comply with the relevant LAB
requirements, namely:
• Provision for 6 ports P1 to P6, with P1 being bi-directional and ports P2-P6
being uni-directional.
• Each port operating in conformance to the RS422 standard as described in
the LAB guidelines with the addition of pull up/down resistors at the RS422
receiver inputs of particular signal lines.
• Transmission from each port being asynchronous at 9600 bps.
• A “power good” status output signal provided at each port.
• A “subsidiary equipment function” (SEF) status input signal received at
each port from an external source.
• All unused ports capped with “power good” status output signals fed back
through the SEF status input line.
The port 1 connector is a 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the pinouts
as shown in the following table.
Table 17-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout

Pin Signal Name Signal Function Signal Direction
1 Common Signal GND
2, 3 Tx Data Transmit Data From LAB Comms Board
4, 5 Rx Data Receive Data To LAB Comms Board
6, 7 Power Good EGM Power is Normal From LAB Comms Board
8, 9 SEF Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
Functioning Normally Status
The connectors for ports 2-6 are 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the
pinouts as shown in the following table.

Table 17-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout

1 Common Signal GND _
2, 3 Tx Data Transmit Data From LAB Comms Board
6, 7 Power Good EGM Logic Power is normal From LAB Comms Board
8, 9 SEF Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
Functioning Normally
Status
Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

the LAB Communications Board is provided in Volume II:
• Circuit diagrams.

Figure 17-1 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout

A brief description of the functionality of the LAB Communications Board is
provided in this section.

Figure 17-2 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram
The LAB Communications Board provides six ports, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and P6.
Port P1 is bi-directional and receives communications from the equipment
connected to the corresponding port of the Subsidiary Equipment Serial Interface
(SESI). The port P1 is reserved for Centralised Cash Control Equipment. Ports
P2 to P6 are uni-directional and do not receive communications from subsidiary
equipment.
Each port operates in conformance to the RS 422 standard with the speed of the
transmissions being 9600 bps. Each character or digit is represented by 11 bits (1
start bit + 8 data bits (packed BCD) + 1 parity bit (even) + 1 stop bit). The data
byte is transmitted with LSB first, parity transmitted after the MSB.
In addition to the usual RX and TX data signals, each port provides a "power
good" status signal to and receive a "Subsidiary Equipment Function" (SEF) status
signal from the SESI.
The "power good" status signal is an indication of the integrity of the power
supply level on the gaming machine Main Board and hence the LAB
Communications Board. The signal operates such that the differential voltage at
the output of the line driver is negative (Vd = -V) whenever the Main Board and
any other "sensitive" subsidiary boards (eg LAB Comms Board) have "normal"
power applied.

Under all other conditions the line driver differential voltage is positive (Vd =
+V). The manufacturer of the SESI must ensure that the other power fail
conditions which may cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or
high impedance are detected correctly.
The SEF status signal is an indication to the gaming machine that subsidiary
equipment connected is functioning correctly or that a request has been made for
play suspension. Under "normal" conditions the SEF differential signal voltage at
the line driver output is negative (Vd = -V). A positive signal (Vd = +V) is to be
interpreted by the EGM as a request to suspend play. "Fail" conditions which may
cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or high impedance must
also be interpreted as a request to suspend play.
All unused ports will be "capped". In the "cap" for the connector, pins 6 and 7
(power good) are linked to pins 8 and 9 (SEF) respectively so that the gaming
machine can be provided with the SEF input signal.
17.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description

The machine Power Supply Assembly provides the LAB Comms PSU Fusing and
Serial I/F Card Mounting Chassis (PSU chassis) with 12 V DC at 3 A, isolated to
3 kV, via a ribbon cable. This cable connects to the LAB PSU chassis at its
12 V DC input and to the machine Power Supply Assembly via a 4-pin Molex
Minifit Junior compatible header.
The PSU chassis is located mounted to the back wall of the cabinet, below the
monitor shelf. It provides power connections to the six subsidiary equipment
interfaces (third party vendor equipment). Each connection is capable of
supplying 12 V DC at 0.5 A. Each output connection from the PSU chassis is
protected by a 0.5 A fuse.
Figure 17-3 LAB PSU Chassis
The wire leading from pin 1 of the ribbon cable connector is connected in parallel
fashion to all six fuse holders and hence fuses.

The outer terminal (contact) of each fuse holder (fuse) is wired to pin 2 of its
corresponding 3 way power output connector.
The wire leading from pin 2 of the ribbon cable connector is connected in parallel
fashion to pin 2 of each of these power output connectors. Pin 3 of each power
output connector is unused.
In this way, six 12 V DC/0.5 A power output connections are provided by the
LAB Communications PSU.
Figure 17-4 LAB PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring

CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices
(ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to avoid
physical contact with components. PCBAs
should be handled by their edges. ESD items
should not be placed on metal surfaces.
Removal
To remove the LAB Communications Board:
4. Release the LAB Communications Board from its connected position by
using the board extractors. Disconnect any looms to the board.
5. Withdraw the board from the logic cage and place in an antistatic bag
immediately.
Replacement
followed when replacing PCBAs.
2. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag.
3. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage.
4. Reconnect the looms to the board. Slide the board into the logic cage
grooves and gently move the board into position on the Interface Board.
Close the logic cage door.
5. Switch the machine ON, and close the cabinet door.
CAUTION
For general maintenance of the LAB Communications Board:

• Remove any dust or dirt from the external surfaces.
• Check that all plugs are secure.

17.4 Connector Pin Assignment

The LAB Communications Board connects directly to the Interface Board via the
DIN 96-pin vertical connector P5.
The connector pin assignments are detailed in the following table:
Table 17-3 Interface Board Bus Connector to LAB Communications Board

A1 ---
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 ---
A2 ---
B2 ---
C2 ---
---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
B4 ---
C4 ---
A5 ---
B5 GNDD Ground
A6 ---
B6 ---
C6 ---
A7 ---
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 ---
A8 ---
B8 ---
C8 ---
A9 ---
B9 GNDD Ground
C9 ---
A10 ---
B10 ---
C10 ---
A11 ---
B11 GNDD Ground
C11 ---
A12 ---
B12 ---
C12 ---
A13 ---
B13 GNDD Ground
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 GNDD configuration pin, specify card number
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 VCC configuration pin, specify card number
(continued ...)


B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---
B19 GNDD Ground
B21 GNDD Ground
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
B26 /PFAIL power fail signal
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 ---
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 ---
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual ANET - DACOM Communications Interface
______Chapter 18 ______
ANET - DACOM Communications Interface
18.1 General Description ............................................................... 18-3
18.1.1 Typical Hardware Devices........................................................ 18-3
18.2 Basic Operation...................................................................... 18-6

18.3.2 Functional Description.............................................................. 18-9
18.3.3 Serial Equipment Interface (Assembly SEI 564144) .............. 18-16
18.4.1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface: ......................... 18-17

18.4.2 Communications Filter:........................................................... 18-17
18.4.3 Mains Filter Box:..................................................................... 18-18
18.5 Pin Connector Assignment ................................................. 18-20
18.6 Installation and General Maintenance ................................ 18-24

ANET - DACOM Communications Interface MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 18-1 Typical DACOM Installation .......................................................................18-5
Figure 18-2 FEP Connection to Gaming Machines .......................................................18-6
Figure 18-3 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface - Component Locations........18-7
Figure 18-4 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Functional Diagram..............18-9
Figure 18-5 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Assembly ...........................18-10
Figure 18-6 Serial Equipment Interface.......................................................................18-16
Figure 18-7 Data Cable Filter Box ...............................................................................18-18
Figure 18-8 Mains Filter Box .......................................................................................18-19
List of Tables
Table 18-1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Physical Description.............18-8
Table 18-2 Status Indicator Function...........................................................................18-14
Table 18-3 Typical Memory Configuration...................................................................18-15
Table 18-4 J1 - RS232 Interface .................................................................................18-20
Table 18-5 J2 - LCD Display........................................................................................18-20
Table 18-6 J3 - ANET Connection to Interface Board.................................................18-20
Table 18-7 J4 - LCD Back Light Power .......................................................................18-21
Table 18-8 J5 - Quad Input..........................................................................................18-21
Table 18-9 J6 - RS485 Serial Cable Connection.........................................................18-21
Table 18-10 J7 - Octal Input ........................................................................................18-21
Table 18-11 J8 - SPI Interface.....................................................................................18-22
Table 18-12 J9 - Door Inputs.......................................................................................18-22
Table 18-13 J10 - Relays.............................................................................................18-22
Table 18-14 J11 - Service Buttons and Keypad Input .................................................18-22
Table 18-15 J12 - Power Input ....................................................................................18-23
Table 18-16 J13 - Mains Power Sense .......................................................................18-23
Table 18-17 J14 - Locking Card Reader .....................................................................18-23
Table 18-18 J15 - Non-locking Card Reader...............................................................18-23


The ANET - DACOM gaming machine management systems collects data from
machine meters, cash transaction payments, security events, coin clearances, and
the Player Communications Module, and use the information to create
sophisticated accounting, security, and machine management packages.
Individual machines are monitored, controlled, included in a range of player
marketing programs, and form part of extensive control systems for the entire
gaming machine installation.
The Aristocrat Networking facility (ANET) (Assembly No. 565109 and associated
elements) provides for a gaming machine interface and data collection operations
for each machine connected to the gaming machine network.
The principal gaming machine management systems include DAta
COMmunications Network System (DACOM) 5000E and the advanced DACOM
6000S Systems. Components of these systems are external to the gaming
machines and provide for the networking, management and reporting system
elements.
Typical main functions of DACOM 6000S system include:
• On-line and real-time machine monitoring,
• Daily data records,
• Progressive and mystery jackpot accounting and verification,
• Comprehensive security strategies including passwords, audit trail, attendant
card tracking, and machine switch monitoring,
• Comprehensive accounting covering coinflow, cash payments, clearances,
jackpot accounting with Mikohn links, reconciliations and extensive reporting,
• Extensive performance analyses including group performance reporting, and
machine performance ranking,
• Wide range of player promotions which include program performance and
activity reporting.
Many repetitive and time consuming tasks are carried out automatically and
without error by DACOM, and management has a wide range of appropriate
information to monitor operations, guide decision making and develop marketing
programs.
18.1.1 Typical Hardware Devices

A typical DACOM installation incorporates essential and optional components
which can include a range of terminals, printers, card readers, paging systems, and
security cameras. The functions of the various components are outlined in the
following pages. For additional information refer to the DACOM support and
marketing publications.

Host Processor
The Host Processor is the central computer that processes the DACOM
application.
Console
The console is the monitor and keyboard directly connected to the Host Processor.
Front End Processor (FEP)

The FEP is a computer used by the Host Processor to communicate with the
gaming machines.
Cashier Terminals
The cashier terminals are usually "dumb" terminals connected to the Host. As
there is no form of data storage on a dumb terminal, the Host does all processing
and stores the data.
Docket (Bonus) Printers

Docket printers communicate with the Host via the cashier terminal they are
attached to. The docket printer prints vouchers awarded to players for later
redemption.
Card Readers
The card readers let cashiers swipe members' cards to allow automated redemption
of bonus points and to read in the current bonus points balance.
Entrance Terminal
The entrance terminal is a computer with a card reader and a high capacity docket
printer. Usually located in the foyer of the building, it allows members to swipe
their cards when entering the premises to participate in current promotions.
Modem
The modem provides a means for an operator to dial into the Host and log in to
the installation as a user while off site.
Note: The modem is typically used to allow access to DACOM by Aristocrat
Technical Support staff.
Printers
Typically, a DACOM installation has separate printers for reports and for the audit
trail. DACOM will allow as many printers as are required to be connected.
UPS
The UPS (uninterruptable power supply) protects the Host Computer in the event
of a power failure, spikes and brown outs.
Weighscales
The weighscale provides automatic cashbox and hopper clearance information to
the system.

Mikohn
To provide a range of jackpot facilities, Mikohn CON2 (V.2.05 and above) Link
Progressive Controllers (Super Controllers) can be connected to DACOM.
Other Equipment
DACOM can also communicate other equipment, including paging systems, a
camera surveillance system and a local area network (LAN).
Security camera systems and paging systems are attached via a serial link and can
be used to provide enhanced services for players and increased surveillance for the
installation.
64-Channel
Serial Card
Cashier Terminals
Card Readers
Printers
Entrance Terminal
Modem
Console Weighscales
Mikohn
Other Equipment
Host Processor. Audit Printer.
Gaming Machines
Gaming Machines
FEP with 16 Channels
RS-485 Communications Gaming Machines
Gaming Machines
Gaming Machines
Gaming Machines
Gaming Machines
Front End Processor. Gaming Machines
(up to 10 per Host Processor) (up to 30 per line)
dacom2.cdr
Up to 480 Machines per FEP
Figure 18-1 Typical DACOM Installation

18.2 Basic Operation

The main computer that runs the DACOM system is called the Host Processor.
The monitor and keyboard connected directly to this computer are known as the
Console. The Host Processor communicates with the gaming machines via one or
more Front End Processors (FEPs), which are basically industrial PCs. Generally
there is no monitor or keyboard connected to the FEP; although, they may be
connected to assist in troubleshooting.
In a typical configuration, the FEP communicates with the gaming machines using
the RS485 communication protocol. Each FEP can support up to 16 channels,
with each channel connected to a maximum of 30 machines. To increase
performance, it is recommended that the number of machines connected to each
channel be limited to about 20. Up to 10 FEPs may be connected to the Host
Processor, thus creating a very powerful communications network for data
collection and monitoring.
Each machine belonging to the network is equipped with a ANET - DACOM
communications interface board and a Player Communication Module. The
ANET - DACOM interface board facilitates communication between the machine
components and the FEP. The Player Communication Module is used for
operator/player messages and, more importantly, for logging the ANET - DACOM
communications interface onto the network.
The machines in the network are physically linked by cable, in series, providing
the channel through which data is transferred.
The Host Processor polls (cycles) through the machines, sequentially addressing
the communications interface in each machine. When addressed, each
communications interface sends its latest data to the Host Processor. This polling
process takes a very short time; therefore, the Host receives continuously updated
data.
The network interface cables attached to the gaming machine are as follows:
• Connection from FEP to machines: banks of gaming machines are daisy-
chained together and connected via a single cable to the FEP. This is
accomplished through the use of an RJ45 three-way adaptor board mounted
in the machine. The last machine in a line will be fitted with an RJ45 two-
way terminator board. The cable from the RJ45 adaptor to the ANET -
DACOM interface board is passed through a ferrite bead to reduce
electromagnetic interference (EMI).
To Machine No.1 To Machine No.2 To Machine No.3
From
FEP
RJ45 3-Way RJ45 3-Way RJ45 2-Way

Adaptor Board Adaptor Board Terminator Board
RJ45DACM.cdr
Figure 18-2 FEP Connection to Gaming Machines

• Mains power cable for ANET - DACOM communications interface,

independent of machine power supply. The cable is passed through a filter
PCB to reduce the effects of EMI transmitted to the communications
interface.
The ANET - DACOM communications interface is designed to be completely

independent of the gaming machine itself. It utilises a separate power supply and
has its own battery back up for data. These features enable the communications
interface to function correctly even when the machine itself is not powered.
Light Tower
ANET - DACOM
Communications
Interface
ANET - DACOM
Communications
Interface
(behind monitor
for Low Boy only)
Logic cage
Bill acceptor
DANGER
TURN OFF POWER BEFO RE
CHANGI NG TUBE. FAIL URE TO
COM PLY MAY CAUSE SER IOUS
DAMAGE OR IN JURY
WARNING
TUBE SO CKETS ARE VERY HOT
DR
PP.C
HO
Data Cable Filter Box
Mains Filter Box
Machine Base
RJ45 Three Way

Adaptor PCB
Mk5V126A
Figure 18-3 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface - Component Locations


The ANET - DACOM communications interface assembly consists of a metal
housing containing the interface board, power supply board, and mains sensor
board.
The dimensions of this housing and the layout of the enclosed boards may vary as
a result of space restrictions or mounting requirements. However, the boards and
their functionality remain the same. Where the boards are mounted side by side
within the housing, the assembly is referred to as a ‘tile’. Where the interface
board is mounted above the other boards within the housing, the assembly is
referred to as a ‘brick’. The ANET - DACOM interface assembly is located at the
bottom of the top box.
The communications interface board is connected to a player communication
module that is located in the cabinet door top trim. The module is used for
'logging on' the ANET - DACOM communications interface. 'Logging on'
involves providing an address to the Host Processor so that it may recognise the
machine as part of the network. For logging the communications interface onto
the Host and further details regarding the player communication module refer to
the procedures outlined in the various DACOM publications.
Table 18-1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Physical Description

Interfaces RS485 (galvanically isolated)
RS232/DACOM
Electronic key
Magnetic card reader
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)
Inputs Opto isolated parallel (mechanical meters and machine events)

Door sensing (security switches)
Service buttons/keypad
Switches Reset
Setup
Indicators Status
Other 2 x dual pole double throw (DPDT) relays

Buzzer
Watch dog timer (1 sec. duration monitoring PCB)
Non-volatile RAM.
Power fail
Battery failing

RELAYS and
Gaming Machine SERIAL PERIPHERAL
INTERFACE (SPI)
Expansion
ANET COMMUNICATIONS
INTERFACE
Data Two-Way
Transfer Communication
Comms
Filter
(ferrite) EMI FILTER BOX
RJ45
Adaptor
Data
Transfer
DACOM MAINS POWER

Data Entry NETWORK SUPPLY
IDEPENDANT OF
MACHINE POWER
COIN CLEARANCES
CASH TRANSACTIONS
CASHIER TERMINAL
DACOM3b.CDR
Figure 18-4 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Functional Diagram

The communications interface detects electromechanical meter pulses, signals
from the machine, and the tripping of security switches, depending on the
configuration of its input interfaces.

Mains Power Inlet
Power Supply Board
Mains Power
Sensor PCB
Security Switch
Setup
ANET - DACOM Communications
Interface Board
Battery
Reset
LCD contrast dacomlay
potentiometer Diagnostic LEDs
Figure 18-5 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface Assembly
There are several methods for interfacing to the machine:

• Directly to the machine logic via the DACOM 5000 port on the Interface
Board (P21). It enables the communications interface to receive all
electromechanical meter and security signals using the gaming machine's
built-in auditing and security functions.
• RS232 communication via one of the Generic Serial Channels. Security
functions are separate.
• RS232 communication via the LAB Communications Board and a Serial
Equipment Interface board. Security functions are separate.
• Directly to the machine electromechanical meter pulse logic via the
DACOM 3000 port on the Interface Board (P20). This method will supply
meter pulse data to the communications interface. Security functions are
separate.
• Directly from the components via separate looms and connections to the
communications interface. The communications interface receives the
driving pulses from the same source as the component.
The data received by the ANET - DACOM interface is sent to specific buffers
(according to which function it represents) for storage before being processed.
The electromechanical meter data is passed through optically isolating couplers to
reduce the effects of any interference before being sent to its respective buffer.

The microprocessor is requested by the Host Processor (via the FEP) to supply its
current data for a particular function (eg: coins-in). The microprocessor then
sends out an address line to the data buffers. The buffer corresponding to the
particular address will then provide the contents of its memory to the processor.
The microprocessor reads the information and converts it to the required protocol
for the FEP and Host Processor. The data is then sent, via the FEP, to the Host
Processor.
Data sent from the FEP to the gaming machine is converted by the
communications interface into a suitable protocol for communicating with the
player communication module.
There are twelve inputs to the communications interface. These inputs are
optically isolated to minimise interference. The following paragraphs describe a
typical distribution of inputs.
The communications interface is connected to the electromechanical meter logic
of the machine. As each meter is changed through functions of the machine, the
electronic pulse used to drive the meter is also transmitted to the communications
interface circuitry. The system has the capability for monitoring up to eight
electromechanical meters.
Machine security is monitored by the communications interface. Four security
switches may be connected to the interface. A standard allocation for the security
switches is on the main door, cash box door, logic cage door and communications
interface cover. The interface circuitry can detect when a switch is tripped, even
when the gaming machine itself is not powered.
Coin-in, coin-out and hopper motor power signals are detected and processed by
the communications interface circuitry.
The communications interface detects when the machine is powered up or
powered down.
The machine components monitored by the interface (electromechanical meters,
security, etc) may be changed according to network, customer and market
requirements.
The major features and components of the communications interface assembly are
as follows:
• RS485 interface,
• RS232/DACOM interface,
• Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus,
• Electronic key interface,
• Optically isolated parallel inputs,
• Door sensing inputs,
• Keypad interface,
• Magnetic card reader interface,
• Liquid crystal display (LCD) interface,
• Buzzer,
• Status indicators,
• RAM/ROM,

• Relays,
• Switches,
• Watch dog timer,
• Battery fail indicator,
• Power supply PCB,
• Mains sensor PCB - power fail indicator.
RS485 Interface
The communications interface output uses RS485 multi-drop connection standard
utilising 38.4 k baud (bits per second) data transfer speed. The standard uses 4
pair UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) and RJ45 connectors. Machines are
connected via a 3-way RJ45 adaptor board at each machine. Each adaptor board
connects to:
• Incoming cable from previous machine
• Machine cable to machine ANET - DACOM interface
• Outgoing cable to following machine
The final machine in the network uses a two way RJ45 adaptor for termination.
The maximum permissible data cable length between an FEP and the final
machine connected to it is 500 m or 1000 m if a signal amplifier is used.
RS232/DACOM Interface
The ANET - DACOM interface enables the DACOM system to communicate
directly with the gaming machine Main Board logic via connector P21 on the
machine Interface Board. The data transfer speed is set at 9600 baud.
The RS232 interface enables the ANET - DACOM system to communicate
serially with the gaming machine via a Serial Equipment Interface board and Port
3 on the LAB Communications Board.
The interface has only one connection, so no galvanic isolation is required. The
RS232 interface and the ANET - DACOM interface use the same serial port;
therefore, only one of the interfaces can be connected at a time.
SPI Bus
A serial peripheral interface is designed into the communications interface to
allow for future expansion whereby other components could be driven by the Host
Processor, via the communications interface. For example, the SPI bus could be
used to drive other peripheral devices, such as an electronic sign.
Where the ANET - DACOM interface communicates with a LAB
Communications Board via a SEI board, the SPI is used to power the SEI board,
to monitor a power good signal from the machine, and to send a Subsidiary
Equipment Functioning signal to the machine.
Electronic Key Interface

The electronic key is an optional device that can be configured (via network
software options) to perform various functions.

For example, the electronic key could be configured so that when it is activated (at
a particular machine), the ANET - DACOM interface will send the key number to
the Host.
Optically Isolated Parallel Inputs

This interface can support up to 12 optically isolated inputs. The distribution of
the inputs can be varied according to the machine configuration. The most
common distribution of inputs is:
• Eight electromechanical meters
• Coin-in
• Coin-out
• Hopper motor ON
• Machine ON
Door Sensing Inputs

Up to four door sensing inputs (security switches) can be connected to the
communications interface. Each input is a dual-pole double-throw (DPDT) switch
set in the normally open position. When a security door is opened, the electrical
circuit to the switch is broken and the communications interface board detects the
change in state.
A common configuration for the door sensing inputs is:
• Main door
• Logic cage door
• Mechanical Meters Cover
• Cash box door
Keypad Interface
The communications interface allows for two different types of keypad input:
• Service buttons (three)
• Keypad (16 buttons on a 4 x 4 switch matrix)
The service buttons are usually used for customer services (calling attendant,
drinks, change). The 16-button pad can be configured to function as service
buttons as well as a cashless system where, for example, the patron uses a PIN
number to access funds.
The switches (normally open) have pull up resistors holding the outputs 'normally
high'. When a row or column on the button matrix is selected, its' input is driven
'low'. Data output bit 0 is ‘normally low'.
When more than one button is pressed at once, an error condition is indicated to
the operator/player via the LCD on the player communications module. The error
conditions that will create a response from the Host are controlled and configured
from the network software.

Magnetic Card Reader Interface

The magnetic stripe card reader interface enables the ANET - DACOM
communications interface to read the identification of the card (owner details) and
transfer this information to the Host Processor. The magnetic stripe card reader
derives its power from the communications interface board.
This facility enables the Host Processor to individually 'track' or monitor a patron's
use of machines, gaming habits, etc.
LCD Interface
The LCD interface allows the transfer of data from the Host Processor to be
output to the operator/player via an LCD unit in the player communication
module. The LCD unit also derives its power from the communications interface
board.
This interface enables the output from the Host Processor to the operator/player
necessary for logging the communications interface onto the network and for
player messages. See the Player Communication chapter for further information.
Buzzer
The buzzer generates audio feedback. It 'beeps' when a key is pressed.
Status Indicators
The status indicators consists of an array of seven LEDs. Each LED represents a
function of the board and indicates whether it is receiving or transmitting data.
The status indicators illuminate when the communications interface board
performs a function or receives data from the machine or Host. The table below
lists the function of each indicator and its designation on the communications
interface board. The status indicators serve in assisting the installation and
servicing of the modules.
Slots provided in the interface cover allow the diagnostic LEDs to be viewed
without removing the cover.
Table 18-2 Status Indicator Function

Status Function
Indicator
1 (LD2) RX from Host. Illuminates when the communications interface is receiving data from the
Host.
2 (LD3) TX to Host. Illuminates when the communications interface is sending data to the Host.
3 (LD4) RX from RS232/DACOM. Illuminates when communications interface is receiving data
from the machine.
4 (LD5) TX to RS232/DACOM. Illuminates when communications interface is sending data to the
machine.
5 (LD6) Illuminates when a electro-mechanical meter pulse is received from the machine logic.
6 (LD7) Illuminates when there is a system fault.
7 (LD8) Power indicator for the communications interface board. Illuminates when power ON.

RAM/ROM
The Random Access Memory (RAM) is battery backed, providing non-volatile
memory storage that is capable of maintaining its contents for a long period of
time. Machine information and data is stored in RAM.
The Read Only Memory (ROM) is permanently stored in EPROM chips. It is
unaffected by power conditions and cannot be overwritten by the communications
interface or software. Operating system information, data protocol and
instructions (program) are stored in ROM.
Table 18-3 Typical Memory Configuration

Standard RAM 32k x 8
ROM 64k x 8
Maximum RAM 128k x 8
ROM 128k x 8
Relays
The ANET - DACOM communications interface is equipped with two dual-pole
double-throw (DPDT) relays. The two relays are independently controlled and
can be used for driving other machines peripherals (eg: light tower, siren).
The relays are driven via the Host Processor, in response to machine or
communications interface conditions, according to the configuration of the
network.
The relays may be attached to components (eg: light tower) for switching only; the
component still derives its power from the machine power control system.
Switches
The communications interface board is equipped with two switches: RESET and
SETUP. These switches are used when installing or servicing the
communications interface:
The RESET switch resets the microprocessor by triggering the reset line.
The SETUP switch puts the communications interface board into setup mode for
logging onto the Host. Refer to the Player Communication chapter for further
details.
Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is built into the communications interface board electronics.
Its function is to monitor the operation of the communications interface board
microprocessor.
It receives an electronic pulse from the microprocessor periodically. If the
microprocessor fails to supply the pulse on time, perhaps due to a fault, the
watchdog resets the communications interface board.

Battery Failing Indication

The battery failing indicator provides two warnings of the back up battery failing.
The first warning is given six months before failure, and the second is given two
months before failure.
Power Supply PCB

The power supply PCB is directly attached to mains power and powers the
communications interface board.
Mains Sensor PCB - Power Fail Indication

The power fail signal is generated by the mains sensor PCB. It indicates to the
communications interface board microprocessor that the input power has failed
within 20 ms.
The power supply, however, will maintain correct power for 10 ms to enable the
microprocessor to perform an orderly shutdown and save important information in
non-volatile memory.
18.3.3 Serial Equipment Interface (Assembly SEI 564144)

A Serial Equipment Interface board is used to allow the DACOM system to
communicate with the gaming machine via an LAB Communications Board. The
SEI board converts the RS232 and SPI signals from the DACOM system to
RS422 signals to communicate with the gaming machine.
The RS232 communicates with the ANET - DACOM interface. The SPI is used
to sense a Power Good signal from the gaming machine, send a Subsidiary
Equipment Functioning signal back to the machine, and to provide power to the
SEI board.
The SEI is housed within a metal cover and located close to the ANET - DACOM
interface. A block diagram of the SEI board is shown below.
Main Board
Serial Equipment SPI

LAB Comms J8
Board Interface DACOM
Interface
P3 RS422 J1 J3 RS232 J1
SEILABDA
Figure 18-6 Serial Equipment Interface

18.4.1 ANET - DACOM Communications Interface:

To remove the ANET - DACOM Communications Interface from the machine:
1. Turn OFF both power to the machine and to the ANET - DACOM
Communications Interface.
2. Open the top box and remove the reflector assembly as described in the
chapter Cabinet, Door and Top Box.
3. Two separate metal covers are used to house the interface PCBA and the
power supply components respectively.
4. To access the communications interface PCBA, remove the two screws
securing the cover, then lift the front of the cover up and the locating tabs at
the rear will disengage.
5. Disconnect all looms from the communications interface.
6. The communications interface is mounted on studs/screws and may now be
removed.
7. The mains sensor PCB and power control PCB are accessed and removed in
a similar manner.
CAUTION
When handling electro-static devices (ESDs)
such as PCBs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBs by
metal surfaces. When handling PCBs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCB. Flexing may
Note
Ensure that the security switch contacts are
closed when the interface cover is replaced.
18.4.2 Communications Filter:

The data cable from the ANET - DACOM communications interface to the RJ45
three-way adaptor PCB is passed through a ferrite clamp through which the cable
is looped. The ferrite is used to eliminate electromagnetic interference (EMI).
The components are mounted and attached to the base of the machine cabinet,
behind the hopper.
To remove the communications filter from the machine:

2. Access the ANET - DACOM communications interface and disconnect the
data cable from it.
3. Open the cash box door and disconnect the data cable from the RJ45 three
way adaptor PCB.
4. Remove the hopper as described in the chapter Hopper.
5. Unclip the ferrite clamp from around the cable.
Screw (3)
Ferrite Bead
Ferrite Mounting
Plate Self Tapping
Screw (2)
Filter Box
DACOM
Data Cable
Mk5V155 Cabinet Base
Figure 18-7 Data Cable Filter Box
18.4.3 Mains Filter Box:

The mains cable used for supplying power to the ANET - DACOM
communications interface is passed through a mains filter assembly. The purpose
of the filter is to reduce the effects of EMI transmitted to the communications
interface.
To remove the mains filter box from the machine:
2. Access the communications interface and unplug the power loom.
3. Remove the hopper from the machine as described in the chapter Hopper.

4. Remove the self-tapping screw fastening the mains filter box to the machine
cabinet base. Lift the filter box upward so the location tab is clear of the
base and withdraw the assembly from the machine.
To DACOM 6000S
Communications
Interface
Connection
From
Ground from Mains
DACOM Loom Washer
M4 Nut
A191-032.cdr
Figure 18-8 Mains Filter Box

18.5 Pin Connector Assignment

The following tables provide pin numbers, signal names and functions for the
various ports and interfaces on the ANET - DACOM communications interface.
It should be noted that depending on the machine configuration, some of the ports
and interfaces may not be used.
Table 18-4 J1 - RS232 Interface

1 ---
2 TXA1 Transmit data.
3 RXA1 Receive data.
4 ---
5 GND Ground.
6 ---
7 ---
8 ---
9 ---
10 ---
Table 18-5 J2 - LCD Display

1 GND 0V.
2 VCC 5V.
3 VEE LCD drive voltage.
4 R/S Register select.
5 R/W Read/write.
6 ENABLE Enable.
7 DB0 Data bit 0.
8 DB1 Data bit 1.
9 DB2 Data bit 2.
10 DB3 Data bit 3.
11 DB4 Data bit 4.
12 DB5 Data bit 5.
13 DB6 Data bit 6.
14 DB7 Data bit 7.
Table 18-6 J3 - ANET Connection to Interface Board

1 TXDAC Transmit data.
2 TXDAC Transmit data.
3 COM Common.
4 COM Common.
5 RX DAC Receive data.
6 RX DAC Receive data.
7 COM Common.
8 COM Common.
9 TX DAC Transmit data.
10 TX DAC Transmit data.

Table 18-7 J4 - LCD Back Light Power

1 LCDBL+ LCD back light power +.
2 LCDBL- LCD back light power -.
Table 18-8 J5 - Quad Input

1 INPUT8+ Coin in.
2 INPUT8- Coin in.
3 INPUT9+ Coin out.
4 INPUT9- Coin out.
5 INPUTA+ Hopper motor.
6 INPUTA- Hopper motor.
7 INPUTA+ Machine power.
8 INPUTA- Machine power.
9 ---
10 ---
Table 18-9 J6 - RS485 Serial Cable Connection

Pin Signal Name Wire Colour Function
1 -VISOL Blue Isolated ground.
2 -VISOL Orange Isolated ground.
3 TX- Black Data transmit -.
4 RX+ Red Data receive +.
5 RX- Green Data receive -.
6 TX+ Yellow Data transmit +.
7 -VISOL Brown Isolated ground.
8 -VISOL Grey Isolated ground.
Table 18-10 J7 - Octal Input

1 INPUT0+ Turn over.
2 INPUT0- Turn over.
3 INPUT1+ Credit wins.
4 INPUT1- Credit wins.
5 INPUT2+ Cash box.
6 INPUT2- Cash box.
7 INPUT3+ Cancelled credit.
8 INPUT3- Cancelled credit.
9 INPUT4+ Jackpot.
10 INPUT4- Jackpot.
11 INPUT5+ Stroke.
12 INPUT5- Stroke.
13 INPUT6+ Reserved.
14 INPUT6- Reserved.
15 INPUT7+ Reserved.
16 INPUT7- Reserved.

Table 18-11 J8 - SPI Interface

1 VCC 5V
2 TXA Transmit data.
3 RXA Receive data.
4 CKA Clock.
5 GND Ground.
6 SPIDEV0 SPI device select 0.
10 GND Ground.
Table 18-12 J9 - Door Inputs

1 MD+ Main door +.
2 MD- Main door -.
3 DD+ Cash box door +.
4 DD- Cash box door -.
5 TD+ Top box door +.
6 TD- Top box door -.
7 LD+ Logic cage door +.
8 LD- Logic cage door -.
9 ---
10 ---
Table 18-13 J10 - Relays

1 RL1NCA Relay 1 normally closed - A
2 RL1COMA Relay 1,common - A.
3 RL1NOA Relay 1 normally open - A
4 RL1NCB Relay 1 normally closed - B
5 RL1COMB Relay 1 common - B
6 RL1NOB Relay 1 normally open - B
7 RL2NCA Relay 2 normally closed - A
8 RL2COMA Relay 2 common - A
9 RL2NOA Relay 2 normally open - A
10 RL2NCB Relay 2 normally closed - B
11 RL2COMB Relay 2 common - B
12 RL2NOB Relay 2 normally open - B
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---
16 ---
Table 18-14 J11 - Service Buttons and Keypad Input

1 SERSWIN0* Switch in 0.
5 SERSWOUT0* Switch out 0.

Table 18-15 J12 - Power Input

1 12V 12V DC input.
2 VCC Vcc input.
3 VCC Vcc input.
4 GND Ground input.
5 GND Ground input.
6 GND Ground input.
Table 18-16 J13 - Mains Power Sense

1 MPS+ Mains power sense +.
2 MPS- Mains power sense -.
Table 18-17 J14 - Locking Card Reader

1 ---
2 ---
3 ---
4 RDI* Receive data input.
5 RCL*/INT2* Receive clock input.
6 CLS* Card loading signal.
7 P1* Position 1 switch.
8 P2* Position 2 switch.
9 STATUS* Card reader status.
10 SLN* Solenoid.
11 LED1* LED 1.
12 LED2* LED 2.
13 ---
14 12V 12V.
15 VCC 5V.
16 GND 0V.
Table 18-18 J15 - Non-locking Card Reader

1 ---
2 RDI* Receive data input.
3 RCL* Receive clock.
4 CLS* Card loading signal.
5 GND Ground.
6 SW1* Switch 1.
7 GND Ground.
8 SW2* Switch 2.
9 VCC 5V.
10 GND Ground.

18.6 Installation and General Maintenance

Procedures for the installation, configuration, and maintenance of the DACOM
systems are outlined in the DACOM publications.

MVP Video Service Manual Player Communication Module
______Chapter 19______
Player Communication Module
19.1 General Description ..................................................................... 19-3
19.2 Technical Description (PCM) ....................................................... 19-4
19.2.1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader ......................................................... 19-4

19.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display ..................................................................... 19-4
19.2.3 Service Buttons .............................................................................. 19-5
19.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 19-5
19.4 Machine Communications Setup ................................................ 19-6
19.5 General Maintenance ................................................................... 19-7

Player Communication Module MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 19-1 Player Communication Module ..................................................................19-3
Figure 19-2 Variation to Face of PCM (Initial Display Message) ...................................19-6


The Player Communications Module provides a range of services for players
through a plastic-card reader, a character display unit, and three pushbuttons.
Functions are integrated into the ANET - DACOM communications network and
casino management system. and the units are controlled and utilised by the
DACOM host computer system.(See chapter, ANET - DACOM Communications
Interface). The Player Communication Module (PCM) is mounted in the top trim
of the cabinet door (refer to Figure 19-1).
The PCM fitted may be from one of several different manufacturers, including
Bally, GRIPS, IGT, and Aristocrat. The following descriptions are based on the
Aristocrat (PCM). The internal components may vary slightly between
manufacturers, however, the functionality of the device remains the same.
Player
Communication
Module
LCD Display Pushbutton Card Reader

Panel
Top Trim
Mk5s2042x
Figure 19-1 Player Communication Module
Player communication is accomplished through the use of a magnetic stripe card

that has the player's identification encoded onto it. The player inserts the card into
a card reader, and the PCM reads the information stored on the card. The ANET -
DACOM communications interface enables the PCM to communicate with the
network. The host processor then 'knows' who is playing the gaming machine,
and messages can be sent to the player via the PCM liquid crystal display (LCD).
The player communication function thus allows greater scope for the marketing
strategies of the casino by being able to keep record of player spending, gaming
machine popularity, etc., as it happens. This enables the casino to introduce
incentives to individual players via the PCM as they play, and to target patrons by
age and sex at given times.

The PCM is housed in the top trim of the cabinet door and connects to the ANET -
DACOM communications interface PCBA (located in the top box) via looms.
19.2 Technical Description (PCM)
19.2.1 Magnetic Stripe Card Reader

The Magnetic Stripe Card Reader is a manual feed Omron type 3S4YR-SBR. The
card reader is a 66% reader; ie: it reads approximately 66% of the magnetic stripe.
The reader works with magnetic cards conforming to AS 3522.2 and ISO 2894
and 3554. The magnetic stripe cards used can contain up to 10 characters of
information on track two.
Note
The information stored on the card is for the
personal identification of the card owner
only.
The reader has a minimum life of 300,000 card insertions.

Operating Voltage 5V DC ± 10%
Input Voltage max 6V DC
Current Consumption 25mA max.
Connector IL-10P-S3FP2-1 or equivalent
Effective Stripe Length 46.6mm max.
19.2.2 Liquid Crystal Display

The Liquid Crystal Display is a Data Vision DV-16252 S2FTLY. The display
consists of 2 lines of 16 characters. The characters appear in silver-grey LCD
mode over a yellow-green LED backlight.
Operating Voltage 5 V DC
Logic Input Voltage max. 7.0 V DC
LCD Driver Input Voltage max. 16.5 V DC
Current Consumption 2 mA
Connector 14 way header, Molex M6471-14-1 or equivalent
To adjust the liquid crystal display:

2. Access the ANET - DACOM communications interface and remove the
cover. Refer to the chapter ANET - DACOM Communications Interface.

3. Locate the LCD contrast potentiometer RV1 on the ANET - DACOM

communications interface PCB. Refer to the diagram in the chapter on the
ANET - DACOM interface.
4. Using a small flat blade screw driver, adjust the contrast potentiometer until
the display is acceptable.
19.2.3 Service Buttons

The Service Buttons used in the player communication module are Omron type
B3W-4150S. The buttons are a two piece arrangement incorporating the switch
itself (soldered onto the Service Button PCB) and a plastic push on cap.

Removal
Removal procedure for the player communication module is as follows:
1. Disconnect power to the ANET - DACOM communications interface.
2. Open cabinet door, and switch OFF machine power.
3. Disconnect the looms from the player communication module to the
communications interface.
4. The components of the player communication module may now be removed
from the top trim.
Replacement

19.4 Machine Communications Setup

A setup procedure must be carried out to link the gaming machine to the host
computer network. Details of this setup procedure are detailed in the DACOM
support publications.
The setup involves logging the ANET - DACOM communications interface to the
host processor along with the identification number of the gaming machine
(usually located on the upper left of the play window) via the PCM.
The Service Buttons perform dual functions, providing cursor movement and
acceptance of options through the LCD menu when installing the communications
interface onto the network. Refer to Fig 19-2.
LCD Display Service Buttons Card Reader
Mk5s2044
Top Trim
Button 1 Button 3
Button 2
Figure 19-2 Variation to Face of PCM (Initial Display Message)
Once the ANET - DACOM communications interface is powered on, the player
communication module will display a series of messages and installation
processes are carried out.
Upon completion of the setup procedure, the gaming machine becomes functional
and the range of player services and programs are available to gaming machine
players. Also, links are established between the host computer and components in
the gaming machine which enable security control and machine monitoring.
NOTE
The procedure for installing the ANET - DACOM
communications interface to the host processor
remains the same regardless of the front decal in
use. For example, if the front decal has only one
button visible, the other two buttons will function
in the manner previously described in this section
for installation, even though they are not seen or
utilised during normal machine operation.


The exterior of the Player Communication Module should be cleaned regularly
with a soft cloth.
Do not use any solvents or abrasives for cleaning as this may damage the
appearance of the module or impair the operation of the magnetic stripe card
reader.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Communications Systems
_____Chapter 20_____
Communications Systems
20.1 Overview ................................................................................. 20-3
20.2 VLC Communication PCB ..................................................... 20-3
20.3 TCP/IP Communications........................................................ 20-8
20.3.1 TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board....................................... 20-8

20.3.2 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board ........................................................... 20-15
20.4 Machine Communications Interface (MCI) ......................... 20-19
20.5 IGT Interface ......................................................................... 20-21
20.6 ActivData II+.......................................................................... 20-23
20.7 Olympic Head Unit ............................................................... 20-24

Communications Systems MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 20-1 VLC Comms Inlet PCB Block Diagram ......................................................20-4
Figure 20-2 VLC Communication Inlet PCB - Component Layout ................................20-5
Figure 20-3 TCP/IP Communications Board - Block Diagram ....................................20-10
Figure 20-4 TCP/IP Communications Board - Component Location............................20-11
Figure 20-5 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Block Diagram ...........................................20-15
Figure 20-6 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Component Location .................................20-16
Figure 20-7 MCI - Typical Connections .......................................................................20-19
Figure 20-8 Olympic Head Unit - Connections ............................................................20-24
List of Tables
Table 20-1 Connector P0 ..............................................................................................20-6
Table 20-2 Connector P1 ..............................................................................................20-6
Table 20-3 Connectors P2 and P3 ................................................................................20-7
Table 20-4 Connector J1 ...............................................................................................20-7
Table 20-5 Interface Connector - P7 ...........................................................................20-12
Table 20-6 AUI and Cash Box Connector P2..............................................................20-14
Table 20-7 Logic Seal Interface...................................................................................20-14
Table 20-8 Comms Board Connector J3.....................................................................20-17
Table 20-9 Isolated Power Input Connector J4 ...........................................................20-17
Table 20-10 AUI / Network Interface Connector J2.....................................................20-18
Table 20-11 Cash Box Connector J1 ..........................................................................20-18
Table 20-12 MCI Harnesses and Functions ................................................................20-20
Table 20-13 P15 - RS232 Port to IGT Interface Board ...............................................20-21
Table 20-14 Gaming Machine to ORION Unit Communications .................................20-23
Table 20-15 ORION Unit to ActivData II+ communications cable ...............................20-23

20.1 Overview
Machines may be connected to a network communications system to monitor
security, record accounting information, provide performance analysis, and enable
player communications. To connect to a network, each machine must be fitted
with a communications interface.
There are several different communications systems that may fitted, depending on
the jurisdiction and market requirements. A number of companies, including
Aristocrat Technologies Australia, manufacture and install communications
interfaces and network systems for gaming machines.
The different types of communications systems are described in this chapter, with
Aristocrat products being described in greater detail. For more information on any
of the systems described, refer to the vendor documentation for the particular
system installed.
20.2 VLC Communication PCB

The VLC Communication PCB and housing is mounted inside the gaming
machine cabinet. The PCB has five connectors, two on the upper side for
connection to the host machine and three on the reverse side for connection to the
communications network and also the cash box security switch.
The purpose of the VLC Communication Inlet PCB is to provide connections to
VLC communication protocol and 3 kV isolation for these connections in a single
bi-directional channel. The VLC communication bus is a multi-drop system, the
signals comply with EIA RS422 specification but with EIA RS485 driver/receiver
capabilities, capable of supporting 9600 baud. The PCB also provides
connections and signal filtering for the cash box switch.
The PCB converts input RS232 signals from the machine Main Board via P15
(serial channel 2) on the Interface Board, to TTL levels before crossing the signals
over the 3 kV isolation via optical isolators.
The signals are then converted into RS422 for network transmission using an
RS485 driver/receiver chip. This conversion process is reversed when the
machine is receiving signals from the network. The machine software controls the
transmission signals for the PCB via serial channel 2 from the machine Main
Board - it can enable or disable TXD and RTS from the VLC network.
The PCB receives isolated 12 V DC power at connector P1. This power line is
filtered then rectified and regulated down to 5 V DC before being utilised by the
isolated side of the opto isolators and the driver/receiver. The PCB also receives
12 V DC non-isolated power at connector P0. This power line is regulated down
to 5 V DC to power the non-isolated section of the PCB.

Cash Box Signal 1

Line 6 Way Connector
Cash Box Signal 2 Filter J1
to Cash Box
3kV Isolated Section

12V Isolated
P1 Bridge
+12V
15 Way
5V Connector 5V
Regulator Regulator
15 Way
5V +5V +/-5% Isolated Connectors
Non-
Isolated P2 P3
RS422
Driver
RS232 Optical
Op
Iso
Isolator
RS422
TTL
Receiver
P0
25 Way
Connector
Mk5V186
Figure 20-1 VLC Comms Inlet PCB Block Diagram
Ports P2 and P3 are connected in parallel in accordance with VLC communication

bus standards.
Connectors
The connectors to the host machine and the VLC communication bus are as
follows:
P0 Connects to P15 (serial channel 2) and P22 (cash box) on machine
Interface Board.
P1 Connects to P23 on machine Interface Board for isolated 12 V DC
power.
P2/P3 Connects directly to VLC communication bus.
J1 Connects to cash box security switch.

MKV VLC COMMS INLET PCBA 2501 - 410276 PCB 0801 - 410275
ISSUE
P1 1
1 R15 C4
R14 +
C5 D1
R13 R8 L1
R12 R9
P3
D12 D11
D14 D13 C15
D10 D7
C22
D8 D9 +C19
U8
D6 D3
C3 C2
D4 D5 R21
D18 D17 R10
D16 D15 R11 U1
1 C18
C16 C9
Q1
U6
U5
P2
U9
R3 R6
R20 1
R4 R18 R19
C1 R7 C7
R25
U10
U7
U4
1995 D2 C14
R24 R17 R23 P0
R5 R22
R26 C21
R16 +
C17 C10 C8
Q2
1 U2
J1 C13 U3 C6
C11 C12 C20 +
R1 FL2
R2 FL1
Mk5V185
Figure 20-2 VLC Communication Inlet PCB - Component Layout

Connector Pin Assignments
Table 20-1 Connector P0

Pin Signal Name Comment
1 GND Ground.
2 GND Ground.
3 GND Ground.
4 /RTS Handshake signal from machine, active 'low'.
5 /DTR Handshake signal from machine, active 'low'.
6 GND Ground.
7 GND Ground.
8 Reserved.
9 GND Ground.
10 GND Ground.
11 +12V + 12 V DC non-isolated power.
12 Reserved.
13 CASH2 Cash box signal 2.
14 TX Data Data signal from the machine.
15 RX Data Data signal to the machine.
16 GND Ground.
17 /CTS Handshake signal to machine, active 'low'.
18 Reserved.
19 Reserved.
20 Reserved.
21 Reserved.
22 Reserved.
23 Reserved.
24 ---
25 CASH1 Cash box signal 1.
Table 20-2 Connector P1

1 12VDC1 12 V DC isolated power from machine.
2 ---
3 12VDC2 12 V DC isolated power from machine.
4 ---
5 ---
6 ---
7 ---
8 ---
9 ---
10 ---
11 ---
12 ---
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---

Table 20-3 Connectors P2 and P3

Pin Signal Name Signal Name Comment
1 Shield Shield Chassis ground.
2 TXDa TXDa Transmitted data (to VLC bus).
3 RTSa RTSa Request to send (to VLC bus).
4 RXDa RXDa Received data (from VLC bus).
5 CTSa DCDa Clear to send (from VLC bus).
6 ---
7 GND_REF GND_REF Ground reference.
8 ---
9 TXDb TXDb Transmitted data (to VLC bus).
10 RTSb DTRb Request to send (to VLC bus).
11 RXDb RXDB Received data (from VLC bus).
12 CTSb DCDb Clear to send (from VLC bus).
13 ---
14 ---
15 ---
Table 20-4 Connector J1

1 EXT2 To cash box security.
3 ---
4 ---
5 ---

20.3 TCP/IP Communications

TCP/IP communications requires two separate boards be installed within the
machine: the TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board and the TCP/IP Comms
Inlet Board.
20.3.1 TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board

The TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board is located inside the logic cage and
is perpendicularly mounted to the Interface Board via the 96-way right-angled
DIN41612 connector P5. The board links to the EGM and the TCP/IP
Communications Inlet Board providing the interface between the machine and the
IEEE802.3 TabCorp network data stream.
The MC68302 Integrated MultiProtocol Processor (IMP) acts as the main
processor on the board and is attached to a variety of inputs and outputs which
serve to inform the processor of the current machine status.
Functional Blocks
The MC68302 IMP operates at 16 MHz and contains three serial communications
controllers, four programmable chip-select lines, two 16-bit timer/counters,
interrupt encoding and a number of programmable input/output pins.
Memory devices attached to the bus consist of two 128KB EPROMs and four
128 KB static RAMs. The RAM is battery backed to provide a non-volatile, read-
write, data storage area.
Network Interfaces
Network Address PROM
A 32-byte PROM carries the Ethernet hardware address of the module along with
other site-dependent data and is read directly by the MC68302 IMP in the same
manner as the other memory devices.
MACE
The Am79C940 Media Access Controller for Ethernet (MACE ) interfaces the
network transceiver to the MC68302 using the MC68302 external DMA channel.
MACE performs the transmit, receive and collision arbitration and housekeeping.
The MACE contains a 136 byte transmit FIFO and a 128 byte receive FIFO which
are read from or written to under DMA control, as configured by the processor and
required for the network interface. The transmit, receive and collision sense pairs
are transformer-isolated to 3 kV DC on the TCP/IP Communications Inlet Board.

Other System Elements

Additional functional blocks include:
• Three serial communication ports provided on the MC68302.
• A Bus Port used to communicate to the machine via a 16C452 UART and a
16V8.
• Two diagnostic ports buffered to RS232 signal levels and connected to 10-way
headers.
• One optically-coupled digital input and one optically-coupled digital output
port (10-way headers) provided on the two spare RS232 ports. These digital
I/O points may be read or written to via the MC68230 Dongle parallel interface
IC.
• An 8-pin socket which enables an EEPROM to be plugged in to the TCP/IP
Communications Board and carry security-encoded site-specific data.
• General purpose I/O pins to monitor a variety of machine status points and
functions, including:
(a) Battery-backed real-time, clock chip for real-time stamping of events, if
required.
(b) Serially-driven octal driver device to provide a protected drive to the
electromechanical meter module.
(c) Three inputs and three outputs used to interface to various optic door
sensors within the cashbox.
(d) Special battery-backed 16-bit counter to provide a logic door seal for the
machine.
Battery-Backed Logic Door Seal

The logic door security switch loom is disconnected from the Interface Board and
connected to J2 on the TCP/IP Communications Board.
The logic door seal is provided by a 16-bit, buffered binary counter loaded with a
value (up to 65535) which is reset to zero on breaking the logic seal. This value is
read directly by the MC68302 to determine if the logic seal has been broken. The
logic seal is battery backed so as to maintain monitoring of the seal during power-
down or power-fail conditions.
Cashbox Optics
Three cashbox, optical-sensor signals are generated and monitored by the I/O on
the MC68302 and filtered by the TCP/IP Communications Inlet Board. (TabCorp
supplies the loom to the cashbox optics).
Electromechanical Meter Driver

The meter-driver circuitry is provided by the MC33298. This device is accessed
serially by the MC68302 and provides a 1 A short-circuit, high-voltage protected
output. Each output can be checked for open-circuit or short-circuit conditions
simply by reading back a status byte.
To maintain compatibility with the ANET10 firmware design, the TCP/IP
Communications Board uses pull-up resistors to convince the firmware that the
meters are connected to it. However, the machine controls and monitors the
meters via the Mechanical Meter Board to minimise changes to the machine.

Gaming
Machine Network
Bus 16C452 Address
Port Prom
EPROM
/ Ram
MC68302 Dongle
Integrated Interface EEPROM
MultiProtocol
Processor
(IMP) Logic Logic
Door Door
Seal Switch
Media Access
RS232 RS232 Controller for
Ethernet To
TCP/IP
Comms
Cashbox Inlet
Optics Board
Opto Opto
Meter
Driver
/RTC
Port2 Port3
TAB031
Figure 20-3 TCP/IP Communications Board - Block Diagram


REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MK V TCP/IP COMMUNICATIONS BOARD ISSUE A02 R46 R47 D6
PCBA 2501-410298 R43 R42
D5
C37 R110 R112 PCB 0801-410297 R44
R203 R208 R207 C67 D4
U25 C25 U12
U29 R205 R200 R109 R90 R45 D3
C5 U2
P7 D2
C54 CLSN
C56 R111 U15 C55 RAMM ODD D1
Figure 20-4 TCP/IP Communications Board - Component Location
ABC R91 C35 R88 R26 D8 RX

U11
R201 C70 R115 C26 R89 R24 D9
TX
32 C30 R97
C36 R25 D10
R206 RAMM EVEN R96
U30 U24 R100 R87 R92
C65 R204 C68 U14
C27 R55 R29
C66 R116 R114 R93
R33 R38 R54 C 1996 R99 P2
R49 R56 C11 R94
U28 R39 R48 R32 R36 R37 C9 R35 R98
R28 R101
R202 R40 R52 R95
C17 R34 C102
C64 R40 R50 U1 C14 R103
C28 C13
D7 R49 C50
C63 R21O C38 C52
R31 C3
C53
U13 R27 R30
U20 R209 C39
J3 C29 XL1 C12
C10 R1 R2
R41 R104
R105
R6 C51
U16
R212 R214 C8
R51 R86 R108 C7 R22 C61 C2 R215
C69 Security R5 R8
R211 R213 R7 C6 Y1
Address C16 U3 C62 U27 C60
R23
U23 R106 C40 Chip R3 R4
R84 R21
Communications Systems
U19 D14 R83 C1 C4 J2 1
U22 U31 U17 R81
C31 U5
R80
R85 C48 R113 Q1 D13 R82
1 C21
ABC R76 D11 D12
C32
Y3
C18 C19 C20 C79 U18

BT1 PL1 PL2
20-11
TAB035A1
Machine Interface Connector - P7

The 96-way DIN 41612 connector P7 on the TCP/IP Communications Board
interfaces with P5 on the Interface Board. The interface supplies 5 V and 24 V to
the communications board.
Table 20-5 Interface Connector - P7

Pin No. Pin Name Destination Comment
/ IC-Pin No.
A1 ---
B1 GND PS1 section, ground 24V
C1 ---
A2 ---
B2 ---
C2 ---
A3 ---
C3 ---
B4 ---
C4 ---
A5 ---
A6 ---
B6 ---
C6 ---
A7 ---
C7 ---
A8 ---
B8 ---
C8 ---
A9 ---
C9 ---
A10 ---
B10 ---
C10 ---
A11 ---
C11 ---
A12 ---
B12 ---
C12 ---
A13 ---
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 ID0 configuration pin, specify card number
C15 ID1 U28-18 configuration pin, specify card number
A16 P5V +5V from mainboard, converted from PS1 24V
B16 P5V +5V from mainboard, converted from PS1 24V
C16 P5V +5V from mainboard, converted from PS1 24V
C17 ---


B18 EHF CPU, FH0 interrupt
C18 /DACK U28-13 CPU, data acknowledge
C19 /EIL0 U28-12 CPU, IL0 interrupt
A20 /ERESET U30-11 CPU, external reset output
B20 /EIOW U29-36 CPU, IO write signal
C20 /EIOR U29-37 CPU, IO read signal
A21 EA13 U28-15 CPU, address bus
C21 ECLK8M U29-4 CPU, clock signal
B22 EA11 U28-8 CPU, address bus
C22 EA12 UF28-9 CPU, address bus
C23 EA9 U28-6 CPU, address bus
B24 EA6 U28-3 CPU, address bus
A25 EA3 U28-4U29-34 CPU, address bus
B26 /PFAIL power fail signal of PS1 section, ground 24V
A27 ---
C27 ---
A28 ED5 U29-19 CPU, data bus
B28 ED6 U29-20 CPU, data bus
C28 ED7 U29-21 CPU, data bus
B30 ED1 U29-15 CPU, data bus
A31 GND PS1 section, ground 24V
B31 ---
C31 GND PS1 section, ground 24V
A32
C32 P24V PS1 section, +24V

AUI and Cashbox Optic Interface Connector - P2

The P2 interface is a 26-way header that connects the signals from the AM79C940
MACE and Cashbox optics to the TCP/IP Communications Inlet Board.
Table 20-6 AUI and Cash Box Connector P2

1 M_BD_EMIT + R89-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter +
2 M_CB_EMIT + R88-2 Cash Box Emitter +
3 M_BD_EMIT - R96-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter -
4 M_CB_EMIT - R97-2 Cash Box Emitter -
5 M_TD_EMIT + R87-2 Cash Box Top Door Emitter +
6 M_CB_DET + R92-2, R100-2, C36-1 Cash Box Detector +
7 M_TD_EMIT - R95-2 Cash Box Top Door Emitter -
8 M_CB_DET - R101-1 Cash Box Detector -
9 M_BD_DET + R93-2, R99-2, C49-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector +
10 M_BD_DET - R102-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector -
11 M_TD_DET + R94-2, R98-2, C50-1 Cash Box Top Door Detector +
12 M_TD_DET - R103-1 Cash Box Top Door Detector -
13 NC
14 NC
15 NC
16 NC
17 NC
18 NC
19 NC
20 M_CI - U81-1, R1-1 Collision -
21 M_CI + U1-82, R2-1 Collision +
22 M_DO - U1-76 AUI Data Out -
23 M_DO + U1-77 AUI Data Out +
24 M_DI - U1-79, R3-1 AUI Data In -
25 M_DI + U1-80, R4-1 AUI Data In +
26 NC
Logic Seal Interface - J2

The connector J2 is a 3-way Molex type connecting to the logic cage door security
switch.
Table 20-7 Logic Seal Interface

1 NO U5-13 Normally Open Contact
2 C Common
3 NC U5-14 Normally Close Contact

20.3.2 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board

The TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Inlet Board is housed in a metal container
(Communications Inlet Tower) which is located at the base of the machine. The
board provides an interface between the TCP/IP Communications Board and the
IEEE802.3 TabCorp network data stream.
The TCP/IP Communications Inlet Board provides a 3 kV isolation and ESD
protection between the AUI Interface ( TCP/IP Network ) and Cash Box Signals
on the network side, and the TCP/IP Communications Board on the machine side.
The board also provides power (12 V DC) for the AUI Interface (TCP/IP
Network).
The Cash Box Signals are protected by EMI/RFI filters and metal oxide varistors.
The Data Signals from the TCP/IP Network are protected by transient voltage
suppressors and 3 kV isolation transformers.
TCP/IP
Communications
Board Cash Box
EMURFT J1 Signals
P2 Varistors
J3 Transient
Voltage TCP/IP
Suppressor Network
Power
Supply AUI
Assembly J2 Signal
12 Volt
Regulators
AUI (Attachment
J4
Unit Interface)
Power
TAB033
Figure 20-5 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Block Diagram

MK V TCP/IP COMMS INLET

RV12 RV6 PCB 0801- 410292
C1 PCBA 2501- 410293
FL6 ISSUE - A03
FL12
RV11 RV5 Revision No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J3 D1
FL11 FL5
C2 FB1
J4
RV10 RV4 C6 C3
FL10 FL4
RV9 RV3 C5 C4
T1 T2 T3
FL9 FL3 U1
RV8 RV2
C
LEISURE INDUSTRIES
FL8 FL2
1996
RV7 RV1
FL7 FL1
SA1 SA3 SA5
SA2 SA4 SA6
SA7 SA9 SA11

SA8 SA10 SA12
J1 J2
TAB034
Figure 20-6 TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board - Component Location
Communications Board Connector J3 (Machine Side)

The connector between J3 on the Inlet Board and P2 of the Communications
Board is a 25-way male D-type with ferrite.
The following pinout lists each pin on each connector on the board, the first
destination and pin number, and the signal name.

Table 20-8 Comms Board Connector J3

Pin Pin Name Destination / Function
IC-Pin No.
1 M_BD_EMIT+ FL12-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter +
2 M_BD_EMIT- FL10-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter -
3 M_TD_EMIT + FL8-1 Cash Box Top Door Emitter +
4 M_TD_EMIT - FLK6-1 Cash Box Top Door Emitter -
5 M_BD_DET + FL4-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector +
6 M_TD_DET + FL2-1 Cash Box Top Door Detector +
7 Not Used Not Applicable
11 M_CI + T3-IN1 Collision
12 M_DO + T2-IN1 AUI Data Out +
13 M_DI + T1-IN1 AUI Data In +
14 M_CB_EMIT + FL11-1 Cash Box Emitter +
15 M_CB_EMIT - FL9-1 Cash Box Emitter -
16 M_CB_DET + FL7-1 Cash Box Detector +
17 M_CB_DET - FL5-2 Cash Box Detector -
18 M_BD_DET - FL3-1 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector -
19 M_TD_DET - FL1-1 Cash Box Top Door Detector -
23 M_CI - T3-IN2 Collision
24 M_DO - T2-IN2 AUI Data Out -
25 M_DI - T1-IN2 AUI Data In -
Interface Board Connector J4 (Machine Side)

The isolated power input is provided by a connector between the power supply
assembly and J4 on the Inlet Board. The connector is a 15-way male D-type.
Table 20-9 Isolated Power Input Connector J4

Pin Pin Name Destination / Function
IC-Pin No.
1 12VDC1 C2-1, FB1-1 12 Volts DC Power
3 12VDC2 C1-1, FB1-3 12 Volts DC Power

AUI Interface (TCP/IP Network) Connector J2

The connector between the AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) (TCP/IP Network)
and J2 is a 15-way male D-type with ferrite.
Table 20-10 AUI / Network Interface Connector J2

Pin Pin Name Destination / IC- Function
Pin No.
2 CI + SA5-2, T3-OUT1 Collision +
3 DO + SA3-2,T2-OUT1 Data Out +
5 DI + SA1-2, T1-OUT1 Data In +
6 AUI Power - U1-2, C3-2, AUI Power -
D1-DC, C4-2,
C5-2, C6-2
9 CI - SA6-2, T3-OUT2 Collision -
10 DO - SA4-2, T2-OUT2 Data Out -
12 DI - SA2.2, T1-OUT2 Data In -
13 AUI Power + U 1-3, C5-1, C6-1 AUI Power +
Cash Box Connector J1 (External Side)

The cash box connector J1 is a 15-way female D-type with ferrite.
Table 20-11 Cash Box Connector J1

Pin Pin Name Destination / IC- Function
Pin No.
1 BD_EMIT + FL12-3, RV12-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter +
2 BD_EMIT - FL10-3, RV6-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Emitter -
3 TD_EMIT + FL8-3 Cash Box Top Door Emitter +
4 TD_EMIT - FL6-3, RV6-2 Cash Box Top Door Emitter -
5 BD_DET + FL4-3, RV4-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector +
6 BD_DET - FL3-3, RV3-2 Cash Box Bottom Door Detector -
7 TD_DET + FL2-3, RV2-2 Cash Box Top Door Detector +
8 TD_DET - FL1-3, RV2-2 Cash Box Top Door Detector -
9 CB_EMIT + FL11-3, RV11-2 Cash Box Emitter +
10 CB_EMIT - FL9-3, RV9-2 Cash Box Emitter -
11 CB_DET + FL7-3, RV7-2 Cash Box Detector +
12 CB_DET - FL5-3, RV5-2 Cash Box Detector -

20.4 Machine Communications Interface (MCI)

MCI Connections
Figure 20-1 shows the connections between the MCI Box, the gaming machine
and the Player Communications Module.
Cash Box
Door
BACC
Door
Machine Harness C
Door
MCI Box
Fluorescent
Flasher
Earth
Mains
Switch
Machine Harness F
Serial
Harness D
Ferrite
Filter Display Harness E
240 V/24 V AC
Transformer Plug Keypad
Break Harness B Bonus
Button
Harness A
Card
Reader
To O/L Connection
To Cash Box
Switch
Online
Cable (O/L)
C_052
Figure 20-7 MCI - Typical Connections

The following table details the functions of the various harnesses.

Table 20-12 MCI Harnesses and Functions
Harness ID. Connection Function
Code
A Cash Box The harness connects the cash box switch, on-line
cable and the 24 V AC power to a 14-pin connector
which then connects to a mating connector on harness
B. Harness B links to the MCI box.
B MCI to Plug Harness connects from the plug break on the harness A
Break to inside the MCI box. It also branches out at the MCI
end to provide the cash box door switch signal that is
brought up from the cash box and fed through the MCI.
C EGM Machine Harness connects the MCI to the machine to detect the
BACC door switch signal, EGM machine door switch
signal, EGM machine power signal, and most
importantly, the serial communication to the EGM
logical board.
D VFD Display Harness connects the MCI to the fluorescent display,
Harness keypad, and card reader.
E Bonus Button Harness connects the bonus button from the card
reader board.
F Fluorescent Harness connects the MCI to the fluorescent flasher.
Flasher
G 240V/24VAC Item is a 240 V AC to 24 V AC power transformer. At
Transformer the 24 V AC end, it plugs to the connector on harness
Pack A. At the 240 V AC end, a standard 3-wire AC cord is
used to bring the 240 V AC power to the transformer.
Note:
An optical reflective sensor is built into the MCI board to
detect the opening of the lid of the box.

20.5 IGT Interface

The function of the IGT interface PCB is to provide a communications link
between the Main Board and a Location COMmunicator (LCOM) system. The
IGT interface assembly is supplied and installed into the machine by the
Queensland Office of Gaming Regulation. The assembly consists of a base plate,
the interface PCB, and a plastic cover. An earth stud is provided on the base plate
for mandatory mains earth connection.
A separate switch and fuse are provided on the power supply assembly for the
interface power.
Technical Description
The IGT interface PCB communicates with the Main Board using RS232 and with
the LCOM system using a fibre-optic link. The RS232 port is configured on
generic serial channel 2 (P15 on the Interface Board). The channel has six I/O
signals, including data I/O.
High-speed optoisolators used on channel 2 allow this port to support baud rates
greater than 9600.
The following table lists the function of each pin on the 12-pin connector that
links P15 to the IGT interface PCB.
Table 20-13 P15 - RS232 Port to IGT Interface Board

Pin Name I/O Description
1 SIN2 Input Serial data input, high current LED driver to ensure
the high speed switching of the opto.
2 SOUT22 Output Serial data output.
3 CTS2 Input Active 'low' handshake input.
4 DSR2 Input Active 'low' handshake input.
5 I2 Input Not used.
6 RTS2 Output Active 'low' handshake output.
7 DTR2 Output Active 'low' handshake output.
8 O2 Output Not used.
9 P12V + 12V isolated; from Main Board.
10 ---
11 N12V - 12V isolated; from Main Board.
12 GND Ground.
The IGT interface PCB receives independently switched and fused mains power
from the transformer box. This enables the LCOM system to be powered even
when the machine is turned off. Power is connected via a standard IEC female
socket located on the side of the transformer box. This socket is clearly labelled
"INTERFACE", and the interface power switch is clearly labelled "ON", "OFF".

Overview of LCOM
The Location COMmunicator (LCOM) is connected via fibre-optic links to a
cluster of gaming machines. Up to 255 machines can be controlled by a single
LCOM. The LCOM monitors all machines on a frequent basis and redundantly
stores all security and accounting information.
All communication between the LCOM and machine is accomplished over the
fibre-optic link. Data is transferred asynchronously at 9600 baud with one start
bit, eight data bits, one "wake-up" bit, and one stop bit. The first byte of all
messages from the LCOM contains the address of the machine for which it is
intended. This byte will have the wake-up bit set, allowing significantly reduced
software overhead in the machines capable of interrupting when the wake-up bit is
seen. An error detection and message retransmission protocol assures accurate
communication.
The LCOM polls the machines continuously to detect any change in status and to
collect current meter information. All valid machine responses will be
acknowledged by the LCOM. The machines monitor the regular polling cycle of
the LCOM. If a malfunction occurs that causes a machine to stop receiving polls
to its address, or message acknowledgments from the LCOM, the machine will
automatically disable gameplay.
Games can be disabled under the following conditions:
• Disabled by receiving a global disable broadcasting poll from LCOM
• Disabled by receiving an initialisation poll from LCOM
• No polls are received for a period of 10 seconds
• Three consecutive messages are not acknowledged
• Event log full
The LCOM only polls the machines defined in the initialisation data sent by the
Central System. This feature prohibits any machine from being played on the
system until the regulatory authority and Central System have been notified.

20.6 ActivData II+

All gaming machines connected to the ActivData II+ Casino Monitoring System
must be fitted with an ORION Unit assembly supplied by M&B Electronics. The
ORION Unit consists of a communications interface board, a card reader, a 2-line
LCD display, and three call buttons.
Power is supplied through a “Plug Pack” power unit, which connects to the GPO
on the machine power supply unit.
The ORION Unit directly monitors the gaming machine top cover security switch
and the cash box security switch. The ORION Unit controls the operation of the
light tower (if fitted).
Staff Card
All staff required to work on the gaming machines are issued with Magnetic
Cards, encoded according to their access rights.
Player Card
A Player Card is used for the purposes of player tracking and rating.
Cashless Card
The cashless card is another form of player card. This card provides player
tracking and rating, as well as the ability to transfer cash from a centrally
controlled account.
ActivData II+ Communications

Table 20-14 Gaming Machine to ORION Unit Communications
ORION Connector Input/Output Description
Molex 4-pin KK to ORION
1 - RX Data Return
2 Input RX DATA+
3 - TX Data Return
4 Output TX DATA+
Table 20-15 ORION Unit to ActivData II+ communications cable

ORION Connector Input/Output Description External Connector
Molex 12-pin KK to ORION DB 15 Male
1 --------- 0 Volts 7
2 Output TX Data+ 6
3 Output TX Data- 8
4 Input RX Data+ 9
5 Input RX Data- 11
6 Input Address Input 0 12
12 Output Address Common 10
- --------- Cable Shield 1

20.7 Olympic Head Unit

The Olympic Head Unit is fitted inside the cabinet and provides the interface
between the gaming machine and the Olympic communications network. The
connections between the gaming machine and the Olympic Head Unit are shown
in the diagram below.
GAMING MACHINE
Olympic Head Unit
Olympic Network
RS485 Comms
12 V DC
P15 Generic Serial Channel 2
Interface Board
Power Supply
Assembly
Figure 20-8 Olympic Head Unit - Connections

MVP Video Service Manual Machine Fault Finding
________Chapter 21________
Machine Fault Finding

Equipment connected to Auxiliary power socket Replace auxiliary power socket
auxiliary power socket & fuse is blown. fuse.
has no power.
Machine has no power. A. Mains socket 1. Check that the mains socket is
supplying the machine live.
is not live. 2. If the mains socket is dead, check
that the circuit breaker at the
distribution board is on.
B. Main Board not 3. Turn off mains power for 5
showing 4 lit red LEDs seconds, then turn power on.
(ie, sequential 4. Check main board seating and
display). links. If condition continues,
replace the Main Board.
No power-up cycle. A. Coin jam in the Coin 1. Clear coin jam from the Coin
Chute Assembly. Chute Assembly.
B. Faulty hopper photo- 2. Check that the hopper photo-optic
optic detector. detector is not damaged or
disconnected. If the detector is
damaged, replace the detector.
C. Cable fault. 3. Check that the looms are
correctly seated and have
continuity.
E. Faulty Interface 4. If the looms are OK, replace the
Board. Interface Board.
F. Faulty Main Board. 5. If there is still no power, replace
the Main Board.

Machine Fault Finding MVP Video Service Manual
Table 21-1 Fault Finding (continued)

Fluorescent lamps, A. Faulty lamp or 1. If only one lamp is faulty,
animation lamp, and fluorescent driver. replace the fluorescent tube or
pushbutton lamps not lit. driver, the animation lamp, or
the pushbutton lamp or
microswitch.
B. Faulty power supply 2. Check that the power supply
assembly. assembly is operating correctly.
If not, replace the power supply
assembly.
C. Faulty loom between: 3. Check cables and looms and
• the fluorescent lamps ensure lamps are correctly
and the power supply seated.
assembly.
D. Faulty connection or 4. Check cables, looms, boards

loom between: and lamps are correctly seated
• the animation lamps / and have continuity.
pushbutton lamps and
Interface Board.
• the power supply
assembly and the
Interface Board.
• the Interface Board
and the Main Board.
• the Interface Board
and the Driver Board.
E. Faulty Main Board. 5. If there are still no lamps lit,
Video monitor blank. A. Faulty power supply 1. Check that mains power is
assembly. available at the power supply.
See Power Supply Assembly.
B. Faulty video monitor. 2. Check that the mains power
supply is available at the
monitor. If available, replace the
monitor.
C. Faulty loom between 3. Check that the looms are
the monitor and the correctly seated and have
power supply or continuity.
between the Main
Board and the monitor.
D. Faulty Main Board. 4. If the condition persists, replace
the Main Board.


Video monitor colour or A. Monitor settings 1. Carry out Basic Colours Test
picture incorrect. incorrect. from the Video Monitor Test
Menu in Operator Mode.
Work through the procedure for
adjusting and testing the video
monitor as detailed in the
chapter Video Monitor.
B. Faulty monitor. 2. If the condition persists, replace
the monitor.
YO-YO-YO-YO message A. Coin jammed in the 1. Remove jammed coin.
while machine not being coin
played. comparator/validator.
B. Faulty coin 2. Replace the coin
comparator/validator . comparator/validator .
C. Fault in the loom 3. Check that the loom is correctly
between the coin seated and has continuity.
comparator/validator
and the Interface
Board.
Sound too loud or too A. Volume control requires 1. Adjust the volume using Sound
soft. adjustment. System Setup in the Operator
Setup / Selections Menu.
2. If the condition persists, replace
the Interface Board.
3. If the condition still persists,


No sound. A. Volume control 1. Adjust the volume using Sound
requires adjustment. System Setup in the Operator
Setup / Selections Menu.
B. Speaker open circuit. 2. Remove the connectors from the
speaker terminals and check that
there is 6 to 8 Ω across the
speaker terminals. If not, replace
the speaker.
Reconnect the speaker terminals.
C. Faulty loom between 3. If there is no power at the
the Interface Board speaker, check that the looms are
and the speaker. correctly seated and are
physically sound.
D. Faulty Interface Board 4. If the looms are OK, replace the
Interface Board.
E. Faulty Main Board. 5. If the condition persists, replace
the Main Board.
Hopper does not rotate. A. Faulty loom between 1. Check that the loom is correctly
hopper and Interface seated and has continuity.
Board.
B. Faulty hopper motor. 2. If motor is not operating, replace
the hopper.
Hopper motor running A. Hopper disc is 1. Remove hopper, dismantle it and
slowly. binding. remove foreign matter.
B. Motor spindle bent. 2. Replace the hopper.
C. Faulty hopper motor 3. Replace the hopper motor
controller. controller.
COIN ACCEPTOR A. Faulty loom between: 1. Check that the looms are
FAULT, COIN OPTIC • the coin correctly seated and have
FAULT message. comparator/validator continuity.
and Interface Board
• the comparator
PCBA and the
sensor assembly.
B. Sample coin not 2. Check that the sample coin is
correct or not in correct and is located in the
correct position in correct position.
comparator sensor
assembly.
C. Coins jammed in coin 3. Remove coin jam.
comparator/validator.


Coins jamming at the top Coin jam at top of coin Rotate the disk backwards by
of the coin chute chute inserting fingers through gaps in
the casting and exerting finger
pressure.
Coin runner is loose or Place the coin runner point as
not in the correct close as possible to the disk and
position. tighten the securing nuts. Also
check if the shims are damaged.
Coins jamming in the Coin diverter Adjust the position of the diverter.
diverter window. jamming.
Coins continually A. Sample coin not in the 1. Check that the sample coin is
rejected. correct location in the located firmly between the
comparator sensor scanner unit and the fork of the
assembly. rail insert.
B. Faulty 2. Replace the comparator/validator
comparator/validator . .
ILLEGAL COIN OUT A. Dirty hopper photo- 1. Clean the hopper photo-optic
message on power-up. optic detector/emitter. detector/emitter.
B. Faulty hopper. 2. Run a hopper test (see Machine
Modes) to check that the hopper
motor stops when the correct
number of coins have been
ejected.
All coins are going to the A. Hopper probe shorted 1. Clear the short.
cash box and the hopper to ground.
is empty.
B. Faulty coin diverter 2. Run a coin chuting test (see
solenoid on the coin Machine Modes) to check that the
chute assembly. solenoid has power.
C. Coin diverter 3. Adjust the position of the coin
jamming. diverter.
Reject coins not falling Coins jammed in the Carefully clear the reject chute.
into the coin tray. reject chute.
Coins accepted by the A. Faulty loom between 1. Check that the loom is correctly
comparator/validator but the coin seated and has continuity.
not registered on the coin comparator/validator
counter and the machine and the Interface
locks out. Board.
B. Faulty coin 2. Replace the comparator/validator
comparator/validator . .
3 WAY METERING Corrupt data. Perform a memory reset (see
ERROR message. Inconsistent data Machine Modes).
across all three
electronic audit meter
sets.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Glossary
Glossary
ADH Aristocrat Disc Hopper.
APM Approved Poker Machine
Animation Lamps Lamps located in the top box for animation purposes.
Any pays Symbols are read anywhere on the payline, and not
necessarily left to right or right to left.
ARM250 Advanced RISC Machine - a type of integrated
microcontroller
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Audit key switch To display the electronic audit meters on the monitor, insert
the audit key and turn it 90° clockwise.
Audit meters See electronic and electro-mechanical meters.
Base A specially designed box unit on which the cabinet stands.
The cash box is usually located securely within the base.
BIPS Bar Interface Poker System, used in Cashless Transfer.
Book pay After the player presses the COLLECT button, the credits
are manually paid out to a player and recorded in the
payout book.
Button panel The series of buttons across the front of the cabinet which
the player uses to control game play.
Cabinet The major cabinet or casing in which the workings of the
machine are housed.
Cancel credit When a player attempts to COLLECT, a credit amount
greater than the amount that the Hopper can pay out, the
machine locks up. When this occurs, the Cancel Credit
procedure allows for the player to be paid manually and the
credit on the machine cancelled to zero.
Cash box The high security compartment used to hold any coins not
held in the hopper.
Clearance The value of coins removed from the cash box, usually
daily.
CMOS Channel metal oxide semi-conductor.
Coin comparator Device that compares a coin inserted by a player with a
sample coin of the correct denomination to determine if the
inserted coin is valid and acceptable for play.
Coin detectors See photo-optic detectors.
Coin jam When coins jam in the coin chute assembly chute.
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 4 G-1

Glossary MVP Video Service Manual
Coin selector See coin comparator.

Coin tray The tray at the bottom of the cabinet into which payout or
reject coins are deposited for collection.
Coin validator See coin comparator.
Collect cash To convert the amount shown on the CREDIT meter to
cash, the player presses the COLLECT button which
activates the hopper to pay the coins into the coin tray.
Console See base.
CPU Central processing unit.
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check.
Credit Coins inserted into the machine register as credits. One
coin may equal more than one credit. Prizes are shown as
credits until such time as the player chooses to collect
them.
D/A Digital to analog.
DACOM DAta COMmunications Network System
Degaussing Removing magnetic interference that causes colour
aberrations on monitor screen.
DES Data Encryption System
EGM Electronic Gaming Machine
EHM Electronic Hard Meters
Electromechanical The electromechanical meters or counters. These meters
meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the
machine.
Electronic meters The electronic audit meters that provide audit information.
EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory.
ESD Electrostatic discharge.
FEP Front End Processor (on DACOM).
FIP Fluorescent Interface Panel
FPLA Field programmable logic array.
GL5 Communications protocol for the note acceptor
Hard meters See electromechanical meters.
HCMOS High speed CMOS logic.
Hopper The electronically controlled unit which stores the coins
that are played and which pays out the exact number of
coins in a credit collect situation.
G-2 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 4

MVP Video Service Manual Glossary
House The club, casino or organisation running the games.

IC Integrated circuit
Illegal coin A coin which is incorrectly paid out by the hopper.
Intelligent bezel Sites the accept/reject slot for note placement on the note
acceptor fascia panel.
Installation A club, casino or other place which has a number of
gaming machines.
I/O Input/output.
Jackpot key switch To reset the machine after a cashier payout or after a
machine fault has been corrected, insert the J key, turn it
180° clockwise and back again.
LAB New South Wales Liquor Administration Board.
LED Light emitting diode.
Left to right pay Symbols are read from left to right for prize determination.
Links A series of machines are linked together by an external
progressive controller. Each machine contributes to a
common progressively incremented jackpot and is
displayed separately for the player to see.
Lockup A lockup renders the machine unplayable and is triggered
either by a malfunction, when a jackpot has been won (if
the program permits), or when the player has pressed the
CASH OUT pushbutton when there is more than the cancel
credit amount in credit.
Manual pay A book payment made for any amount in excess of the
cancel credit limit of the machine.
Max bet A button which automatically bets the maximum amount
possible on a game.
Meters Electronic (soft) meters and electro-mechanical meters
located within the machine that record and display
important audit information for the operator.
Microprocessor The computer component which controls and processes
game play instructions.
Multiline A game in which a player bets on additional lines to
multiply the chance of a prize.
Multiplier A game in which a player bets additional coins on any one
game to multiply the value of the prize.
Payline(s) The line or lines which indicate where the symbols must
line up for a player to win.
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 4 G-3

Glossary MVP Video Service Manual
Payout book Book used to record hopper refill amount, jackpot amount
and cancel credit amount.
PCBA Printed circuit board assembly.
Play button One of the illuminated buttons on the button panel, used in
game play.
PLD Programmable logic device.
Progressive jackpot This is an additional jackpot to the game's normal jackpot.
This jackpot increments by a fixed percentage of the
machine's turnover and is displayed separately for the
player to see.
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory.
Refill Money you add to a hopper by opening the door and
inserting coins, usually when the machine has run out of
coins.
Reserve A button on the machine which allows a player to indicate
to others that the machine is reserved. This reserve message
remains lit for 3 minutes.
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer.
Scattered pays Symbols can be above, below or on the payline to qualify
for a prize.
SEF Subsidiary equipment function.
SESI Subsidiary equipment serial interface.
Short time out The machine locks up when a coin jams across the hopper
photo-optic detector for more than 0.5 seconds.
Soft meters See electronic meters.
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SRAM Static Random Access Memory.
Symbols The various designs on the reel strips. Common symbols
include Jacks, Kings, Aces, Cherries, and Gold Bars.
Top box The box unit on top of the cabinet which carries the game
graphics, rules and score card.
VLC Video Lottery Corporation
Yo-Yo A coin travelling in reverse to its normal direction. For
example: a coin is dangled through and withdrawn from the
coin entry slot of the machine in an attempt to cheat the
machine of a coin during game play.
G-4 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 4

MVP Video Service Manual Appendix A
Appendix A
Games
MVP Games ....................................................................................................A-3
Spinning Reel games ...................................................................................A-3

Card Games .................................................................................................A-6
Keno/Bingo Games ......................................................................................A-6
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 A-1

Appendix A MVP Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure A-1 MVP Video Game Screen Example............................................................... A-4
Figure A-2 MVP Pay Table Example .............................................................................. A-5
A-2 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

MVP Games
Three families of games are available in Aristocrat MVP video gaming machines:
• Spinning reel games (video simulation),
• Blackjack,
• Keno/Bingo.
Spinning Reel games

The screen displays a simulation of the reels spinning, which, after a short time
'come to rest'. The resultant positions of the various symbols (refer to Fig A-1) is
assessed for a winning combination.
If the resultant combination is a winner (the winning combination(s) can be
checked, if the machine has a top box, with the pay table provided on the top box
artwork, if the machine has no top box, with the pay table provided on the belly
panel artwork. Figure A-2 shows an example of a pay table), the machine
responds by flashing the corresponding symbols and by emitting 'win' sounds. The
game software displays the amount of credits won on the screen, prompts the
player to gamble the win (if available), then adds them to the player's credit total.
This action may vary slightly depending on the software, customer and legal
requirements.
The gamble features can vary considerably between games, however, the concept
is the same. The player is given the opportunity to gamble the credits won for a
chance to double the total. This 'doubling up' may continue for up to five times (or
possibly more) consecutively.
If the combination is not a winner, the machine will end the game if no credits are
remaining or prompt the player to continue.

K Q
4 4
6 6
2 2
K
8 8
1 1
9 9
Q K
3 3
7 7
5 5
SCV018
Figure A-1 MVP Video Game Screen Example

Play up to 90 credits. Bet up to 10 credits per line.
Prince, K, Q, J, 10 & 9
1000 10000 3000 5000 2000

500 5000 1500 2500 1000
100 1000 300 500 200
10 100 30 50 20
2 20 6 10 4
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
100 1000 300 500 200
50 500 150 250 100
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
75 750 225 375 150
25 250 75 125 50
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
50 500 150 250 100
20 200 60 100 40
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
40 400 120 200 80
15 150 45 75 30
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
30 300 90 150 60
10 100 30 50 20
500
25
5
5000
250
50
* 1500
75
15
2500
125
25
1000
50
10
2 20 6 10 4
1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 14 15
Scattered 500
500
1000 1500 2500 3000 3500 4500 5000 7000 7500
25 50 75 125 150 175 225 250 350 375
Peacocks 255
52
10
4
15
6
25
10
30
12
35
14
45
18
50
20
70
28
75
30
pay any. 2
18 21 25 27 30 35 45 50 70 90
Scattered wins are multiplied by total number 9000 10500 12500 13500 15000 17500 22500 25000 35000 45000
of credits staked. 450 525 625 675 750 875 1125 1250 1750 2250
To change bet per line, press the bet button of 90 105 125 135 150 175 225 250 350 450
your choice. To start the game, press the 36 42 50 54 60 70 90 100 140 180
payline button of your choice.
GAMBLE BUTTON FLASHING: DOUBLE UP FEATURE APPEARS AFTER WIN. PRESS IF NOT REQUIRED.
GAMBLE BUTTON NOT FLASHING: AFTER WIN. PRESS GAMBLE BUTTON TO DOUBLE UP.
DOUBLE UP PRESS RED OR BLACK. EXTRA
FEATURE WIN IS DOUBLED IF YOUR CHOICE IS CORRECT. WINNINGS MAY BE GAMBLED UP TO 5 TIMES.
MAXIMUM WIN PER GAMBLE IS $10,OOO.
LINES
TOPBOX2
Figure A-2 MVP Pay Table Example

Card Games
The blackjack type games are derived from the game '21' or 'Pontoon'. The player
and dealer (machine) are dealt two cards from the pack.
The player decides whether to try and increase the sum of cards in his/her hand to
more than the dealers', but not exceeding 21.
If the player is successful in beating the dealers' hand, the machine will respond by
showing the credits won, 'win' graphics on screen and emitting the 'win' sounds.
The player may also have the opportunity to gamble the win as well.
If the combination is not a winner, the machine will end the game if no credits are
remaining or prompt the player to continue.
Keno/Bingo Games
The keno/bingo type games are based on the standard bingo game. The object of
the game is for the player to select a set of numbers (eg: 10 numbers) from those
available (eg: 80 numbers) and place a bet on these choices being also selected by
the gaming machine.
The screen will dispay a simulation of bingo cards with the player's selections
shown. As the game begins, the machine will display the random selections made
and will mark off any of the player's selections that correspond.
If the player is successful in matching his/her numbers with the gaming machine,
the machine will again respond with credits won, 'win' graphics and emitting the
'win' sounds.

MVP Video Service Manual Appendix B
Appendix B
B. Hyperlink Systems
B. 1 Overview ...................................................................................B-4
B.1.1 LPJS Concepts ..........................................................................B-4

B.1.2 General Principles ......................................................................B-4
B.1.3 Regulatory Requirements...........................................................B-8
B.1.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface .................................................B-8
B.2 Technical Description ..............................................................B-9
B.2.1 Physical Description ...................................................................B-9
B.3 Hyperlink Jackpot Controller ................................................B-13
B.3.1 Front Panel...............................................................................B-13

B.3.2 Back Panel ...............................................................................B-16
B.3.3 Internal Components................................................................B-18
B.3.4 Functional Description..............................................................B-21
B.3.5 Configuration EPROM Layout ..................................................B-23
B.3.6 Replacing a Faulty Controller Board ........................................B-25
B.3.7 Replacing the Firmware ...........................................................B-26
B.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface............................................B-27
B.5 Graphic Displays ....................................................................B-31
B.5.1 In Machine Displays .................................................................B-31
B.6 Link Configuration .................................................................B-36
B.6.1 Link Configuration Data Sheet .................................................B-36
B.7 Installation and Pre-start Checks .........................................B-37
B.8 Jackpot Controller Modes .....................................................B-38
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 B-1

Appendix B MVP Video Service Manual
B.8.1 Initial Power Up ........................................................................B-38

B.8.2 Power Up..................................................................................B-38
B.8.3 Normal Mode ............................................................................B-39
B.8.4 Jackpot Hit................................................................................B-39
B.8.5 Power Save ..............................................................................B-40
B.8.6 Audit Mode ...............................................................................B-40
B.8.7 Test Mode ................................................................................B-45
B.8.8 Reset ........................................................................................B-47
B.9 Error Conditions .................................................................... B-47
B.9.1 Memory Error............................................................................B-47

B.9.2 CRC Error.................................................................................B-48
B.9.3 Communication Failure.............................................................B-48
B.9.4 Security Cage Open .................................................................B-48
B.9.5 Meter Disconnect......................................................................B-49
B.9.6 Link Controller Power Save ......................................................B-49
B.9.7 Power Good Signal Fail............................................................B-49
B.9.8 Configuration Change...............................................................B-49
B.9.9 Manufacturer Specific Errors ....................................................B-50
B.9.10 Not All Machines Link Progressive ...........................................B-50
B.9.11 All Machines Not Configured with Same Jackpot Level ...........B-50
B.9.12 All Machines should have Same Probability of Winning...........B-50
B.9.13 Jackpot Value Error ..................................................................B-50
B.9.14 Increment Percentage Error .....................................................B-50
B.9.15 Credits Received Mismatch......................................................B-51
B.10 Hyperlink Statistics ............................................................... B-51
B.11 Hyperlink Reels Test ............................................................. B-51
B.12 Adding / Removing APMs ..................................................... B-52
B.13 Hyperlink Games ................................................................... B-53
B.13.1 Hyperlink Jackpot Feature Game .............................................B-53
B.14 Fault Finding .......................................................................... B-55
B-2 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

B.15 PalLinks ..................................................................................B-57
B.15.1 Overview ..................................................................................B-57

B.15.2 EPROM Production Checklist ..................................................B-57
B.15.3 Sites .........................................................................................B-57
B.15.4 Links.........................................................................................B-59
B.15.5 Slot Machines...........................................................................B-62
B.15.6 Generating an EPROM Configuration File ...............................B-66
B.15.7 Link Configuration Report.........................................................B-66
List of Figures
Figure B.1 Hyperlink - block diagram ..............................................................................B-7
Figure B.2 Hyperlink – Machine Wiring .........................................................................B-10
Figure B.3 Link Layout...................................................................................................B-11
Figure B.4 Last Machine in Bank – Option 1 .................................................................B-12
Figure B.5 Last Machine in Bank – Option 2 .................................................................B-12
Figure B.6 Jackpot Controller ........................................................................................B-13
Figure B.7 Jackpot Controller – Front Panel .................................................................B-14
Figure B.8 JPC Door – Top Cover security ...................................................................B-15
Figure B.9 Jackpot Controller – Back Panel..................................................................B-16
Figure B.10 Jackpot Controller – Back Panel Security Door .........................................B-17
Figure B.11 JPC – Top Cover removed ........................................................................B-19
Figure B.12 Jackpot Controller Board - layout...............................................................B-20
Figure B.13 Hyperlink SEI Board – component layout ..................................................B-28
Figure B.14 Graphic Display – wiring diagram ..............................................................B-32
Figure B.15 Hyperlink Display .......................................................................................B-33
Figure B.16 Hyperlink Graphic Display Assembly ..........................................................B-34
Figure B.17 Power Supply Unit......................................................................................B-35
Figure B.18 Link Configuration Report ..........................................................................B-36
Figure B.19 Site Information..........................................................................................B-57
Figure B.20 Link Configuration Information...................................................................B-59
Figure B.21 Slot Machines Information .........................................................................B-62
List of Tables
Table B.1 Status LEDs on SEI ......................................................................................B-28
Table B.2 P1 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422......................................................B-29
Table B.3 P5 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422......................................................B-29
Table B.4 P1SIM - from SEI ..........................................................................................B-29
Table B.5 JPCIN on SEI – RS485 .................................................................................B-30
Table B.6 JPCOUT on SEI – RS485.............................................................................B-30
Table B.7 Display on SEI – RS485................................................................................B-30
Table B.8 Power to ACDC on SEI .................................................................................B-30
Table B.9 Graphic Display Power Supply Specification ................................................B-35
Table B.10 Hyperlink Statistics......................................................................................B-51
Table B.11 Fault Finding ...............................................................................................B-55
Table B.12 Site Function Details ...................................................................................B-58
Table B.13 Basic Details Tab Screen............................................................................B-59
Table B.14 Percentages Tab Screen ............................................................................B-60
Table B.15 Cashless Details Tab Screen......................................................................B-60
Table B.16 Slot Machines Function...............................................................................B-63

B. 1 Overview
Hyperlink is a Linked Progressive Jackpot System (LPJS) that uses serial
communications and is designed for use with Aristocrat MVP gaming machines.
A LPJS is a network of Approved Poker Machines (APMs), connected to a
controller, where each APM contributes to a jackpot pool or pools that may be
won by any APM connected to the network.
B.1.1 LPJS Concepts

There are two fundamentally different types of LPJS:
• A STANDARD jackpot system, in which the jackpot winning APM generates
a specific winning combination, as indicated by the prize table on that
machine, and informs the controller that it has done so.
• A RANDOM jackpot system, in which the winning APM is the machine
whose turnover contribution to the controller causes the progressive jackpot
amount to coincide with a controller generated random value within the
programmed minimum and maximum jackpot values.
In the Hyperlink concept, the Hyperlink feature is triggered at random by the game
software during the play of a bought game. The chance of triggering the
Hyperlink feature is weighted to the bet made. The Hyperlink feature game then
behaves as a Standard jackpot system.
B.1.2 General Principles

For the same amount wagered, the probability of winning any one of the LPJS
levels must be the same for each connected APM and each APM must contribute
the same amount to the LPJS jackpot pool or pools.
In the event of a link failure or "false jackpot" the prize disbursement must take
place using approved methods that do not involve changing the displayed
progressive jackpot.
In the event of link decommissioning, the prize disbursement must take place
using approved methods.
If a jackpot is not reset, after it has been won, the controller must continue to
accumulate the turnover contributions from the connected APMs and no
subsequent jackpots are to be impeded.
A gaming machine connected to a link controller must have a sign clearly
indicating that in the event of Link Failure, play must be discontinued and that any
link prizes won after the "Progressive Link Failure" may not be paid.
All devices connected to the LPJS controller must themselves be approved. The
configuration of any LPJS must also be approved (i.e. the overall system and
APMs connected).

Number of Progressive Systems permitted

A maximum of two progressive systems (linked or standalone) may be connected
to the ports provided on the APM.
Maximum Prize Limit

The maximum progressive prize that can be won from any one play of a gaming
machine connected to a LPJS or systems is set at $100,000.
Link Contribution
Machines connected to a LPJS must contribute to the prize pool on every credit
that is wagered and causes the gaming machine turnover meter to be incremented.
The contribution must be directly proportional to the number of credits wagered.
Current Jackpot Value

The Current Jackpot Value is the "reset" value plus the accrued contributions
since the last jackpot reset (separate value for each level).
Incrementation takes place when a valid turnover contribution is received from
any of the APMs. After a jackpot win, the Current Jackpot Value is reset to the
reset value plus any "Hidden" Jackpot value, up to the maximum jackpot value for
that level.
Hidden Jackpot Value

The Hidden Jackpot Value (separate value for each level), is the value of a jackpot
accruing after the Current Jackpot reaches the prescribed limit, but unavailable to
the player until the Current Jackpot has been won, at which time all or a preset
portion of the Hidden Jackpot is transferred to the new Current Jackpot.
APMs
The Approved Poker Machines (APMs) connected to the Linked Progressive
Jackpot System (LPJS) will be standard MVP machines, fitted with Hyperlink
style games, which are linked electronically to a LPJS controller unit with all
connected APMs contributing a percentage of their turnover to the LPJS jackpot
pool or pools.
A maximum of two progressive systems (linked or standalone) may be connected
to the ports provided on the APM.
Hyperlink Games
“Hyperlink” is a new Linked Progressive Jackpot game concept designed and
patented by ARISTOCRAT. The Hyperlink system supports up to four separate
jackpot levels, which could be described as Grand (JP1), Major (JP2), Minor
(JP3), Mini (JP4). However, it is not necessary to support all four jackpot levels
as three or two jackpot levels are also feasible.
The system consists of a bank of Aristocrat MVP APMs, each equipped with a
“Hyperlink” game. The APMs are connected using serial communications, via a
Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) board, connected to the appropriate port and
using the LAB communications protocol to the input of the Jackpot Controller
(JPC).

Jackpot Win
Once an appropriate “Hyperlink” feature event triggers a specific jackpot, the
APM will lockup and signal the JPC that a jackpot has occurred. The JPC will
deal with the jackpot trigger in one of two ways, depending upon the level of the
Maximum CCCE Transfer limit set in the JPC EPROM.
In the higher level jackpots, above the Maximum Centralised Cash Control
Equipment (CCCE) Transfer limit (normally a Grand or Major jackpot), the
jackpot value will be announced, the APM will remain locked, and the normal
jackpot pay out procedure for the venue will be followed, including the specific
jackpot and APM being reset.
In the lower level jackpots, below the Maximum CCCE Transfer limit (normally a
Minor or Mini jackpot), the jackpot value will be announced but instead of the
APM locking up for a book pay, the amount of the jackpot will be directed by the
JPC to the APM winning the jackpot. This will be achieved by the JPC
addressing the winning APM’s SEI, communicating with the APM’s CCCE port,
and thereby downloading the value of the jackpot to the Credit meter of the
winning APM directly. For direct credit download, CCCE Transfer must be
enabled in the Audit Mode Machine Options screen of each APM connected to
the link. Once the full amount has been downloaded the jackpot is reset and the
APM resumes normal operation.
When a progressive jackpot is hit, the system will immediately move the Current
Jackpot value to the jackpot won value, promote the hidden jackpot value plus the
jackpot reset value, up to the jackpot maximum value for that level, to the current
jackpot value and commence appropriation of incoming turnover.
Figure B.1 shows the Hyperlink Controller, SEI, and APM connectivity.
Hyperlink Controller
The primary function of the Hyperlink Controller is to allow linked APMs to
participate in the Hyperlink LPJS concept. The controller supports up to 128
APMs, easily cascadable in a master slave situation on up to 4 jackpot levels. The
controller also supports the automatic transfer of certain jackpot amounts, which is
configured in the controller EPROM.
Floor Network
A serial RS 485 multi-drop physical network configuration is used, with RJ45
connectors and junction boxes for simplified connection to the APM and CAT5
cable.

EGM Progressive
Electronic Displays
Gaming (if required)
Machine
Port 1 Bi-Directional Port 5 or Port 6

LAB Comms - CCCE UNI-Directional
(RS422) LAB Comms
(RS422)
Port 1 Pass Through
(used where Bi-Directional Comms
are required by other systems
- otherwise looped back)
Subsidiary Equipment
Interface Board
Paltronics
Proprietary
Protocol
(RS485)
If required
Slot Management Linked Progressive

System
(e.g. Dacom) Jackpot Controller
Paltronics
Proprietary
Protocol
(RS485)
Jackpot Display 4
Jackpot Display 3
Overhead
Progressive
Jackpot Display 2 Displays
Jackpot Display 1
Figure B.1 Hyperlink - block diagram

B.1.3 Regulatory Requirements

The functionality and design of the Hyperlink controller is to a large extent
dictated by the requirements of the LAB New Technical Standards.
The single most important factor in the LAB regulations is the requirement for
each APM to communicate with any subsidiary equipment via the LAB
Communications Board via a series of six ports:
Port P1 is a unique, bi-directional port. P1 is to be used for CCCE (Centralised
Cash Control Equipment) – cashless – transactions only.
Ports P2 – P6 comprise of a separate, single uni-directional (output) port,
separately buffered, to five connectors labeled:
a) P2 - Data Gathering Port (Reserved)
b) P3 - Data Gathering Port
c) P4 - Promotional Equipment Port
d) P5 - Progressive Port 1
e) P6 - Progressive Port 2
A further LAB requirement is for the Hyperlink controller to provide for at least
three SEI (Subsidiary Equipment Interface) boards, with the necessary power
supply, connector, and space requirements.
B.1.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface

The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) board is an LAB required piece of
equipment used to communicate with the APM via the LAB Ports and Protocol
system. In the Hyperlink system, the SEI communicates with the APM for link
information via Port 5 or Port 6 and with the APM for cash transfers via Port 1.

B.2 Technical Description
B.2.1 Physical Description

The Hyperlink Link Progressive Jackpot System consists of the following
components:
• Jackpot Controller manufactured by Paltronics.
• Subsidiary Equipment Interface Board manufactured by Paltronics and fitted in
each APM connected to the network.
• Graphic Display unit and power supply, manufactured by Paltronics and fitted
in each APM connected to the network.
• CAT5 cabling and RJ45 connectors to provide the physical network.
• Overhead Display units manufactured by Paltronics
Machine Interconnection
Each Jackpot Controller has 4 ports, each of which can be connected to up to 32
APMs. Therefore, each JPC can have 128 linked APMs. The load is balanced
(set in EPROM) between the four ports. Up to 16 JPCs can be cascaded together,
allowing for a maximum of 2000 APMs to be linked to a single Hyperlink
network.
There are two options for machine interconnection (see Figure B.3):
Option 1
CAT5 cable and RJ45 connectors are used to physically connected the JPC
controller and APMs. Banks of APMs are daisy-chained together and
connected via a single cable to one of the four Machine Interface Ports at the
back of the JPC unit. This is accomplished through the use of a RJ45 3-way
adaptors. The use of these adaptors means that only one CAT5 cable needs to
lead to or from each APM, simplifying the connection and installation of
APMs.
The CAT5 cable leads from the RJ45 adaptor, through the cable entry hole at
the base of the cabinet, and connects to the JPCIN port on the SEI board, which
is located behind the monitor, against the back wall of the cabinet. The SEI is
housed in a metal cover and mounted onto the LAB PSU chassis.
A terminator board is fitted in the cabinet base of the last APM in each bank
(see Figure B.4). The cable from the previous machine is plugged into J1 on
this board, and J3 is then connected to the JPCIN port on the SEI board. The
JPCOUT port of the last machine in a bank is not used.

Option 2
If RJ45 adaptors are not used or if there is a requirement not to break the cable
outside of the APM, an alternative method for daisy-chaining the APMs is to
use the JPCOUT port on the SEI board to link to the next APM’s JPCIN port.
A terminator board is fitted in the last APM in each bank (see Figure B.5). The
cable from the previous machine is plugged into J1 on this board, and J3 is then
connected to the JPCIN port on the SEI board. The JPCOUT port of the last
machine in a bank is not used.
The JPC communicates with the SEI using the RS485 multi-drop connection
standard utilising 38.4 kbaud data transfer speed. The maximum permissible data
cable length between the JPC and the final machine in the link is 500 m, or
1000 m if a signal amplifier is used.
Hyperlink Hyperlink Display Top Box

Mains Input 5V
Power
Supply
RS485
RS485
Cabinet
P1 P1 JPCOUT
MkV Series II SEI Board RS485
Interface Board LAB JPCIN
Comms RS422 PSIM DISPLAY
Board P5
P5
AC-DC
12 V DC
Mystery
Jackpot LED
LAB Comms
Power Supply
12 V DC
24 V AC
EGM
240 V AC GPO Power
Supply
Normally not required, as RJ45 3-way adaptors are used.
Figure B.2 Hyperlink – Machine Wiring

Linked Progressive Jackpot Controller

Rear View - Back Panel Open
Machine Interface Ports

Group
1 2 3 4
Machine
Group 4
Machine
Group 3
Machine
Group 2
Next
Machine
Gaming Gaming Gaming Gaming Bank of

Machine Machine Machine Machine Machines
Next Bank of Machine Group 1

Gaming Machines (up to 32 machines)
Option 1 Option 2
Group 1 Group 2 Group 1 Group 2
CAT5 CAT5
RJ45 Connector RJ45 Connector
Cable Cable
Next
Machine
Next
Machine
RJ45 3-way
Adaptor
Next Bank of
Gaming Machines JPCIN JPCOUT JPCIN JPCOUT
Paltronics Paltronics
SEI Board SEI Board
Gaming Gaming
Machine Machine
Figure B.3 Link Layout

Next Last Machine

Machine in Bank
RJ45 3-way
Adaptor
JPCIN JPCOUT Terminator JPCIN JPCOUT

J1
Paltronics Board Paltronics
SEI Board J3
SEI Board
Gaming Gaming
Machine Machine
Cabinet Base Cabinet Base
Figure B.4 Last Machine in Bank – Option 1
Next Last Machine

Machine in Bank
Terminator
JPCIN JPCOUT Board J1 JPCIN JPCOUT
Paltronics Paltronics
SEI Board J3
SEI Board
Gaming Gaming
Machine Machine
Figure B.5 Last Machine in Bank – Option 2

B.3 Hyperlink Jackpot Controller

The Jackpot Controller consists of a Controller Board and power supply unit
housed within a secure metal box (security cage).
432 mm
Top Cover Back Panel Cover
330 mm
135 mm
TOTAL NO. HIT S NO. HITS NO. HITS NO. HITS TOTAL W ON TOTAL WON TOTAL WON TOTAL
TURNOVER LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVE
1 2 3 é ê
POW ER
4 5 6 AUDIT TES T
SAVE
7 8 9
JACKP OT
CO NTRO LLER
* 0 # SYS TEM
SECU RITY MEMOR Y METER MFG. MACHINE LOW P OWE R 1 POW ER 2

NORMAL P OWE R SAVE TES T MODE AUDIT MODEJACKPOT HIT CAGE OPENCO M F AILURE ERROR RE SET DISCO NNECT F UNCTIO N POW ER DO W N BATTERY CONFIGU RE ( 5VDC) ( 12V DC)
Screws for Top Cover

(8 off)
12 mm
Front
Keyed Plexiglas
Cam Lock Cover
Figure B.6 Jackpot Controller
B.3.1 Front Panel

The front panel of the JPC provides:
• On/Off Switch
• JPC Display
• Keypad
• Status Lights
• JPC Door - fitted with a security seal and a security switch
• Nine Mechanical Meters
• LAB Security Seal
• Compliance Plate
Access to the front panel of the JPC is restricted by a Plexiglas cover fitted with a
keyed lock.

Compliance Plate JPC Door Mechanical Meters
0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000

No of JACKPOT No of JACKPOT No of JACKPOT No of JACKPOT TOTAL VALUE OF TOTAL VALUE OF TOTAL VALUE OF TOTAL VALUE OF TOTAL
RESETS RESETS RESETS RESETS JACKPOTS WON JACKPOTS WON JACKPOTS WON JACKPOTS WON TURNOVER
LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 4 LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 LEVEL 1
1 2 3
POWER
JACKPOT CONTROLLER 4 5 6 AUDIT TEST
SAVE
IN
NORMAL MODE 7 8 9
ON / OFF
0
SECURITY MEMORY METER MFG. MACHINE LOW POWER 1 POWER 2
NORMAL POWER SAVE TEST MODE AUDIT MODE JACKPOT HIT CAGE OPEN COM FAILURE ERROR RESET DISCONNECT FUNCTION POWER DOWN BATTERY CONFIGURE (5VDC) (12VDC)
Status LEDs LCD Display Panel Keypad On / Off Button
Figure B.7 Jackpot Controller – Front Panel
On/Off Switch
Switches JPC power On and Off.
JPC Display
A four line, LCD display that provides status, metering and diagnostic information
for the LPJS.
Keypad
Used to access and navigate through the Audit, Test, and Power Save modes.
Push the appropriate button to enter a mode, and push the button a second time to
exit a mode and return to normal operation. Push the number buttons to select
menu options, the up and down arrows to step through screens, and Cancel to
return to the previous menu.
Status Lights
An array of 16 red LEDs at the bottom of the Front Panel provide information on
the status of the JPC.
The LED MFG. FUNCTION flashes to indicate the Controller Board CPU is
active and running.
The LOW BATTERY LED illuminates to indicate the battery on the Controller
Board is low and should be replaced. This battery provides power to the battery-
backed RAM on the Controller Board.
The POWER 1 and POWER 2 LEDs illuminate to indicate that the 5 V and 12 V
power lines on the Controller Board are active.
JPC Door
The JPC Door provides access to the firmware and configuration EPROMs, the
battery-backed and non-volatile RAMs, and the four function buttons without
having to remove the Top Cover. It also allows the four red LEDs on the
Controller Board to be viewed. These LEDs should be flashing sequentially to
indicate the Controller Board CPU is active and running.

The JPC Door is fitted with a LAB security seal that must be broken before the
door can be opened. This may only be done by a licensed technician with
approval from the LAB.
A mechanical security switch fitted to the underside of the Top Cover monitors
the opening of the JPC Door. This same security switch also monitors the
removal of the JPC Top Cover. When this switch is triggered, it is recorded as a
security cage access.
LAB Security Seal fitted

JPC Top Cover Seal/lock bracket on Top Cover through hole in
in open position seal/lock bracket
protrudes through the JPC Door
0000000
TOTAL
TURNOVER
Keyed Security
Cam Lock switch
Seal/lock
bracket JACK
Front NOR
Plexiglas Keyed
Cover Cam Lock
on JPC Door
SECURITY MEMORY
NORMAL POWER SAVE TEST MODE AUDIT MOD E JAC KPOT H IT CAGE OPEN COM FAILURE ER ROR
Hinge
Cross-section View Cut-away View
Figure B.8 JPC Door – Top Cover security
Mechanical Meters
Nine Mechanical Meters are mounted to the Front Panel. These meters are non-
resettable and cumulative for the life of the meter. They provide a permanent
record of:
• Total Turnover from all APMs connected from start up of the Link
• Number of Jackpot Hits Level 1
• Total Value of Jackpots Won Level 1
Note
On Initial Power Up, these meters may not be set to zero because
of factory tests. Record the initial meter values before Start Up.

Compliance Plate
A compliance plate is attached to the front panel of the JPC. The compliance
plate shows the following information:
• Serial Number
• Date of Manufacture
• Machine Type
• Dealer’s License Number
Compliance Plate Change

The compliance plate must remain with the JPC until it is de-licensed. At the time
of de-licensing, the plates must be disposed of in the manner specified by the
relevant jurisdictional authority. In the case of de-licensing followed by
"rebuilding", new compliance plates must be attached to the controller. Note that
"rebuilt" controllers are subject to evaluation and approval by the relevant
jurisdictional authority.
B.3.2 Back Panel

This panel is monitored as a security door, and can be sealed with an LAB seal.
The back panel of the JPC provides:
• Mains Cable entry and Mains fuse.
• Four Machine Interface Ports.
• Two Overhead Sign Ports.
• Two Master/Slave Ports, used for cascading JPCs.
• Security Switch.
• AUX Out Port
• Cable entry hole to provide for P1, P2, and P3.
Access to the back panel of the JPC is restricted by a metal cover fitted with a
keyed cam lock. A security switch is fitted to detect when the back cover is
opened.
Mains Cable
INPUT POWER
220-240 VAC 50 HZ
Seal/
Lock DISCLAIMER
Bracket ALL MALFUNCTIONS VOIDS PAYS
Security 2A READ INSTRUCTION MANUALS AND
FUSE DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE SERVICING
Switch
MACHINE INTERFACE
PORTS
P1 - P3 (32 AMPS PER GROUP) IN
Cable Entry GROUP 4 GROUP 3 GROUP 2 GROUP 1
MACHINE OVERHEAD MASTER/ MASTER/
SIGN SIGN SLAVE SLAVE
AUX. OUT
3 knockouts - 2 corners left attached
Figure B.9 Jackpot Controller – Back Panel

Mains Cable
LAB Security Seal
Keyed Cam Lock DISCLAIMER
Figure B.10 Jackpot Controller – Back Panel Security Door
Mains Cable entry and Mains fuse

The Mains cable is routed through the back panel of the JPC. Mains input is 220-
240 V AC @ 50 Hz. A replaceable 2 A Mains fuse is situated next to the Mains
cable entry.
Machine Interface Ports

Four 8-pin RJ45 connectors are provided for communication with the APMs. Up
to 32 machines can be serially connected to each port. These ports are labeled
Group 1, Group 2, Group 3, and Group 4.
Overhead Sign Ports

Two 6-pin RJ45 ports are provided for connection to Overheads Signs, which are
large graphic display units usually situated above banks of APMs or in some other
prominent position to attract players. These ports are labeled In-Machine Sign
and Overhead Sign. Each port can be serially connected to up to 32 Overhead
Signs.
Master / Slave Ports

Two Master/Slave 6-pin RJ45 ports are provided to enable JPC units to be serially
connected. Up to 16 JPC units can be connected together on the same link,
providing the capability of connecting up to 2000 APMs in a LPJS.
Security Switch
A mechanical security switch is fitted to the Back Panel to monitor access. The
switch is activated when the metal cover guarding the Back Panel is opened.
AUX Out Port

The AUX Port provides four opto-isolated triggers that can be used to activate
sounds, lights, or other effects in the event of a jackpot win.
Cable entry hole to provide for P1, P2, and P3

A cable entry hole is provided to allow for the connection of communication
cables to ports P1, P2, and P3 on the Controller Board. These ports are provided
for the connection of subsidiary equipment, such as Data Gathering or Monitoring
Systems. When not used, the hole is filled with a plastic plug.

B.3.3 Internal Components

The Top Cover of the JPC may be removed to gain access to the Controller Board
and other components located within the JPC security cage. When the Top Cover
is in place, a seal/lock bracket on the underside of the Top Cover protrudes
through a hole in the JPC Door. An LAB security seal is fitted to this bracket, on
the outside of the JPC Door (see Figure B.8). Before the Top Cover can be
removed, the LAB security seal must be broken. This may only be done by a
licensed technician with approval from the LAB.
Once the LAB security seal is removed, remove the Allen screws securing the
cover, then slide the cover back to disengage, and lift the cover from the unit.
The removal of the Top Cover triggers a security switch that is fitted to a bracket
on the underside of the cover. This same security switch also monitors the
opening of the JPC Door. When this switch is triggered, it is recorded as a
security cage access.
A plan view of the JPC unit with the Top Cover removed is shown below. The
Internal Components of the JPC include:
• Controller Board (Part No. PAL-0143, Order Code PAL XJPC-MB)
• Mains Transformer and Power Supply Circuitry – connected via two looms to
the Controller Board and the JPC On / Off Switch.
• Mechanical Meters – connected via a loom to METERS on the Controller
Board.
• Fan - connected via a loom to FAN on the Controller Board.
• LCD Display connected via a loom to DISPLAY on the Controller Board.
• Keypad connected via a loom to MEMBRANE on the Controller Board.
• On/Off Switch connected via a loom to the Power Supply unit.
• Top Cover Security Switch connected via a loom to SECSW1 on the Controller
Board.
• Back Panel Security Switch connected via a loom to SECSW2 on the
Controller Board.
• SEI boards – optional – mounted on standoffs above the Controller Board.

Security Switch
Power Supply Transformer and circuitry Port 1

housed in metal cover and mounted to back panel
Port 2
Port 3
Fan
RAM 1
Non-volatile
RAM 2
Non-volatile
DIP SW1
ODD
Firmware
EVEN
Firmware
EPROM
Configuration
-backed RAM
Battery
Mechanical Meters
LCD Display Keypad
On / Off
Switch
Figure B.11 JPC – Top Cover removed

Jackpot Controller Board
Fan
PAL-0143-REV-4.0
Meters
Membrane
SECSW 1-2
Power
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Display
Non-volatile Battery
RAM 2 -backed RAM
Non-volatile Configuration
RAM 1 EPROM
CPU
Function Buttons
Firmware
ODD
Firmware
EVEN
Micro Reset DIP SW1
Shaded components not fitted on depopulated board for NSW
Figure B.12 Jackpot Controller Board - layout

B.3.4 Functional Description

The Main Board of the Jackpot Controller is a six layer circuit board comprising
of the main processor, three separate peripheral buses and a memory bus. The
major features of the hardware are described below.
CPU
A Hitachi SH2 processor is used, running at 35 Mhz. The internal RAM on the
CPU is only used for vector offsets and initialization. The CPU is connected
directly to the RAM for variable storage on a local 35 Mhz bus.
Program EPROMs
All software is run directly from EPROMs in sockets U12 (Even) and U13 (Odd).
Configuration EPROM
The Jackpot Controller takes its configuration from the “Config EPROM”. A
special piece of Windows software called PalLinks is used to program the
Configuration EPROM.
Without a correctly configured EPROM in the Config EPROM socket, the Jackpot
Controller will not operate. The Config EPROM is in socket U17.
Battery Backed Memory

A 3.6 V high-capacity battery is used to backup the memory in socket U14, the
voltage of the battery is monitored and in case of failure or a flat battery, an
appropriate alarm and message is raised. Two further nonvolatile RAMs, U15 and
U18, are also used to backup critical memory. With a total of three memory
backup devices, it is almost impossible to have a total memory failure. At each
Power Up, all three memories are checked and in the event of a memory failure
the appropriate messages will be displayed.
CAUTION
A lithium battery can potentially explode if reverse charged.

Function Buttons
Four function buttons are located on the Controller Board (see Figure B.12).
These buttons can be accessed when the JPC door is open and have the following
functions:
FUNCT1 Used to reset memory on initial power up and after a memory
error. Also used to restore memory from backup after a
firmware change.
FUNCT2 Used to restore memory from backup after a memory error.
SYSCONFIG Used to reset the link configuration after a configuration
change.
MEMRST Used to reset memory after a firmware change.
The JPC display will usually prompt the operator to press the appropriate button.
Micro Reset
This button (see Figure B.12) is used to reset the controller after a software
"hang". In practice, a software hang can usually be recovered from by turning the
JPC power off then back on.
Electromechanical Meters
The Jackpot Controller is able to drive nine electromechanical (hard) meters. A
meter disconnect circuit is monitored continuously to detect the meter board being
disconnected. Each individual meter is also monitored to ensure that there has not
been a failure in the meter itself.
Security Environment.
The Jackpot Controller provides a security cage in which all the electronics are
contained; this area requires a key to be accessed. Three monitored switches
provide the physical security environment, although only two are currently used.
The switches are monitored even while there is no power to the Controller,
ensuring a high degree of security.
LAB Ports
Three serial ports (P1, P2, and P3) are provided on the Controller Board to output
the required protocol for NSW Jackpot Controllers. Also, three 0.5 A 12-volt
power connectors are on the Controller Board with separate fuses to provide
power for Subsidiary Equipment Interfaces that may be mounted inside the
Jackpot Controller.
Ports P1, P2, and P3

Three 10-pin Amphenol headers are provided on the Controller Board for the
connection of subsidiary equipment, such as Data Gathering or Monitoring
Systems. These ports are only capable of outputting information, as it is an LAB
requirement that no external signals can be input to the JPC other than information
collected from approved APMs.

In general terms, the Controller Board will output the “Progressive Data Block 1
and 2” and “Configuration Data Blocks” whenever certain events occur. The
Controller Board may also output a “Manufacturer Data Block”
These output signals pass from the communication port P1, P2, or P3 on the
Controller Board, via an SEI mounted internally within the JPC, through a cable
hole at the rear of the JPC, and on to the subsidiary equipment.
The ports are electrically independent from each other to prevent interference.
This is achieved by the use of separate “line drivers” for each port.
SEI Boards
Up to three SEI boards may be mounted on standoffs above the Controller Board
Network Ports
Four high-speed serial ports are used to communicate with the slot machines on
the Jackpot Link. Each port is capable of communicating with 32 machines at
38.4 kbaud. A proprietary protocol is used to communicate with Slot Machine
Jackpot Controller interface card. The maximum number of machines that each
controller can handle is 128. Multiple controllers can link together to form a
Jackpot Link to a maximum of 2000 APMs.
Overhead Sign Ports

Two serial ports are provided on the Controller for Overhead Signs. Each port is
capable of taking 32 signs giving a total of 64 Overhead Signs per Jackpot
Controller.
Linking Jackpot Controllers

A single high-speed serial port allows up to 16 controllers to link together to form
a link of up to 2000 machines.
Accounting and Ethernet Ports

Provision is made on the main circuit board for Accounting and Ethernet ports.
These are not populated in the NSW version of the Jackpot Controller.
LCD and Keypad

The controller has a four-line by 20 character LCD screen and keypad for the
displaying of critical messages, data, and configuration of the Link.
B.3.5 Configuration EPROM Layout

The Jackpot Controller has a dedicated 64 K, 8 bit EPROM installed for the link
configuration information. The information stored in this EPROM is generated by
the Link Configuration software, PalLinks. All information is stored as ASCII so
that the EPROM can be easily verified without the use of any special software.
The layout of the information is as follows:-

Identification Data Block

The identification data block must be present in both firmware EPROMs and the
configuration EPROM.
Type Identification_Block
• IB_Manufact_code Char(2); ASCII provided by LAB
• IB_Data_Block_Ver Char(4); ASCII
• IB_Firmware_ID Char(8); ASCII
• IB_Reserved Char(18); Filled with Chr$(0);
End Type.
The Identification Data Block appears in the last 32 bytes of each EPROM.
Link Data Block

The Link Progressive Data Block is a single block of data for each controller that
describes the approved link that will operate. The Link Data Block will contain
the setup and other information for both Standard Progressive and Random
Mystery link configurations.
Type Link_Block
• LB_Gmid Char(6); ASCII provided by LAB
• LB_Num_Links Char(1); 1,2,3 or 4
• LB_Inc_Link_1 Char(8); Format #.###### 1.25% = 0.012500
• LB_Max_Link_1 Char(6); Format ######
• LB_Min_Link_1 Char(6); Format ######
• LB_Link_Type Char(1); P for Progressive, M for Mystery.
• LB_Theory_Rtn Char(4); Format ##.##
• LB_Num_Machines Char(4); Number of Machines on Link
• LB_Autopay_max Char(5); Maximum Autopay amount
• LB_Autopay_Level_1 Byte Y for yes, N for No
• LB_Reserve Char(39); Filled with Chr$(0)
End Type
Machine Data Block
The Machine Data Block describes each machine connected to the link. Space Id
provided in the EPROM for 2000 machines to be defined. If any of the Machine
Data Blocks contain chr$(0) in the GMID, then it can be assumed you have
reached the end of the connected machine list.

Type Machine_Block
• MB_Gmid Char(6); LAB Issued Machine
GMID
• MB_Base_Credit Char(5); Denom of play in cents
• MB_House_Number Char(6); Casino Machine Number
• MB_Bank_Number Char(4); Casino Bank Number
• MB_JPC_Number Char(1); JPC number, 0 to F
• MB_Port_Number Char(1); 1,2,3 or 4
• MB_Reserved Char(9); Filled with Chr$(0);
End Type.
Configuration EPROM Layout
0000 to 007F Link Data Block 128 Bytes
0080 to FA7F 2000 Machine Data Blocks 64000 Bytes
FA80 to FFDF Reserved 1376 Bytes
FFE0 to FFFF Identification Block 32 Bytes
B.3.6 Replacing a Faulty Controller Board
Note
All link configuration information, metering information, and Jackpot values
should be recorded before replacing the Controller Board.
1. Switch off the JPC and unplug it from the Mains power supply.
2. Open the Back Panel cover and disconnect all cables from the Back Panel.
3. Remove the screws securing the Top Cover, slide the cover back to
disengage, and remove the Top Cover.
4. Remove the faulty Controller Board and insert the new Controller Board.
Replace the chips Non-Volatile RAM 1, Non-Volatile RAM 2, and
Configuration EPROM on the new Controller Board with those from the
faulty Controller Board.
5. Replace the Top Cover and secure with the four Hex screws.
6. Reconnect cables on the Back Panel and close the Back Panel cover.
7. Reconnect Mains power and turn the JPC on. The JPC will run through the
normal start-up checks. Provided no error conditions are detected, the JPC
will enter Normal Mode upon detecting the first valid turnover contribution
from an APM.
8. Check the configuration information, metering information, and Jackpot
values match those recorded before the Controller Board was replaced.
9. If the metering information does not match the recorded values, the meters
must be reset. To do this, open the JPC Door and hold down the FUNCT1
button on the Controller Board while switching the JPC on. Press ENTER
to fully reset all metering information.

B.3.7 Replacing the Firmware
Note
All metering information and Jackpot values should be recorded before
replacing the Firmware.
1. Switch the JPC power off and open the JPC door.
2. Remove both Firmware EPROMs and replace with the new EPROMs.
3. Switch the JPC power on.
4. The JPC will display the message “MEMORY ERROR - MEMRST TO
RESET MEMORY”.
5. Press the MEMRST function button on the Controller Board.
6. The JPC will enter Power Up Mode, and then give the option of either
pressing MEMRST to clear the memory or pressing FUNCT1 to restore the
memory from backup.
7. Press the appropriate button and close the JPC door.

B.4 Subsidiary Equipment Interface

The Hyperlink Subsidiary Equipment Interface Board (ALI Part No. 568200,
Paltronics Part No. PAL 145-2.43, Order Code PAL XINT_CCCE) provides the
communications interface between the LAB Board and the Jackpot Controller.
The board converts the RS485 signals used to communicate with the JPC to
RS422 signals to communicate with the LAB Comms Board. It is also used to
communicate with the Hyperlink Graphic Display located in the top box of the
APM.
Connectors
The 10-pin Amphenol 816 type header P1 provides bi-directional RS422
communications with the port P1 on the LAB Board. P1 is to be used for CCCE
(Centralised Cash Control Equipment) – cashless transactions only.
The 10-pin Amphenol 816 type header P5 receives uni-directional RS422 input
from P5 on the LAB Board.
The 10-pin Amphenol 816 type header P1SIM provides bi-directional RS422
communications with the port P1 on the LAB Board. P1SIM is provided for
additional systems that may require the P1 port, e.g. DACOM. When not used, a
connector is used to loop-back Power Good signals through the SEF (Subsidiary
Equipment Functional) pins to tell the LAB Board that equipment is functioning
normally. If the loop-back connector is disconnected, play will be suspended on
the APM and the Graphic Display will show”P1 SIM – SEF”.
The 8-pin RJ45 type connector JPCIN provides RS485 communications with the
JPC.
The 8-pin RJ45 type connector JPCOUT allows the JPC signals to be serially
connected to the next APM. This port is connected to the JPCIN port on the SEI
board in the next APM. Where possible, it is preferable to use RJ45 3-way
adaptors to achieve the serial connection between APMs, in which case, the
JPCOUT port is not used.
The 6-pin RJ45 type connector DISPLAY provides RS485 communicates with the
Graphic Display
The SEI also receives 12 V DC (or AC) @ 0.5 A power from the LAB Comms
Power Supply via the 3-pin Molex connector ACDC.
The SEI is housed in a metal cover and mounted on the LAB PSU Chassis, which
is located against the back wall of the cabinet, behind the monitor assembly. The
cover is held in place with a screw and fitted with a security seal.
An assembly drawing of the Hyperlink SEI is shown below.

U5
CH GND
GND
SUPERCAP
CXT1B
XT1
JPCOUT
R5
R29
R37
R31
R34
CU5 CU19
R8
D1
TXD1
R27
OSC1
R7 R6
( )
R30
R50
U19
R55
RXD1
OC1
( )
+
CXT1A
R54
TXJPC
R38
R28
R51
R52
R53
R56
CU1 ( )
1 R57
R35 R36 DS2
R40
CU17
FB1
FLASH
JPCIN ( )
IDNUM
U17
R39
U16
8
CU16
EPROM
OC3
CU7 CU20
FB2 FB4
( )
CU15
OSC2
U7
FB3 RXP1
R42 R33 RXJPC Status
U15 R26
LEDs
1
R41 U1 R1 ( )
CU18
R72 R23 R25 D2
U14
C1
R71
R9
R2
CU4
6
R77
R21
R24 ( )
R10
R44
R45
1 U8 CU8 C6 RXSIM
R32
7 U20
R20
R19
( )
CU13
CU14 L1
CU2
JPNOISO1 TXSIM
1
U13 U10
JPNOISO2
R22
DISPLAY ( )
R46
D10
RXP5
R69
U4
R43
C4
U2
U9
( )
R70 Q1
R48 VR2 9 R13 ISO+5

R11
R49 ( )
R4 R3
R47 R68
R12
+5
CU10
C5
11
R73 R14 U6
SUP2 D8 D7
CU9
Z1
Expansion Port
C3
D9
U12
C7
EXPAND
+
20-pin
R17
ACDC
C2
R16
D11 + VR1
D4
CU11
CU12
R18 U3
10 1
RN1
PSIM
SUP1
U11
CU3
CU6
R15
CH GND
D5 D3 D6
1
P5
20
9 1 9 1 9 1
GND
P1
10 2 10 2 10 2
Figure B.13 Hyperlink SEI Board – component layout
Status LEDs
There are eleven status LEDs located on one side of the SEI board. The LEDs
illuminate to indicate that the SEI is either receiving or transmitting signals.
The status indicators assist in machine diagnostics and fault finding. The table
below explains the function of each of the status LEDs.
Table B.1 Status LEDs on SEI

LED Function
TXD1 Yellow LED. Illuminates when DISPLAY on the SEI is sending data to the
graphic display located in the top box.
RXD1 Yellow LED. Illuminates when DISPLAY on the SEI is receiving data from the
graphic display.
TXJPC Green LED. Tx to JPC. Illuminates when JPCIN on the SEI is sending data to
the JPC.
DS2 Red LED. Illuminates to indicate the CPU on the SEI is active. Should be
flashing at all times when the board is powered.
RXP1 Red LED. Illuminates when P1 on the SEI is receiving data from the LAB Board.
RXJPC Green LED. Rx from JPC. Illuminates when JPCIN on the SEI is receiving data
from the JPC.
RXSIM Red LED. Illuminates when P1SIM is receiving data.
TXSIM Red LED. Illuminates when P1SIM is sending data.
RXP5 Red LED. Illuminates when P5 on the SEI is receiving data from the LAB Board.
ISO+5 Yellow LED. Illuminates to indicate the isolated 5 V line is active.
+5 Green LED. Illuminates to indicate the 5 V line is active.

Pinouts
The input / outputs signals for the SEI Board are detailed in the following tables.
Table B.2 P1 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422

The connector is a 10-pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type header.
1 -------------- Not Connected
2 Rx Data Receive Data From LAB Comms Board
4 Tx Data Transmit Data To LAB Comms Board
5 Tx Data Transmit Data To LAB Comms Board
6 Power Good APM Power is Normal From LAB Comms Board
8 SEF Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
10 -------------- Not Connected
Table B.3 P5 - SEI to LAB Comms Board – RS422

10 -------------- Not Connected
Table B.4 P1SIM - from SEI

2 Tx Data SIM Transmit Data To LAB Comms Board
3 Tx Data SIM Transmit Data To LAB Comms Board
4 Rx Data SIM Receive Data From LAB Comms Board
5 Rx Data SIM Receive Data From LAB Comms Board
6 Power Good SIM APM Power is Normal From LAB Comms Board
7 Power Good SIM APM Power is Normal From LAB Comms Board
8 SEF SIM Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
9 SEF SIM Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
10 -------------- Not Connected

Table B.5 JPCIN on SEI – RS485

The connector is a 8-pin RJ45 type header.
1 Tx Data Transmit Data
3 Rx Data Receive Data
4 ---- Not used
5 ---- Not used
7 Ground
8 Ground
Table B.6 JPCOUT on SEI – RS485

4 ---- Not used
5 ---- Not used
7 Ground
8 Ground
Table B.7 Display on SEI – RS485

1 Rx Data Receive Data From Graphic Display
2 Rx Data Receive Data From Graphic Display
3 ---- Not used
4 ---- Not used
5 Tx Data Transmit Data To Graphic Display
6 Tx Data Transmit Data To Graphic Display
Table B.8 Power to ACDC on SEI

The connector is a 3-pin Molex type.
1 12 V AC Power 12 V power from LAB Power
2 12 V AC / DC Power Supply Unit.
3 Gnd. Ground

B.5 Graphic Displays

There are two types of Graphic Displays used with the Hyperlink LPJS:
• In-Machine Displays located in the top box of each APM connected to the link.
These displays are driven by the JPC via the SEI Board mounted within the
APM and provide animations and jackpot information, and as well as status
and diagnostic information relating to the individual APM.
• Overhead Displays that are mounted outside of the APM. These are larger
displays usually located above banks of machines or in some other prominent
position to attract players. These displays provide animations and jackpot
totals. In addition, when a jackpot is hit, the Overhead Display will show the
amount of the jackpot won and the Gaming Machine Identification number of
the winning APM.
B.5.1 In Machine Displays

The In-Machine displays consist of a display assembly and a power supply unit.
The part number for the 5x11 display is PAL 32 / 11-5.
Display Assembly
The display assembly consists of a three-colour LED display tablet, a display
controller board, and a power supply unit. The display tablet and controller board
are housed in a metal case fitted with a wire mesh front cover. A cover plate on
the back of the case allows easy access to the controller board. The power supply
unit is mounted to the back cover plate. The dimensions of the case are 467.44 x
167 x 51.05 mm. The assembly is mounted on brackets at the front of the Top
Box, behind the artwork panel.
The 5x11 display tablet is made up of five 1x11 modules with the part number
PAL 32 - 11. The individual modules can be replaced if faulty. The display tablet
has a resolution of 40 x 88 and a display area of 434.8 mm x 160 mm.
The part number for the display controller board is PAL 104-ALI. A cable
connects the RJ45 port labelled DISPLAY on the SEI to the RJ45 port labelled
RS485 on the display controller board, via a port on the back of the display box, to
provide RS485 communications with the JPC. The display controller board also
receives 5 V power at the connector labelled PWR.
The display controller board utilises a button-cell type lithium battery. This must
only be replaced by the manufacturer’s recommended type
CAUTION
A lithium battery can potentially explode if reverse charged.

A 16-way loom connects from the connector labeled 1 on the controller board to
the 16-pin connector labeled IN on the top row of the display tablet. Looms
connect the OUT connector on each module to the IN connector of the module
below (see Figure B.15).
The following drawings show a block diagram of the display, the display panel,
and the display assembly.
Display TOP BOX

Case
IN +5V (Red)
-5V (Black)
+5V (Red)
Display
Tablet Mounted to back
of Display Case
Power Supply
RS485 for Display
Display PWR
Controller +5V (Red) Terminal +5V (Red)

1 -5V (Black) -5V (Black)
Block
240 V AC
Hyperlink CABINET EGM GPO

SEI Power
RS485 DISPLAY Supply
Figure B.14 Graphic Display – wiring diagram

Data Cable from Mounting Holes - 4 per module

Controller Board Incandescent Bulbs - 2 per module
160 mm
DISPLAY
AREA
-5V (Black)
Power from Display +5V (Red) Data Cable from
Power Supply Unit -5V (Black)
Controller Board
PAL 32-11 IN
OUT 16-way loom
OUT PAL 32-11 IN 16-pin

16-way loom
connectors
OUT IN
16-way loom PAL 32-11
OUT IN
16-way loom PAL 32-11
PAL 32-11 IN
PAL 32 - 5x11
434.8 mm
Figure B.15 Hyperlink Display

Top Box
Door
Top Box
Artwork Panel
with blank area for
Hyperlink Display
Hyperlink Display
mounted to sides
of top box, between the
door and the reflector panel.
Reflector
Panel
Metal Box
Power Supply Unit
Mounting
Holes
Display Tablet
Mounting
Mounting Brackets Holes
screwed to sides
of Top Box
Figure B.16 Hyperlink Graphic Display Assembly
Power Supply
The Power Supply for the In-Machine Graphic Display is a model SP-300-5
supplied by Paltronics. It is mounted to the cover plate on the back of the display
case (see Figure B.17). The Power Supply receives Main Input from the GPO on
the APM Power Supply Unit located at the base of the cabinet. Mains input is via
a standard IEC socket. A metal cover is fitted over the Mains wiring.
The power supply unit supplies +5 V and –5 V to a terminal block located inside
the back cover on the display case. From the terminal block, the +5 V and –5 V
are distributed to the display modules and the controller board, as shown in Figure
B.14.

The specifications of the Power Supply are shown in the following table.
Table B.9 Graphic Display Power Supply Specification

Type 300 W Single Output Switching Power Supply
Model No. SP-300-5
Features Built-in PFC circuit (0.99)
High efficiency, high reliability
100% full load burn-in test
Cooling fan on/off automatically
Short circuit / overload / overvoltage / over temperature protected
Universal AC input / full range
Approvals: UL / TUV / CE / ISO-9001
Input Voltage 88 V AC~264 V AC universal input
Input Current / 4 A / 115 V, 2 A / 230 V; 47-63 Hz
Frequency
Inrush Current 15 A /115 V, 30 A / 230 V
DC Output Voltage 5 V @ 50 A, Tol: ±2%, R&N: 150 mV, Eff: 77%, P.P.: 220
DC Output Power 250 W
DC Voltage Adj. 4.5 V – 5.7 V
Overload Protection 105%~135% output pulsing mode
Overvoltage Protection 115%~145% of output
Setup, Rise, Hold Up 1.5 s, 50 ms, 20 ms / 230 V AC
Time
Withstand Voltage I/P-O/P:3 kV, I/P-FG:1.5 kV, 1 minute
Working Temp 0-40C @ 100%, -10 C @ 80%, 50C @ 50%
Safety Standards UL 1012, TUV EN60950
EMC Standards (EN55022), IEC1000-4-2~6,8,11, IEC1000-3-2
Connection 9P / 9.5 mm pitch terminal block
Dimensions 230 mm x 115 mm x 50 mm
Weight 1.2 kg
Power
Supply
Unit
Green
LED MW
Mean Well
SP-300-5
DC OUTPUT 5V 50A
AC Input 100-240VAC/4A
50/60 Hz
+V ADJ
+ +5V -5V N L
Mains Fuse
(in plug)
Data Cables from

Hyperlink SEI Mains Input
(from base
of EGM)
Figure B.17 Power Supply Unit

B.6 Link Configuration

The link configuration is programmed into the configuration EPROM using a
software application called PalLinks (see section B.15). The configuration
determines the APMs that may be connected to the link and the jackpot levels for
the link. The configuration EPROM may only be programmed by Aristocrat.
B.6.1 Link Configuration Data Sheet

The Link Configuration Data Sheet contains information on the configuration of
the Hyperlink. It shows the percentage contribution, start value, maximum value,
and whether or not CCCE transfers are allowed for each jackpot level. It also
shows the Gaming Machine Identification (GMID) number and the corresponding
Base Credit value, House number, Controller number, Port number, and Network
number for each gaming machine.
A sample Link Configuration Report is shown below:
Link Configuration Report

3/05/99
Link Name ALI Test Link Site Name Aristocrat
Link GMID 102010 Site Lic. No. 10201
Number of Levels 4 Type of Link: Progressive Link Number of Machines on Link: 63

Maximum CCCE Transfer $1,000
Increment % Start Out Max Value Allow CCCE Payment of Jackpot

Level1 2.00 $1,000 $10,000 No
Level2 1.50 $500 $5,000 No
Level 3 1.00 $400 $1,000 Yes
Level 4 0.50 $100 $500 Yes
Bank Number Bank 1

GMID Base Credit House Number Controller Port Number Network Number
10017 5 Cents 1 0 Group 1 1
10018 5 Cents 2 0 Group 1 2
10019 10 Cents 3 0 Group 1 3
10032 5 Cents 4 0 Group 1 4
10033 10 Cents 5 0 Group 1 5
10035 5 Cents 6 0 Group 1 6
Bank Number Bank 2
GMID Base Credit House Number Controller Port Number Network Number
10036 5 Cents 7 0 Group 2 1
10040 1 Cent 8 0 Group 2 2
10041 1 Cent 9 0 Group 2 3
10042 5 Cents 10 0 Group 2 4
Bank Number Bank 3
etc...
Bank Number Bank 4
etc...
Figure B.18 Link Configuration Report

B.7 Installation and Pre-start Checks

On installation of the Hyperlink LPJS, the following steps should be taken:
1. Check that CCCE Transfer is enabled in the Audit Mode Machine
Options screen of each APM connected to the link.
2. Ensure that the APM layout, configuration, and link connections match the
information contained in the Link Configuration Report.
3. Check the following cable connections:
♦ Mains cable to all JPC units.
WARNING
SINCE THE MAIN POWER SWITCH IS NOT
ACCESSIBLE BECAUSE OF THE LOCK ON THE
FRONT PANEL, THE SOCKET OUTLET FOR
THE MAINS CONNECTION MUST BE IN CLOSE
PROXIMITY TO THE JPC AND SHALL BE
EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
♦ All cabling, connectors, and adaptors from the JPCs to APMs and
Overhead Displays.
♦ For each APM, check:
• RJ45 connector to JPCIN on SEI board.
• Loom from P1 on SEI board to P1 on LAB Comms Board.
• Loom from P5 on SEI board to P5 on LAB Comms Board.
• Loop-back connector in PSIM on SEI, or other loom connected to PSIM as
required.
• Loom from LAB Comms Power Supply Unit to ACDC on SEI.
• Loom from DISPLAY on SEI board to Graphic Display in Top Box.
• Mains cable from APM GPO at base of cabinet to Graphic Display power
supply unit in Top Box.
• Loom from Graphic Display power supply unit to Graphic Display Controller
Board.
♦ For each Overhead Display, check:
• Mains cable to power supply unit.
• CAT5 cable from JPC
4. Turn on the JPC and observe any error messages.
5. Reset the meters. Follow the Initial Power Up procedure outlined in
Controller Modes below.
6. Run Test Mode and compare the information on the APM graphic displays
with that contained in the Link Configuration Report.

B.8 Jackpot Controller Modes

B.8.1 Initial Power Up
Note
Only required on first installation of JPC.
On initial Power Up, it is necessary to clear any metering information that may
have accumulated during testing. To do this, open the JPC Door and hold down
the FUNCT1 button on the Controller Board while switching the JPC on. The
JPC display will show:
POWER UP MODE
fully reset RAM
ENTER to confirm
CANCEL to resign
Press ENTER to fully reset all metering information. Press CANCEL to preserve
the existing metering information and enter the normal Power Up Mode as
described below.
B.8.2 Power Up
Refers to the condition where the JPC is powered up from a condition where all
power was removed from the JPC.
The complete state of the link is saved when a Power Down is detected and is
restored when the JPC is Powered Up.
The JPC displays the words POWER UP MODE and runs a series of tests to
check the integrity of the Firmware, EPROMs, SRAM, batteries, communications,
etc. If no faults are detected the JPC will enter Normal Mode.
If the JPC fails to communicate with any machine, the JPC will display a message
as shown below. Where more than one machine has failed to communicate, the
display will cycle through, identifying the GMID, House Number, and Bank
Number of each machine that the JPC has failed to communicate with.
*** COMMUNICATION ***

FAILED
GMID 0100001
H 1234 B
bank 1
The Graphic Display panel on the APMs for which communication has failed will
display an appropriate error message.

B.8.3 Normal Mode

When the Jackpot Controller is operating correctly it displays the message
JACKPOT CONTROLLER
IN
NORMAL MODE
The Status LEDs - NORMAL, POWER 1, and POWER 2 should be lit and the
LED MFG. FUNCTION should be flashing.
B.8.4 Jackpot Hit

When a Jackpot of any level is hit, the JPC display will show the jackpot amount
won, the jackpot level won, and the GMID, house number, and bank number of
the winning APM.
*** JACKPOT HIT ***

$100.00 Lev3
GMID 010001
H 1234 B bank 1
The Graphic Display on the winning APM will show the Win amount,
periodically changing to an animation or message such as “HYPERLINK
WINNER”.
The JPC will deal with the jackpot trigger in one of two ways, depending upon
whether CCCE Transfer is enabled for the jackpot level won and the level of the
Maximum CCCE Transfer limit. These settings are configured in the JPC
Configuration EPROM.
For jackpots below the Maximum CCCE Transfer limit (usually Level 3 and Level
4 jackpots), the JPC automatically transfers the Win amount to the Credit meter of
the winning machine via a CCCE transfer. The message line on the monitor will
display “CCCE transfer in xxx credits”, where xxx is the credit value of the
jackpot won. The jackpot is reset to the jackpot reset value plus any hidden
jackpot value, up to the jackpot maximum value for that level. Once the Jackpot
is reset, the JPC display will revert to Normal Mode.
Before the CCCE transfer, the controller will suspend the machine via P5SEF
signal, and will transfer the credit via CCCE to the machine. The controller
checks if the credits are transferred to the Credits Received. If there is a
mismatch, the machine will remain suspended and the controller will display
CCCE MISMATCH
WIN VALUE = $X IN
CCCE VALUE = $Y IN

The attendant manually clears the locked-up machine by pressing the ENTER key.
For jackpots above the Maximum CCCE Transfer limit, (usually Level 1 and
Level 2 jackpots), the operator turns the Jackpot Reset key in the winning gaming
machine and pays the Win amount by hand. The jackpot is reset to the jackpot
reset value plus any hidden jackpot value, up to the jackpot maximum value for
that level. Once the Jackpot is reset, the JPC display will revert to Normal Mode.
B.8.5 Power Save

When the Power Save button is pressed, the JPC will suspend the operation of all
connected gaming machines. The SEF input signal is used for this purpose.
On entering the Power Save mode, each gaming machine will sound an alarm and
show the words “POWER SAVE” on the display. After a short period, the display
will go blank. In the Power Save state, the JPC will still perform most of its
normal functions, including security monitoring and communication output.
Power Save can only be entered 20 seconds after all game play finishes.
Pressing the Power Save button again will return the controller, APMs, and
displays to normal operation, and will display “Power Up – Save” when the
controller returns from Power Save mode. It will remain until the first turnover is
received from a machine.
B.8.6 Audit Mode

The Audit display provides five options as shown in the figure below.
1. Controller Ident.
2. Metering Inform.
3. Link Configurat.
4. History 5. Manuf.
Controller Identification
This option provides information on the Hyperlink configuration. Use the arrow
buttons to cycle through the displays.
Press Cancel to return to Audit Mode menu. Press the AUDIT button again to
return to Normal Mode.

Display Explanation
LINK CONTROLLER GAMING MACHINE IDENTIFICATION – a unique six-digit
GMID identification number allocated by the Liquor Administration
001234 Board to each gaming machine. The display cycles through
GMID numbers for each machine connected.
MANUFACTURER The manufacturer of the Jackpot Controller.

CODE PL - Paltronics
PL
DATA BLOCK VERSION A four digit number allocated by the Jurisdictional Authority
PDB1 0102 is displayed on the LED screen.
PDB2 0102
CDB 0102
F/WARE EVEN 01HE Identification numbers for the firmware and configuration
F/WARE ODD 01HO0148 EPROM.
CONFIG CFG2.1.7
PROGRESSIVE LEVELS The number of progressive jackpot levels supported.

SUPPORTED
4
LINK CONTROLLER Theoretical Percentage Return . When not implemented will

PRT display “MYSTERY NOT IMPLEMENTED”.
INCREMENT The percentage of the APMs turnover that is added to the

PERCENTAGE pool of funds available for Level 1 jackpots.
LEVEL 1
0.012500

LEVEL 2
0.012500

LEVEL 3
0.012500

LEVEL 4
0.012500
JACKPOT MAXIMUM The maximum cash value of the Level 1 jackpot.

LEVEL 1
$ 100.00

LEVEL 2
$ 90.00


LEVEL 3
$ 80.00

LEVEL 4
$ 70.00
JACKPOT RESET The cash value that the Level 1 jackpot is reset to after it
VALUE has been won.
LEVEL 1
$ 80
VALUE has been won.
LEVEL 2
$ 70
VALUE has been won.
LEVEL 3
$ 60
VALUE has been won.
LEVEL 4
$ 50
Metering Information
Use the arrow buttons on the keypad to step through the displays.
Display Explanation
CURRENT JACKPOT The current cash value of the Level 1 jackpot.
LEVEL 1
$ 100.00

LEVEL 2
$ 90.00

LEVEL 3
$ 80.00

LEVEL 4
$ 70.00
HIDDEN JACKPOT The “overflow “ value of a jackpot accruing after the current
LEVEL 1 jackpot reaches the prescribed maximum value. The
$ 10.00 hidden jackpot is unavailable to the player until the current
jackpot has been won, at which time the new current
jackpot is reset to the reset value plus the value of the
hidden jackpot, up to the maximum limit for that level. Any
residual hidden jackpot will then become the new hidden
jackpot value.
B-42 There is a separate HiddenNSW Clubs

Jackpot & Hotels
value - Revision
for each level. 04
HIDDEN JACKPOT
LEVEL 2
$ 6.50
HIDDEN JACKPOT
LEVEL 3
$ 34.00
HIDDEN JACKPOT
LEVEL 4
$ 25.60
TOTAL VALUE WON The cumulative total value of Level 1 jackpots won.
LEVEL 1
$ 365.71
LEVEL 2
$ 76.00
LEVEL 3
$ 206.00
LEVEL 4
$ 3680.00
TOTAL CCCE TRANSFER The cumulative total value of CCCE transfers for Level 1
LEVEL 1 jackpots.
$ 0.00
LEVEL 2 jackpots.
$ 0.00
LEVEL 3 jackpots.
$ 456.00
LEVEL 4 jackpots.
$ 235.00
JACKPOT RESETS This is a cumulative total representing the number of times

LEVEL 1 the Level 1 jackpot has been reset.
4

5

8


14
TOTAL TURNOVER SINCE The cumulative total value of turnover from all APMs since
START UP the link start up.
$ 4137.00
TOTAL TURNOVER SINCE The cumulative total value of turnover from all APMs since
LAST CONFIGURATION the last configuration change.
$ 4137.00
TOTAL DOOR OPENS This is a cumulative total representing the number of times
8 the security cage has been accessed. This meter will
increment whenever the JPC Door is opened or the Top
Cover is removed.
TOTAL POWER UPS This is a cumulative total representing the number of times
10 the link has been powered up.
TOTAL HARD METERS This is a cumulative total representing the number of times
DISCONNECTED the Hard (Mechanical) Meters have been disconnected.
0
GMID 010000 Gaming Machine Identification number

1234 bank 1 House number Bank number
TURNOVER $ 567.00 Turnover from the APM since the last configuration
change.
Use arrow keys to step through each APM.
Link Configuration
MACHINES The number of machines currently connected to the

ON LINE network and communicating correctly.
12
MACHINES The number of machines configured on the network and

OFF LINE not connected or not communicating correctly.
0
GMID 010000 Gaming Machine Identification

1234 bank1 House number Bank number
CREDIT 5 CENTS The cash value of one credit
ON LINE 0001 Status XXXX
XXXX is a four digit identifier. The first digit identifies the

JPC from 0-9 and A-F. The second digit identifies the Port
from 1 to 4. The third and fourth digits identify the Address
No. from 1 to 32.

History
REC# 0 C0 P1 N 1 Record number Controller Port Node

MACH # 010000 Lev 4 Machine number Jackpot Level won
1234 bank1 House number Bank number
$ 70.00 Cash amount won
Records the last 128 Jackpot wins, identifying the

machine, the controller, port, and node to which it is
connected, and the amount of the win.
Manufacturing
REC # 0 Information is recorded in this log whenever a

1. 0000 4. 0000 7. 0000 critical error occurs from which the machine cannot
2. 0000 5. 0000 8. 0000 recover (such as a memory error). This
3. 0000 6. 0000 9. 0000 information can help to identify the cause of the
error. Sixteen records are stored.
B.8.7 Test Mode

To enter Test Mode, open the logic cage.
Note
All gaming machines connected to the link must be idle to enter Test Mode.
When the logic cage is opened, the JPC will enter Test Mode. When the TEST
button is pressed, the JPC will suspend the operation of all connected gaming
machines. The Subsidiary Equipment Functional input signal is used for this
purpose.
On entering Test Mode, each machine will sound an alarm and display the
message “CALL ATTENDANT – PLAY SUSPENDED P5”.
The JPC display shows:
1. TEST COMMUNIC.
2. TEST SIGN
3. SETUP SIGN
4. CCCE DELAY
Test Communications
Select this option to test the communications with all the gaming machines
configured for the JPC. The JPC will display “CONTROLLER IN TEST
COMMUNICATION MODE” and any faults detected will produce an appropriate
message on the display panel of the relevant APM.

Test Sign
Press 2 to test the graphic displays in the APMs. Once the TEST SIGN option is
selected, the JPC display will show “CONTROLLER IN TEST SIGN MODE”.
Each machine display then cycles through test displays where all LEDs are lit
sequentially. The displays can be observed to find faulty LEDs. If four or more
LEDs are faulty, the display should be replaced.
Setup Sign
The Setup Sign display is shown below.
1. TIME TO ATTRACT
CURRENT 30
2. ODOMETER SPEED
CURRENT SET 1
Time to Attract
When an APM is idle for a period of time (about 3 minutes), the Hyperlink
display will switch from showing the jackpot values to Attract Mode, in which an
animation sequence designed to attract players is shown. Once the animation
sequence is completed, the jackpot values will be displayed. If the machine is still
idle, the Attract Mode animation sequence will be repeated. The period of time
between the beginning of one Attract Mode animation sequence and the beginning
of the next is the Time to Attract.
If the time required to play the animation sequence is longer than the Time to
Attract, the sequence will play out, the jackpot values will be displayed
momentarily, and the sequence will then repeat.
The current value for the Time to Attract is shown flashing on the second line.
Press 1 to enter the selection screen where the Time to Attract can be reset to one
of eight preset values.
Odometer Setup
The Odometer Speed determines the speed at which the displayed jackpot values
are incremented.
The current setting for the Odometer Speed is shown flashing on the fourth line.
Press 2 to enter the selection screen where the Odometer Speed can be reset to one
of eight preset values.
CCCE Delay
The delay time between when the JPC receives a request for a CCCE payment and
when the JPC sends the CCCE payment to the APM can be set to one of four
preset values. This delay period can give the APM display time to run though an
animation sequence when a jackpot is hit.

B.8.8 Reset
Note
All metering information should be recorded before
performing a reset.
The purpose of reset is to indicate any abnormal conditions which result in the
program being "restarted" and as a result of this process losing completely or
partially significant link state or parameter information.
The following events summarise typical actions that would lead to the reset status
condition being set:
1. The processor(s) is "reset" by a hardware action. Normally this will mean that
a "reset" line is activated.
2. The program performs a "cold start or initialisation procedure" and the current
state is partially or completely lost.
3. Memory is cleared or it is restored from known "uncorrupted" values.
Note: A memory reset (clear) or a memory restore can only be initiated manually
by an authorised person and then only if the link controller detects the appropriate
memory error.
A reset or restore will require access to the JPC security cage and will only be
performed by an authorised licensed technician. All metering information should
be checked against the values recorded before the memory restore.
The reset status condition is set when a reset is executed and is cleared when the
first valid turnover contribution is received from an APM after the reset or restore.
B.9 Error Conditions

B.9.1 Memory Error
Note
All metering information should be recorded
before restoring from a memory error.
The Jackpot Controller (JPC) checks the integrity of all memory that is accessed
by the processor(s) either directly or indirectly. The memory checking process is
implemented at least on each power up or "reset" of the link controller (see
"Reset" status above).
The checking process checks for valid memory contents and where practical it
also checks for correctly functioning memory storage components.
The JPC also detects a change in link controller program(s). This has the same
status as a memory error and result in a RAM reset being performed. The JPC

program also ensures that all "option" settings that apply with the new program are
correctly set.
The JPC suspends the operation of all connected gaming machines when a
memory error status condition is detected. The Subsidiary Equipment Functional
(SEF) signal is used for this purpose.
The JPC display will show the message “MEMORY ERROR” and prompt for one
of the function buttons to be pressed to either clear the memory or restore from
backup. Open the JPC Door and press the appropriate function button located on
the Controller Board.
If the metering information is restored from the battery-backed memory, check the
values against those recorded before the memory restore. If the metering
information does not match the recorded values, the meters must be reset. To do
this, open the JPC Door and hold down the FUNCT1 button on the Controller
Board while switching the JPC on. Press ENTER to fully reset all metering
information.
The status condition is set when a memory error is detected and is cleared when a
reset or restore procedure is performed by an authorised person.
B.9.2 CRC Error

The SEI firmware performs a CRC CHECK, and if the CRCs are not matched, the
controller will suspend the machine and display the error message “INTERFACE
CARD FIRMWARE ERROR”.
B.9.3 Communication Failure

The JPC scans the gaming machines (i.e. each Subsidiary Equipment Interface) in
a sequence that covers all the APMs connected to the link.
If the JPC does not receive a valid response from an APM for 66 seconds, then a
communication failure has occurred and the JPC suspends the operation of the
APMs for which the communication has failed. The SEF input signal to the
machine is to be used for this purpose.
The status condition is set when a communication failure is detected from one or
more APMs and is cleared when communication is restored from all APMs.
B.9.4 Security Cage Open

This condition is set when the JPC Door is opened or the Top Cover is removed.
The JPC suspends the operation of all connected APMs when a security cage open
condition is detected. The SEF input signal to each connected gaming machine is
used for this purpose.
The status condition is set when the open condition is detected and is cleared
when a closed condition is detected.

B.9.5 Meter Disconnect

This status condition is set when the JPC detects that one or more of the
mechanical (hard) meters are disconnected. The condition is reset when the JPC
detects that all meters are connected.
B.9.6 Link Controller Power Save

In the Power Save state, the JPC will still perform most of the normal functions,
including security monitoring and communication output.
This requires that power to the logic board(s), security sensors and Subsidiary
Equipment Interface boards is maintained.
In Power Save mode, the JPC suspends the operation of all connected APMs. The
SEF input signal to each gaming machine is used for this purpose.
The status condition is turned on when the Power Save condition is activated by
an authorised person and is turned off when the condition is removed.
B.9.7 Power Good Signal Fail

The link controller monitors the "Power Good" output signal from the interface
port of APMs connected to the link.
If the "Power Good" signal fails from one or more of the APMs connected, then
the JPC will suspend the operation of those APMs. The Graphic Display will
show the message “PG ERR” and the JPC display will show “APM POWER
DOWN”.
The status condition is set when the "Power Good" signal from one or more APMs
has failed and is cleared when "Power Good" signal is restored from all APMs.
B.9.8 Configuration Change

Any linked system must be set up using a configuration procedure performed by
an authorised technician. From the configuration procedure, the JPC sets up and
maintains a configuration table about the APMs connected to the link. This table
contains APM details like Gaming Machine Identification (GMID), Base Credit
Value etc., and has to be updated with any configuration procedure.
On Power Up or Reset the JPC verifies the GMID and Base Credit Value of the
connected APMs with the existing data in the configuration table. In addition,
after a gaming machine Power Down/Up or a security cage open status condition
is detected, the JPC verifies the GMID and Base Credit Value received from the
gaming machine.
If there is any mismatch, then a configuration change error has occurred and the
JPC will suspend operation of the "non-configured" APMs. The SEF input signal
to the interface port of the gaming machine is used for this purpose.

The status condition is turned on when a configuration change is detected and is

turned off when a new "configuration set up procedure" is performed by an
authorised person.
B.9.9 Manufacturer Specific Errors

Any error condition that is not mentioned above and causes the link controller to
assume an error condition.
The status condition is turned on when the error is detected and is turned off when
an authorised person executes the specified reset procedure.
Depending on the nature of the error the JPC may suspend play on connected
gaming machines by using the SEF signal to each gaming machine.
B.9.10 Not All Machines Link Progressive

The software will check that all machines connected to Hyperlink are a link
progressive game machine, or all machines will be suspended, with the message
quoted
B.9.11 All Machines Not Configured with Same Jackpot Level

All APMs should have the same number of Jackpot levels. Should one of the
machines be configured with a different number of levels, the error message is
displayed.
B.9.12 All Machines should have Same Probability of Winning

All APMs linked to the Hyperlink controller should have the same Probability. If
otherwise, all AGMs will be suspended, and the error message is displayed.
B.9.13 Jackpot Value Error

In the configuration setting, the maximum Jackpot value cannot be more than
$100,000. Otherwise, the error message is displayed and all machines are
suspended.
B.9.14 Increment Percentage Error

The Increment Percentage for a User Jackpot Level must be more than zero.
Otherwise the error message is displayed and all machines are suspended.

B.9.15 Credits Received Mismatch

Before CCCE transfer, controller suspends machine via P5SEF signal, and
transfers credit via CCCE to the machine. The controller checks if credits are
transferred to Credits Received. If there is a mismatch, machine will remain
suspended and controller will display error message.
B.10 Hyperlink Statistics

The Operator Mode of the APM provides accounting information on the
Hyperlink system. To access this information, turn the Audit key in the APM to
enter Operator Mode, then select Accounting Information Hyperlink Statistics.
Table B.10 Hyperlink Statistics

HYPERLINK INFORMATION
Progressive Levels Supported 4

Level 1 Occurrence 1
Level 1 Probability 0.00001254309741
Total Number of Hyperlink Hit 11
Total Number of Jackpot Hit 11
Last Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $56.00
Total Grand Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $1200.00
Total Major Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $600.00
Total Minor Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $2300.00
Total Mini Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $5740.00
Total Jackpot AMT TRNSF Via CCCE $9840.00
B.11 Hyperlink Reels Test

The Operator Mode of the APM enables the Hyperlink reels display to be
examined. The operator can step through the reels to check that the symbols
appear in the correct positions.

B.12 Adding / Removing APMs

Note
All Jackpot values should be recorded before
adding or removing APMs from the link.
To Add an APM to the Link

1. Obtain a new Config EPROM programmed for a increased number of APMs
(see section B.15).
2. Switch off the Jackpot Controller (JPC). The APM Graphic Display will
show “JPC TIMOUT”.
3. Physically connect the additional APM(s) to the link.
4. Open the JPC Door.
5. Replace the Config EPROM with the new Config EPROM.
7. If a new machine is added to the link, the JPC will display the message
“CONFIGURATION CHANGE NEW MACHINE #####”, where ##### is
GMID of the machine. If more than one machine is added to the link, the
new machines’ GMID must be displayed on the audit screen. Set the
configuration change flag in PDB 1. Press the SysConfig key located on the
Controller Board inside the JPC Door. The JPC will run through the normal
start-up checks. Provided no error conditions are detected, the JPC will
enter Normal Mode. The error message is cleared when the SYS CONFIG
key is pressed.
8. Check that the Jackpot values match those recorded before adding the
APM(s).
9. Enter Audit Mode and check that the Total Turnover Since Last Config and
the Total Turnover for each APM have been reset to zero.
To Remove an APM from the Link

1. Obtain a new Config EPROM programmed for a reduced number of APMs
(see section B.15).
2. Switch off the Jackpot Controller (JPC). The APM Graphic Display will
show “JPC TIMOUT”.
3. Physically remove the APM(s) from the link, ensuring that all cabling to the
remaining APMs is properly connected.
4. Open the JPC Door.
5. Replace the Config EPROM with the new Config EPROM
7. The JPC will display the message “CONFIGURATION CHANGE
EXISTING MACHINE #### REMOVED”. Set the configuration change
flag in PDB 1. Press the SysConfig key located on the Controller Board
inside the JPC Door. The JPC will run through the normal start-up checks.
Provided no error conditions are detected, the JPC will enter Normal Mode.
The error message will be cleared when the JPC SYS CONFIG key is
pressed.

8. Check that the Jackpot values match those recorded before removing the
APM(s).
9. Enter Audit Mode and check that the Total Turnover Since Last Config and
the Total Turnover for each APM have been reset to zero.
B.13 Hyperlink Games

Hyperlink is a MVP link progressive jackpot feature, which can be made to
operate with almost any MVP game, providing that the game software caters for
ordinary linked progressive jackpot games.
In Hyperlink, each game acts as a base game for the generic Hyperlink jackpot
feature game. The base game and jackpot feature games are mutually exclusive.
The outcome of each game is not dependent on the other game.
B.13.1 Hyperlink Jackpot Feature Game

The jackpot feature game is won at random during the play of a bought game.
A sound file is played when the jackpot feature game is won. It is played at the
conclusion of the current game, after all wins have been paid including any from
base game features. Any wins during this base game are paid normally to the Win
meter and taken automatically to the Credit meter. No gamble feature is available
in the trigger game in which the jackpot feature game is won.
The jackpot feature game appears with the new reel strips stopped. A sound file is
played when the jackpot feature game appears. The reels start spinning after this
sound file is played.
The player then presses the pushbuttons to stop the individual reels. A time limit
of 30 seconds is given to stop any one reel before it becomes automated and the
first reel stops itself. A further 30 seconds is given to stop the other four reels
before the game becomes automated and the reels stop one after another with only
a slight delay.
There are two different types of symbols on the reels:
• Numbers
• Jackpot Symbols
The score made across the five reels determines which jackpot level is won. One
of the jackpots must be won. The score is the sum of the numbers on the centre
line (line 1) of all 5 reels. A message with the Game Feature Score is displayed on
message line 2. The score is progressively incremented as each reel is stopped.
Once all 5 reels are stopped, any Jackpot Symbols appearing on the center line
animate, one at a time, left-to-right, to reveal a number. These animations are
played with a sound file. Once each animation has finished, the number revealed
is added to the Game Feature Score.

The total Game Feature Score, once all reels have stopped and all Jackpot Symbol
numbers revealed, determines which jackpot level is won. The message line on
the monitor will display the jackpot amount and level won.
An example of the scores required to win each jackpot level is:
• Grand Jackpot Won with a score of 100 or more
• Major Jackpot Won with a score of 90-99 (inclusive)
• Minor Jackpot Won with a score of 75-89 (inclusive)
• Mini Jackpot Won with a score of 74 or less
When the jackpot feature game is completed, the player is returned to the trigger
game in which the jackpot feature game was won. The Win from the trigger game
is still shown on the Win meter. The Win meter is not cleared until the
commencement of the next bought game.
The Graphic Display on the winning APM will show the Jackpot Win amount,
periodically changing to an animation or message such as “HYPERLINK
WINNER”.
Depending on the level of the Maximum CCCE Transfer Limit set and enabled in
the JPC EPROM, the jackpot will be paid either by direct credit download or by
hand.
When a direct credit download jackpot has been won, a direct credit transfer from
the Jackpot Controller will pay the jackpot amount to the Credit meter of the
winning APM using bi-directional communications (CCCE). For direct credit
download, CCCE Transfer must be enabled in the Audit Mode Machine
Options screen of each APM connected to the link.
When a hand/book pay jackpot has been won, the game will lockup and play will
be suspended. The Club/Casino will then deal with the jackpot win in their
preferred manner. The jackpot will be paid using some manual transaction (e.g.
book pay) before the APM is reset using the Jackpot Reset key.
Gameplay cannot continue until the jackpot has been cleared (whether
automatically or by an attendant).

B.14 Fault Finding

The table below shows errors messages as displayed on the JPC or Graphic
Display, and the corresponding faults and possible solutions.
Table B.11 Fault Finding

Message Possible Fault Possible Solution
JPC P5 The JPC has stopped Check that the JPC is receiving power and is
SUSPENDED communicating with the APM. turned on.
Check the data cables leading from the JPC
to the SEI of each APM displaying this
message.
P1 The port P1 on the SEI board is Check that the Interface Board Main Board
PG ERR not receiving the Power Good and LAB Interface Board are receiving
signal from the LAB Comms power.
Board.
P5 The port P5 on the SEI board is Check that the Interface Board Main Board
PG ERR not receiving the Power Good and LAB Interface Board are receiving
signal from the LAB Comms power.
Board.
P1 The port P1 on the SEI board is 1. Check that the connector P1 on the SEI
TIMEOUT not communicating with the board is securely plugged in.
LAB Comms Board.
2. Check that CCCE Transfer is enabled in
the Operator Mode Machine Options
Enable CCCE Transfer.
P5 The port P5 on the SEI board is Check that the connector P5 on the SEI
TIMEOUT not communicating with the board is securely plugged in.
LAB Comms Board.
Configuration Change The Base Credit Value or APM The JPC will display an error message
Existing machine Identification (GMID) number in showing the configured GMID. Enter the
GMID 01001 the APM Machine Options APM’s Audit Mode, select Machine Options,
69 1 does not match the Base Credit and change the Base Credit Value to the
Unit (BCU) or GMID stored in configured value.
the JPC Configuration EPROM.
GMID 10002 The JPC is in Test Mode Press the Test Mode button on the APM
BCU 1 machine graphical display.
ONLINE

Message Possible Fault Possible Solution

MEMORY ERROR - The Firmware has been Open the JPC door and press the MEMRST
MEMRST TO RESET changed. function button.
MEMORY
The JPC will enter Power Up Mode, and
then give the option of either pressing
MEMRST to clear the memory or pressing
FUNCT1 to restore the memory from
backup.
MEMORY ERROR A memory error has occurred. Open the JPC door and press the FUNCT2
FUNCT2 TO RESTORE function button to restore the memory from
FROM BACKUP backup.
BATTERY LOW The battery on the JPC board Open the JPC and replace the battery.
is low.
Jackpot levels not updating. Check the cable from the SEI to the Graphic
Display controller board.
SECONDARY Not all machines are link The software will check that all machines
FUNCTION NOT progressive. connected to Hyperlink are a link
SUPPORTED progressive game machine, or all machines
GMID 01002 will be suspended, with the message quoted
69 1
JACKPOT LEVEL All machines are not configured All APMs should have the same number of
ERROR with the same Jackpot level. Jackpot levels. Should one of the machines
GMID 01002 be configured with a different number of
69 1 levels, the error message is displayed.
INTERFACE CARD CRC Check The SEI firmware performs a CRC check,
FIRMWARE ERROR and if the CRCs are not matched, the
controller will suspend the machine and
displays the error message.
PROBABILITY ERROR All machines should have the All APMs linked to the Hyperlink controller
same probability of winning. should have the same Probability. If
otherwise, all AGMs will be suspended, and
the error message is displayed.
JACKPOT RESET Error in the Jackpot value. In the configuration setting, the maximum
ERROR Jackpot value cannot be more than
$100,000. Otherwise, the error message is
displayed and all machines are suspended.
INCREMENT ERROR Increment Percentage Error The Increment Percentage for a User
Jackpot Level must be more than zero.
Otherwise the error message is displayed
and all machines are suspended.
CCCE MISMATCH Credits Received mismatch Before CCCE transfer, controller suspends
WIN VALUE = $X IN machine via P5SEF signal, and transfers
CCCE VALUE = $Y IN credit via CCCE to the machine. The
controller checks if credits are transferred to
Credits Received. If there is a mismatch,
machine will remain suspended and
controller will display error message.

B.15 PalLinks
B.15.1 Overview
PalLink is a software application designed to produce configuration files for
EPROMs that are intended for use in the Paltronic Jackpot Controller. These
configuration files can be downloaded to an EPROM programmer to create
EPROMs that contain site, link, and slot machine details.
B.15.2 EPROM Production Checklist

1. Run PalLinks software.
2. Add a site.
3. Add associated links.
4. Add associated slot machine records.
5. Generate an EPROM configuration file.
6. Generate a link configuration report.
7. Download the EPROM configuration file to the EPROM programmer.
8. Create the EPROM.
B.15.3 Sites
Figure B.19 Site Information

The Sites function enables site identification details to be set up, viewed and
maintained.
Table B.12 Site Function Details

Field Description
License Number Unique site licence number issued by gaming authority.
Site Name Name or description of site.
Adding a Site
1. From the PalLinks screen, click on the Sites button. The Link Controller
Sites screen will be displayed.
2. Click on the Add button. Enter the site licence number in the Licence
Number field and the site name in the Site Name field.
3. Click on the Do button to save the site record (or the Cancel button to clear
the details you have entered without saving them). The name of the added
site will be displayed in the left panel.
4. Repeat this procedure to add another record if required.
5. Click on the Exit button to close the Link Controller Sites screen and return
to the PalLinks workspace.
Updating Site Details

1. From the PalLinks screen, click on the Sites button. The Link Controller
Sites screen will be displayed.
2. In the left panel, click on the name of the required site. Click on the Update
button.
3. Update the site licence number in the Licence Number field and/or the site
name in the Site Name field as required.
4. Click on the Do button to save the site record with the changes you have
made (or the Cancel button to keep the original details).
5. Repeat this procedure to update another record if required.
6. Click on the Exit button to close the Link Controller Sites screen and return
to the PalLinks workspace.
Deleting a Site
1. Link Controller Sites screen and return to the PalLinks workspace. From
the PalLinks screen, click on the Sites button. The Link Controller Sites
screen will be displayed.
2. In the left panel, click on the name of the site to be deleted. Click on the
Delete button.
3. Click on the Do button to delete the site record (or the Cancel button to keep
the original record).
4. Repeat this procedure to delete another record if required.
5. Click on the Delete button to delete another record, or the Exit button to
close the Link Controller Sites screen and return to the PalLinks workspace.

B.15.4 Links
Figure B.20 Link Configuration Information

The Links function enables you to set up, view and maintain link configuration
records. Each link record includes information recorded via three tab screens:
• the Basic Details tab screen
• the Percentages tab screen
• the Cashless Details tab screen
Basic Details Tab Screen

The Basic Details tab screen enables you to set up, view and maintain link
identification details.
Table B.13 Basic Details Tab Screen

Field Description
Name/Ref Name or description of link.
GMID Unique code issued by gaming authority to identify link.
Machines Number of slot machines that will contribute to jackpots
Connected controlled by link.
Type of Link Type of jackpot controlled by the link.
Number of Number of jackpot levels assigned to the link.
Levels

Percentages Tab Screen

The Percentages tab screen enables you to set up, view and maintain startout,
maximum jackpot and turnover contribution values for the link identified on the
Basic Details tab screen. A row containing a Startout field, Max Jackpot field and
a Percentage field is displayed for each jackpot level assigned to the selected link.
Table B.14 Percentages Tab Screen

Field Description
Startout Reset cash value of jackpot; i.e. cash value displayed
immediately after a jackpot is won.
Max Jackpot Maximum cash value of jackpot win.
Percentage Percentage of turnover contributed to jackpot by slot
machines assigned to link.
Cashless Details Tab Screen

The Cashless Details tab screen enables you to set up, view and maintain
automatic credit transfers resulting from jackpots controlled by the selected link.
Table B.15 Cashless Details Tab Screen

Field Description
Maximum Highest cash value that can be transferred automatically to
Transfer credit meter of winning slot machine when a jackpot is
Amount awarded (amounts above the value in Maximum Transfer
Amount field are treated as hand pays).
Enable Identifies jackpot levels for which automatic credit transfer
Cashless is available.
Transfer
Adding a Link
1. From the PalLinks screen, click on the Links button. The Maintain Links
2. From the Site Information dropdown list, select the required site. The panel
beneath it will display currently configured links for the selected site, if any.
3. Click on the Add button to record link information.
4. Click on the Basic Details tab to continue.
5. In the Name/Ref field, enter the name of the link.
6. In the GMID field, enter the unique code issued by your gaming authority to
identify the link.
7. In the Machines Connected field, enter the number of slot machines that will
contribute to jackpots controlled by the link.
8. From the Type of Link options, select the option that identifies the type of
jackpot controlled by the link.

9. From the Number of Levels options, select the option that identifies the
number of jackpot levels assigned to the link.
10. Click on the Percentages tab to continue. A row containing a Startout field,
Max Jackpot field and Percentage field is displayed for each jackpot level
assigned to the link via the Basic Details tab screen.
11. For each jackpot level:
a. in the Startout field, enter the reset cash value of the jackpot i.e. the
cash value displayed immediately after a jackpot has been won.
b. in the Max Jackpot field, enter the maximum cash value of the jackpot
that can be won.
c. in the Percentage field, enter the turnover percentage contributed to
the jackpot by slot machines assigned to the link.
12. If automatic credit transfer is not available at your venue, you have finished
entering all the details required to create a link record. Click on the Do
button to save the link record (or the Cancel button to clear the details you
have entered without saving them). The name of the added link will be
displayed in the left panel. Repeat this procedure to add another link, or
click on the Exit button to close the Maintain Links screen and return to the
PalLinks workspace.
13. If automatic credit transfer is available at your venue, click on the Cashless
Details tab to continue.
14. In the Maximum Transfer Amount field, enter the maximum cash value that
can be transferred automatically to the credit meter of a winning slot
machine when a jackpot is awarded (amounts above the value in Maximum
Transfer Amount field are treated as hand pays).
15. From the Enable Cashless Transfer options, set the levels at which
automatic credit transfer is available.
16. Click on the Do button to save the link record (or the Cancel button to clear
the details you have entered without saving them). The name of the added
link will be displayed in the left panel.
18. Click on the Exit button to close the Maintain Links screen and return to the
PalLinks workspace.
Updating Link Details

beneath it will display currently configured links for the selected site.
3. Click on the required link.
4. Click on the Update button.
5. Update link information on the Basic Details, Percentages and Cashless
Details tab screens as required.
6. Click on the Do button to save the link record with the changes you have
made (or the Cancel button to keep the original details).

PalLinks workspace.
Deleting a Link
3. Click on the link that is to be deleted.
4. Click on the Delete button.
5. Click on the Do button to confirm that the link is to be deleted (or the
Cancel button to keep the record).
PalLinks workspace.
B.15.5 Slot Machines
Figure B.21 Slot Machines Information

The Slot Machines function enables you to set up, view and maintain records for
slot machines associated with a selected link.
Table B.16 Slot Machines Function

Field Description
Site Information Name or description of site as defined via Site Name
(top of panel) field on Sites screen.
Site Information Name or description of link as defined via Name/Ref
(bottom of panel) field on Links screen.
Link Layout Displays properties of banks and slot machines
associated with selected link, if any, as defined via
Add/Update Machines Wizard.
Add/Update Machines Wizard

The Add/Update Machines Wizard is displayed when you attempt to add or update
slot machine records. Six screens are displayed as the wizard guides you through
the process of adding or updating a record:
1. the Welcome screen enables you to indicate whether you are adding or
updating a slot machine record.
2. the Bank screen enables you to identify the bank to which the slot machine
is assigned.
3. the GMID screen enables you to record the unique code issued by your
gaming authority to identify the slot machine.
4. The Denomination screen enables you to record the denomination value of
the slot machine.
5. The House Number screen enables you to record the number used to identify
the slot machine within the venue.
6. The Finish screen enables you to review the details you have entered before
you save the record.
Clicking on the Next button on one screen displays the next screen. At any time,
you can click on the Cancel button to clear the details you have entered without
saving them, or click on the Back button to return to previous screens.
Adding a Slot Machine

1. From the PalLinks screen, click on the Machines button. The Machine
Layout screen will be displayed.
beneath it will display currently configured links for the selected site, if any.
3. Click on the required link. The Link Layout panel will display banks and
slot machines associated with the selected link, if any.
4. Click on the Add/Edit button to record slot machine information.
5. The Add/Update Machines Wizard Welcome screen will be displayed. (At
any time during the remaining steps, you can click on the Cancel button to

clear the details you have entered without saving them, or click on the Back
button to return to previous screens).
6. Click on the Add a New Machine to Link option. Click on the Next button
to continue.
7. The Bank screen will be displayed. If the bank to which the slot machine is
to be assigned is displayed in the left panel, click on the required bank. If
not, enter the name of the bank to which the slot machine is assigned in the
Enter the New Bank Name field. Click on the Next button to continue.
8. The GMID screen will be displayed. In the GMID field, enter the unique
code issued by your gaming authority to identify the slot machine, and click
on the Next button to continue.
9. The Denomination screen will be displayed. Click on the required
denomination option for the slot machine, and click on the Next button to
continue.
10. The House Number screen will be displayed. In the House Number field,
enter the number used to identify the slot machine within the venue, and
click on the Next button to continue.
11. The Finish screen will be displayed, showing the slot machine identification
details you have entered. If the details are correct, click on the Finish button
to save the slot machine record. If the details are incorrect, click on the
Back button to make corrections.
13. Click on the Exit button to close the Machine Layout screen and return to
the PalLinks workspace.
Updating Slot Machine Details

slot machines associated with the selected link.
4. In the Link Layout panel, click on the bank to which the slot machine has
been assigned. If the bank name is not visible, click on Plus icons to expand
the displayed lists of banks or slot machines (or use the scroll bar to locate
the required bank).
5. Click on the required slot machine icon. Right-click on the slot machine's
GMID number. A shortcut menu will be displayed.
6. Click on the Edit Machine option. The Add/Update Machines Wizard
Welcome screen will be displayed. (At any time during the remaining steps,
you can click on the Cancel button to clear the details you have entered
without saving them, or click on the Back button to return to previous
screens.).
7. Leave the Add a New Machine to Link option cleared. Click on the Next
button to continue.
8. The Bank screen will be displayed.

a. If the bank to which the slot machine is assigned has changed and the
name of the new bank is displayed in the left panel, click on the
required bank. Click on the Next button to continue.
b. If the bank to which the slot machine is assigned has changed and the
name of the new bank is not displayed in the left panel, enter the name
of the bank to which the slot machine is assigned in the Enter the New
Bank Name field. Click on the Next button to continue.
c. If the bank to which the slot machine has been assigned has not
changed, click on the Next button to continue.
9. The GMID screen will be displayed.
a. If the slot machine's GMID code has changed, replace the displayed
GMID code with the new code, and click on the Next button to
continue.
b. If the slot machine's GMID code has not changed, click on the Next
button to continue.
10. The Denomination screen will be displayed.
a. If the slot machine's denomination has changed, replace the displayed
denomination with the new option, and click on the Next button to
continue.
b. If the slot machine's denomination has not changed, click on the Next
button to continue.
11. The House Number screen will be displayed.
a. If the slot machine's house number has changed, replace the displayed
house number with the new number, and click on the Next button to
continue.
b. If the slot machine's house number has not changed, click on the Next
button to continue.
12. The Finish screen will be displayed, showing the slot machine identification
details you have entered.
a. If the details are correct, click on the Finish button to save the slot
machine record.
b. If the details are incorrect, click on the Back button to make
corrections.
Deleting a Slot Machine

4. In the Link Layout panel, click on the bank to which the slot machine has
been assigned. If the bank name is not visible, click on Plus icons to expand

the displayed lists of banks or slot machines (or use the scroll bar to locate
the required bank).
5. Click on the required slot machine icon. Right-click on the slot machine's
GMID number. A shortcut menu will be displayed.
6. Click on the Delete Machine option. A confirmation message will be
displayed.
7. Click on the Yes button to confirm that the slot machine is to be deleted (or
the No button to keep the record).
B.15.6 Generating an EPROM Configuration File

You can generate an EPROM configuration file for a link if the value in the
Machines Connected field on the Maintain Links screen matches the number of
slot machines associated with the link as displayed in the Link Layout panel on the
Machine Layout screen.
4. Click on the EPROM button. The Configuration File Name dialog box will
be displayed, prompting you to save the configuration file with the GMID
recorded via the Links function as the file name.
5. In the Configuration File Name dialog box, use the Save In dropdown list to
specify the folder in which the configuration file is to be stored.
6. Click on the Save button to save the file in the specified folder.
B.15.7 Link Configuration Report

The Link Configuration Report provides a snapshot of site, link and slot machine
information for a selected link (see Figure B.18). You can generate a Link
Configuration Report for a link if the value in the Machines Connected field on
the Maintain Links screen matches the number of slot machines associated with
the link as displayed in the Link Layout panel on the Machine Layout screen.
Generating a Link Configuration Report

4. Click on the Print button. The Link Report screen will be displayed,
showing a screen version of the report as it would appear if you printed it.

5. At the bottom of the Link Report screen, click on:

a. the Print button to print the report.
b. the Export button to export the report in electronic form for use in
other software applications.
c. the Email button to export the report as an email attachment.
6. Repeat this procedure to generate a Link Configuration Report for another
link if required.
7. Click on the Close button to close the Link Report screen and return to the
Machine Layout screen.

Notes

MVP Video Service Manual Index
Index
4 B
410165 ....................................................... 14-4 bail, printer .................................................. 9-7

410174 ....................................................... 17-1 bank note acceptor ..................................... 10-1
410217 ....................................................... 14-4 communications .................................. 10-11
410227 ....................................................... 16-8 condition indicators ............................ 10-14
410250 ....................................................... 15-1 configuration options .......................... 10-14
410252 ..................................................... 16-14 DIP switches ....................................... 10-14
410254 ....................................................... 16-5 electronics ............................................. 10-7
410311 ....................................................... 13-1 LEDs ................................................... 10-10
410314 ....................................................... 14-4 mechanics and transport ....................... 10-4
410315 ....................................................... 12-1 periodic maintenance .......................... 10-18
410337 ..................................................... 15-12 periodic maintenance .......................... 10-17
410345 ..................................................... 15-12 software ................................................ 10-8
410366 ....................................................... 15-1 troubleshooting ................................... 10-17
410385 ..................................................... 15-12 Bank Note Acceptor
410388 ....................................................... 11-1 technical description ............................. 10-3
410389 ....................................................... 11-1 Bank note acceptor faults ........................ 10-14
Bank Note Acceptor Jams ....................... 10-15
A
Bank Note Acceptor Security .................. 12-21
accept chute ................................................. 6-3 bank note acceptor stacker
Accounting Information ............................. 3-19 clearing notes ...................................... 10-15
ActivData II+ ........................................... 20-23 Bank Note Entry ........................................ 1-15
ADH ............................................................. 7-3 Battery Backup Circuit ............................ 11-15
ADH, definition .......................................... G-1 battery failing indicator ........................... 18-16
alarm .......................................................... 3-13 BET ............................................................. 3-4
alarm, yo-yo ............................................... 6-15 Bezel Assembly Indicators ...................... 10-10
animation lamps, definition .......................... B-1 Bilock .......................................................... 4-9
any pays, definition ...................................... B-1 Bilock Locks ............................................. 1-10
APM, definition ........................................... B-1 BIPs ........................................................... 16-8
Aristocrat (PCM) ....................................... 19-3 BIPS Plus .................................................. 3-15
Aristocrat Disc Hopper ................................ 7-3 BIPS, definition .......................................... G-1
ARM .......................................................... 11-3 blackjack games ......................................... A-6
ARM250 Timers ...................................... 11-10 button panel, definition ............................... G-1
ASIC, definition .......................................... G-1 Button Test ................................................ 3-31
Audit / Jackpot switch .............................. 12-26
C
Audit key ...................................................... 4-9
audit key, definition .................................... G-1 cabinet base ................................................. 2-7
audit operator key ............................ 3-23, 3-28 cabinet door
Australian Lock Company ........................... 4-9 lock ......................................................... 4-7
NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 Index 1

Index MVP Video Service Manual
Cabinet Door ................................................ 4-6 coin validator ............................................... 6-3

Latch ....................................................... 4-7 collect ............................................... 3-24, 3-27
Security Switch ....................................... 4-7 Collect Limit ................................................ 3-6
cabinet security ............................................ 4-7 collect statistics ......................................... 3-24
camlocks ...................................................... 4-9 Collect Statistics ........................................ 3-24
cancel credit ............................................... 3-13 Combination Quick Test ............................ 3-36
cancel credit, definition ............................... G-1 Comms Inlet Filter Box ........................... 16-16
cash box ........................... 3-13, 4-11, 6-4, 6-18 communications ....................... 15-7, 15-8, 20-3
cash box chute ............................................ 4-11 communications configuration board 15-7, 15-8
cash box, definition ..................................... G-1 Communications Configuration Board ...... 14-3
Cashcade .................................................... 16-8 function ................................................. 14-4
cashless system .......................................... 1-12 communications interface .......................... 20-3
Cashless Transfer ..................................... 16-10 Condor Coin Validator .............................. 6-14
cathode ray tube ........................................... 8-3 CPU ........................................................... 11-9
CC-62 Coin Comparator .............................. 6-4 CPU, definition ........................................... G-2
CCB ........................................................... 14-3 CRC, definition .......................................... G-2
CCCE .......................................................... B-6 CREDIT ............................................. 3-4, 6-15
CCCE equipment ....................................... 17-6 credit, definition ......................................... G-2
CCREDIT .................................................... 6-7 CRT ............................................................. 8-3
CDS Display ............................................ 16-13 CRT Neckboard PCB .................................. 8-3
CDS Display Board ................................... 16-4 CRT PCB .................................................... 8-4
Centralised Cash Control Equipment .......... B-6 CSENSE ...................................................... 6-7
CERROR ..................................................... 6-7 Currency Handling .................................... 1-15
chip tray ....................................................... 6-3 Current Active Lockup
ClearTek, touchscreen ................................ 8-15 Help screens .......................................... 3-42
COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT ...................... 21-4 Current Lock ............................................. 3-13
coin comparator ........................................... 6-3 Current Lock Menu ................................... 3-41
adjustment procedures ............................. 6-9
D
connector pinouts .................................. 6-12
fault finding ........................................... 6-13 DACOM .................................................... 18-3
sensor assembly ....................................... 2-8 Basic Operation .................................... 18-6
Coin Comparator Door Sensing Inputs ........................... 18-13
security .................................................... 3-8 Electronic Key Interface ..................... 18-12
coin comparator, definition ......................... G-1 Keypad Interface ................................. 18-13
coin discrimination ..................................... 6-14 LCD Interface ..................................... 18-14
Coin Dispensing ........................................... 7-7 'Logging on' .......................................... 18-8
coin diverter ................................................. 6-3 Magnetic Card Reader Interface ......... 18-14
coin entry ........................................... 3-13, 6-3 Mains Sensor PCB .............................. 18-16
Coin Entry .................................................. 1-15 Optically Isolated Parallel Inputs ........ 18-13
Coin Entry Test .......................................... 3-32 polling ................................................... 18-6
Coin Handling .......................................... 12-20 Status Indicators ................................. 18-14
Coin Handling Interface ................. 11-18, 13-7 Typical Installation ............................... 18-3
coin handling system .................................. 6-19 DACOM 3000 ......................................... 12-24
coin jam, definition ..................................... G-1 DACOM 5000 ......................................... 12-23
Coin Jamming Prevention ............................ 7-7 DACOM 5000E Communications Component
COIN OPTIC FAULT ............................... 21-4 Locations Diagram ................................ 18-7
coin tray ..................................................... 4-19 DACOM 5000E communications interface
Physical Description ............................. 18-8
Index 2 NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

DACOM 5000E Communications Interface Electronic Hard Meters

Functional Diagram ............................... 18-9 Displaying Meter Values .................... 15-13
Pin Connector Assignment .................. 18-20 Warning Messages .............................. 15-14
DACOM Network System ......................... 19-3 electronic meters ............................... 3-12, 3-14
DACOM, definition .................................... G-2 EMI filtering ................................................ 5-3
Data Storage Board (DSB) ...................... 15-12 EMI/RFI filters ........................................ 16-15
DC-DC Converter Board ........................... 16-8 EPROM ................................................... 11-14
debris flap .................................................. 6-16 EPROM, definition ..................................... G-2
Debugging ................................................ 11-21 EPROMs ................................................... 1-15
degaussing .................................................. 8-19 Error Log Display ...................................... 3-27
degaussing, definition ................................. G-2 ESB ......................................................... 15-12
DEMON ................................................... 11-21 External I/O Expansion ........................... 11-13
DES Encryption ....................................... 11-19
F
DES, definition ........................................... G-2
Diagnostic Information .............................. 3-25 Factory Test ............................................... 3-34
Diagnostic LEDs .............................. 11-9, 13-9 Fan ........................................................... 12-27
displays ...................................................... 16-4 fault ........................................................... 3-13
diverter photo-optic .................................... 6-18 fault conditions .......................................... 1-16
diverter solenoid ........................................ 6-18 Fault Finding ............................................. 21-1
Door Access ............................................... 3-10 Fault Mode ................................................ 3-41
door artwork ............................................... 4-13 FEP ............................................................ 18-6
door fluorescent lighting ............................ 4-13 FEP, definition ........................................... G-2
door security ............................................ 12-26 Fig 2-3, Machine Footprint and Clearances 2-6
Door Signals Interface ............................. 12-19 Fig 6-7, Condor Coin Handling Assembly 6-14
DRAM ........................................... 11-5, 11-13 Fig 8-1, Tatung Video Monitor, assembly and
DRAM Emulator ...................................... 11-14 controls ................................................... 8-5
DSB ......................................................... 15-12 Fig 8-2, Kristel and Ceronix Video Monitor,
Dual Cage Assembly .................................. 10-3 assembly and controls ........................... 8-12
Fig 9-4, Printed Ticket Example ................. 9-9
E
Fig. 10-3, bank note acceptor
earth leads .................................................. 4-25 dual cage assembly ............................... 10-6
EEPROMS ............................................... 11-14 Figure 4-12, Playbutton\, Exploded View . 4-18
EGM number ............................................. 10-3 FIP ............................................................. 14-4
EGM, definition .......................................... G-2 FIP, definition ............................................. G-2
EHM .............................................. 3-13, 15-12 fluorescent ballast ...................................... 4-13
EHM SPI Board (ESB) ............................ 15-12 FPLA, definition ......................................... G-2
EHM switch ............................................. 15-13 Front End Processor .................................. 18-6
EHM, definition .......................................... G-2 fuses .................................................... 5-3, 5-11
EIA ............................................................. 20-3
G
electromagnetic interference ........................ 5-3
Electromechanical Meter Board gamble ....................................................... 3-24
Block Diagram ...................................... 15-4 GAMBLE .................................................... 3-6
Board Layout ......................................... 15-6 gamble statistics ........................................ 3-24
Connector Pin Assignment .................... 15-9 Gamble Statistics ....................................... 3-24
Functional Description .......................... 15-3 game display ................................................ 3-4
Physical Description .............................. 15-3 game display shelf ..................................... 4-13
electronic hard meters .................... 3-13, 15-12 game replay ............................................... 3-22
Game Replay ............................................. 3-22

game statistics ............................................ 3-23 security switches ................................... 13-9

Game Statistics ........................................... 3-23 I/O Expansion Card ................................. 12-15
Gaming Machine I/O Expansion Port ................................ 11-10
Basic Operation ..................................... 1-11 IDLE .......................................................... 3-11
specifications ......................................... 1-18 IGT Interface ........................................... 20-21
Gaming Machine Network ......................... 18-6 ILLEGAL COIN OUT .............................. 21-5
General Purpose Outlet ................................ 5-4 INHIBIT ALL ........................................... 6-15
GL5 Serial Interface ................................. 10-11 Inrush Current Scenario ............................... 5-8
GL5, definition ............................................ G-2 Installation Requirements ............................ 2-3
GPO ............................................................. 5-4 installing the communications interface .... 19-6
GPO outlet fuse .......................................... 5-11 installing the sample coin ............................ 2-8
Graphic Displays ....................................... B-31 Intelligent Bezel ........................................ 10-3
Intelligent Bezel Indicators ...................... 10-14
H
intelligent bezel, on fascia panel, definition G-3
HANDPAYS .............................................. 3-11 interface board ............................................. 1-5
Hidden Jackpot Value ................................. B-5 Interface Board .......................................... 12-3
hopper ........................................................ 3-13 description of connectors ...................... 12-7
Hopper .................................................... 12-25 Interface Board Connections ..................... 12-6
assembly and disassembly ..................... 7-10 Internal I/O .............................................. 11-12
fault finding ............................................. 7-8 Interrupt System ........................................ 11-9
security .................................................... 3-9
J
Hopper Full Detection ................................. 7-7
Hopper Interface ...................................... 11-17 Jackpot Controller ............................. B-9, B-13
Hopper Interface Signals .............................. 7-8 Error Conditions ................................... B-47
Hopper Parts ................................................ 7-4 Modes ................................................... B-38
Hopper payout ............................................. 7-6 jackpot keyswitch, definition ...................... G-3
Hopper PCB ................................................. 7-3 Jackpot Reset key ........................................ 4-9
hopper probe ................................................ 7-7 jurisdictional meters .................................. 3-23
Hopper Test ............................................... 3-32 Jurisdictional Meters ................................. 3-20
hopper, definition ........................................ G-2
K
horizontal circuit .......................................... 8-7
Host Processor ........................................... 18-6 keno/bingo games ....................................... A-6
House, definition ......................................... G-3 Key Switches ............................................... 4-9
Hyperlink .................................................... B-4 Keyboard Port ......................................... 11-11
Adding / Removing APMs ................... B-52 keying ........................................................ 12-6
Fault Finding ........................................ B-55 L
Games .................................................. B-53
Graphic Displays .................................. B-31 LAB Board .................................................. 1-5
Link Configuration Data Sheet ............. B-36 LAB Comms ............................................ 12-15
Hyperlink SEI ........................................... B-27 LAB Communication Ports ....................... 17-3
Hyperlink Statistics ................................... B-51 LAB Communications Board ...................... B-8
Basic Operation .................................... 17-5
I Block Diagram ...................................... 17-6
I/O Data Bus .............................................. 11-9 Connector Pin Assignment ................. 17-10
I/O Driver Board Physical Description ............................. 17-3
Connector Pin Assignment .................. 13-11 requirements ......................................... 17-3
Power Supply ........................................ 13-6 LAB Communications Board - component
Pushbuttons and Lamps ......................... 13-6 layout .................................................... 17-5

LAB PSU Chassis ...................................... 17-7 Mains Filter Box

Lamp Test .................................................. 3-30 Removal and Replacement ................. 18-18
LCD ......................................................... 15-12 Mains selector switch .................................. 5-4
LCOM ...................................................... 20-21 Manual pay, definition ................................ G-3
LCom, definition ......................................... G-3 Mars GL5 standard .................................. 10-11
LED ............................................... 6-19, 10-10 max bet, definition ...................................... G-3
LEDs .......................................................... 21-1 Mechanical Meters .................................. 12-17
Left to right pay, definition ......................... G-3 Mechanical Security ................................ 11-16
Light Tower ..................................... 3-11, 4-22 Mechanical Switches .................... 11-22, 12-26
Light Tower - exploded view ..................... 4-24 media access controller for ethernet
Light Tower Interface ................................ 15-5 (MACE ) ............................................. 20-8
Link Configuration Data Sheet ................. B-36 Memory ................................................... 11-13
Link Progressive Jackpots .............. 16-3, 16-14 Memory Expansion Port .......................... 11-15
Linked Progressive Jackpot System ............ B-4 Meters SRAM ......................................... 11-14
links, definition ........................................... G-3 meters, definition ........................................ G-3
Liquid Crystal Display ............................... 19-4 MicroTouch, touchscreen .......................... 8-15
Location COMmunicator (LCOM) .......... 20-22 mid-trim panel ........................................... 4-16
Locks ............................................................ 4-9 Mikohn ........................................... 12-23, 16-4
lockup, definition ........................................ G-3 Mikohn CON2 ........................................... 16-8
logging on to the host processor ................ 19-6 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface ......... 11-21
logic cage ................................................... 4-11 Mikohn Progressive Interface Communications
Low-Power Mode Signal ............................. 5-9 (Comms) Inlet Board .......................... 16-14
LPJS ............................................................ B-4 Mikohn Serial Interface ........................... 16-13
Mikohn’s Super Controller (Con2) .......... 16-14
M
monitor ........................................................ 1-5
Machine Communications Interface adjustment procedures ............................ 8-8
(MCI) .................................................. 20-19 fuse ....................................................... 5-11
machine components .................................... 4-3 picture adjustment ................................. 8-13
Machine Dimensions .................................... 2-5 power supply ........................................... 8-7
Machine Footprint and Clearances ............... 2-9 Power Supply ........................................ 8-11
Machine Identification ............................... 3-19 setup settings ......................................... 8-10
Machine Keys ............................................ 1-10 monitor mask ............................................. 4-19
Machine Lockup ........................................ 1-16 removal and replacement ...................... 4-19
Machine Modes ............................................ 3-3 multi-drop .................................................... B-6
Machine Modules ........................................ 1-4 multiline game ............................................. 3-6
machine options ........................................... 3-5 multiplier game ............................................ 3-6
Machine Options ........................................ 3-37 Mystery Cashcade ..................................... 16-8
Machine Peripherals ................................ 11-17 Mystery Jackpot Light ............................. 16-10
Magnetic Stripe Card Reader ..................... 19-4
N
main board ................................................. 11-1
architecture ............................................ 11-5 NECOINBLK .............................................. 6-7
Main board, Input/Output connectors ...... 11-24 network communications ........................... 20-3
Main Board ................................................ 11-3 networks .................................................... 11-4
Main Monitor Chassis PCB ......................... 8-3 note acceptor ............................................. 3-28
Main Monitor PCB ...................................... 8-4 Note Acceptor
mains cable, security ................................................. 3-10
clamp ....................................................... 2-8 NOTE ACCEPTOR
mains filter ................................................... 5-3 enable/disable ....................................... 3-38

Note Acceptor Backlight .......................... 12-21 power supply assembly ................................ 5-3
Note Acceptor Information ........................ 3-28 basic operation ........................................ 5-5
Note Acceptor LEDs ................................ 12-21 input requirements .................................. 5-6
note denomination selection ..................... 10-14 output requirements ................................ 5-7
Note Entry .................................................. 10-6 Power Supply Assembly, wiring diagram .... 5-5
note stacker, security .................................. 10-4 power supply fuse ...................................... 5-11
Note Stacker ............................................... 10-3 Printed Circuit Boards ................................. 1-4
Printer
O
bail .......................................................... 9-7
Olympic Head Unit .................................. 20-24 controller PCB ........................................ 9-5
Operator Mode ........................................... 3-17 general description .................................. 9-3
Operator Setup / Selections Menu ............. 3-37 paper low ................................................ 9-5
optical scanning ......................................... 10-3 paper roll ................................................ 9-5
Optical security ........................................ 11-16 replacing paper ..................................... 9-10
optical sensor ............................................... 4-7 replacing ribbon cassette ...................... 9-12
options ....................................................... 3-24 ribbon cassette ........................................ 9-6
ORION Unit ............................................. 20-23 take up unit ............................................. 9-6
Overcurrent Protection ................................. 5-7 Progressive SPI Display Controller Board 16-5
Overvoltage Protection ................................ 5-8 PSU Chassis ................................................ 1-5
P pushbuttons .................................................. 3-8
PAL 104-ALI ............................................ B-31 Q

PAL 145-2.43 ........................................... B-27 QCC on locks .............................................. 4-9
PAL 32 – 11x5 .......................................... B-31 Quick Change Cores on locks ..................... 4-9
PalLinks .................................................... B-57
R
Paltronics .................................................... B-9
panic log ......................... 3-27, 3-28, 3-29, 3-36 RANDOM jackpot system ........................... B-4
Panic Log Display ............................ 3-27, 3-36 Real Time Clock ...................................... 11-15
Paper Roll, replacement ............................. 9-10 Real Time Clock Setup .............................. 3-39
pay table ..................................................... 4-20 Record Refill ............................................. 2-10
Periodic Meters .......................................... 3-21 reflector panel ............................................ 4-14
photo-optic module ...................................... 6-3 reject chute .................................................. 6-3
Picture Control PCB ............................ 8-3, 8-4 replay ......................................................... 3-22
play button, definition ................................. G-4 RESERVE ................................................... 3-6
Play Mode .................................................... 3-4 Reset ........................................................ 11-12
playbuttons ................................................. 4-16 Ribbon Cassette ........................................... 9-6
Player Communication ............................... 19-3 replacement ........................................... 9-12
Player Communication Module ................. 18-6 RISC ............................................................ 1-3
Removal and Replacement .................... 19-5 RISC, definition .......................................... G-4
Technical Description ........................... 19-4 RJ45 adaptor ............................................. 18-6
Player Communication Module (PCM) ..... 19-3 RS 485 ......................................................... B-6
player communication unit ......................... 4-18 RS232 ...................................................... 20-21
power ......................................................... 15-7 RS232/DACOM Interface ....................... 18-12
power cable .................................................. 2-8 RS422 ........................................................ 20-3
Power Fail Signal ......................................... 5-9 RS-422 ....................................................... 16-8
Power Lines ............................................. 11-20 RS422 Communications .......................... 16-19
Power Save Mode ...................................... 3-40 RS485 Interface ....................................... 18-12
Power Supply ........................................... 12-27

S Subsidiary Equipment Interface ................ 16-8

surge protection ........................................... 5-3
sample coin
switch box ................................................... 5-3
installation ............................................... 2-8
switched mode power converter .................. 5-3
replacement ............................................. 6-8
switchlocks .................................................. 4-9
sandwich box ............................................. 19-4
sync interface circuit .................................... 8-6
security ....................................................... 3-12
System 6000S Communications Interface
Security ................................. 3-8, 11-16, 12-17
Removal and Replacement ................. 18-17
SEF ............................................................ 17-3
System Communications Filter
SEF ........................................ 17-3, 17-4, B-30
Removal and Replacement ................. 18-17
SEF, definition ............................................ G-4
SEI ............................................................. 16-8 T
Self Test Mode ........................................... 3-29
Take Up Unit, Printer .................................. 9-6
self-monitoring ........................................... 1-16
Tatung VS-20475T ...................................... 8-4
Self-test ........................................................ 3-8
TCP/IP Comms Inlet Board ........... 20-8, 20-15
sensor coils ................................................... 6-5
TCP/IP Communications ........................... 20-8
serial channels ............................................ 14-4
TCP/IP Communications (Comms) Board 20-8
Serial Channels ............................ 11-19, 12-21
Temperature Measurement ...................... 11-16
serial peripheral interface ........................... 11-6
Ticket Printer Log ..................................... 3-28
SERVICE ................................................... 3-11
TILT .......................................................... 3-11
Service Buttons .......................................... 19-5
top box ..................................... 3-12, 3-13, 4-20
SESI, definition ........................................... G-4
top box fluorescent lighting ....................... 4-22
SESI, Subsidiary Equip Serial Interface .... 17-6
top trim artwork ......................................... 4-18
SIMM ......................................................... 14-3
Top Trim Panel ......................................... 4-18
smart card ................................................... 1-12
touchscreen ................................................ 8-15
soft meters, definition ................................. G-4
touchscreen operation ................................ 8-15
solid-state relay ............................................ 5-3
touchscreen performance ........................... 8-16
Sound ....................................................... 11-11
Tower Lamps Connector ......................... 15-20
Sound Effects Test ..................................... 3-34
transformer box ......................................... 5-12
Sound System Setup ......................... 3-39, 3-40
TTL ........................................................... 20-3
Sounds and tunes .......................................... 3-7
SP-300-5 ................................................... B-34 V
Spare Voltage 24 V DC ........................... 12-25 VACS ........................................................ 6-15
Specifications ............................................. 1-18 validator ..................................................... 6-14
printer ...................................................... 9-5 vertical circuit .............................................. 8-6
SPI ........................................................... 15-12 Video ............................................ 11-10, 12-25
SPI bus ....................................................... 11-6 video controller ........................................... 8-3
SPI Bus .................................................... 11-19 video display ............................................... 3-7
SPI Channel 1 .......................................... 12-24 Video Gaming Machine
SPI Display Boards .................................... 16-7 external view ........................................... 1-6
SPI, definition ............................................. G-4 physical description ................................ 1-3
spinning reel games ..................................... A-3 VLC ........................................................... 20-3
Spinning Reel Games ................................... 3-5 VLC Comms Inlet PCB ............................. 20-3
SRAM ........................................................ 11-5 VLC Communication PCB ........................ 20-3
SRAM, definition ........................................ G-4 VLC Network ............................................ 20-3
Standalone Progressive Jackpots ... 16-3, 16-14 VLC, definition .......................................... G-4
STANDARD jackpot system ...................... B-4 voltage fluctuation ....................................... 5-3
statistics ............................................ 3-23, 3-24 voltage selector switch ................................ 2-8

W Yo-Yo, definition ....................................... G-4
Watchdog Timer ...................................... 11-12 Z

WIN ............................................................. 3-4
ZSPI Bus ................................................. 18-12
Y
yo-yo ................................................ 6-15, 21-3

Serv Man 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Serv Man 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

New South Wales

ARISTOCRAT TECHNOLOGIES AUSTRALIA PTY LTD (ACN 001 660 715)

Important Safety Information

than in accordance with this document.

Inform Yourself and Your Staff

Amendment Amendment Items and Functions Writer

No. 02 February Update for Bilocks RP

No. 03 June 1999 Chapter reorganisation RP

No. 03 June 1999 Update to Main Board chapter for battery RP

No. 04 Nov 1999 Appendix B added IW

NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 iii

Amendment Amendment Items and Functions Writer

No. 04 Nov 1999 New Installation chapter IW

No. 04 Nov 1999 Update to Wiring Diagrams IW

No. 04 Nov 1999 New Cautions added to reverse of Flyleafs. IW

iv NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

Aristocrat MVP Manuals

Primarily intended for operators of Aristocrat

Primarily intended for service technicians. The

Primarily intended for operators and service

NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 v

This page intentionally left blank

vi NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

User of the Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 vii

Brief History of Aristocrat Technologies Australia

Head Office International Offices

Western Australia Latin America

viii NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

General Description 1-1

1.2 Basic Operation................................................................. 1-11

2.2 Inspection on Delivery ........................................................ 2-7

2.3 Installation Procedure ........................................................ 2-7

NSW Clubs & Hotels Machine Modes 3-1

3.2 Play Mode ............................................................................ 3-4

NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 VII

3.3.2 Accounting Information ............................................................3-19

Cabinet, Door and Top Box 4-1

4.2 Technical Description ......................................................... 4-6

Power Supply Assembly 5-1

5.2 Basic Operation................................................................... 5-5

5.3 Functional Specification..................................................... 5-6

5.5 General Maintenance ........................................................ 5-12

Coin Handling Assembly 6-1

6.2 CC-62 Coin Comparator...................................................... 6-4

VIII NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

6.3.4 Fault Finding ............................................................................ 6-17

ADH Hoppers 7-1

7.2 Aristocrat Disc Hopper ....................................................... 7-3

Video Monitors and Touch Screen 8-1

8.2 General Description ........................................................... 8-3

8.3 Tatung Monitor ................................................................... 8-4

8.6 General Maintenance ....................................................... 8-14

8.7 Touchscreen Option ........................................................ 8-15

NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04 IX

Serial Ticket Printer 9-1

Bank Note Acceptor 10-1

Main Board Part Nos 410388 or 410389 11-1

11.2 Physical Description ......................................................... 11-3

11.4 Technical Description ....................................................... 11-7

X NSW Clubs & Hotels - Revision 04

11.4.8 Memory .................................................................................. 11-13